diff options
| author | Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com> | 2009-08-17 16:37:42 (GMT) |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com> | 2009-08-17 16:37:42 (GMT) |
| commit | 911557fcf7dedc002e689a0d66efd2b77e044bd1 (patch) | |
| tree | a66138f008c27f39e5306dc6f2df01c129e11988 /src | |
| parent | 285d4b12cb937a5672d6eb15781f03d249f8cfc1 (diff) | |
| download | Qt-911557fcf7dedc002e689a0d66efd2b77e044bd1.zip Qt-911557fcf7dedc002e689a0d66efd2b77e044bd1.tar.gz Qt-911557fcf7dedc002e689a0d66efd2b77e044bd1.tar.bz2 | |
Restructure the documentation, both on a file and on a content level.
- directory structure in doc/src
- moving of class-specific documentation together with classes
- new, less cluttered index page
- significantely reduced number of "groups of classes"
- categorized all (?) documentation into "Frameworks" or "Howtos"
- reformatting of examples pages
- splitting of very long documentation pages into walkthroughs
- some writing where it was missing
Squashed commit of the following:
commit b44ea6c917a7470a678509f4c6c9b8836d277346
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 17 18:32:09 2009 +0200
Some cleaning up in the categories.
commit b592c6eba72332fd23911251d836cf0af4514bae
Merge: 1e10d9e 285d4b1
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 17 18:20:57 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit 1e10d9e732f4171e61b3d1ecf0b64f7509e71607
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 17 18:19:03 2009 +0200
Split the "io" group into "io" and "network".
And list the network classes in the respective overview documentation.
commit fae86d24becb69c532a9c3b4fbf744c44a54f49d
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 17 18:00:32 2009 +0200
Move the string-processing classes together with the Unicode in Qt docu.
commit d2a6dd3307b0306bd7a8e283e11a99e833206963
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 17 18:00:14 2009 +0200
Not a toplevel topic, it's within the "paint system" set of pages.
commit 44cba00cdf7fb086dd3bb62b15c0f9a7915e20c2
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 17 17:57:37 2009 +0200
"Canvas UI" is not a stand-alone concept in Qt - yet!
commit 5f6e69b38fbca661709bc20b502ab0bc1b251b96
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 17 17:43:01 2009 +0200
Can just as well delete the old index.
commit aa5ec5327dceb1d3df62b990a32c970cce03ba9c
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 17 17:39:52 2009 +0200
Some rephrasing and easier access to the "Keyboard Focus" docu.
commit 6248de281565cafce12221c902e9944867b338b3
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 17 17:37:02 2009 +0200
Replace the old index with the new index.
commit 110acab8af0c99db9905b0f4cc6e93c325b1e3c6
Merge: d88d526 53807e5
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 17 16:04:59 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit d88d52681d758e9e730de0e69290472728bf8c40
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sun Aug 16 17:34:14 2009 +0200
Give the "Widgets and Layouts" topic a bit more content.
commit 01e108a5f2d1d0948c2093987a77f222d6cc4d09
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sun Aug 16 14:21:41 2009 +0200
Move OpenVG "best practices" documentation into howtos directory.
commit 86f4ca38f965909a29cee0478c537558a4ea8f5a
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sun Aug 16 14:18:32 2009 +0200
Add module documentation for OpenVG and Multimedia.
commit 9fef923acbbb75cdc3fc4e984aec177ddcd24c53
Merge: e7e5cd9 72c1cb2
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sun Aug 16 13:20:23 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit e7e5cd9444ac0e7be55ecfbeb8c9ace23784205b
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sun Aug 16 13:20:08 2009 +0200
Add Google custom search box.
Not sure why that change was never merged in by git.
commit 348372947a3d7da2b28325731ac02bbc67cdec41
Merge: 3ff51b9 aa09d4f
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sat Aug 15 02:14:31 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit 3ff51b9b52af39c00a938db380809e36b6c701c9
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sat Aug 15 02:09:38 2009 +0200
Minor word-smithing.
commit da612b4130061e094a16d47a450f3f3fe6f547c7
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sat Aug 15 01:55:16 2009 +0200
Separating the "multimedia" group into reasonable sets of classes.
commit 838955a1a780e41ea77676e1bef8e471c7a2a2f5
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Aug 14 23:12:33 2009 +0200
Just one file, doesn't need a separate directory.
commit b99f56262faa4410880d08787f2c8d9a509d303d
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Aug 14 23:05:59 2009 +0200
Move documentation for Asian codecs into src/corelib/codecs.
Not ideal, the source of most of those codecs live in src/plugins/codecs,
but since this is no real API documentation it's probably appropriate.
commit ba2258c0b6587d959cdfe6ff99c4d36319077aac
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Aug 14 22:24:33 2009 +0200
Renaming of files that used old product/company names.
commit 30ee7deb935bb3de4257cd71be5ba9610376047c
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Aug 14 22:14:30 2009 +0200
Those will only used by "Qt 4 for Qt 3" users, so leave the original text.
commit d0c110d047bbbd2dde70fc51ad702db59fa3883b
Merge: c5eccd5 8198d35
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Aug 14 22:12:15 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit c5eccd51ad85cfaf07ea8522a977b7bef70f70fd
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Aug 14 22:09:43 2009 +0200
Moving some last files from doc/src into subdirectories.
commit d2dc303d92c1f66bf721b65fca1c6d55ab7ec01d
Merge: 0bdf16e a835ec7
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Aug 14 15:39:59 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit 0bdf16e1bb04e532d4cc72c5646cb28470d5e627
Merge: 04bb351 c73fd72
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Aug 14 13:08:37 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
Conflicts:
src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebelement.cpp
commit 04bb3513f107a895cfbbf98f8c4f9a67e392c72a
Merge: 8a52ce8 07d2ce1
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 12 19:58:04 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
Conflicts:
tools/qdoc3/test/qt-html-templates.qdocconf
commit 8a52ce8055d5d8b1bf799bf1fdde18aaf8b940c7
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 12 13:30:50 2009 +0200
Fix some links to the qt.nokia.com page, and at least some linking to IO.
commit f7823801bf750b0b76ce0871c3f9e8e59c7901fe
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 12 12:27:19 2009 +0200
Make links in header point to the pages with links to everything else.
commit 335012b7e96698d6ec7994fdfd52813140f12413
Merge: 21b1263 96b6a3c
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 12 12:17:57 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
Conflicts:
doc/src/classes/qtdesigner-api.qdoc
doc/src/desktop-integration.qdoc
doc/src/distributingqt.qdoc
doc/src/examples-overview.qdoc
doc/src/examples.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/dbus-adaptors.qdoc
doc/src/geometry.qdoc
doc/src/groups.qdoc
doc/src/objecttrees.qdoc
doc/src/plugins-howto.qdoc
doc/src/qt4-accessibility.qdoc
doc/src/qt4-scribe.qdoc
doc/src/qt4-sql.qdoc
doc/src/qt4-styles.qdoc
doc/src/qtdbus.qdoc
doc/src/qtgui.qdoc
doc/src/qtmain.qdoc
doc/src/qtopengl.qdoc
doc/src/qtscripttools.qdoc
doc/src/qtsvg.qdoc
doc/src/qtuiloader.qdoc
doc/src/qundo.qdoc
doc/src/richtext.qdoc
doc/src/topics.qdoc
doc/src/xml-processing/xml-processing.qdoc
commit 21b126346989a86a828ee8a66bb12108d2bb2b71
Merge: 88e7d76 204c771
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 11 18:15:17 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit 88e7d76ceec664404a913469025ed9a7ca6f4fb0
Merge: 97c4128 1c62dc4
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 11 18:00:56 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit 97c412815162859d853c5a4ede1eb9bd4be4af9b
Merge: cf5d8ae 4096911
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 10 19:27:08 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit cf5d8ae4b09a92fed5b4e4cabbcfd49116e9e13f
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 10 19:09:57 2009 +0200
This should link to the platform specific documentation.
commit 38610f0ff210286f92528495d48f434d2c0db8e8
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 10 18:59:35 2009 +0200
These groups are embedded in the respective framework overview already.
commit 1e58a90c561d33aada9427b17db8e0f7bbe02fa7
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 10 18:54:47 2009 +0200
Remove howtos and overviews from script group.
The "Making Applications Scriptable" page needs to be split into a
walkthrough anyway.
commit 1e68b8d7d53500b8fb6c9c821d46e045ed7efe6f
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 10 18:30:10 2009 +0200
Groups are for classes. The objectmodel framework overview links to those.
commit a0a95420c82e2a77150b070e98609aa3e1b3b1a6
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 10 18:22:20 2009 +0200
Kill the "buildsystem" group.
All documents can be reached through the "Developing with Qt" page.
commit 7b23a40c5ba3a215fba6032ad96199b5c9797e98
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 10 18:07:23 2009 +0200
This guide should only be in the porting group.
commit ef731bcc53a9b34ba3b42e5ad7caf4234941c4a9
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 10 18:06:21 2009 +0200
Phonon is a framework on its own.
The whole "multimedia" group is a rather random collection of stuff...
commit 5d290d48fc428573ccd31861cf57d214051ba349
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 10 17:59:36 2009 +0200
Move the Qt Help documentation into frameworks.
This needs a bit of a rewrite, and the list of classes needs to be
integrated.
commit 5e4d094c8712bfb46d844e09746aad5da3ac4a91
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 10 17:58:52 2009 +0200
The list of all classes that use implicit sharing is not useful on its own.
commit 2059a0be23c5953f9758098cb7a9416cb86d5ad1
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 10 17:55:20 2009 +0200
Make the QtScript overview documentation part of frameworks.
commit 3413696bd745ee5862aa517dcfc9c8446fee9b82
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 10 17:54:59 2009 +0200
Make the list of drag & drop classes part of the framework docu.
commit f1c85ea263b30de1e1a1f6c5cb8b8d9ee12254cb
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 10 17:44:57 2009 +0200
Porting guides are part of the Howto's
commit cfcc742f938cf7c278f1f8b11b24a61f62fb4c62
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 10 17:44:26 2009 +0200
All platform specific docu is available through one toplevel page.
commit 53c642fe4cbc2dbd44fe5b9b4e32feeca438b5c3
Merge: c564285 41537bb
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 10 16:48:09 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit c5642857b2f2364134f58776661cc08a9da13b2c
Merge: 9cdeba7 24aa363
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 10 15:53:47 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit 9cdeba712c51eb0bf71eab35080734a2b93efcc5
Merge: 09dac33 d13418e
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sat Aug 8 11:46:42 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit 09dac333d427792a8d33fa311a63c620678e7920
Merge: f7b211e dfa2842
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Aug 7 15:40:33 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
Conflicts:
doc/src/examples.qdoc
commit f7b211e5588fee20913a8d02c55cca0e05ea2859
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Aug 6 14:58:49 2009 +0200
Rename file to follow naming scheme and resulting html.
commit ed6432fea376e60e4dd7c8987ed61a063af11ac7
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Aug 6 14:58:10 2009 +0200
Structure the XML documentation into a walk-through.
The XmlPatterns docu should probably be split into two or three sections,
XQuery, XPath and XML Schema.
commit 3dbc1d4ca08d3cac47ca2709b6fb1a2419442c36
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Aug 6 14:15:00 2009 +0200
Add a table of contents.
commit 1569c35cb90c10ead72dcea2c4b99a0a6cbfcc13
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Aug 6 14:04:52 2009 +0200
Splitting the long SQL documentation into walkthrough steps.
commit 6a05688bce3cca34dd1b8b323b8feb49d3133d7e
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Aug 6 13:49:50 2009 +0200
Combining various desktop integration topics into one document.
commit c02c9adca98ba1d4494dd9c7de4ef5b191d9721a
Merge: 4cc4a81 2a286b0
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Aug 6 08:16:04 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'doccleanup' of git@scm.dev.nokia.troll.no:qt/vohis-docuwork into doccleanup
commit 4cc4a81324cff3c1ad91867cf3acb87d9b4184c6
Merge: a88dc5d 06d57fc
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Aug 6 08:15:52 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit 2a286b03167ce028821b4007bf08537d2c5637c2
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 5 23:23:28 2009 +0200
Some writing on windows and dialogs.
Also some restructuring of the existing content.
commit a88dc5d72bec7abeec23b289c212418499c25e4a
Merge: 86f956c fb8bb14
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 5 18:09:58 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit 86f956c89b9b8fb3d684665797d4a5b5e538fb2c
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 5 17:09:36 2009 +0200
All "Qt 4 vs Qt 3" docu lives in porting.
Some of those files have been changed by now to move docu into overview
files where the respective information was missing.
commit ac6f1fc8b1e760ae69ce799e13ac92144eeb89e2
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 5 17:06:15 2009 +0200
Start work on windows and dialogs docu.
commit 4253dea2661dc3526a9dec53f336301992b543cb
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 5 16:03:52 2009 +0200
Make QtWebKit module documentation follow the other modules:
- Module overview only lists classes, library, header and license
implication
- Usage-documentation is separated
commit a27f1b8498ba8d06743e70ecde4fc1e44d5f02f0
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 5 16:01:25 2009 +0200
Make QtWebKit classes show up in the module overview.
commit d38d185ec8b7d32037e86b4ecbbc725343aabea7
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 5 15:40:17 2009 +0200
Make the most important sections a bit larger.
commit 70991dcdfb8c00baa960381b297fdcb8ed7f50d0
Merge: deb4c2b e95166d
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 5 14:35:07 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit deb4c2bb4d7120579fda541b03c0a77d989089d5
Merge: 37e5373 f78bd88
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 5 12:59:22 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit 37e5373dcc5455b1e029ee389ce7985a98f579d9
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 5 11:32:43 2009 +0200
These new examples are not yet fully documented
commit 85fb40ea11458040e09302bb898d89664eb280b5
Merge: 8b78e18 bcf41cf
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 5 11:30:26 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
Conflicts:
doc/src/examples-overview.qdoc
doc/src/examples.qdoc
tools/qdoc3/htmlgenerator.cpp
commit 8b78e1828b93a9762301d80cb110a1f1b7c4211f
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 5 00:04:36 2009 +0200
Line-feed fixes.
commit 2fa80a411dd96369c0e09defc54af44118930ae5
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 5 00:04:00 2009 +0200
The "buildsystem" docu seems a reasonable start for proper documentation.
Three lists of tools - in the buildsystem table, in the tools-list docu
and implicitly through \ingroup qttools. Needs to be consolidated.
commit 8d4043feab66698664cfa17bd150eabf4fe2420d
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 5 00:01:32 2009 +0200
Restructure the i18n page.
The list of classes needs to be reviewed.
commit 49f718b1e75c02bc43feac93d5b233064c032555
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Wed Aug 5 00:00:45 2009 +0200
The Accessibility group is just a group of classes.
commit b17db7dc54c1945cd2651fdebde471c71ef4001d
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 23:40:21 2009 +0200
Remove the "Topics" group.
Things are part of frameworks or how-to documentation. Top-level groups are
right now still on the "all overviews" document.
commit 31e5c276b50130542dbd824b0b8cc20b16ca1cb1
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 22:45:43 2009 +0200
Splitting the thread documentation into multiple pages.
Also add relevant classes from QtConcurrent to the thread group.
commit d491ffb0e949f1d8653d73495e091b241a025558
Merge: e99794c 3ff7afd
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 19:29:18 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'doccleanup' of git@scm.dev.nokia.troll.no:qt/vohis-docuwork into doccleanup
commit 3ff7afd6c11d824af38c72afdea4b6578f6de784
Merge: 1dae0ad 2df403d
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 18:07:11 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'doccleanup' of git@scm.dev.nokia.troll.no:qt/vohis-docuwork into doccleanup
Conflicts:
doc/src/accessible.qdoc
doc/src/activeqt.qdoc
doc/src/animation.qdoc
doc/src/containers.qdoc
doc/src/custom-types.qdoc
doc/src/desktop-integration.qdoc
doc/src/dnd.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/accessible.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/activeqt-container.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/activeqt-server.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/activeqt.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/animation.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/containers.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/dbus-adaptors.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/dbus-intro.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/desktop-integration.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/dnd.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/implicit-sharing.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/ipc.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/model-view-programming.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/phonon.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/qt4-interview.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/qtdesigner.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/qthelp.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/statemachine.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/templates.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks-technologies/unicode.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/accessible.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/activeqt-container.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/activeqt-server.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/activeqt.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/animation.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/containers.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/dbus-adaptors.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/dbus-intro.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/desktop-integration.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/dnd.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/ipc.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/model-view-programming.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/phonon.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/qt4-interview.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/qtdesigner.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/qthelp.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/qundo.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/richtext.qdoc
doc/src/frameworks/statemachine.qdoc
doc/src/graphicsview.qdoc
doc/src/howtos/custom-types.qdoc
doc/src/howtos/session.qdoc
doc/src/implicit-sharing.qdoc
doc/src/introtodbus.qdoc
doc/src/ipc.qdoc
doc/src/model-view-programming.qdoc
doc/src/modules.qdoc
doc/src/new_index.qdoc
doc/src/objectmodel/custom-types.qdoc
doc/src/objectmodel/object.qdoc
doc/src/objectmodel/objecttrees.qdoc
doc/src/overviews.qdoc
doc/src/phonon.qdoc
doc/src/porting/qt4-tulip.qdoc
doc/src/qaxcontainer.qdoc
doc/src/qaxserver.qdoc
doc/src/qdbusadaptors.qdoc
doc/src/qt4-interview.qdoc
doc/src/qtdesigner.qdoc
doc/src/qthelp.qdoc
doc/src/statemachine.qdoc
doc/src/technologies/implicit-sharing.qdoc
doc/src/technologies/templates.qdoc
doc/src/technologies/unicode.qdoc
doc/src/templates.qdoc
doc/src/unicode.qdoc
doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/layout.qdoc
doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/styles.qdoc
doc/src/widgets-and-layouts/widgets.qdoc
src/gui/kernel/qstandardgestures.cpp
commit 1dae0adf3d85620f7574a2a0475510a627a896dc
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 17:46:58 2009 +0200
This way it appears as part of the overview, and the moc docu links to it.
commit 5802092887e46dc5eb034bb9b45dd34a265607f5
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 17:45:09 2009 +0200
Not sure what it is yet, but definitely not an architecture.
QDataStream links to this page, that might just as well be enough.
commit 69d32c4ff079bcaea098b34de70b7d9587e51e88
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 17:43:42 2009 +0200
Use \annotatedlist command to list all widget classes.
Needs nicer formatting, ie qdoc could be \table aware for those lists and
skip the header.
commit 02057d7575bb4f0875e82ea4cb76552f2d8ac17a
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 17:35:46 2009 +0200
This should be together with all the other licensing documentation.
commit be91b2fe15c67cb90eaa59121d7ff51eb21b4dba
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 17:26:02 2009 +0200
These are best practices.
commit 8e0b104db1266a736ac246c9466656c058df18f2
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 17:25:35 2009 +0200
Another technology.
commit 19c16384d712c652716776c94c749030b0742752
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 17:24:55 2009 +0200
Remove duplicate and out-of-date license headers.
commit 689aa91de0f840fc0f98f0adfbb2f18d72c6b985
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 17:21:00 2009 +0200
Move into frameworks.
Add explicitly printed list of classes instead of using a separate
\group page. The \group page is still there as long as qdoc requires it.
Threading and WebKit are still "architectures", coming later.
commit 3f96833ab78dacd7ae66e6dd58a3a0dee22229e7
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 16:35:17 2009 +0200
Remove IPC group.
Only two classes, and those are explicitly listed in the real
documentation about IPC in Qt.
commit bbb02d8cc55c9595226f42fe5b617261584c6bdd
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 15:54:46 2009 +0200
Use the new \annotatedlist command, and make it a framework.
commit ba3a0376acb44ae5cafc8bd3802bd425dcb663a5
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 15:38:24 2009 +0200
Make \annotatedlist <group> work.
commit c80fb8d6a143c81700c2aefe7af1e83dd487dde4
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 15:37:51 2009 +0200
These are API documentation, not architecture.
commit 713744520bd35d510864ad48464575f1c8a35668
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 15:10:25 2009 +0200
Frameworks and technologies used in Qt are really one thing.
commit a86d4248c1e3c13f245c49f3f2d018ec4babc822
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 15:00:35 2009 +0200
Move into correct groups and make the howto a walk-through.
commit 7cc88f310e0dfa37d39026d67443f518531d7fe9
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 12:50:58 2009 +0200
Architecture -> Frameworks and Technologies
commit 4a3ba3f19d78c4df5343af951c761df47e22759a
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 12:50:41 2009 +0200
Some consolidation of the Tulip documentation.
commit d3dab98b96d83ce408523f8ccb9363a09eed1f34
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 12:01:10 2009 +0200
Start with "Frameworks and Technologies" vs "howtos and best practices".
commit 37a8e364442e6234c6a83667eb64af1c79b38e9b
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 12:00:34 2009 +0200
Beautify.
commit c86d844a79406d4b9fee67578efd67e27ce96b83
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 00:04:40 2009 +0200
Fix some headers.
commit 20b775d781d3b1d91164320807c21c8a6efcf011
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 3 23:48:17 2009 +0200
Split the accessibility docu into a "compared to Qt 3" section, and move
real information into the overview.
commit 6846a1bccf7d212f7ee0471f992cfb16efb71c43
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 3 23:47:37 2009 +0200
The gui-programming seems rather arbitrary and should go away.
Some things fit into the desktop integration, which is probably more a
howto. Focus is a concept in the widgets context, and application-wide
techniques like accelerators should probably be part of the "window"
docu.
commit 8c7bc99e78a69751080de07618bf003bc227e2db
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 3 23:45:28 2009 +0200
Move "Getting Started" documentation into getting-started directory.
commit 561cc3eafa20903243f3946ac4b7b724554c341c
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 3 19:06:16 2009 +0200
Group "getting started" documents into a walkthrough structure.
commit 6d703807348923a068dea7360fb4456cbde071b6
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 3 17:35:15 2009 +0200
Add screenshots for example-overview page.
commit f7a47536305e157c16e8a863f145a2617606a2cc
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sun Aug 2 16:57:04 2009 +0200
Link to the real documentation, not just to the modules overview.
commit 92ce250ba206f4dde198637f1a30cd10768d9ae5
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sun Aug 2 16:56:41 2009 +0200
A new layout for the examples.
Needs a bit of shuffeling around, and more screenshots and descriptive text
for some categories.
commit a5e2e2939b32dee0aceabe136aa4c13b12c88070
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sat Aug 1 22:39:27 2009 +0200
Cleanup the script-related groups a bit.
commit ca469165a9f55ca6bd31e53d85d74883fe892ed4
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sat Aug 1 22:17:16 2009 +0200
Add QContiguousCache to the list of containers as a special case.
commit a21292704bd12daf2495195b216424442e097220
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sat Aug 1 21:52:37 2009 +0200
Cleaning up groups of text- and string-related classes.
Make a clear separation between classes that deal with string data (ie
QString, QByteArray, QTextStream) and classes that are part of the "scribe"
framework.
Merge documentation from the Qt 4.0 introduction of Scribe into the
richtext processing guide.
commit 3854592806e23955f69613bdc1e2998d5d6f3a8a
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sat Aug 1 20:50:06 2009 +0200
One group of thread-related classes should be enough.
commit b8935bc0ec3d33b6a3fe7b3b220b5781ad79d68d
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sat Aug 1 19:32:21 2009 +0200
Move documentation for classes into same directory as the respective
header files (or implementation file, if one exists).
This follows the Qt standard, and there is no particular reason why .qdoc
files cannot live in src. Since there are a number of .cpp files that have
only documentation it might also be an idea to rename the .qdoc files to
.cpp and add them to the .pro-files to have them included in generated
project files for easier access.
commit b61cc5eaf2f2bf72cff209ab0f69fde48fb87471
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 19:29:46 2009 +0200
Starting to tie together the widgets and layouts groups and documentation.
commit 47fb0c6cf1dacdbfa07a59cf4dc703dd2c35eb8c
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 18:43:34 2009 +0200
This is all duplicate information that is better covered in the
sql-programming guide.
commit d3c70dd9ed84b4688cbabf30f6b906665b676b76
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 18:37:53 2009 +0200
Consolidate style documentation.
commit 1d8d30eee1e2fe9f8e77ce1462803921b2132ade
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 17:13:44 2009 +0200
Split plugin-documentation into two: writing plugins and deploying plugins.
commit a329665353a78749b0d4fdd6e75403252d34f679
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 14:19:47 2009 +0200
Some final module cleaning up.
commit e3de6579d43cc9796b69188cfb9d3d415a91a770
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 13:51:54 2009 +0200
Move remaining overview groups into one file.
commit 7d783342f520f8376e561246268371d0b74a4e44
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 13:51:34 2009 +0200
The "io" group should be about file access (be it local or networked).
commit 961fcefb034fea89d1aab2bfed5acaabb65e8d34
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 13:36:51 2009 +0200
Kill the "time" group.
The "How to use timers in your application" documentation covers the usecase.
commit c7bebf1a4c3e2da54ce6a5d649926d76bf65e41e
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 13:28:21 2009 +0200
Kill the group "misc".
commit e414a8945cb938ccc6bd1bd8cd52adbfade096c2
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 13:09:24 2009 +0200
Kill the "Environment" group.
It was a random collection of classes, mostly ending up in there because
of copy/paste (I suspect).
commit 9236a04e7ac6dd3910f035d15b8ab23297fd5f24
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 13:08:37 2009 +0200
More moving of files and content.
commit 1ef3134bade2df33ff68c7c906cf20343abd86a5
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 02:03:07 2009 +0200
Workaround qdoc being difficult.
commit 49064b0570088fe749fc08c02c5ab6d23855089f
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 01:49:52 2009 +0200
Some more moving of files into meaningful directories.
commit df4ced831cf9f49c638c231fa9f2754699a8a59d
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 01:41:14 2009 +0200
Separate module documentation from frameworks documentation.
Module documentation will list the classes in each module, how to use the
respective libraries and headerfiles from a build-system perspective and
what the legal implications are when linking against those libraries.
The documentation of frameworks lives now in the frameworks subdirectory,
or in dedicated subdirectories for the key frameworks.
commit f4ccabe1abb97f91f196dab1948fee6135c9fa6e
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 00:47:54 2009 +0200
Group files in subdirectories that would correspond to top level topics.
commit ceb0110a364185b8b5d7bea3d3d1d54500035fcc
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 21:48:45 2009 +0200
Group files in subdirectories that would correspond to top level topics.
commit 72a4dae65b25c9df400218252f1c68d59724ff75
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 20:57:39 2009 +0200
Fix a few links.
commit ecb79681417e8bc3d8e46065dc12146f4d4dfc5f
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 20:20:55 2009 +0200
Consolidate the two example documents into one page.
commit d30d980055e7c531c9e73cdf9a1b220ce9691eef
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 19:25:16 2009 +0200
The QtAssistant module is obsolete, remove it.
QAssistantClient is in the list of obsolete classes.
commit 137ecd1ee70f0766fd94c6199d8a6b8217d020ca
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 18:56:14 2009 +0200
Get rid of \mainclass
If we want to select a list of main classes, then we can use \ingroup for
that, and document them coherently as part of the Fundamentals or a
relevant framework.
commit 042a7f21e68120e43b68444cbf3cfeca3aad4488
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 18:23:55 2009 +0200
The new index page and respective style changes.
commit 5245d784eb46287f8e1ae41addb2765eb19b0663
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 17:05:46 2009 +0200
Deployment group is gone.
commit 567d737a8d08f227133674ebfe2d161888862b8c
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 16:48:53 2009 +0200
All "lists of classes etc" are now in classes.qdoc... I hope.
commit 0bb6074c0b38f07697e72a50a2ef60b561e718fe
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 16:47:20 2009 +0200
Cleaning up files documenting deployment. Text need to be reviewed and merged.
commit 2df403da24a2959c02d0d845d1d4fac0c3aa38e0
Author: Thierry Bastian <thierry.bastian@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 3 16:49:46 2009 +0200
fix warnings on mingw (gcc4.4)
basically reordering members initialization in constructors or fixing
singed/unsigned checks.
Reviewed-by: Trustme
commit e887c7705b8b7f218b3605eeefb316dea274fe27
Author: Richard Moe Gustavsen <richard.gustavsen@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 10:00:01 2009 +0200
Mac: Remove debug work output
commit 62687960508b2855b48d64825b445e5738c44142
Author: Richard Moe Gustavsen <richard.gustavsen@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 09:45:47 2009 +0200
Modify imagewidget example so it works with new API
commit 9c7aed68270b336ae9a309d9eb0107d49729c1f3
Author: Richard Moe Gustavsen <richard.gustavsen@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 09:43:14 2009 +0200
Add support for pan gesture on mac (carbon and cocoa)
commit be5783878a977148b34dc64c464e951be312964e
Author: Morten Sorvig <msorvig@trolltech.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 09:47:05 2009 +0200
Remove the "preliminary support" warning for 10.6
Also make the "usupported on > 10.6" error a warning. No need
to stop the build, the warning will be printed enough times.
commit f6282eec434d073fef46d50ef141df6fa36033b9
Author: Morten Sorvig <msorvig@trolltech.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 09:31:56 2009 +0200
Build on snow leopard.
Don't error out when building qmake, just let it build a 64-bit binary (even for carbon)
RebBy: Richard Moe Gustavsen
commit abae82a26f4dec34635827acf0784058be638e31
Author: Morten Sorvig <msorvig@trolltech.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 08:15:21 2009 +0200
Make Cocoa builds 64-bit by default on snow leopard.
commit 4672e771c164503d998ccb6ca05cf7e7906fb031
Author: Jason McDonald <jason.mcdonald@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 15:40:15 2009 +1000
Fix incorrect license headers.
Reviewed-by: Trust Me
commit a3bd65e8eb0fd39e14539919cc9ced645c969883
Author: Bill King <bill.king@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 14:57:36 2009 +1000
Fixes failed queries when mysql auto-prepares
Queries like "Show Index" etc, fail on mysql when automatically prepared
due to a bug in several versions of mysql. Basically anything but a
select query will fail. This fixes this by making the user explicitly
prepare the query if they want to, and the blame then falls on them
if they try and prepare a statement likely to fail. This fix also
seems to result in a speedup for single-execution queries, possibly
due to reduction in roundtrip communications.
All autotests pass & behaviour conforms to documentation.
Task-number: 252450, 246125
commit 4612596a6a945ab0199fe06727ff3ea350092ec1
Author: Jason McDonald <jason.mcdonald@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 14:49:14 2009 +1000
Fix obsolete license headers
Reviewed-by: Trust Me
commit c3bcc8b094341e0dc768ef5820ba359e2c23436a
Author: Aaron Kennedy <aaron.kennedy@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 10:59:02 2009 +1000
Doc fixes
Reviewed-by: TrustMe
commit 1d60528ced1f6818a60889d672089bfe4d2290bb
Author: Morten Sorvig <msorvig@trolltech.com>
Date: Mon Aug 3 15:57:44 2009 +0200
Fix spelling error.
commit e99794c1200515f18ffdd0bec9c143db46e009a1
Merge: 199db81 d65f893
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 09:24:14 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit 199db8104a680f91451cf2c93d2d41077b5605bb
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Tue Aug 4 00:04:40 2009 +0200
Fix some headers.
commit e8f8193b951a9f9e4b6d309c44151c47b715e901
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 3 23:48:17 2009 +0200
Split the accessibility docu into a "compared to Qt 3" section, and move
real information into the overview.
commit 8006ec36024e972be21e8397c2cc758a0e9b2ba0
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 3 23:47:37 2009 +0200
The gui-programming seems rather arbitrary and should go away.
Some things fit into the desktop integration, which is probably more a
howto. Focus is a concept in the widgets context, and application-wide
techniques like accelerators should probably be part of the "window"
docu.
commit 8dab96460280b8af6726905e8d5d24020930b882
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 3 23:45:28 2009 +0200
Move "Getting Started" documentation into getting-started directory.
commit 523fd47c29c24a865855d085a0036fc741203930
Merge: a1e50f6 2076f15
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 3 19:10:51 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit a1e50f6619ff1a302dd1fefbcb6b0cd62a653e7d
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 3 19:06:16 2009 +0200
Group "getting started" documents into a walkthrough structure.
commit e393b4f458263cb2f011cc5e5e67cdcc48610ea9
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 3 17:35:15 2009 +0200
Add screenshots for example-overview page.
commit 8c84f307f73ab7b77a91e61ed18fdc685afebcc5
Merge: a16033a 34e272a
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Mon Aug 3 11:03:41 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit a16033a287afe2f494401e24f02f046ec98d944c
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sun Aug 2 16:57:04 2009 +0200
Link to the real documentation, not just to the modules overview.
commit 6c4ed0361c860e738b9344dfb191f55d35b3309f
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sun Aug 2 16:56:41 2009 +0200
A new layout for the examples.
Needs a bit of shuffeling around, and more screenshots and descriptive text
for some categories.
commit 2dde2faa8f6e86acf738a808412c5e3c21c44658
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sat Aug 1 22:39:27 2009 +0200
Cleanup the script-related groups a bit.
commit a66227d0bed87c633a22a4d155f6a7f0061fc34e
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sat Aug 1 22:17:16 2009 +0200
Add QContiguousCache to the list of containers as a special case.
commit b22133eef28566f1c3c5d57aa0e8272af26da86a
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sat Aug 1 21:52:37 2009 +0200
Cleaning up groups of text- and string-related classes.
Make a clear separation between classes that deal with string data (ie
QString, QByteArray, QTextStream) and classes that are part of the "scribe"
framework.
Merge documentation from the Qt 4.0 introduction of Scribe into the
richtext processing guide.
commit b30ba739308905b6c06987cec47d4de1e5d172de
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sat Aug 1 20:50:06 2009 +0200
One group of thread-related classes should be enough.
commit a2511650577126026f98cb7416c159498f6f2db5
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sat Aug 1 19:32:21 2009 +0200
Move documentation for classes into same directory as the respective
header files (or implementation file, if one exists).
This follows the Qt standard, and there is no particular reason why .qdoc
files cannot live in src. Since there are a number of .cpp files that have
only documentation it might also be an idea to rename the .qdoc files to
.cpp and add them to the .pro-files to have them included in generated
project files for easier access.
commit f333ad71384cf42c20219a55d9dfa1e29a8c263e
Merge: bad9ba5 5aed3db
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Sat Aug 1 12:04:55 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit bad9ba5468333be2f08da7f28950c980bc63c787
Merge: 49f38b7 c57ed13
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 19:31:04 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit 49f38b7afe3205eedccf655c0ad749d685cb3d52
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 19:29:46 2009 +0200
Starting to tie together the widgets and layouts groups and documentation.
commit e6c4b8316b7c90b19815c0008a282983012c68b3
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 18:43:34 2009 +0200
This is all duplicate information that is better covered in the
sql-programming guide.
commit 620620ae969bed86d970519bead45762bd39ede1
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 18:37:53 2009 +0200
Consolidate style documentation.
commit 01c78ff78888d3ccb50189206b9bcacaf13f5c80
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 17:13:44 2009 +0200
Split plugin-documentation into two: writing plugins and deploying plugins.
commit a21f510c982dce06ac1769e61e93574f90cc48c4
Merge: da93c4c c6cdfcb
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 16:04:51 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit da93c4ccc25dd189dfb9b71bda28bd1e3a7230c1
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 14:19:47 2009 +0200
Some final module cleaning up.
commit 9eb0815bbd01b7e30877110b53aa6f82b8e9221d
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 13:51:54 2009 +0200
Move remaining overview groups into one file.
commit 65d4c4145386a409aeb1372ae5adc6f3e71e444b
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 13:51:34 2009 +0200
The "io" group should be about file access (be it local or networked).
commit 1a3de3a7add6d9e7653e46b57b00852845384a42
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 13:36:51 2009 +0200
Kill the "time" group.
The "How to use timers in your application" documentation covers the usecase.
commit dbadf1c060e051dbac7f5c72528ef6a3125d5ba3
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 13:28:21 2009 +0200
Kill the group "misc".
commit 7b7484b37b074d52af5c4ff9b138087a75965508
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 13:09:24 2009 +0200
Kill the "Environment" group.
It was a random collection of classes, mostly ending up in there because
of copy/paste (I suspect).
commit b5271d81e7da6666d339041d028a0ae6c8ed75c4
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 13:08:37 2009 +0200
More moving of files and content.
commit 96a707d25342c273cdd7629fc1e24b0ead4118de
Merge: 4ffe572 18fbfdf
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 11:08:11 2009 +0200
Merge branch 'master' into doccleanup
commit 4ffe572a954e99d604c1360fc55db25e8586436c
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 02:03:07 2009 +0200
Workaround qdoc being difficult.
commit 7f0e965c7cf613782e8189069444a4b549f0c11a
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 01:49:52 2009 +0200
Some more moving of files into meaningful directories.
commit b0d67674469e57b29e60110888352ae955adcdd8
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 01:41:14 2009 +0200
Separate module documentation from frameworks documentation.
Module documentation will list the classes in each module, how to use the
respective libraries and headerfiles from a build-system perspective and
what the legal implications are when linking against those libraries.
The documentation of frameworks lives now in the frameworks subdirectory,
or in dedicated subdirectories for the key frameworks.
commit 45240a9c0eba9e42e6e441a55a407173a81a7344
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Fri Jul 31 00:47:54 2009 +0200
Group files in subdirectories that would correspond to top level topics.
commit 896507f2f4fdc541fc436cf901a2beb72d35f6aa
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 21:48:45 2009 +0200
Group files in subdirectories that would correspond to top level topics.
commit 37eb554f75d8b1d9d76993f6fcf632933c9616a2
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 20:57:39 2009 +0200
Fix a few links.
commit 74027c3568c1bdbb9960d203266f4ccc5e89c05c
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 20:20:55 2009 +0200
Consolidate the two example documents into one page.
commit cfc0fd3df050cf6c0e3229d22adfbff35aed46af
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 19:25:16 2009 +0200
The QtAssistant module is obsolete, remove it.
QAssistantClient is in the list of obsolete classes.
commit 0f86c7a176fc920669ca8a880afa141434f37767
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 18:56:14 2009 +0200
Get rid of \mainclass
If we want to select a list of main classes, then we can use \ingroup for
that, and document them coherently as part of the Fundamentals or a
relevant framework.
commit c4dfbc6bf58ef741fdab01538e75e9472e8370bf
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 18:23:55 2009 +0200
The new index page and respective style changes.
commit a3e4eb6712e24a4d6156c340ee98671887a2b2fa
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 17:05:46 2009 +0200
Deployment group is gone.
commit f03ee6192450db977bc2e4b07ffc613314b63a80
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 16:48:53 2009 +0200
All "lists of classes etc" are now in classes.qdoc... I hope.
commit c5fb9a4b5208498454812d27578ac62ae23652a4
Author: Volker Hilsheimer <volker.hilsheimer@nokia.com>
Date: Thu Jul 30 16:47:20 2009 +0200
Cleaning up files documenting deployment. Text need to be reviewed and merged.
Diffstat (limited to 'src')
326 files changed, 17471 insertions, 895 deletions
diff --git a/src/3rdparty/easing/legal.qdoc b/src/3rdparty/easing/legal.qdoc index 25f67e1..466ff15 100644 --- a/src/3rdparty/easing/legal.qdoc +++ b/src/3rdparty/easing/legal.qdoc @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /*! \page legal-easing.html \title Easing Equations by Robert Penner -\ingroup animation +\ingroup licensing \legalese \code diff --git a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebdatabase.cpp b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebdatabase.cpp index d51e4e6..4e8fd30 100644 --- a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebdatabase.cpp +++ b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebdatabase.cpp @@ -33,6 +33,8 @@ using namespace WebCore; \since 4.5 \brief The QWebDatabase class provides access to HTML 5 databases created with JavaScript. + \inmodule QtWebKit + The upcoming HTML 5 standard includes support for SQL databases that web sites can create and access on a local computer through JavaScript. QWebDatabase is the C++ interface to these databases. diff --git a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebelement.cpp b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebelement.cpp index 3ef969e..57c8b0d 100644 --- a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebelement.cpp +++ b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebelement.cpp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ public: \since 4.6 \brief The QWebElement class provides convenient access to DOM elements in a QWebFrame. - + \inmodule QtWebKit A QWebElement object allows easy access to the document model, represented by a tree-like structure of DOM elements. The root of the tree is called diff --git a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebframe.cpp b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebframe.cpp index 23cb473..f2fe108 100644 --- a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebframe.cpp +++ b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebframe.cpp @@ -268,6 +268,8 @@ void QWebFramePrivate::renderPrivate(QPainter *painter, const QRegion &clip) \since 4.4 \brief The QWebFrame class represents a frame in a web page. + \inmodule QtWebKit + QWebFrame represents a frame inside a web page. Each QWebPage object contains at least one frame, the main frame, obtained using QWebPage::mainFrame(). Additional frames will be created for HTML @@ -1360,6 +1362,8 @@ QWebFrame* QWebFramePrivate::kit(WebCore::Frame* coreFrame) \brief The QWebHitTestResult class provides information about the web page content after a hit test. + \inmodule QtWebKit + QWebHitTestResult is returned by QWebFrame::hitTestContent() to provide information about the content of the web page at the specified position. */ diff --git a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebhistory.cpp b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebhistory.cpp index 1c1c72a..b11ae56 100644 --- a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebhistory.cpp +++ b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebhistory.cpp @@ -35,6 +35,8 @@ \since 4.4 \brief The QWebHistoryItem class represents one item in the history of a QWebPage + \inmodule QtWebKit + Each QWebHistoryItem instance represents an entry in the history stack of a Web page, containing information about the page, its location, and when it was last visited. @@ -201,6 +203,8 @@ bool QWebHistoryItem::isValid() const \since 4.4 \brief The QWebHistory class represents the history of a QWebPage + \inmodule QtWebKit + Each QWebPage instance contains a history of visited pages that can be accessed by QWebPage::history(). QWebHistory represents this history and makes it possible to navigate it. diff --git a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebhistoryinterface.cpp b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebhistoryinterface.cpp index 87d52ce..80567d1 100644 --- a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebhistoryinterface.cpp +++ b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebhistoryinterface.cpp @@ -81,6 +81,8 @@ QWebHistoryInterface* QWebHistoryInterface::defaultInterface() \since 4.4 \brief The QWebHistoryInterface class provides an interface to implement link history. + \inmodule QtWebKit + The QWebHistoryInterface is an interface that can be used to implement link history. It contains two pure virtual methods that are called by the WebKit engine. addHistoryEntry() is used to add diff --git a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebpage.cpp b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebpage.cpp index 613a72f..7860cec 100644 --- a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebpage.cpp +++ b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebpage.cpp @@ -1224,6 +1224,8 @@ QVariant QWebPage::inputMethodQuery(Qt::InputMethodQuery property) const \since 4.4 \brief The QWebPage class provides an object to view and edit web documents. + \inmodule QtWebKit + QWebPage holds a main frame responsible for web content, settings, the history of navigated links and actions. This class can be used, together with QWebFrame, to provide functionality like QWebView in a widget-less environment. @@ -2307,6 +2309,8 @@ void QWebPage::updatePositionDependentActions(const QPoint &pos) \since 4.4 \brief The ExtensionOption class provides an extended input argument to QWebPage's extension support. + \inmodule QtWebKit + \sa QWebPage::extension() */ @@ -2316,6 +2320,8 @@ void QWebPage::updatePositionDependentActions(const QPoint &pos) \brief The ChooseMultipleFilesExtensionOption class describes the option for the multiple files selection extension. + \inmodule QtWebKit + The ChooseMultipleFilesExtensionOption class holds the frame originating the request and the suggested filenames which might be provided. @@ -2328,6 +2334,8 @@ void QWebPage::updatePositionDependentActions(const QPoint &pos) \brief The ChooseMultipleFilesExtensionReturn describes the return value for the multiple files selection extension. + \inmodule QtWebKit + The ChooseMultipleFilesExtensionReturn class holds the filenames selected by the user when the extension is invoked. diff --git a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebpluginfactory.cpp b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebpluginfactory.cpp index d2bb124..e3b7efe 100644 --- a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebpluginfactory.cpp +++ b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebpluginfactory.cpp @@ -26,6 +26,8 @@ \brief The QWebPluginFactory class creates plugins to be embedded into web pages. + \inmodule QtWebKit + QWebPluginFactory is a factory for creating plugins for QWebPage. A plugin factory can be installed on a QWebPage using QWebPage::setPluginFactory(). @@ -47,6 +49,8 @@ \class QWebPluginFactory::Plugin \since 4.4 \brief the QWebPluginFactory::Plugin structure describes the properties of a plugin a QWebPluginFactory can create. + + \inmodule QtWebKit */ /*! @@ -68,6 +72,8 @@ \class QWebPluginFactory::MimeType \since 4.4 \brief The QWebPluginFactory::MimeType structure describes a mime type supported by a plugin. + + \inmodule QtWebKit */ /*! @@ -173,6 +179,8 @@ void QWebPluginFactory::refreshPlugins() \since 4.4 \brief The ExtensionOption class provides an extended input argument to QWebPluginFactory's extension support. + \inmodule QtWebKit + \sa QWebPluginFactory::extension() */ @@ -181,6 +189,8 @@ void QWebPluginFactory::refreshPlugins() \since 4.4 \brief The ExtensionOption class provides an extended output argument to QWebPluginFactory's extension support. + \inmodule QtWebKit + \sa QWebPluginFactory::extension() */ diff --git a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebsecurityorigin.cpp b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebsecurityorigin.cpp index d2eaf10..ed2e959 100644 --- a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebsecurityorigin.cpp +++ b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebsecurityorigin.cpp @@ -35,6 +35,8 @@ using namespace WebCore; \since 4.5 \brief The QWebSecurityOrigin class defines a security boundary for web sites. + \inmodule QtWebKit + QWebSecurityOrigin provides access to the security domains defined by web sites. An origin consists of a host name, a scheme, and a port number. Web sites with the same security origin can access each other's resources for client-side diff --git a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebsettings.cpp b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebsettings.cpp index fb94d55..89595c3 100644 --- a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebsettings.cpp +++ b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebsettings.cpp @@ -219,6 +219,8 @@ QWebSettings* QWebSettings::globalSettings() \brief The QWebSettings class provides an object to store the settings used by QWebPage and QWebFrame. + \inmodule QtWebKit + Each QWebPage object has its own QWebSettings object, which configures the settings for that page. If a setting is not configured, then it is looked up in the global settings object, which can be accessed using diff --git a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebview.cpp b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebview.cpp index e1a0c98..422b5e6 100644 --- a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebview.cpp +++ b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/Api/qwebview.cpp @@ -77,6 +77,8 @@ public: web documents. \ingroup advanced + \inmodule QtWebKit + QWebView is the main widget component of the QtWebKit web browsing module. It can be used in various applications to display web content live from the Internet. diff --git a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/docs/qtwebkit.qdoc b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/docs/qtwebkit.qdoc index f3681ee..144feb5 100644 --- a/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/docs/qtwebkit.qdoc +++ b/src/3rdparty/webkit/WebKit/qt/docs/qtwebkit.qdoc @@ -4,15 +4,67 @@ \contentspage Qt's Modules \previouspage QtSvg \nextpage QtXml - \ingroup architecture \ingroup modules - \brief An introduction to the QtWebKit module. + \brief The QtWebKit module provides a web browser engine as well as + classes to render and interact with web content. - \keyword Browser - \keyword Web Browser + To include the definitions of the module's classes, use the + following directive: + + \snippet webkitsnippets/qtwebkit_build_snippet.qdoc 1 + + To link against the module, add this line to your \l qmake \c + .pro file: + + \snippet webkitsnippets/qtwebkit_build_snippet.qdoc 0 + + \section1 License Information + + This is a snapshot of the Qt port of WebKit. The exact version information + can be found in the \c{src/3rdparty/webkit/VERSION} file supplied with Qt. + + Qt Commercial Edition licensees that wish to distribute applications that + use the QtWebKit module need to be aware of their obligations under the + GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). + + Developers using the Open Source Edition can choose to redistribute + the module under the appropriate version of the GNU LGPL; version 2.1 + for applications and libraries licensed under the GNU GPL version 2, + or version 3 for applications and libraries licensed under the GNU + GPL version 2. + + \legalese + WebKit is licensed under the GNU Library General Public License. + Individual contributor names and copyright dates can be found + inline in the code. + + This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or + modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public + License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either + version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. + This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU + Library General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License + along with this library; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not, write to + the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, + Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA. + \endlegalese +*/ + +/*! + \page webintegration.html + \title Integrating Web Content with QtWebKit \since 4.4 + \ingroup frameworks-technologies + + \keyword Browser + \keyword Web Browser + QtWebKit provides a Web browser engine that makes it easy to embed content from the World Wide Web into your Qt application. At the same time Web content can be enhanced with native controls. @@ -55,20 +107,6 @@ \tableofcontents - \section1 Configuring the Build Process - - Applications using QtWebKit's classes need to be configured to be built - against the QtWebKit module. The following declaration in a \c qmake - project file ensures that an application is compiled and linked - appropriately: - - \snippet webkitsnippets/qtwebkit_build_snippet.qdoc 0 - - To include the definitions of the module's classes, use the following - directive: - - \snippet webkitsnippets/qtwebkit_build_snippet.qdoc 1 - \section1 Architecture The easiest way to render content is through the QWebView class. As a @@ -158,40 +196,4 @@ \o The system \c{/Library/Internet Plug-Ins} directory \endlist \endtable - - \section1 License Information - - This is a snapshot of the Qt port of WebKit. The exact version information - can be found in the \c{src/3rdparty/webkit/VERSION} file supplied with Qt. - - Qt Commercial Edition licensees that wish to distribute applications that - use the QtWebKit module need to be aware of their obligations under the - GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). - - Developers using the Open Source Edition can choose to redistribute - the module under the appropriate version of the GNU LGPL; version 2.1 - for applications and libraries licensed under the GNU GPL version 2, - or version 3 for applications and libraries licensed under the GNU - GPL version 2. - - \legalese - WebKit is licensed under the GNU Library General Public License. - Individual contributor names and copyright dates can be found - inline in the code. - - This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or - modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public - License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either - version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. - - This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, - but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of - MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU - Library General Public License for more details. - - You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License - along with this library; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not, write to - the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, - Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA. - \endlegalese */ diff --git a/src/corelib/animation/qpropertyanimation.cpp b/src/corelib/animation/qpropertyanimation.cpp index 0c1feee..35d65d0 100644 --- a/src/corelib/animation/qpropertyanimation.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/animation/qpropertyanimation.cpp @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ \class QPropertyAnimation \brief The QPropertyAnimation class animates Qt properties \since 4.6 - \mainclass + \ingroup animation QPropertyAnimation interpolates over \l{Qt's Property System}{Qt diff --git a/src/corelib/codecs/codecs.qdoc b/src/corelib/codecs/codecs.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9cffa85 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/codecs/codecs.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,546 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \group codecs + \title Codecs + \ingroup groups + \brief Codec support in Qt. + + These codecs provide facilities for conversion between Unicode and + specific text encodings. + + \generatelist{related} +*/ + +/*! + \page codec-big5.html + \title Big5 Text Codec + \ingroup codecs + + The Big5 codec provides conversion to and from the Big5 encoding. + The code was originally contributed by Ming-Che Chuang + \<mingche@cobra.ee.ntu.edu.tw\> for the Big-5+ encoding, and was + included in Qt with the author's permission, and the grateful + thanks of the Qt team. (Note: Ming-Che's code is QPL'd, as + per an mail to qt-info@nokia.com.) + + However, since Big-5+ was never formally approved, and was never + used by anyone, the Taiwan Free Software community and the Li18nux + Big5 Standard Subgroup agree that the de-facto standard Big5-ETen + (zh_TW.Big5 or zh_TW.TW-Big5) be used instead. + + The Big5 is currently implemented as a pure subset of the + Big5-HKSCS codec, so more fine-tuning is needed to make it + identical to the standard Big5 mapping as determined by + Li18nux-Big5. See \l{http://www.autrijus.org/xml/} for the draft + Big5 (2002) standard. + + James Su \<suzhe@turbolinux.com.cn\> \<suzhe@gnuchina.org\> + generated the Big5-HKSCS-to-Unicode tables with a very + space-efficient algorithm. He generously donated his code to glibc + in May 2002. Subsequently, James has kindly allowed Anthony Fok + \<anthony@thizlinux.com\> \<foka@debian.org\> to adapt the code + for Qt. + + \legalese + Copyright (C) 2000 Ming-Che Chuang \BR + Copyright (C) 2002 James Su, Turbolinux Inc. \BR + Copyright (C) 2002 Anthony Fok, ThizLinux Laboratory Ltd. + + Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + are met: + + \list 1 + \o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + \o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + \endlist + + THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND + ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + SUCH DAMAGE. + \endlegalese +*/ + +/*! + \page codec-big5hkscs.html + \title Big5-HKSCS Text Codec + \ingroup codecs + + The Big5-HKSCS codec provides conversion to and from the + Big5-HKSCS encoding. + + The codec grew out of the QBig5Codec originally contributed by + Ming-Che Chuang \<mingche@cobra.ee.ntu.edu.tw\>. James Su + \<suzhe@turbolinux.com.cn\> \<suzhe@gnuchina.org\> and Anthony Fok + \<anthony@thizlinux.com\> \<foka@debian.org\> implemented HKSCS-1999 + QBig5hkscsCodec for Qt-2.3.x, but it was too late in Qt development + schedule to be officially included in the Qt-2.3.x series. + + Wu Yi \<wuyi@hancom.com\> ported the HKSCS-1999 QBig5hkscsCodec to + Qt-3.0.1 in March 2002. + + With the advent of the new HKSCS-2001 standard, James Su + \<suzhe@turbolinux.com.cn\> \<suzhe@gnuchina.org\> generated the + Big5-HKSCS<->Unicode tables with a very space-efficient algorithm. + He generously donated his code to glibc in May 2002. Subsequently, + James has generously allowed Anthony Fok to adapt the code for + Qt-3.0.5. + + Currently, the Big5-HKSCS tables are generated from the following + sources, and with the Euro character added: + \list 1 + \o \l{http://www.microsoft.com/typography/unicode/950.txt} + \o \l{http://www.info.gov.hk/digital21/chi/hkscs/download/big5-iso.txt} + \o \l{http://www.info.gov.hk/digital21/chi/hkscs/download/big5cmp.txt} + \endlist + + There may be more fine-tuning to the QBig5hkscsCodec to maximize its + compatibility with the standard Big5 (2002) mapping as determined by + Li18nux Big5 Standard Subgroup. See \l{http://www.autrijus.org/xml/} + for the various Big5 CharMapML tables. + + \legalese + Copyright (C) 2000 Ming-Che Chuang \BR + Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 James Su, Turbolinux Inc. \BR + Copyright (C) 2002 WU Yi, HancomLinux Inc. \BR + Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 Anthony Fok, ThizLinux Laboratory Ltd. + + Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + are met: + + \list 1 + \o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + \o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + \endlist + + THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND + ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + SUCH DAMAGE. + \endlegalese +*/ + +/*! + \page codec-eucjp.html + \title EUC-JP Text Codec + \ingroup codecs + + The EUC-JP codec provides conversion to and from EUC-JP, the main + legacy encoding for Unix machines in Japan. + + The environment variable \c UNICODEMAP_JP can be used to + fine-tune the JIS, Shift-JIS, and EUC-JP codecs. The \l{ISO + 2022-JP (JIS) Text Codec} documentation describes how to use this + variable. + + Most of the code here was written by Serika Kurusugawa, + a.k.a. Junji Takagi, and is included in Qt with the author's + permission and the grateful thanks of the Qt team. Here is + the copyright statement for that code: + + \legalese + + Copyright (C) 1999 Serika Kurusugawa. All rights reserved. + + Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + are met: + + \list 1 + \o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + \o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + \endlist + + THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS". + ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + SUCH DAMAGE. + \endlegalese +*/ + +/*! + \page codec-euckr.html + \title EUC-KR Text Codec + \ingroup codecs + + The EUC-KR codec provides conversion to and from EUC-KR, KR, the + main legacy encoding for Unix machines in Korea. + + It was largely written by Mizi Research Inc. Here is the + copyright statement for the code as it was at the point of + contribution. The subsequent modifications are covered by + the usual copyright for Qt. + + \legalese + + Copyright (C) 1999-2000 Mizi Research Inc. All rights reserved. + + Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + are met: + + \list 1 + \o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + \o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + \endlist + + THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND + ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + SUCH DAMAGE. + \endlegalese +*/ + +/*! + \page codec-gbk.html + \title GBK Text Codec + \ingroup codecs + + The GBK codec provides conversion to and from the Chinese + GB18030/GBK/GB2312 encoding. + + GBK, formally the Chinese Internal Code Specification, is a commonly + used extension of GB 2312-80. Microsoft Windows uses it under the + name codepage 936. + + GBK has been superseded by the new Chinese national standard + GB 18030-2000, which added a 4-byte encoding while remaining + compatible with GB2312 and GBK. The new GB 18030-2000 may be described + as a special encoding of Unicode 3.x and ISO-10646-1. + + Special thanks to charset gurus Markus Scherer (IBM), + Dirk Meyer (Adobe Systems) and Ken Lunde (Adobe Systems) for publishing + an excellent GB 18030-2000 summary and specification on the Internet. + Some must-read documents are: + + \list + \o \l{ftp://ftp.oreilly.com/pub/examples/nutshell/cjkv/pdf/GB18030_Summary.pdf} + \o \l{http://oss.software.ibm.com/cvs/icu/~checkout~/charset/source/gb18030/gb18030.html} + \o \l{http://oss.software.ibm.com/cvs/icu/~checkout~/charset/data/xml/gb-18030-2000.xml} + \endlist + + The GBK codec was contributed to Qt by + Justin Yu \<justiny@turbolinux.com.cn\> and + Sean Chen \<seanc@turbolinux.com.cn\>. They may also be reached at + Yu Mingjian \<yumj@sun.ihep.ac.cn\>, \<yumingjian@china.com\> + Chen Xiangyang \<chenxy@sun.ihep.ac.cn\> + + The GB18030 codec Qt functions were contributed to Qt by + James Su \<suzhe@gnuchina.org\>, \<suzhe@turbolinux.com.cn\> + who pioneered much of GB18030 development on GNU/Linux systems. + + The GB18030 codec was contributed to Qt by + Anthony Fok \<anthony@thizlinux.com\>, \<foka@debian.org\> + using a Perl script to generate C++ tables from gb-18030-2000.xml + while merging contributions from James Su, Justin Yu and Sean Chen. + A copy of the source Perl script is available at + \l{http://people.debian.org/~foka/gb18030/gen-qgb18030codec.pl} + + The copyright notice for their code follows: + + \legalese + Copyright (C) 2000 TurboLinux, Inc. Written by Justin Yu and Sean Chen. \BR + Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 Turbolinux, Inc. Written by James Su. \BR + Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 ThizLinux Laboratory Ltd. Written by Anthony Fok. + + Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + are met: + + \list 1 + \o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + \o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + \endlist + + THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND + ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + SUCH DAMAGE. + \endlegalese +*/ + +/*! + \page codecs-jis.html + \title ISO 2022-JP (JIS) Text Codec + \ingroup codecs + + The JIS codec provides conversion to and from ISO 2022-JP. + + The environment variable \c UNICODEMAP_JP can be used to + fine-tune the JIS, Shift-JIS, and EUC-JP codecs. The mapping + names are as for the Japanese XML working group's \link + http://www.y-adagio.com/public/standards/tr_xml_jpf/toc.htm XML + Japanese Profile\endlink, because it names and explains all the + widely used mappings. Here are brief descriptions, written by + Serika Kurusugawa: + + \list + + \o "unicode-0.9" or "unicode-0201" for Unicode style. This assumes + JISX0201 for 0x00-0x7f. (0.9 is a table version of jisx02xx mapping + used for Unicode 1.1.) + + \o "unicode-ascii" This assumes US-ASCII for 0x00-0x7f; some + chars (JISX0208 0x2140 and JISX0212 0x2237) are different from + Unicode 1.1 to avoid conflict. + + \o "open-19970715-0201" ("open-0201" for convenience) or + "jisx0221-1995" for JISX0221-JISX0201 style. JIS X 0221 is JIS + version of Unicode, but a few chars (0x5c, 0x7e, 0x2140, 0x216f, + 0x2131) are different from Unicode 1.1. This is used when 0x5c is + treated as YEN SIGN. + + \o "open-19970715-ascii" ("open-ascii" for convenience) for + JISX0221-ASCII style. This is used when 0x5c is treated as REVERSE + SOLIDUS. + + \o "open-19970715-ms" ("open-ms" for convenience) or "cp932" for + Microsoft Windows style. Windows Code Page 932. Some chars (0x2140, + 0x2141, 0x2142, 0x215d, 0x2171, 0x2172) are different from Unicode + 1.1. + + \o "jdk1.1.7" for Sun's JDK style. Same as Unicode 1.1, except that + JIS 0x2140 is mapped to UFF3C. Either ASCII or JISX0201 can be used + for 0x00-0x7f. + + \endlist + + In addition, the extensions "nec-vdc", "ibm-vdc" and "udc" are + supported. + + For example, if you want to use Unicode style conversion but with + NEC's extension, set \c UNICODEMAP_JP to \c {unicode-0.9, + nec-vdc}. (You will probably need to quote that in a shell + command.) + + Most of the code here was written by Serika Kurusugawa, + a.k.a. Junji Takagi, and is included in Qt with the author's + permission and the grateful thanks of the Qt team. Here is + the copyright statement for that code: + + \legalese + + Copyright (C) 1999 Serika Kurusugawa. All rights reserved. + + Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + are met: + + \list 1 + \o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + \o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + \endlist + + THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS". + ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + SUCH DAMAGE. + \endlegalese +*/ + +/*! + \page codec-sjis.html + \title Shift-JIS Text Codec + \ingroup codecs + + The Shift-JIS codec provides conversion to and from Shift-JIS, an + encoding of JIS X 0201 Latin, JIS X 0201 Kana and JIS X 0208. + + The environment variable \c UNICODEMAP_JP can be used to + fine-tune the codec. The \l{ISO 2022-JP (JIS) Text Codec} + documentation describes how to use this variable. + + Most of the code here was written by Serika Kurusugawa, a.k.a. + Junji Takagi, and is included in Qt with the author's permission + and the grateful thanks of the Qt team. Here is the + copyright statement for the code as it was at the point of + contribution. The subsequent modifications are covered by + the usual copyright for Qt. + + \legalese + + Copyright (C) 1999 Serika Kurusugawa. All rights reserved. + + Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + are met: + + \list 1 + \o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + \o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + \endlist + + THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS". + ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + SUCH DAMAGE. + \endlegalese +*/ + +/*! + \page codec-tscii.html + \title TSCII Text Codec + \ingroup codecs + + The TSCII codec provides conversion to and from the Tamil TSCII + encoding. + + TSCII, formally the Tamil Standard Code Information Interchange + specification, is a commonly used charset for Tamils. The + official page for the standard is at + \link http://www.tamil.net/tscii/ http://www.tamil.net/tscii/\endlink + + This codec uses the mapping table found at + \link http://www.geocities.com/Athens/5180/tsciiset.html + http://www.geocities.com/Athens/5180/tsciiset.html\endlink. + Tamil uses composed Unicode which might cause some + problems if you are using Unicode fonts instead of TSCII fonts. + + Most of the code was written by Hans Petter Bieker and is + included in Qt with the author's permission and the grateful + thanks of the Qt team. Here is the copyright statement for + the code as it was at the point of contribution. The + subsequent modifications are covered by the usual copyright for + Qt: + + \legalese + + Copyright (c) 2000 Hans Petter Bieker. All rights reserved. + + Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + are met: + + \list 1 + \o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + \o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + \endlist + + THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND + ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + SUCH DAMAGE. + \endlegalese +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuture.cpp b/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuture.cpp index a366a4b..f0c1e34 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuture.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuture.cpp @@ -44,8 +44,10 @@ \brief The QFuture class represents the result of an asynchronous computation. \since 4.4 + \ingroup thread + To start a computation, use one of the APIs in the - \l {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} framework. + \l {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} framework. QFuture allows threads to be synchronized against one or more results which will be ready at a later point in time. The result can be of any type @@ -90,7 +92,7 @@ To interact with running tasks using signals and slots, use QFutureWatcher. - \sa QFutureWatcher, {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} + \sa QFutureWatcher, {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} */ /*! \fn QFuture::QFuture() diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturesynchronizer.cpp b/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturesynchronizer.cpp index 1fd7198..dfb693e 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturesynchronizer.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturesynchronizer.cpp @@ -44,7 +44,9 @@ \brief The QFutureSynchronizer class is a convenience class that simplifies QFuture synchronization. - + + \ingroup thread + QFutureSynchronizer is a template class that simplifies synchronization of one or more QFuture objects. Futures are added using the addFuture() or setFuture() functions. The futures() function returns a list of futures. @@ -63,7 +65,7 @@ You can query the status of the cancel-on-wait feature using the cancelOnWait() function. - \sa QFuture, QFutureWatcher, {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} + \sa QFuture, QFutureWatcher, {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} */ /*! diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturewatcher.cpp b/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturewatcher.cpp index f0f06f9..4e9e723 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturewatcher.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturewatcher.cpp @@ -55,6 +55,8 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \reentrant \since 4.4 + \ingroup thread + \brief The QFutureWatcher class allows monitoring a QFuture using signals and slots. @@ -94,7 +96,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE QFutureWatcher<void> as well. This is useful if only status or progress information is needed; not the actual result data. - \sa QFuture, {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} + \sa QFuture, {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} */ /*! \fn QFutureWatcher::QFutureWatcher(QObject *parent) diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qrunnable.cpp b/src/corelib/concurrent/qrunnable.cpp index 86a099b..db33803 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qrunnable.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qrunnable.cpp @@ -44,6 +44,8 @@ \since 4.4 \brief The QRunnable class is the base class for all runnable objects. + \ingroup thread + The QRunnable class is an interface for representing a task or piece of code that needs to be executed, represented by your reimplementation of the run() function. diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentfilter.cpp b/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentfilter.cpp index f4572b8..4ab0723 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentfilter.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentfilter.cpp @@ -42,12 +42,12 @@ /*! \headerfile <QtConcurrentFilter> \title Concurrent Filter and Filter-Reduce - \ingroup threading + \ingroup thread \brief The <QtConcurrentFilter> header provides concurrent Filter and Filter-Reduce. - These functions are a part of the \l {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} framework. + These functions are a part of the \l {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} framework. The QtConcurrent::filter(), QtConcurrent::filtered() and QtConcurrent::filteredReduced() functions filter items in a sequence such diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentmap.cpp b/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentmap.cpp index 80baa8f..3fd044d 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentmap.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentmap.cpp @@ -47,7 +47,9 @@ possible to write multi-threaded programs without using low-level threading primitives. - See the \l {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} section in the \l{threads.html}{threading} documentation. + See the \l {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} chapter in + the \l{threads.html}{threading} documentation. + \inheaderfile QtCore \ingroup thread */ @@ -58,8 +60,6 @@ \brief The QtConcurrent::internal namespace contains QtConcurrent implementation details. - - \ingroup thread */ /*! @@ -78,11 +78,11 @@ /*! \headerfile <QtConcurrentMap> \title Concurrent Map and Map-Reduce - \ingroup threading + \ingroup thread \brief The <QtConcurrentMap> header provides concurrent Map and MapReduce. - These functions are a part of the \l {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} framework. + These functions are a part of the \l {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} framework. The QtConcurrent::map(), QtConcurrent::mapped() and QtConcurrent::mappedReduced() functions run computations in parallel on diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentrun.cpp b/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentrun.cpp index 5803abb..989f54d 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentrun.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentrun.cpp @@ -42,11 +42,13 @@ /*! \headerfile <QtConcurrentRun> \title Asynchronous Run - + \brief The <QtConcurrentRun> header provides a way to run a function in a separate thread. + + \ingroup thread - This function is a part of the \l {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} framework. + This function is a part of the \l {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} framework. The QtConcurrent::run() function runs a function in a separate thread. The return value of the function is made available through the QFuture API. diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qthreadpool.cpp b/src/corelib/concurrent/qthreadpool.cpp index 2dfac31..9b2ac46 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qthreadpool.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qthreadpool.cpp @@ -364,6 +364,8 @@ void QThreadPoolPrivate::stealRunnable(QRunnable *runnable) \since 4.4 \threadsafe + \ingroup thread + QThreadPool manages and recyles individual QThread objects to help reduce thread creation costs in programs that use threads. Each Qt application has one global QThreadPool object, which can be accessed by calling @@ -404,7 +406,7 @@ void QThreadPoolPrivate::stealRunnable(QRunnable *runnable) Note that QThreadPool is a low-level class for managing threads, see QtConcurrent::run() or the other - \l {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} APIs for higher + \l {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} APIs for higher level alternatives. \sa QRunnable diff --git a/src/corelib/global/qendian.qdoc b/src/corelib/global/qendian.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e0ef662 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/global/qendian.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \headerfile <QtEndian> + \title Endian Conversion Functions + \ingroup classlists + \brief The <QtEndian> header provides functions to convert between + little and big endian representations of numbers. +*/ + +/*! + \fn T qFromBigEndian(const uchar *src) + \since 4.3 + \relates <QtEndian> + + Reads a big-endian number from memory location \a src and returns the number in the + host byte order representation. + On CPU architectures where the host byte order is little-endian (such as x86) this + will swap the byte order; otherwise it will just read from \a src. + + \note Template type \c{T} can either be a qint16, qint32 or qint64. Other types of + integers, e.g., qlong, are not applicable. + + There are no data alignment constraints for \a src. + + \sa qFromLittleEndian() + \sa qToBigEndian() + \sa qToLittleEndian() +*/ +/*! + \fn T qFromBigEndian(T src) + \since 4.3 + \relates <QtEndian> + \overload + + Converts \a src from big-endian byte order and returns the number in host byte order + representation of that number. + On CPU architectures where the host byte order is little-endian (such as x86) this + will return \a src with the byte order swapped; otherwise it will return \a src + unmodified. +*/ +/*! + \fn T qFromLittleEndian(const uchar *src) + \since 4.3 + \relates <QtEndian> + + Reads a little-endian number from memory location \a src and returns the number in + the host byte order representation. + On CPU architectures where the host byte order is big-endian (such as PowerPC) this + will swap the byte order; otherwise it will just read from \a src. + + \note Template type \c{T} can either be a qint16, qint32 or qint64. Other types of + integers, e.g., qlong, are not applicable. + + There are no data alignment constraints for \a src. + + \sa qFromBigEndian() + \sa qToBigEndian() + \sa qToLittleEndian() +*/ +/*! + \fn T qFromLittleEndian(T src) + \since 4.3 + \relates <QtEndian> + \overload + + Converts \a src from little-endian byte order and returns the number in host byte + order representation of that number. + On CPU architectures where the host byte order is big-endian (such as PowerPC) this + will return \a src with the byte order swapped; otherwise it will return \a src + unmodified. +*/ +/*! + \fn void qToBigEndian(T src, uchar *dest) + \since 4.3 + \relates <QtEndian> + + Writes the number \a src with template type \c{T} to the memory location at \a dest + in big-endian byte order. + + Note that template type \c{T} can only be an integer data type (signed or unsigned). + + There are no data alignment constraints for \a dest. + + \sa qFromBigEndian() + \sa qFromLittleEndian() + \sa qToLittleEndian() +*/ +/*! + \fn T qToBigEndian(T src) + \since 4.3 + \relates <QtEndian> + \overload + + Converts \a src from host byte order and returns the number in big-endian byte order + representation of that number. + On CPU architectures where the host byte order is little-endian (such as x86) this + will return \a src with the byte order swapped; otherwise it will return \a src + unmodified. +*/ +/*! + \fn void qToLittleEndian(T src, uchar *dest) + \since 4.3 + \relates <QtEndian> + + Writes the number \a src with template type \c{T} to the memory location at \a dest + in little-endian byte order. + + Note that template type \c{T} can only be an integer data type (signed or unsigned). + + There are no data alignment constraints for \a dest. + + \sa qFromBigEndian() + \sa qFromLittleEndian() + \sa qToBigEndian() +*/ +/*! + \fn T qToLittleEndian(T src) + \since 4.3 + \relates <QtEndian> + \overload + + Converts \a src from host byte order and returns the number in little-endian byte + order representation of that number. + On CPU architectures where the host byte order is big-endian (such as PowerPC) this + will return \a src with the byte order swapped; otherwise it will return \a src + unmodified. +*/ + diff --git a/src/corelib/global/qglobal.cpp b/src/corelib/global/qglobal.cpp index b2046c9..81a5ae5 100644 --- a/src/corelib/global/qglobal.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/global/qglobal.cpp @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QFlags class provides a type-safe way of storing OR-combinations of enum values. - \mainclass + \ingroup tools The QFlags<Enum> class is a template class, where Enum is an enum @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \headerfile <QtGlobal> \title Global Qt Declarations - \ingroup architecture + \ingroup classlists \brief The <QtGlobal> header provides basic declarations and is included by all other Qt headers. diff --git a/src/corelib/global/qlibraryinfo.cpp b/src/corelib/global/qlibraryinfo.cpp index 51c7988..f42a2ff 100644 --- a/src/corelib/global/qlibraryinfo.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/global/qlibraryinfo.cpp @@ -147,9 +147,6 @@ QSettings *QLibraryInfoPrivate::findConfiguration() \class QLibraryInfo \brief The QLibraryInfo class provides information about the Qt library. - \ingroup misc - \mainclass - Many pieces of information are established when Qt is configured. Installation paths, license information, and even a unique build key. This class provides an abstraction for accessing this diff --git a/src/corelib/global/qnamespace.qdoc b/src/corelib/global/qnamespace.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d1c16e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/global/qnamespace.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,2754 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \namespace Qt + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The Qt namespace contains miscellaneous identifiers + used throughout the Qt library. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::Orientation + + This type is used to signify an object's orientation. + + \value Horizontal + \value Vertical + + Orientation is used with QScrollBar for example. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::AlignmentFlag + + This enum type is used to describe alignment. It contains + horizontal and vertical flags that can be combined to produce + the required effect. + + The \l{TextElideMode} enum can also be used in many situations + to fine-tune the appearance of aligned text. + + The horizontal flags are: + + \value AlignLeft Aligns with the left edge. + \value AlignRight Aligns with the right edge. + \value AlignHCenter Centers horizontally in the available space. + \value AlignJustify Justifies the text in the available space. + \omitvalue AlignAuto + + The vertical flags are: + + \value AlignTop Aligns with the top. + \value AlignBottom Aligns with the bottom. + \value AlignVCenter Centers vertically in the available space. + + You can use only one of the horizontal flags at a time. There is + one two-dimensional flag: + + \value AlignCenter Centers in both dimensions. + + You can use at most one horizontal and one vertical flag at a + time. Qt::AlignCenter counts as both horizontal and vertical. + + Three enum values are useful in applications that can be run in + right-to-left mode: + + \value AlignAbsolute If the widget's layout direction is + Qt::RightToLeft (instead of Qt::LeftToRight, the default), + Qt::AlignLeft refers to the \e right edge and Qt::AlignRight + to the \e left edge. This is normally the desired behavior. + If you want Qt::AlignLeft to always mean "left" and + Qt::AlignRight to always mean "right", combine the flag with + Qt::AlignAbsolute. + \value AlignLeading Synonym for Qt::AlignLeft. + \value AlignTrailing Synonym for Qt::AlignRight. + + Masks: + + \value AlignHorizontal_Mask + \value AlignVertical_Mask + + Conflicting combinations of flags have undefined meanings. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ApplicationAttribute + + This enum describes attributes that change the behavior of + application-wide features. These are enabled and disabled using + QCoreApplication::setAttribute(), and can be tested for with + QCoreApplication::testAttribute(). + + \value AA_ImmediateWidgetCreation Ensures that widgets are created + as soon as they are constructed. By default, resources for + widgets are allocated on demand to improve efficiency and + minimize resource usage. Setting or clearing this attribute + affects widgets constructed after the change. Setting it + tells Qt to create toplevel windows immediately. + Therefore, if it is important to minimize resource + consumption, do not set this attribute. + + \value AA_MSWindowsUseDirect3DByDefault This value is obsolete and + has no effect. + + \value AA_DontShowIconsInMenus Actions with the Icon property won't be + shown in any menus unless specifically set by the + QAction::iconVisibleInMenu property. + + Menus that are currently open or menus already created in the native + Mac OS X menubar \e{may not} pick up a change in this attribute. Changes + in the QAction::iconVisibleInMenu property will always be picked up. + + \value AA_NativeWindows Ensures that widgets have native windows. + + \value AA_DontCreateNativeWidgetSiblings Ensures that siblings of native + widgets stay non-native unless specifically set by the + Qt::WA_NativeWindow attribute. + + \value AA_MacPluginApplication Stops the Qt mac application from doing + specific initializations that do not necessarily make sense when using Qt + to author a plugin. This includes avoiding loading our nib for the main + menu and not taking possession of the native menu bar. When setting this + attribute to true will also set the AA_DontUseNativeMenuBar attribute + to true. + + \value AA_DontUseNativeMenuBar All menubars created while this attribute is + set to true won't be used as a native menubar (e.g, the menubar at + the top of the main screen on Mac OS X or at the bottom in Windows CE). + + \value AA_MacDontSwapCtrlAndMeta On Mac OS X by default, Qt swaps the + Control and Meta (Command) keys (i.e., whenever Control is pressed, Qt + sends Meta and whenever Meta is pressed Control is sent. When this + attribute is true, Qt will not do the flip. QKeySequence::StandardShortcuts + will also flip accordingly (i.e., QKeySequence::Copy will be + Command+C on the keyboard regardless of the value set, though what is output for + QKeySequence::toString(QKeySequence::PortableText) will be different). + + \omitvalue AA_AttributeCount +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::MouseButton + + This enum type describes the different mouse buttons. + + \value NoButton The button state does not refer to any + button (see QMouseEvent::button()). + \value LeftButton The left button is pressed, or an event refers + to the left button. (The left button may be the right button on + left-handed mice.) + \value RightButton The right button. + \value MidButton The middle button. + \value XButton1 The first X button. + \value XButton2 The second X button. + + \omitvalue MouseButtonMask + + \sa KeyboardModifier Modifier +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::KeyboardModifier + + This enum describes the modifier keys. + + \value NoModifier No modifier key is pressed. + \value ShiftModifier A Shift key on the keyboard is pressed. + \value ControlModifier A Ctrl key on the keyboard is pressed. + \value AltModifier An Alt key on the keyboard is pressed. + \value MetaModifier A Meta key on the keyboard is pressed. + \value KeypadModifier A keypad button is pressed. + \value GroupSwitchModifier X11 only. A Mode_switch key on the keyboard is pressed. + + \omitvalue KeyboardModifierMask + + \note On Mac OS X, the \c ControlModifier value corresponds to + the Command keys on the Macintosh keyboard, and the \c MetaModifier value + corresponds to the Control keys. The \c KeypadModifier value will also be set + when an arrow key is pressed as the arrow keys are considered part of the + keypad. + + \note On Windows Keyboards, Qt::MetaModifier and Qt::Key_Meta are mapped + to the Windows key. + + \sa MouseButton Modifier +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::Modifier + + This enum provides shorter names for the keyboard modifier keys + supported by Qt. + + \bold{Note:} On Mac OS X, the \c CTRL value corresponds to + the Command keys on the Macintosh keyboard, and the \c META value + corresponds to the Control keys. + + \value SHIFT The Shift keys provided on all standard keyboards. + \value META The Meta keys. + \value CTRL The Ctrl keys. + \value ALT The normal Alt keys, but not keys like AltGr. + \value UNICODE_ACCEL The shortcut is specified as a Unicode code + point, not as a Qt Key. + \omitvalue MODIFIER_MASK + + \sa KeyboardModifier MouseButton +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::GlobalColor + + \raw HTML + <style type="text/css" id="colorstyles"> + #white { background-color: #ffffff; color: #000000 } + #black { background-color: #000000; color: #ffffff } + #red { background-color: #ff0000; color: #000000 } + #darkRed { background-color: #800000; color: #ffffff } + #green { background-color: #00ff00; color: #000000 } + #darkGreen { background-color: #008000; color: #ffffff } + #blue { background-color: #0000ff; color: #ffffff } + #darkBlue { background-color: #000080; color: #ffffff } + #cyan { background-color: #00ffff; color: #000000 } + #darkCyan { background-color: #008080; color: #ffffff } + #magenta { background-color: #ff00ff; color: #000000 } + #darkMagenta { background-color: #800080; color: #ffffff } + #yellow { background-color: #ffff00; color: #000000 } + #darkYellow { background-color: #808000; color: #ffffff } + #gray { background-color: #a0a0a4; color: #000000 } + #darkGray { background-color: #808080; color: #ffffff } + #lightGray { background-color: #c0c0c0; color: #000000 } + </style> + \endraw + + Qt's predefined QColor objects: + + \value white \raw HTML + White <tt id="white">(#ffffff)</tt> + \endraw + \value black \raw HTML + Black <tt id="black">(#000000)</tt> + \endraw + \value red \raw HTML + Red <tt id="red">(#ff0000)</tt> + \endraw + \value darkRed \raw HTML + Dark red <tt id="darkRed">(#800000)</tt> + \endraw + \value green \raw HTML + Green <tt id="green">(#00ff00)</tt> + \endraw + \value darkGreen \raw HTML + Dark green <tt id="darkGreen">(#008000)</tt> + \endraw + \value blue \raw HTML + Blue <tt id="blue">(#0000ff)</tt> + \endraw + \value darkBlue \raw HTML + Dark blue <tt id="darkBlue">(#000080)</tt> + \endraw + \value cyan \raw HTML + Cyan <tt id="cyan">(#00ffff)</tt> + \endraw + \value darkCyan \raw HTML + Dark cyan <tt id="darkCyan">(#008080)</tt> + \endraw + \value magenta \raw HTML + Magenta <tt id="magenta">(#ff00ff)</tt> + \endraw + \value darkMagenta \raw HTML + Dark magenta <tt id="darkMagenta">(#800080)</tt> + \endraw + \value yellow \raw HTML + Yellow <tt id="yellow">(#ffff00)</tt> + \endraw + \value darkYellow \raw HTML + Dark yellow <tt id="darkYellow">(#808000)</tt> + \endraw + \value gray \raw HTML + Gray <tt id="gray">(#a0a0a4)</tt> + \endraw + \value darkGray \raw HTML + Dark gray <tt id="darkGray">(#808080)</tt> + \endraw + \value lightGray \raw HTML + Light gray <tt id="lightGray">(#c0c0c0)</tt> + \endraw + \value transparent a transparent black value (i.e., QColor(0, 0, 0, 0)) + \value color0 0 pixel value (for bitmaps) + \value color1 1 pixel value (for bitmaps) + + \sa QColor + +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::PenStyle + + This enum type defines the pen styles that can be drawn using + QPainter. The styles are: + + \table + \row + \o \inlineimage qpen-solid.png + \o \inlineimage qpen-dash.png + \o \inlineimage qpen-dot.png + \row + \o Qt::SolidLine + \o Qt::DashLine + \o Qt::DotLine + \row + \o \inlineimage qpen-dashdot.png + \o \inlineimage qpen-dashdotdot.png + \o \inlineimage qpen-custom.png + \row + \o Qt::DashDotLine + \o Qt::DashDotDotLine + \o Qt::CustomDashLine + \endtable + + \value NoPen no line at all. For example, QPainter::drawRect() + fills but does not draw any boundary line. + + \value SolidLine A plain line. + \value DashLine Dashes separated by a few pixels. + \value DotLine Dots separated by a few pixels. + \value DashDotLine Alternate dots and dashes. + \value DashDotDotLine One dash, two dots, one dash, two dots. + \value CustomDashLine A custom pattern defined using + QPainterPathStroker::setDashPattern(). + + \omitvalue MPenStyle + + \sa QPen +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::PenCapStyle + + This enum type defines the pen cap styles supported by Qt, i.e. + the line end caps that can be drawn using QPainter. + + \table + \row + \o \inlineimage qpen-square.png + \o \inlineimage qpen-flat.png + \o \inlineimage qpen-roundcap.png + \row + \o Qt::SquareCap + \o Qt::FlatCap + \o Qt::RoundCap + \endtable + + \value FlatCap a square line end that does not cover the end + point of the line. + \value SquareCap a square line end that covers the end point and + extends beyond it by half the line width. + \value RoundCap a rounded line end. + \omitvalue MPenCapStyle + + \sa QPen +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::PenJoinStyle + + This enum type defines the pen join styles supported by Qt, i.e. + which joins between two connected lines can be drawn using + QPainter. + + \table + \row + \o \inlineimage qpen-bevel.png + \o \inlineimage qpen-miter.png + \o \inlineimage qpen-roundjoin.png + \row + \o Qt::BevelJoin + \o Qt::MiterJoin + \o Qt::RoundJoin + \endtable + + \value MiterJoin The outer edges of the lines are extended to + meet at an angle, and this area is filled. + \value BevelJoin The triangular notch between the two lines is filled. + \value RoundJoin A circular arc between the two lines is filled. + \value SvgMiterJoin A miter join corresponding to the definition of + a miter join in the \l{SVG 1.2 Tiny} specification. + \omitvalue MPenJoinStyle + + \sa QPen +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::BrushStyle + + This enum type defines the brush styles supported by Qt, i.e. the + fill pattern of shapes drawn using QPainter. + + \image brush-styles.png Brush Styles + + \value NoBrush No brush pattern. + \value SolidPattern Uniform color. + \value Dense1Pattern Extremely dense brush pattern. + \value Dense2Pattern Very dense brush pattern. + \value Dense3Pattern Somewhat dense brush pattern. + \value Dense4Pattern Half dense brush pattern. + \value Dense5Pattern Somewhat sparse brush pattern. + \value Dense6Pattern Very sparse brush pattern. + \value Dense7Pattern Extremely sparse brush pattern. + \value HorPattern Horizontal lines. + \value VerPattern Vertical lines. + \value CrossPattern Crossing horizontal and vertical lines. + \value BDiagPattern Backward diagonal lines. + \value FDiagPattern Forward diagonal lines. + \value DiagCrossPattern Crossing diagonal lines. + \value LinearGradientPattern Linear gradient (set using a dedicated QBrush constructor). + \value ConicalGradientPattern Conical gradient (set using a dedicated QBrush constructor). + \value RadialGradientPattern Radial gradient (set using a dedicated QBrush constructor). + \value TexturePattern Custom pattern (see QBrush::setTexture()). + + \omitvalue CustomPattern + + \sa QBrush +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::TextFlag + + This enum type is used to define some modifier flags. Some of + these flags only make sense in the context of printing: + + \value TextSingleLine Treats all whitespace as spaces and prints just + one line. + \value TextDontClip If it's impossible to stay within the given bounds, + it prints outside. + \value TextExpandTabs Makes the U+0009 (ASCII tab) character move to + the next tab stop. + \value TextShowMnemonic Displays the string "\&P" as \underline{P} + (see QButton for an example). For an ampersand, use "\&\&". + \value TextWordWrap Breaks lines at appropriate points, e.g. at word + boundaries. + \value TextWrapAnywhere Breaks lines anywhere, even within words. + \value TextHideMnemonic Same as Qt::TextShowMnemonic but doesn't draw the underlines. + \value TextDontPrint Treat this text as "hidden" and don't print + it. + \value IncludeTrailingSpaces When this option is set, QTextLine::naturalTextWidth() and naturalTextRect() will + return a value that includes the width of trailing spaces in the text; otherwise + this width is excluded. + \value TextIncludeTrailingSpaces Same as IncludeTrailingSpaces + \value TextJustificationForced Ensures that text lines are justified. + + \omitvalue BreakAnywhere + \omitvalue DontClip + \omitvalue DontPrint + \omitvalue ExpandTabs + \omitvalue IncludeTrailingSpaces + \omitvalue NoAccel + \omitvalue ShowPrefix + \omitvalue SingleLine + \omitvalue WordBreak + \omitvalue TextForceLeftToRight + \omitvalue TextForceRightToLeft + \omitvalue TextLongestVariant Always use the longest variant when computing the size of a multi-variant string + + You can use as many modifier flags as you want, except that + Qt::TextSingleLine and Qt::TextWordWrap cannot be combined. + + Flags that are inappropriate for a given use are generally + ignored. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::BGMode + + Background mode: + + \value TransparentMode + \value OpaqueMode +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ConnectionType + + This enum describes the types of connection that can be used between signals and + slots. In particular, it determines whether a particular signal is delivered to a + slot immediately or queued for delivery at a later time. + + \value DirectConnection When emitted, the signal is immediately delivered to the slot. + \value QueuedConnection When emitted, the signal is queued until the event loop is + able to deliver it to the slot. + \value BlockingQueuedConnection + Same as QueuedConnection, except that the current thread blocks + until the slot has been delivered. This connection type should + only be used for receivers in a different thread. Note that misuse + of this type can lead to deadlocks in your application. + \value AutoConnection If the signal is emitted from the thread + in which the receiving object lives, the + slot is invoked directly, as with + Qt::DirectConnection; otherwise the + signal is queued, as with + Qt::QueuedConnection. + \value UniqueConnection Same as AutoConnection, but there will be a check that the signal is + not already connected to the same slot before connecting, otherwise, + the connection will fail. + This value was introduced in Qt 4.6. + \value AutoCompatConnection + The default connection type for signals and slots when Qt 3 support + is enabled. Equivalent to AutoConnection for connections but will cause warnings + to be output under certain circumstances. See + \l{Porting to Qt 4#Compatibility Signals and Slots}{Compatibility Signals and Slots} + for further information. + + With queued connections, the parameters must be of types that are known to + Qt's meta-object system, because Qt needs to copy the arguments to store them + in an event behind the scenes. If you try to use a queued connection and + get the error message + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qnamespace.qdoc 0 + + call qRegisterMetaType() to register the data type before you + establish the connection. + + \sa {Thread Support in Qt}, QObject::connect(), qRegisterMetaType() +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::DateFormat + + \value TextDate The default Qt format, which includes the day and month name, + the day number in the month, and the year in full. The day and month names will + be short, localized names. This is basically equivalent to using the date format + string, "ddd MMM d yyyy". See QDate::toString() for more information. + + \value ISODate ISO 8601 extended format: either \c{YYYY-MM-DD} for dates or + \c{YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS} for combined dates and times. + + \value SystemLocaleShortDate The \l{QLocale::ShortFormat}{short format} used + by the \l{QLocale::system()}{operating system}. + + \value SystemLocaleLongDate The \l{QLocale::LongFormat}{long format} used + by the \l{QLocale::system()}{operating system}. + + \value DefaultLocaleShortDate The \l{QLocale::ShortFormat}{short format} specified + by the \l{QLocale::setDefault()}{application's locale}. + + \value DefaultLocaleLongDate The \l{QLocale::LongFormat}{long format} used + by the \l{QLocale::setDefault()}{application's locale}. + + \value SystemLocaleDate \e{This enum value is deprecated.} Use Qt::SystemLocaleShortDate + instead (or Qt::SystemLocaleLongDate if you want long dates). + + \value LocaleDate \e{This enum value is deprecated.} Use Qt::DefaultLocaleShortDate + instead (or Qt::DefaultLocaleLongDate if you want long dates). + + \value LocalDate \e{This enum value is deprecated.} Use Qt::SystemLocaleShortDate + instead (or Qt::SystemLocaleLongDate if you want long dates). + + \note For \c ISODate formats, each \c Y, \c M and \c D represents a single digit + of the year, month and day used to specify the date. Each \c H, \c M and \c S + represents a single digit of the hour, minute and second used to specify the time. + The presence of a literal \c T character is used to separate the date and time when + both are specified. +*/ + + +/*! + \enum Qt::TimeSpec + + \value LocalTime Locale dependent time (Timezones and Daylight Savings Time). + \value UTC Coordinated Universal Time, replaces Greenwich Mean Time. + \value OffsetFromUTC An offset in seconds from Coordinated Universal Time. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::DayOfWeek + + \value Monday + \value Tuesday + \value Wednesday + \value Thursday + \value Friday + \value Saturday + \value Sunday +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::CaseSensitivity + + \value CaseInsensitive + \value CaseSensitive +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ToolBarArea + + \value LeftToolBarArea + \value RightToolBarArea + \value TopToolBarArea + \value BottomToolBarArea + \value AllToolBarAreas + \value NoToolBarArea + + \omitvalue ToolBarArea_Mask +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::DockWidgetArea + + \value LeftDockWidgetArea + \value RightDockWidgetArea + \value TopDockWidgetArea + \value BottomDockWidgetArea + \value AllDockWidgetAreas + \value NoDockWidgetArea + + \omitvalue DockWidgetArea_Mask +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::BackgroundMode + + \compat + + \value FixedColor + \value FixedPixmap + \value NoBackground + \value PaletteForeground + \value PaletteButton + \value PaletteLight + \value PaletteMidlight + \value PaletteDark + \value PaletteMid + \value PaletteText + \value PaletteBrightText + \value PaletteBase + \value PaletteBackground + \value PaletteShadow + \value PaletteHighlight + \value PaletteHighlightedText + \value PaletteButtonText + \value PaletteLink + \value PaletteLinkVisited + \value X11ParentRelative +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ImageConversionFlag + + The options marked "(default)" are set if no other values from + the list are included (since the defaults are zero): + + Color/Mono preference (ignored for QBitmap): + + \value AutoColor (default) - If the image has \link + QImage::depth() depth\endlink 1 and contains only + black and white pixels, the pixmap becomes monochrome. + \value ColorOnly The pixmap is dithered/converted to the + \link QPixmap::defaultDepth() native display depth\endlink. + \value MonoOnly The pixmap becomes monochrome. If necessary, + it is dithered using the chosen dithering algorithm. + + Dithering mode preference for RGB channels: + + \value DiffuseDither (default) - A high-quality dither. + \value OrderedDither A faster, more ordered dither. + \value ThresholdDither No dithering; closest color is used. + + Dithering mode preference for alpha channel: + + \value ThresholdAlphaDither (default) - No dithering. + \value OrderedAlphaDither A faster, more ordered dither. + \value DiffuseAlphaDither A high-quality dither. + \omitvalue NoAlpha + + Color matching versus dithering preference: + + \value PreferDither (default when converting to a pixmap) - Always dither + 32-bit images when the image is converted to 8 bits. + \value AvoidDither (default when converting for the purpose of saving to + file) - Dither 32-bit images only if the image has more than 256 + colors and it is being converted to 8 bits. + \omitvalue AutoDither + + \omitvalue ColorMode_Mask + \omitvalue Dither_Mask + \omitvalue AlphaDither_Mask + \omitvalue DitherMode_Mask + \omitvalue NoOpaqueDetection +*/ + +/*! \enum Qt::GUIStyle + + \compat + + \value WindowsStyle + \value MotifStyle + \value MacStyle + \value Win3Style + \value PMStyle +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::UIEffect + + This enum describes the available UI effects. + + By default, Qt will try to use the platform specific desktop + settings for each effect. Use the + QApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware() function (passing \c false + as argument) to prevent this, and the + QApplication::setEffectEnabled() to enable or disable a particular + effect. + + Note that all effects are disabled on screens running at less than + 16-bit color depth. + + \omitvalue UI_General + + \value UI_AnimateMenu Show animated menus. + \value UI_FadeMenu Show faded menus. + \value UI_AnimateCombo Show animated comboboxes. + \value UI_AnimateTooltip Show tooltip animations. + \value UI_FadeTooltip Show tooltip fading effects. + \value UI_AnimateToolBox Reserved + + \sa QApplication::setEffectEnabled(), QApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware() +*/ + +/*! \enum Qt::AspectRatioMode + + This enum type defines what happens to the aspect ratio when + scaling an rectangle. + + \image qimage-scaling.png + + \value IgnoreAspectRatio The size is scaled freely. The aspect + ratio is not preserved. + \value KeepAspectRatio The size is scaled to a rectangle as + large as possible inside a given + rectangle, preserving the aspect ratio. + \value KeepAspectRatioByExpanding The size is scaled to a + rectangle as small as possible + outside a given rectangle, + preserving the aspect ratio. + + \omitvalue ScaleFree + \omitvalue ScaleMin + \omitvalue ScaleMax + + \sa QSize::scale(), QImage::scaled() +*/ + +/*! \typedef Qt::ScaleMode + \compat + + Use Qt::AspectRatioMode instead. + + The enum values have been renamed as follows: + + \table + \row \i Old enum value \i New enum value + \row \i Qt::ScaleFree \i Qt::IgnoreAspectRatio + \row \i Qt::ScaleMin \i Qt::KeepAspectRatio + \row \i Qt::ScaleMax \i Qt::KeepAspectRatioByExpanding + \endtable +*/ + +/*! \enum Qt::TransformationMode + + This enum type defines whether image transformations (e.g., + scaling) should be smooth or not. + + \value FastTransformation The transformation is performed + quickly, with no smoothing. + \value SmoothTransformation The resulting image is transformed + using bilinear filtering. + + \sa QImage::scaled() +*/ + +/*! \enum Qt::Axis + + This enum type defines three values to represent the three + axes in the cartesian coordinate system. + + \value XAxis The X axis. + \value YAxis The Y axis. + \value ZAxis The Z axis. + + \sa QTransform::rotate(), QTransform::rotateRadians() + */ + +/*! + \enum Qt::WidgetAttribute + + \keyword widget attributes + + This enum type is used to specify various widget attributes. + Attributes are set and cleared with QWidget::setAttribute(), and + queried with QWidget::testAttribute(), although some have special + convenience functions which are mentioned below. + + \value WA_AcceptDrops Allows data from drag and drop operations + to be dropped onto the widget (see QWidget::setAcceptDrops()). + + \value WA_AlwaysShowToolTips Enables tooltips for inactive windows. + + \value WA_ContentsPropagated This flag is superfluous and + obsolete; it no longer has any effect. Since Qt 4.1, all widgets + that do not set WA_PaintOnScreen propagate their contents. + + \value WA_CustomWhatsThis Indicates that the widget wants to + continue operating normally in "What's This?" mode. This is set by the + widget's author. + + \value WA_DeleteOnClose Makes Qt delete this widget when the + widget has accepted the close event (see QWidget::closeEvent()). + + \value WA_Disabled Indicates that the widget is disabled, i.e. + it does not receive any mouse or keyboard events. There is also a + getter functions QWidget::isEnabled(). This is set/cleared by the + Qt kernel. + + \omitvalue WA_DropSiteRegistered + \omitvalue WA_ForceAcceptDrops + + \value WA_ForceDisabled Indicates that the widget is + explicitly disabled, i.e. it will remain disabled even when all + its ancestors are set to the enabled state. This implies + WA_Disabled. This is set/cleared by QWidget::setEnabled() and + QWidget::setDisabled(). + + \value WA_ForceUpdatesDisabled Indicates that updates are + explicitly disabled for the widget; i.e. it will remain disabled + even when all its ancestors are set to the updates-enabled state. + This implies WA_UpdatesDisabled. This is set/cleared by + QWidget::setUpdatesEnabled(). + + \value WA_GroupLeader + \e{This attribute has been deprecated.} Use QWidget::windowModality + instead. + + \value WA_Hover Forces Qt to generate paint events when the mouse + enters or leaves the widget. This feature is typically used when + implementing custom styles; see the \l{widgets/styles}{Styles} + example for details. + + \value WA_InputMethodEnabled Enables input methods for Asian languages. + Must be set when creating custom text editing widgets. + On Windows CE this flag can be used in addition to + QApplication::autoSipEnabled to automatically display the SIP when + entering a widget. + + \value WA_KeyboardFocusChange Set on a toplevel window when + the users changes focus with the keyboard (tab, backtab, or shortcut). + + \value WA_KeyCompression Enables key event compression if set, + and disables it if not set. By default key compression is off, so + widgets receive one key press event for each key press (or more, + since autorepeat is usually on). If you turn it on and your + program doesn't keep up with key input, Qt may try to compress key + events so that more than one character can be processed in each + event. + For example, a word processor widget might receive 2, 3 or more + characters in each QKeyEvent::text(), if the layout recalculation + takes too long for the CPU. + If a widget supports multiple character unicode input, it is + always safe to turn the compression on. + Qt performs key event compression only for printable characters. + Qt::Modifier keys, cursor movement keys, function keys and + miscellaneous action keys (e.g. Escape, Enter, Backspace, + PrintScreen) will stop key event compression, even if there are + more compressible key events available. + Platforms other than Mac and X11 do not support this compression, + in which case turning it on will have no effect. + This is set/cleared by the widget's author. + + \value WA_LayoutOnEntireRect Indicates that the widget + wants QLayout to operate on the entire QWidget::rect(), not only + on QWidget::contentsRect(). This is set by the widget's author. + + \value WA_LayoutUsesWidgetRect Ignore the layout item rect from the style + when laying out this widget with QLayout. This makes a difference in + QMacStyle and QPlastiqueStyle for some widgets. + + \value WA_MacNoClickThrough When a widget that has this attribute set + is clicked, and its window is inactive, the click will make the window + active but won't be seen by the widget. Typical use of this attribute + is on widgets with "destructive" actions, such as a "Delete" button. + WA_MacNoClickThrough also applies to all child widgets of the widget + that has it set. + + \value WA_MacOpaqueSizeGrip Indicates that the native Carbon size grip + should be opaque instead of transparent (the default). This attribute + is only applicable to Mac OS X and is set by the widget's author. + + \value WA_MacShowFocusRect Indicates that this widget should get a + QFocusFrame around it. Some widgets draw their own focus halo + regardless of this attribute. Not that the QWidget::focusPolicy + also plays the main role in whether something is given focus or + not, this only controls whether or not this gets the focus + frame. This attribute is only applicable to Mac OS X. + + \value WA_MacNormalSize Indicates the widget should have the + normal size for widgets in Mac OS X. This attribute is only + applicable to Mac OS X. + + \value WA_MacSmallSize Indicates the widget should have the small + size for widgets in Mac OS X. This attribute is only applicable to + Mac OS X. + + \value WA_MacMiniSize Indicates the widget should have the mini + size for widgets in Mac OS X. This attribute is only applicable to + Mac OS X. + + \value WA_MacVariableSize Indicates the widget can choose between + alternative sizes for widgets to avoid clipping. + This attribute is only applicable to Mac OS X. + + \value WA_MacBrushedMetal Indicates the widget should be drawn in + the brushed metal style as supported by the windowing system. This + attribute is only applicable to Mac OS X. + + \omitvalue WA_MacMetalStyle + + \value WA_Mapped Indicates that the widget is mapped on screen. + This is set/cleared by the Qt kernel. + + \value WA_MouseNoMask Makes the widget receive mouse events for + the entire widget regardless of the currently set mask, + overriding QWidget::setMask(). This is not applicable for + top-level windows. + + \value WA_MouseTracking Indicates that the widget has mouse + tracking enabled. See QWidget::mouseTracking. + + \value WA_Moved Indicates that the widget has an explicit + position. This is set/cleared by QWidget::move() and + by QWidget::setGeometry(). + + \value WA_MSWindowsUseDirect3D This value is obsolete and has no + effect. + + \value WA_NoBackground This value is obsolete. Use + WA_OpaquePaintEvent instead. + + \value WA_NoChildEventsForParent Indicates that the widget does + not want ChildAdded or ChildRemoved events sent to its + parent. This is rarely necessary but can help to avoid automatic + insertion widgets like splitters and layouts. This is set by a + widget's author. + + \value WA_NoChildEventsFromChildren Indicates that the widget does + not want to receive ChildAdded or ChildRemoved events sent from its + children. This is set by a widget's author. + + \value WA_NoMouseReplay Used for pop-up widgets. Indicates that the most + recent mouse press event should not be replayed when the pop-up widget + closes. The flag is set by the widget's author and cleared by the Qt kernel + every time the widget receives a new mouse event. + + \value WA_NoMousePropagation Prohibits mouse events from being propagated + to the widget's parent. This attribute is disabled by default. + + \value WA_TransparentForMouseEvents When enabled, this attribute disables + the delivery of mouse events to the widget and its children. Mouse events + are delivered to other widgets as if the widget and its children were not + present in the widget hierarchy; mouse clicks and other events effectively + "pass through" them. This attribute is disabled by default. + + \value WA_NoSystemBackground Indicates that the widget has no background, + i.e. when the widget receives paint events, the background is not + automatically repainted. \note Unlike WA_OpaquePaintEvent, newly exposed + areas are \bold never filled with the background (e.g., after showing a + window for the first time the user can see "through" it until the + application processes the paint events). This flag is set or cleared by the + widget's author. + + \value WA_OpaquePaintEvent Indicates that the widget paints all its pixels + when it receives a paint event. Thus, it is not required for operations + like updating, resizing, scrolling and focus changes to erase the widget + before generating paint events. The use of WA_OpaquePaintEvent provides a + small optimization by helping to reduce flicker on systems that do not + support double buffering and avoiding computational cycles necessary to + erase the background prior to painting. \note Unlike + WA_NoSystemBackground, WA_OpaquePaintEvent makes an effort to avoid + transparent window backgrounds. This flag is set or cleared by the widget's + author. + + \value WA_OutsideWSRange Indicates that the widget is outside + the valid range of the window system's coordinate system. A widget + outside the valid range cannot be mapped on screen. This is + set/cleared by the Qt kernel. + + \value WA_PaintOnScreen Indicates that the widget wants to draw directly + onto the screen. Widgets with this attribute set do not participate in + composition management, i.e. they cannot be semi-transparent or shine + through semi-transparent overlapping widgets. \note This flag is only + supported on X11 and it disables double buffering. On Qt for Embedded + Linux, the flag only works when set on a top-level widget and it relies on + support from the active screen driver. This flag is set or cleared by the + widget's author. To render outside of Qt's paint system, e.g., if you + require native painting primitives, you need to reimplement + QWidget::paintEngine() to return 0 and set this flag. + + \value WA_PaintOutsidePaintEvent Makes it possible to use QPainter to + paint on the widget outside \l{QWidget::paintEvent()}{paintEvent()}. This + flag is not supported on Windows, Mac OS X or Embedded Linux. We recommend + that you use it only when porting Qt 3 code to Qt 4. + + \value WA_PaintUnclipped Makes all painters operating on this widget + unclipped. Children of this widget or other widgets in front of it do not + clip the area the painter can paint on. This flag is only supported for + widgets with the WA_PaintOnScreen flag set. The preferred way to do this in + a cross platform way is to create a transparent widget that lies in front + of the other widgets. + + \value WA_PendingMoveEvent Indicates that a move event is pending, e.g., + when a hidden widget was moved. This flag is set or cleared by the Qt + kernel. + + \value WA_PendingResizeEvent Indicates that a resize event is pending, + e.g., when a hidden widget was resized. This flag is set or cleared by the + Qt kernel. + + \value WA_QuitOnClose Makes Qt quit the application when the last widget + with the attribute set has accepted closeEvent(). This behavior can be + modified with the QApplication::quitOnLastWindowClosed property. By default + this attribute is set for all widgets of type Qt::Window. + + \value WA_Resized Indicates that the widget has an explicit size. This flag + is set or cleared by QWidget::resize() and QWidget::setGeometry(). + + \value WA_RightToLeft Indicates that the layout direction for the widget + is right to left. + + \value WA_SetCursor Indicates that the widget has a cursor of its own. This + flag is set or cleared by QWidget::setCursor() and QWidget::unsetCursor(). + + \value WA_SetFont Indicates that the widget has a font of its own. This + flag is set or cleared by QWidget::setFont(). + + \value WA_SetPalette Indicates that the widget has a palette of its own. + This flag is set or cleared by QWidget::setPalette(). + + \value WA_SetStyle Indicates that the widget has a style of its own. This + flag is set or cleared by QWidget::setStyle(). + + \value WA_ShowModal \e{This attribute has been deprecated.} Use + QWidget::windowModality instead. + + \value WA_StaticContents Indicates that the widget contents are north-west + aligned and static. On resize, such a widget will receive paint events only + for parts of itself that are newly visible. This flag is set or cleared by + the widget's author. + + \value WA_StyleSheet Indicates that the widget is styled using a + \l{Qt Style Sheets}{style sheet}. + + \value WA_TranslucentBackground Indicates that the widget should have a + translucent background, i.e., any non-opaque regions of the widgets will be + translucent because the widget will have an alpha channel. Setting this + flag causes WA_NoSystemBackground to be set. On Windows the + widget also needs the Qt::FramelessWindowHint window flag to be set. + This flag is set or cleared by the widget's author. + + \value WA_UnderMouse Indicates that the widget is under the mouse cursor. + The value is not updated correctly during drag and drop operations. There + is also a getter function, QWidget::underMouse(). This flag is set or + cleared by the Qt kernel. + + \value WA_UpdatesDisabled Indicates that updates are blocked (including the + system background). This flag is set or cleared by the Qt kernel. + \warning This flag must \e never be set or cleared by the widget's author. + + \value WA_WindowModified Indicates that the window is marked as modified. + On some platforms this flag will do nothing, on others (including Mac OS X + and Windows) the window will take a modified appearance. This flag is set + or cleared by QWidget::setWindowModified(). + + \value WA_WindowPropagation Makes a toplevel window inherit font and + palette from its parent. + + \value WA_MacAlwaysShowToolWindow On Mac OS X, show the tool window even + when the application is not active. By default, all tool windows are + hidden when the application is inactive. + + \value WA_SetLocale Indicates the locale should be taken into consideration + in the widget. + + \value WA_StyledBackground Indicates the widget should be drawn using a + styled background. + + \value WA_ShowWithoutActivating Show the widget without making it active. + + \value WA_NativeWindow Indicates that a native window is created for the + widget. Enabling this flag will also force a native window for the widget's + ancestors unless Qt::WA_DontCreateNativeAncestors is set. + + \value WA_DontCreateNativeAncestors Indicates that the widget's ancestors + are kept non-native even though the widget itself is native. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeDesktop Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_DESKTOP to the + window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeDock Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_DOCK to the + window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeToolBar Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_TOOLBAR to the + window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automaticaly sets this + attribute for QToolBar. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeMenu Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_MENU to the + window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automatically sets this + attribute for QMenu when torn-off. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeUtility Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_UTILITY to the + window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automatically sets this + attribute for the Qt::Tool window type. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeSplash Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_SPLASH to the + window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automatically sets this + attribute for the Qt::SplashScreen window type. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeDialog Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_DIALOG + to the window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This + attribute has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automatically sets + this attribute for the Qt::Dialog and Qt::Sheet window types. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeDropDownMenu Adds + _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_DROPDOWN_MENU to the window's + _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This + attribute has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt + automatically sets this attribute for QMenus added to a QMenuBar. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypePopupMenu Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_POPUP_MENU + to the window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automatically sets this + attribute for QMenu. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeToolTip Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_TOOLTIP to the + window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automatically sets this + attribute for the Qt::ToolTip window type. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeNotification Adds + _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_NOTIFICATION to the window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 + window property. See http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more + details. This attribute has no effect on non-X11 platforms. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeCombo Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_COMBO + to the window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automatically sets this + attribute for the QComboBox pop-up. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeDND Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_DND to + the window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automatically sets this + attribute on the feedback widget used during a drag. + + \value WA_MacFrameworkScaled Enables resolution independence aware mode + on Mac when using Carbon. This attribute has no effect on Cocoa. + The attribute is off by default and can be enabled on a per-window basis. + + \value WA_AcceptTouchEvents Allows touch events (see QTouchEvent) + to be sent to the widget. Must be set on all widgets that can + handle touch events. Without this attribute set, events from a + touch device will be sent as mouse events. + + \value WA_TouchPadAcceptSingleTouchEvents Allows touchpad single + touch events to be sent to the widget. + + \omitvalue WA_SetLayoutDirection + \omitvalue WA_InputMethodTransparent + \omitvalue WA_WState_CompressKeys + \omitvalue WA_WState_ConfigPending + \omitvalue WA_WState_Created + \omitvalue WA_WState_DND + \omitvalue WA_WState_ExplicitShowHide + \omitvalue WA_WState_Hidden + \omitvalue WA_WState_InPaintEvent + \omitvalue WA_WState_OwnSizePolicy + \omitvalue WA_WState_Polished + \omitvalue WA_WState_Reparented + \omitvalue WA_WState_Visible + \omitvalue WA_SetWindowIcon + \omitvalue WA_PendingUpdate + \omitvalue WA_LaidOut + \omitvalue WA_GrabbedShortcut + \omitvalue WA_DontShowOnScreen + \omitvalue WA_InvalidSize + \omitvalue WA_ForceUpdatesDisabled + \omitvalue WA_NoX11EventCompression + \omitvalue WA_TintedBackground + \omitvalue WA_X11OpenGLOverlay + \omitvalue WA_CanHostQMdiSubWindowTitleBar + \omitvalue WA_AttributeCount + \omitvalue WA_StyleSheet + \omitvalue WA_X11BypassTransientForHint + \omitvalue WA_SetWindowModality + \omitvalue WA_WState_WindowOpacitySet + \omitvalue WA_WState_AcceptedTouchBeginEvent +*/ + +/*! \typedef Qt::HANDLE + + Platform-specific handle type for system objects. This is + equivalent to \c{void *} on Mac OS X and embedded Linux, + and to \c{unsigned long} on X11. On Windows it is the + DWORD returned by the Win32 function getCurrentThreadId(). + + \warning Using this type is not portable. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::Key + + The key names used by Qt. + + \value Key_Escape + \value Key_Tab + \value Key_Backtab + \omitvalue Key_BackTab + \value Key_Backspace + \omitvalue Key_BackSpace + \value Key_Return + \value Key_Enter Typically located on the keypad. + \value Key_Insert + \value Key_Delete + \value Key_Pause + \value Key_Print + \value Key_SysReq + \value Key_Clear + \value Key_Home + \value Key_End + \value Key_Left + \value Key_Up + \value Key_Right + \value Key_Down + \value Key_PageUp + \omitvalue Key_Prior + \value Key_PageDown + \omitvalue Key_Next + \value Key_Shift + \value Key_Control On Mac OS X, this corresponds to the Command keys. + \value Key_Meta On Mac OS X, this corresponds to the Control keys. + On Windows keyboards, this key is mapped to the + Windows key. + \value Key_Alt + \value Key_AltGr On Windows, when the KeyDown event for this key is + sent, the Ctrl+Alt modifiers are also set. + \value Key_CapsLock + \value Key_NumLock + \value Key_ScrollLock + \value Key_F1 + \value Key_F2 + \value Key_F3 + \value Key_F4 + \value Key_F5 + \value Key_F6 + \value Key_F7 + \value Key_F8 + \value Key_F9 + \value Key_F10 + \value Key_F11 + \value Key_F12 + \value Key_F13 + \value Key_F14 + \value Key_F15 + \value Key_F16 + \value Key_F17 + \value Key_F18 + \value Key_F19 + \value Key_F20 + \value Key_F21 + \value Key_F22 + \value Key_F23 + \value Key_F24 + \value Key_F25 + \value Key_F26 + \value Key_F27 + \value Key_F28 + \value Key_F29 + \value Key_F30 + \value Key_F31 + \value Key_F32 + \value Key_F33 + \value Key_F34 + \value Key_F35 + \value Key_Super_L + \value Key_Super_R + \value Key_Menu + \value Key_Hyper_L + \value Key_Hyper_R + \value Key_Help + \value Key_Direction_L + \value Key_Direction_R + \value Key_Space + \value Key_Any + \value Key_Exclam + \value Key_QuoteDbl + \value Key_NumberSign + \value Key_Dollar + \value Key_Percent + \value Key_Ampersand + \value Key_Apostrophe + \value Key_ParenLeft + \value Key_ParenRight + \value Key_Asterisk + \value Key_Plus + \value Key_Comma + \value Key_Minus + \value Key_Period + \value Key_Slash + \value Key_0 + \value Key_1 + \value Key_2 + \value Key_3 + \value Key_4 + \value Key_5 + \value Key_6 + \value Key_7 + \value Key_8 + \value Key_9 + \value Key_Colon + \value Key_Semicolon + \value Key_Less + \value Key_Equal + \value Key_Greater + \value Key_Question + \value Key_At + \value Key_A + \value Key_B + \value Key_C + \value Key_D + \value Key_E + \value Key_F + \value Key_G + \value Key_H + \value Key_I + \value Key_J + \value Key_K + \value Key_L + \value Key_M + \value Key_N + \value Key_O + \value Key_P + \value Key_Q + \value Key_R + \value Key_S + \value Key_T + \value Key_U + \value Key_V + \value Key_W + \value Key_X + \value Key_Y + \value Key_Z + \value Key_BracketLeft + \value Key_Backslash + \value Key_BracketRight + \value Key_AsciiCircum + \value Key_Underscore + \value Key_QuoteLeft + \value Key_BraceLeft + \value Key_Bar + \value Key_BraceRight + \value Key_AsciiTilde + \value Key_nobreakspace + \value Key_exclamdown + \value Key_cent + \value Key_sterling + \value Key_currency + \value Key_yen + \value Key_brokenbar + \value Key_section + \value Key_diaeresis + \value Key_copyright + \value Key_ordfeminine + \value Key_guillemotleft + \value Key_notsign + \value Key_hyphen + \value Key_registered + \value Key_macron + \value Key_degree + \value Key_plusminus + \value Key_twosuperior + \value Key_threesuperior + \value Key_acute + \value Key_mu + \value Key_paragraph + \value Key_periodcentered + \value Key_cedilla + \value Key_onesuperior + \value Key_masculine + \value Key_guillemotright + \value Key_onequarter + \value Key_onehalf + \value Key_threequarters + \value Key_questiondown + \value Key_Agrave + \value Key_Aacute + \value Key_Acircumflex + \value Key_Atilde + \value Key_Adiaeresis + \value Key_Aring + \value Key_AE + \value Key_Ccedilla + \value Key_Egrave + \value Key_Eacute + \value Key_Ecircumflex + \value Key_Ediaeresis + \value Key_Igrave + \value Key_Iacute + \value Key_Icircumflex + \value Key_Idiaeresis + \value Key_ETH + \value Key_Ntilde + \value Key_Ograve + \value Key_Oacute + \value Key_Ocircumflex + \value Key_Otilde + \value Key_Odiaeresis + \value Key_multiply + \value Key_Ooblique + \value Key_Ugrave + \value Key_Uacute + \value Key_Ucircumflex + \value Key_Udiaeresis + \value Key_Yacute + \value Key_THORN + \value Key_ssharp + \omitvalue Key_agrave + \omitvalue Key_aacute + \omitvalue Key_acircumflex + \omitvalue Key_atilde + \omitvalue Key_adiaeresis + \omitvalue Key_aring + \omitvalue Key_ae + \omitvalue Key_ccedilla + \omitvalue Key_egrave + \omitvalue Key_eacute + \omitvalue Key_ecircumflex + \omitvalue Key_ediaeresis + \omitvalue Key_igrave + \omitvalue Key_iacute + \omitvalue Key_icircumflex + \omitvalue Key_idiaeresis + \omitvalue Key_eth + \omitvalue Key_ntilde + \omitvalue Key_ograve + \omitvalue Key_oacute + \omitvalue Key_ocircumflex + \omitvalue Key_otilde + \omitvalue Key_odiaeresis + \value Key_division + \omitvalue Key_oslash + \omitvalue Key_ugrave + \omitvalue Key_uacute + \omitvalue Key_ucircumflex + \omitvalue Key_udiaeresis + \omitvalue Key_yacute + \omitvalue Key_thorn + \value Key_ydiaeresis + \value Key_Multi_key + \value Key_Codeinput + \value Key_SingleCandidate + \value Key_MultipleCandidate + \value Key_PreviousCandidate + \value Key_Mode_switch + \value Key_Kanji + \value Key_Muhenkan + \value Key_Henkan + \value Key_Romaji + \value Key_Hiragana + \value Key_Katakana + \value Key_Hiragana_Katakana + \value Key_Zenkaku + \value Key_Hankaku + \value Key_Zenkaku_Hankaku + \value Key_Touroku + \value Key_Massyo + \value Key_Kana_Lock + \value Key_Kana_Shift + \value Key_Eisu_Shift + \value Key_Eisu_toggle + \value Key_Hangul + \value Key_Hangul_Start + \value Key_Hangul_End + \value Key_Hangul_Hanja + \value Key_Hangul_Jamo + \value Key_Hangul_Romaja + \value Key_Hangul_Jeonja + \value Key_Hangul_Banja + \value Key_Hangul_PreHanja + \value Key_Hangul_PostHanja + \value Key_Hangul_Special + \value Key_Dead_Grave + \value Key_Dead_Acute + \value Key_Dead_Circumflex + \value Key_Dead_Tilde + \value Key_Dead_Macron + \value Key_Dead_Breve + \value Key_Dead_Abovedot + \value Key_Dead_Diaeresis + \value Key_Dead_Abovering + \value Key_Dead_Doubleacute + \value Key_Dead_Caron + \value Key_Dead_Cedilla + \value Key_Dead_Ogonek + \value Key_Dead_Iota + \value Key_Dead_Voiced_Sound + \value Key_Dead_Semivoiced_Sound + \value Key_Dead_Belowdot + \value Key_Dead_Hook + \value Key_Dead_Horn + \value Key_Back + \value Key_Forward + \value Key_Stop + \value Key_Refresh + \value Key_VolumeDown + \value Key_VolumeMute + \value Key_VolumeUp + \value Key_BassBoost + \value Key_BassUp + \value Key_BassDown + \value Key_TrebleUp + \value Key_TrebleDown + \value Key_MediaPlay + \value Key_MediaStop + \value Key_MediaPrevious + \omitvalue Key_MediaPrev + \value Key_MediaNext + \value Key_MediaRecord + \value Key_HomePage + \value Key_Favorites + \value Key_Search + \value Key_Standby + \value Key_OpenUrl + \value Key_LaunchMail + \value Key_LaunchMedia + \value Key_Launch0 + \value Key_Launch1 + \value Key_Launch2 + \value Key_Launch3 + \value Key_Launch4 + \value Key_Launch5 + \value Key_Launch6 + \value Key_Launch7 + \value Key_Launch8 + \value Key_Launch9 + \value Key_LaunchA + \value Key_LaunchB + \value Key_LaunchC + \value Key_LaunchD + \value Key_LaunchE + \value Key_LaunchF + \value Key_MediaLast + \value Key_unknown + + \value Key_Call + \value Key_Context1 + \value Key_Context2 + \value Key_Context3 + \value Key_Context4 + \value Key_Flip + \value Key_Hangup + \value Key_No + \value Key_Select + \value Key_Yes + + \value Key_Execute + \value Key_Printer + \value Key_Play + \value Key_Sleep + \value Key_Zoom + \value Key_Cancel + + \sa QKeyEvent::key() +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::HitTestAccuracy + + This enum contains the types of accuracy that can be used by the + QTextDocument class when testing for mouse clicks on text documents. + + \value ExactHit The point at which input occurred must coincide + exactly with input-sensitive parts of the document. + \value FuzzyHit The point at which input occurred can lie close to + input-sensitive parts of the document. + + This enum is defined in the \c <QTextDocument> header file. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::WhiteSpaceMode + + This enum describes the types of whitespace mode that are used by + the QTextDocument class to meet the requirements of different kinds + of textual information. + + \value WhiteSpaceNormal The whitespace mode used to display + normal word wrapped text in paragraphs. + \value WhiteSpacePre A preformatted text mode in which + whitespace is reproduced exactly. + \value WhiteSpaceNoWrap + + \omitvalue WhiteSpaceModeUndefined + + This enum is defined in the \c <QTextDocument> header file. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ButtonState_enum + \compat + \value ShiftButton + \value ControlButton + \value AltButton + \value MetaButton + \value Keypad + \value KeyButtonMask + + Use Qt::KeyboardModifier instead. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef Qt::ButtonState + \compat + + Use Qt::KeyboardModifier instead. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::CheckState + + This enum describes the state of checkable items, controls, and widgets. + + \value Unchecked The item is unchecked. + \value PartiallyChecked The item is partially checked. Items in hierarchical models + may be partially checked if some, but not all, of their + children are checked. + \value Checked The item is checked. + + \sa QCheckBox, Qt::ItemFlags, Qt::ItemDataRole +*/ + + +/*! + \enum Qt::ToolButtonStyle + + The style of the tool button, describing how the button's text and + icon should be displayed. + + \value ToolButtonIconOnly Only display the icon. + \value ToolButtonTextOnly Only display the text. + \value ToolButtonTextBesideIcon The text appears beside the icon. + \value ToolButtonTextUnderIcon The text appears under the icon. + \value ToolButtonFollowStyle Follow the \l{QStyle::SH_ToolButtonStyle}{style}. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::Corner + + This enum type specifies a corner in a rectangle: + + \value TopLeftCorner The top-left corner of the rectangle. + \value TopRightCorner The top-right corner of the rectangle. + \value BottomLeftCorner The bottom-left corner of the rectangle. + \value BottomRightCorner The bottom-right corner of the rectangle. + + \omitvalue TopLeft + \omitvalue TopRight + \omitvalue BottomLeft + \omitvalue BottomRight +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ScrollBarPolicy + + This enum type describes the various modes of QAbstractScrollArea's scroll + bars. + + \value ScrollBarAsNeeded QAbstractScrollArea shows a scroll bar when the + content is too large to fit and not otherwise. This is the + default. + + \value ScrollBarAlwaysOff QAbstractScrollArea never shows a scroll bar. + + \value ScrollBarAlwaysOn QAbstractScrollArea always shows a scroll bar. + + (The modes for the horizontal and vertical scroll bars are + independent.) +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ArrowType + + \value NoArrow + \value UpArrow + \value DownArrow + \value LeftArrow + \value RightArrow +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::FocusReason + + This enum specifies why the focus changed. It will be passed + through QWidget::setFocus and can be retrieved in the QFocusEvent + sent to the widget upon focus change. + + \value MouseFocusReason A mouse action occurred. + \value TabFocusReason The Tab key was pressed. + \value BacktabFocusReason A Backtab occurred. The input for this may + include the Shift or Control keys; + e.g. Shift+Tab. + \value ActiveWindowFocusReason The window system made this window either + active or inactive. + \value PopupFocusReason The application opened/closed a pop-up that + grabbed/released the keyboard focus. + \value ShortcutFocusReason The user typed a label's buddy shortcut + \value MenuBarFocusReason The menu bar took focus. + \value OtherFocusReason Another reason, usually application-specific. + + \omitvalue NoFocusReason + + \sa {Keyboard Focus} +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::WindowState + + \keyword window state + + This enum type is used to specify the current state of a top-level + window. + + The states are + + \value WindowNoState The window has no state set (in normal state). + \value WindowMinimized The window is minimized (i.e. iconified). + \value WindowMaximized The window is maximized with a frame around it. + \value WindowFullScreen The window fills the entire screen without any frame around it. + \value WindowActive The window is the active window, i.e. it has keyboard focus. + +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ContextMenuPolicy + + This enum type defines the various policies a widget can have with + respect to showing a context menu. + + \value NoContextMenu the widget does not feature a context menu, + context menu handling is deferred to the widget's parent. + \value PreventContextMenu the widget does not feature a context + menu, and in contrast to \c NoContextMenu, the handling is \e not + deferred to the widget's parent. This means that all right mouse + button events are guaranteed to be delivered to the widget itself + through mousePressEvent(), and mouseReleaseEvent(). + \value DefaultContextMenu the widget's QWidget::contextMenuEvent() handler is called. + \value ActionsContextMenu the widget displays its QWidget::actions() as context menu. + \value CustomContextMenu the widget emits the QWidget::customContextMenuRequested() signal. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::FocusPolicy + + This enum type defines the various policies a widget can have with + respect to acquiring keyboard focus. + + \value TabFocus the widget accepts focus by tabbing. + \value ClickFocus the widget accepts focus by clicking. + \value StrongFocus the widget accepts focus by both tabbing + and clicking. On Mac OS X this will also + be indicate that the widget accepts tab focus + when in 'Text/List focus mode'. + \value WheelFocus like Qt::StrongFocus plus the widget accepts + focus by using the mouse wheel. + \value NoFocus the widget does not accept focus. + +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ShortcutContext + + For a QEvent::Shortcut event to occur, the shortcut's key sequence + must be entered by the user in a context where the shortcut is + active. The possible contexts are these: + + \value WidgetShortcut The shortcut is active when its + parent widget has focus. + \value WidgetWithChildrenShortcut The shortcut is active + when its parent widget, or any of its children has focus. + Children which are top-level widgets, except pop-ups, are + not affected by this shortcut context. + \value WindowShortcut The shortcut is active when its + parent widget is a logical subwidget of the + active top-level window. + \value ApplicationShortcut The shortcut is active when one of + the applications windows are active. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef Qt::WFlags + + Synonym for Qt::WindowFlags. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::WindowType + + \keyword window flag + + This enum type is used to specify various window-system properties + for the widget. They are fairly unusual but necessary in a few + cases. Some of these flags depend on whether the underlying window + manager supports them. + + The main types are + + \value Widget This is the default type for QWidget. Widgets of + this type are child widgets if they have a parent, + and independent windows if they have no parent. + See also Qt::Window and Qt::SubWindow. + + \value Window Indicates that the widget is a window, usually + with a window system frame and a title bar, + irrespective of whether the widget has a parent or + not. Note that it is not possible to unset this + flag if the widget does not have a parent. + + \value Dialog Indicates that the widget is a window that should + be decorated as a dialog (i.e., typically no + maximize or minimize buttons in the title bar). + This is the default type for QDialog. If you want + to use it as a modal dialog, it should be launched + from another window, or have a parent and used + with the QWidget::windowModality property. If you make + it modal, the dialog will prevent other top-level + windows in the application from getting any input. + We refer to a top-level window that has a parent + as a \e secondary window. + + \value Sheet Indicates that the window is a Macintosh sheet. Since + using a sheet implies window modality, the recommended + way is to use QWidget::setWindowModality(), or + QDialog::open(), instead. + + \value Drawer Indicates that the widget is a Macintosh drawer. + + \value Popup Indicates that the widget is a pop-up top-level + window, i.e. that it is modal, but has a window + system frame appropriate for pop-up menus. + + \value Tool Indicates that the widget is a tool window. A tool + window is often a small window with a smaller than + usual title bar and decoration, typically used for + collections of tool buttons. It there is a parent, + the tool window will always be kept on top of it. + If there isn't a parent, you may consider using + Qt::WindowStaysOnTopHint as well. If the window + system supports it, a tool window can be decorated + with a somewhat lighter frame. It can also be + combined with Qt::FramelessWindowHint. + \br + \br + On Mac OS X, tool windows correspond to the + \l{http://developer.apple.com/documentation/Carbon/Conceptual/HandlingWindowsControls/hitb-wind_cont_concept/chapter_2_section_2.html}{Floating} + class of windows. This means that the window lives on a + level above normal windows; it impossible to put a normal + window on top of it. By default, tool windows will disappear + when the application is inactive. This can be controlled by + the Qt::WA_MacAlwaysShowToolWindow attribute. + + \value ToolTip Indicates that the widget is a tooltip. This is + used internally to implement + \l{QWidget::toolTip}{tooltips}. + + \value SplashScreen Indicates that the window is a splash screen. + This is the default type for QSplashScreen. + + \value Desktop Indicates that this widget is the desktop. This + is the type for QDesktopWidget. + + \value SubWindow Indicates that this widget is a sub-window, such + as a QMdiSubWindow widget. + + There are also a number of flags which you can use to customize + the appearance of top-level windows. These have no effect on other + windows: + + \value MSWindowsFixedSizeDialogHint Gives the window a thin dialog border on Windows. + This style is traditionally used for fixed-size dialogs. + + \value MSWindowsOwnDC Gives the window its own display + context on Windows. + + \value X11BypassWindowManagerHint Bypass the window + manager completely. This results in a borderless window + that is not managed at all (i.e., no keyboard input unless + you call QWidget::activateWindow() manually). + + \value FramelessWindowHint Produces a borderless window. + The user cannot move or resize a borderless window via the window + system. On X11, the result of the flag is dependent on the window manager and its + ability to understand Motif and/or NETWM hints. Most existing + modern window managers can handle this. + + The \c CustomizeWindowHint flag is used to enable customization of + the window controls. This flag must be set to allow the \c + WindowTitleHint, \c WindowSystemMenuHint, \c + WindowMinimizeButtonHint, \c WindowMaximizeButtonHint and \c + WindowCloseButtonHint flags to be changed. + + \value CustomizeWindowHint Turns off the default window title hints. + + \value WindowTitleHint Gives the window a title bar. + + \value WindowSystemMenuHint Adds a window system menu, and + possibly a close button (for example on Mac). If you need to hide + or show a close button, it is more portable to use \c + WindowCloseButtonHint. + + \value WindowMinimizeButtonHint Adds a minimize button. On + some platforms this implies Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint for it to work. + + \value WindowMaximizeButtonHint Adds a maximize button. On + some platforms this implies Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint for it to work. + + \value WindowMinMaxButtonsHint Adds a minimize and a maximize + button. On some platforms this implies Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint for it to work. + + \value WindowCloseButtonHint Adds a close button. On + some platforms this implies Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint for it + to work. + + \value WindowContextHelpButtonHint Adds a context help button to dialogs. + On some platforms this implies Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint for it to work. + + \value MacWindowToolBarButtonHint On Mac OS X adds a tool bar button (i.e., + the oblong button that is on the top right of windows that have toolbars. + + \value BypassGraphicsProxyWidget Prevents the window and its children from + automatically embedding themselves into a QGraphicsProxyWidget if the + parent widget is already embedded. You can set this flag if you + want your widget to always be a toplevel widget on the desktop, + regardless of whether the parent widget is embedded in a scene or + not. + + \value WindowShadeButtonHint + + \value WindowStaysOnTopHint Informs the window system that the + window should stay on top of all other windows. Note that + on some window managers on X11 you also have to pass + Qt::X11BypassWindowManagerHint for this flag to work + correctly. + + \value WindowStaysOnBottomHint Informs the window system that the + window should stay on bottom of all other windows. Note + that on X11 this hint will work only in window managers + that support _NET_WM_STATE_BELOW atom. If a window always + on the bottom has a parent, the parent will also be left on + the bottom. This window hint is currently not implemented + for Mac OS X. + + \value WindowOkButtonHint Adds an OK button to the window decoration of a dialog. + Only supported for Windows CE. + + \value WindowCancelButtonHint Adds a Cancel button to the window decoration of a dialog. + Only supported for Windows CE. + + \value WindowType_Mask A mask for extracting the window type + part of the window flags. + + Obsolete flags: + + \value WMouseNoMask Use Qt::WA_MouseNoMask instead. + \value WDestructiveClose Use Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose instead. + \value WStaticContents Use Qt::WA_StaticContents instead. + \value WGroupLeader No longer needed. + \value WShowModal Use QWidget::windowModality instead. + \value WNoMousePropagation Use Qt::WA_NoMousePropagation instead. + \value WType_TopLevel Use Qt::Window instead. + \value WType_Dialog Use Qt::Dialog instead. + \value WType_Popup Use Qt::Popup instead. + \value WType_Desktop Use Qt::Desktop instead. + \value WType_Mask Use Qt::WindowType_Mask instead. + + \value WStyle_Customize No longer needed. + \value WStyle_NormalBorder No longer needed. + \value WStyle_DialogBorder Use Qt::MSWindowsFixedSizeDialogHint instead. + \value WStyle_NoBorder Use Qt::FramelessWindowHint instead. + \value WStyle_Title Use Qt::WindowTitleHint instead. + \value WStyle_SysMenu Use Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint instead. + \value WStyle_Minimize Use Qt::WindowMinimizeButtonHint instead. + \value WStyle_Maximize Use Qt::WindowMaximizeButtonHint instead. + \value WStyle_MinMax Use Qt::WindowMinMaxButtonsHint instead. + \value WStyle_Tool Use Qt::Tool instead. + \value WStyle_StaysOnTop Use Qt::WindowStaysOnTopHint instead. + \value WStyle_ContextHelp Use Qt::WindowContextHelpButtonHint instead. + + \value WPaintDesktop No longer needed. + \value WPaintClever No longer needed. + + \value WX11BypassWM Use Qt::X11BypassWindowManagerHint instead. + \value WWinOwnDC Use Qt::MSWindowsOwnDC instead. + \value WMacSheet Use Qt::Sheet instead. + \value WMacDrawer Use Qt::Drawer instead. + + \value WStyle_Splash Use Qt::SplashScreen instead. + + \value WNoAutoErase No longer needed. + \value WRepaintNoErase No longer needed. + \value WNorthWestGravity Use Qt::WA_StaticContents instead. + \value WType_Modal Use Qt::Dialog and QWidget::windowModality instead. + \value WStyle_Dialog Use Qt::Dialog instead. + \value WStyle_NoBorderEx Use Qt::FramelessWindowHint instead. + \value WResizeNoErase No longer needed. + \value WMacNoSheet No longer needed. + + \sa QWidget::windowFlags, {Window Flags Example} +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::DropAction + + \value CopyAction Copy the data to the target. + \value MoveAction Move the data from the source to the target. + \value LinkAction Create a link from the source to the target. + \value ActionMask + \value IgnoreAction Ignore the action (do nothing with the data). + \value TargetMoveAction On Windows, this value is used when the ownership of the D&D data + should be taken over by the target application, + i.e., the source application should not delete + the data. + \br + On X11 this value is used to do a move. + \br + TargetMoveAction is not used on the Mac. +*/ + +#if defined(Q_OS_WIN) && defined(QT3_SUPPORT) +/*! + \enum Qt::WindowsVersion + \compat + + \value WV_32s + \value WV_95 + \value WV_98 + \value WV_Me + \value WV_DOS_based + \value WV_NT + \value WV_2000 + \value WV_XP + \value WV_2003 + \value WV_NT_based + \value WV_CE + \value WV_CENET + \value WV_CE_based + \value WV_CE_5 + \value WV_CE_6 +*/ +#endif + +#if defined(Q_OS_MAC) && defined(QT3_SUPPORT) +/*! + \enum Qt::MacintoshVersion + \compat + + \value MV_Unknown Use QSysInfo::MV_Unknown instead. + \value MV_9 Use QSysInfo::MV_9 instead. + \value MV_10_DOT_0 Use QSysInfo::MV_10_0 instead. + \value MV_10_DOT_1 Use QSysInfo::MV_10_1 instead. + \value MV_10_DOT_2 Use QSysInfo::MV_10_2 instead. + \value MV_10_DOT_3 Use QSysInfo::MV_10_3 instead. + \value MV_10_DOT_4 Use QSysInfo::MV_10_4 instead. + + \value MV_CHEETAH Use QSysInfo::MV_10_0 instead. + \value MV_PUMA Use QSysInfo::MV_10_1 instead. + \value MV_JAGUAR Use QSysInfo::MV_10_2 instead. + \value MV_PANTHER Use QSysInfo::MV_10_3 instead. + \value MV_TIGER Use QSysInfo::MV_10_4 instead. + + \sa QSysInfo::MacVersion +*/ +#endif + +/*! \typedef Qt::ToolBarDock + \compat + + Use Qt::Dock instead. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::Dock + \compat + + Each dock window can be in one of the following positions: + + \value DockUnmanaged not managed by a Q3MainWindow. + + \value DockTornOff the dock window floats as its own top level + window which always stays on top of the main window. + + \value DockTop above the central widget, below the menu bar. + + \value DockBottom below the central widget, above the status bar. + + \value DockRight to the right of the central widget. + + \value DockLeft to the left of the central widget. + + \value DockMinimized the dock window is not shown (this is + effectively a 'hidden' dock area); the handles of all minimized + dock windows are drawn in one row below the menu bar. + + \omitvalue Bottom + \omitvalue Left + \omitvalue Minimized + \omitvalue Right + \omitvalue Top + \omitvalue TornOff + \omitvalue Unmanaged +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::AnchorAttribute + + An anchor has one or more of the following attributes: + + \value AnchorName the name attribute of the anchor. This attribute is + used when scrolling to an anchor in the document. + + \value AnchorHref the href attribute of the anchor. This attribute is + used when a link is clicked to determine what content to load. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::SortOrder + + This enum describes how the items in a widget are sorted. + + \value AscendingOrder The items are sorted ascending e.g. starts with + 'AAA' ends with 'ZZZ' in Latin-1 locales + + \value DescendingOrder The items are sorted descending e.g. starts with + 'ZZZ' ends with 'AAA' in Latin-1 locales + + \omitvalue Ascending + \omitvalue Descending +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ClipOperation + + \value NoClip This operation turns clipping off. + + \value ReplaceClip Replaces the current clip path/rect/region with + the one supplied in the function call. + + \value IntersectClip Intersects the current clip path/rect/region + with the one supplied in the function call. + + \value UniteClip Unites the current clip path/rect/region with the + one supplied in the function call. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ItemSelectionMode + + This enum is used in QGraphicsItem, QGraphicsScene and QGraphicsView to + specify how items are selected, or how to determine if a shapes and items + collide. + + \value ContainsItemShape The output list contains only items whose + \l{QGraphicsItem::shape()}{shape} is fully contained inside the + selection area. Items that intersect with the area's outline are + not included. + + \value IntersectsItemShape The output list contains both items whose + \l{QGraphicsItem::shape()}{shape} is fully contained inside the + selection area, and items that intersect with the area's + outline. This is a common mode for rubber band selection. + + \value ContainsItemBoundingRect The output list contains only items whose + \l{QGraphicsItem::boundingRect()}{bounding rectangle} is fully + contained inside the selection area. Items that intersect with the + area's outline are not included. + + \value IntersectsItemBoundingRect The output list contains both items + whose \l{QGraphicsItem::boundingRect()}{bounding rectangle} is + fully contained inside the selection area, and items that intersect + with the area's outline. This method is commonly used for + determining areas that need redrawing. + + \sa QGraphicsScene::items(), QGraphicsScene::collidingItems(), + QGraphicsView::items(), QGraphicsItem::collidesWithItem(), + QGraphicsItem::collidesWithPath() +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::FillRule + + Specifies which method should be used to fill the paths and polygons. + + \value OddEvenFill Specifies that the region is filled using the + odd even fill rule. With this rule, we determine whether a point + is inside the shape by using the following method. + Draw a horizontal line from the point to a location outside the shape, + and count the number of intersections. If the number of intersections + is an odd number, the point is inside the shape. This mode is the + default. + + \value WindingFill Specifies that the region is filled using the + non zero winding rule. With this rule, we determine whether a + point is inside the shape by using the following method. + Draw a horizontal line from the point to a location outside the shape. + Determine whether the direction of the line at each intersection point + is up or down. The winding number is determined by summing the + direction of each intersection. If the number is non zero, the point + is inside the shape. This fill mode can also in most cases be considered + as the intersection of closed shapes. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::PaintUnit + + \compat + + \value PixelUnit + \value LoMetricUnit Obsolete + \value HiMetricUnit Obsolete + \value LoEnglishUnit Obsolete + \value HiEnglishUnit Obsolete + \value TwipsUnit Obsolete +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::TextFormat + + This enum is used in widgets that can display both plain text and + rich text, e.g. QLabel. It is used for deciding whether a text + string should be interpreted as one or the other. This is normally + done by passing one of the enum values to a setTextFormat() + function. + + \value PlainText The text string is interpreted as a plain text + string. + + \value RichText The text string is interpreted as a rich text + string. + + \value AutoText The text string is interpreted as for + Qt::RichText if Qt::mightBeRichText() returns true, otherwise + as Qt::PlainText. + + \value LogText A special, limited text format which is only used + by Q3TextEdit in an optimized mode. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::CursorShape + + This enum type defines the various cursors that can be used. + + The standard arrow cursor is the default for widgets in a normal state. + + \value ArrowCursor \inlineimage cursor-arrow.png + The standard arrow cursor. + \value UpArrowCursor \inlineimage cursor-uparrow.png + An arrow pointing upwards toward the top of the screen. + \value CrossCursor \inlineimage cursor-cross.png + A crosshair cursor, typically used to help the + user accurately select a point on the screen. + \value WaitCursor \inlineimage cursor-wait.png + An hourglass or watch cursor, usually shown during + operations that prevent the user from interacting with + the application. + \value IBeamCursor \inlineimage cursor-ibeam.png + A caret or ibeam cursor, indicating that a widget can + accept and display text input. + \value SizeVerCursor \inlineimage cursor-sizev.png + A cursor used for elements that are used to vertically + resize top-level windows. + \value SizeHorCursor \inlineimage cursor-sizeh.png + A cursor used for elements that are used to horizontally + resize top-level windows. + \value SizeBDiagCursor \inlineimage cursor-sizeb.png + A cursor used for elements that are used to diagonally + resize top-level windows at their top-right and + bottom-left corners. + \value SizeFDiagCursor \inlineimage cursor-sizef.png + A cursor used for elements that are used to diagonally + resize top-level windows at their top-left and + bottom-right corners. + \value SizeAllCursor \inlineimage cursor-sizeall.png + A cursor used for elements that are used to resize + top-level windows in any direction. + \value BlankCursor A blank/invisible cursor, typically used when the cursor + shape needs to be hidden. + \value SplitVCursor \inlineimage cursor-vsplit.png + A cursor used for vertical splitters, indicating that + a handle can be dragged horizontally to adjust the use + of available space. + \value SplitHCursor \inlineimage cursor-hsplit.png + A cursor used for horizontal splitters, indicating that + a handle can be dragged vertically to adjust the use + of available space. + \value PointingHandCursor \inlineimage cursor-hand.png + A pointing hand cursor that is typically used for + clickable elements such as hyperlinks. + \value ForbiddenCursor \inlineimage cursor-forbidden.png + A slashed circle cursor, typically used during drag + and drop operations to indicate that dragged content + cannot be dropped on particular widgets or inside + certain regions. + \value OpenHandCursor \inlineimage cursor-openhand.png + A cursor representing an open hand, typically used to + indicate that the area under the cursor is the visible + part of a canvas that the user can click and drag in + order to scroll around. + \value ClosedHandCursor \inlineimage cursor-closedhand.png + A cursor representing a closed hand, typically used to + indicate that a dragging operation is in progress that + involves scrolling. + \value WhatsThisCursor \inlineimage cursor-whatsthis.png + An arrow with a question mark, typically used to indicate + the presence of What's This? help for a widget. + \value BusyCursor \inlineimage cursor-wait.png + An hourglass or watch cursor, usually shown during + operations that allow the user to interact with + the application while they are performed in the + background. + \value BitmapCursor + \omitvalue LastCursor + \omitvalue CustomCursor + + \omitvalue arrowCursor + \omitvalue upArrowCursor + \omitvalue crossCursor + \omitvalue waitCursor + \omitvalue ibeamCursor + \omitvalue sizeVerCursor + \omitvalue sizeHorCursor + \omitvalue sizeBDiagCursor + \omitvalue sizeFDiagCursor + \omitvalue sizeAllCursor + \omitvalue blankCursor + \omitvalue splitVCursor + \omitvalue splitHCursor + \omitvalue pointingHandCursor + \omitvalue forbiddenCursor + \omitvalue whatsThisCursor +*/ + +/*! + \typedef Qt::TextFlags + \compat + + Use Qt::TextFlag instead. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::LayoutDirection + + Specifies the direction of Qt's layouts: + + \value LeftToRight Left-to-right layout. + \value RightToLeft Right-to-left layout. + + Right-to-left layouts are necessary for certain languages, + notably Arabic and Hebrew. + + \sa QApplication::setLayoutDirection(), QWidget::setLayoutDirection() +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::InputMethodHint + + \value ImhNone No hints. + \value ImhHiddenText Characters should be hidden, as is typically used when entering passwords. + This is automatically set when setting QLineEdit::echoMode to \c Password. + \value ImhNumbersOnly Only number input is allowed. + \value ImhUppercaseOnly Only upper case letter input is allowed. + \value ImhLowercaseOnly Only lower case letter input is allowed. + \value ImhNoAutoUppercase The input method should not try to automatically switch to upper case + when a sentence ends. + \value ImhPreferNumbers Numbers are preferred (but not required). + \value ImhPreferUppercase Upper case letters are preferred (but not required). + \value ImhPreferLowercase Lower case letters are preferred (but not required). + \value ImhNoPredictiveText Do not use predictive text (i.e. dictionary lookup) while typing. + \value ImhDialableCharactersOnly Only characters suitable for phone dialling are allowed. + + \note If several flags ending with \c Only are ORed together, the resulting character set will + consist of the union of the specified sets. For instance specifying \c ImhNumbersOnly and + \c ImhUppercaseOnly would yield a set consisting of numbers and uppercase letters. + + \sa QGraphicsItem::inputMethodHints() +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::InputMethodQuery + + \value ImMicroFocus The rectangle covering the area of the input cursor in widget coordinates. + \value ImFont The currently used font for text input. + \value ImCursorPosition The logical position of the cursor within the text surrounding the input area (see ImSurroundingText). + If any text is selected, the position returned will be at the logical end of the + selection, even if the real cursor is located at the logical start. + \value ImSurroundingText The plain text around the input area, for example the current paragraph. + \value ImCurrentSelection The currently selected text. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ItemDataRole + + Each item in the model has a set of data elements associated with + it, each with its own role. The roles are used by the view to indicate + to the model which type of data it needs. Custom models should return + data in these types. + + The general purpose roles (and the associated types) are: + + \value DisplayRole The key data to be rendered in the form of text. (QString) + \value DecorationRole The data to be rendered as a decoration in the form + of an icon. (QColor) + \value EditRole The data in a form suitable for editing in an + editor. (QString) + \value ToolTipRole The data displayed in the item's tooltip. (QString) + \value StatusTipRole The data displayed in the status bar. (QString) + \value WhatsThisRole The data displayed for the item in "What's This?" + mode. (QString) + \value SizeHintRole The size hint for the item that will be supplied + to views. (QSize) + + Roles describing appearance and meta data (with associated types): + + \value FontRole The font used for items rendered with the default + delegate. (QFont) + \value TextAlignmentRole The alignment of the text for items rendered with the + default delegate. (Qt::AlignmentFlag) + \value BackgroundRole The background brush used for items rendered with + the default delegate. (QBrush) + \value BackgroundColorRole This role is obsolete. Use BackgroundRole instead. + \value ForegroundRole The foreground brush (text color, typically) + used for items rendered with the default delegate. + (QBrush) + \value TextColorRole This role is obsolete. Use ForegroundRole instead. + \value CheckStateRole This role is used to obtain the checked state of + an item. (Qt::CheckState) + + Accessibility roles (with associated types): + + \value AccessibleTextRole The text to be used by accessibility + extensions and plugins, such as screen + readers. (QString) + \value AccessibleDescriptionRole A description of the item for accessibility + purposes. (QString) + + User roles: + + \value UserRole The first role that can be used for application-specific purposes. + + \omitvalue DisplayPropertyRole + \omitvalue DecorationPropertyRole + \omitvalue ToolTipPropertyRole + \omitvalue StatusTipPropertyRole + \omitvalue WhatsThisPropertyRole + + For user roles, it is up to the developer to decide which types to use and ensure that + components use the correct types when accessing and setting data. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ItemFlag + + This enum describes the properties of an item: + + \value NoItemFlags It does not have any properties set. + \value ItemIsSelectable It can be selected. + \value ItemIsEditable It can be edited. + \value ItemIsDragEnabled It can be dragged. + \value ItemIsDropEnabled It can be used as a drop target. + \value ItemIsUserCheckable It can be checked or unchecked by the user. + \value ItemIsEnabled The user can interact with the item. + \value ItemIsTristate The item is checkable with three separate states. + + Note that checkable items need to be given both a suitable set of flags + and an initial state, indicating whether the item is checked or not. + This is handled automatically for model/view components, but needs + to be explicitly set for instances of QListWidgetItem, QTableWidgetItem, + and QTreeWidgetItem. + + \sa QAbstractItemModel +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::MatchFlag + + This enum describes the type of matches that can be used when searching + for items in a model. + + \value MatchExactly Performs QVariant-based matching. + \value MatchFixedString Performs string-based matching. + String-based comparisons are case-insensitive unless the + \c MatchCaseSensitive flag is also specified. + \value MatchContains The search term is contained in the item. + \value MatchStartsWith The search term matches the start of the item. + \value MatchEndsWith The search term matches the end of the item. + \value MatchCaseSensitive The search is case sensitive. + \value MatchRegExp Performs string-based matching using a regular + expression as the search term. + \value MatchWildcard Performs string-based matching using a string with + wildcards as the search term. + \value MatchWrap Perform a search that wraps around, so that when + the search reaches the last item in the model, it begins again at + the first item and continues until all items have been examined. + \value MatchRecursive Searches the entire hierarchy. + + \sa QString::compare(), QRegExp +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::TextElideMode + + This enum specifies where the ellipsis should appear when + displaying texts that don't fit: + + \value ElideLeft The ellipsis should appear at the beginning of the text. + \value ElideRight The ellipsis should appear at the end of the text. + \value ElideMiddle The ellipsis should appear in the middle of the text. + \value ElideNone Ellipsis should NOT appear in the text. + + Qt::ElideMiddle is normally the most appropriate choice for URLs (e.g., + "\l{http://qt.nokia.com/careers/movingto/brisbane/}{http://qt.nok...ovingto/brisbane/}"), + whereas Qt::ElideRight is appropriate + for other strings (e.g., + "\l{http://qt.nokia.com/doc/qq/qq09-mac-deployment.html}{Deploying Applications on Ma...}"). + + \sa QAbstractItemView::textElideMode, QFontMetrics::elidedText(), AlignmentFlag QTabBar::elideMode +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::WindowModality + + \keyword modal + + This enum specifies the behavior of a modal window. A modal window + is one that blocks input to other windows. Note that windows that + are children of a modal window are not blocked. + + The values are: + \value NonModal The window is not modal and does not block input to other windows. + \value WindowModal The window is modal to a single window hierarchy and blocks input to its parent window, all grandparent windows, and all siblings of its parent and grandparent windows. + \value ApplicationModal The window is modal to the application and blocks input to all windows. + + \sa QWidget::windowModality, QDialog +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::TextInteractionFlag + + This enum specifies how a text displaying widget reacts to user input. + + \value NoTextInteraction No interaction with the text is possible. + \value TextSelectableByMouse Text can be selected with the mouse and copied to the clipboard using + a context menu or standard keyboard shortcuts. + \value TextSelectableByKeyboard Text can be selected with the cursor keys on the keyboard. A text cursor is shown. + \value LinksAccessibleByMouse Links can be highlighted and activated with the mouse. + \value LinksAccessibleByKeyboard Links can be focused using tab and activated with enter. + \value TextEditable The text is fully editable. + + \value TextEditorInteraction The default for a text editor. + \value TextBrowserInteraction The default for QTextBrowser. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::MaskMode + + This enum specifies the behavior of the + QPixmap::createMaskFromColor() and QImage::createMaskFromColor() + functions. + + \value MaskInColor Creates a mask where all pixels matching the given color are opaque. + \value MaskOutColor Creates a mask where all pixels matching the given color are transparent. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::DockWidgetAreaSizes + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ToolBarAreaSizes + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::EventPriority + + This enum can be used to specify event priorities. + + \value HighEventPriority Events with this priority are sent before + events with NormalEventPriority or LowEventPriority. + + \value NormalEventPriority Events with this priority are sent + after events with HighEventPriority, but before events with + LowEventPriority. + + \value LowEventPriority Events with this priority are sent after + events with HighEventPriority or NormalEventPriority. + + Note that these values are provided purely for convenience, since + event priorities can be any value between \c INT_MAX and \c + INT_MIN, inclusive. For example, you can define custom priorities + as being relative to each other: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qnamespace.qdoc 1 + + \sa QCoreApplication::postEvent() +*/ +/*! + \enum Qt::SizeHint + \since 4.4 + + This enum is used by QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint() + + \value MinimumSize is used to specify the minimum size of a graphics layout item. + \value PreferredSize is used to specify the preferred size of a graphics layout item. + \value MaximumSize is used to specify the maximum size of a graphics layout item. + \value MinimumDescent is used to specify the minimum descent of a text string in a graphics layout item. + \omitvalue NSizeHints + + \sa QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint() +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::SizeMode + \since 4.4 + + This enum is used by QPainter::drawRoundedRect() and QPainterPath::addRoundedRect() + functions to specify the radii of rectangle corners with respect to the dimensions + of the bounding rectangles specified. + + \value AbsoluteSize Specifies the size using absolute measurements. + \value RelativeSize Specifies the size relative to the bounding rectangle, + typically using percentage measurements. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::WindowFrameSection + \since 4.4 + + This enum is used to describe parts of a window frame. It is returned by + QGraphicsWidget::windowFrameSectionAt() to describe what section of the window + frame is under the mouse. + + \value NoSection + \value LeftSection + \value TopLeftSection + \value TopSection + \value TopRightSection + \value RightSection + \value BottomRightSection + \value BottomSection + \value BottomLeftSection + \value TitleBarArea + + \sa QGraphicsWidget::windowFrameEvent() + \sa QGraphicsWidget::paintWindowFrame() + \sa QGraphicsWidget::windowFrameSectionAt() + +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::TileRule + \since 4.6 + + This enum describes how to repeat or stretch the parts of an image + when drawing. + + \value Stretch Scale the image to fit to the available area. + + \value Repeat Tile the image until there is no more space. May crop + the last image. + + \value Round Like Repeat, but scales the images down to ensure that + the last image is not cropped. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::Initialization + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::GestureState + \since 4.6 + + This enum type describes the state of a gesture. + + \value NoGesture Initial state + \value GestureStarted A continuous gesture has started. + \value GestureUpdated A gesture continues. + \value GestureFinished A gesture has finished. + + \sa QGesture +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qdatastream.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qdatastream.cpp index 572b8a1..52902d0 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qdatastream.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qdatastream.cpp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE to a QIODevice. \ingroup io - \mainclass + A data stream is a binary stream of encoded information which is 100% independent of the host computer's operating system, CPU or diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qdebug.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qdebug.cpp index 6dd2640..1545082 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qdebug.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qdebug.cpp @@ -52,8 +52,7 @@ /*! \class QDebug - \ingroup io - \mainclass + \brief The QDebug class provides an output stream for debugging information. QDebug is used whenever the developer needs to write out debugging or tracing diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qdir.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qdir.cpp index 92aef3c..d08cb2f 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qdir.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qdir.cpp @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ void QDirPrivate::detach(bool createFileEngine) \ingroup io \ingroup shared \reentrant - \mainclass + A QDir is used to manipulate path names, access information regarding paths and files, and manipulate the underlying file diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qfile.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qfile.cpp index 1718f3b..aa704d3 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qfile.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qfile.cpp @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ QFilePrivate::setError(QFile::FileError err, int errNum) \brief The QFile class provides an interface for reading from and writing to files. \ingroup io - \mainclass + \reentrant QFile is an I/O device for reading and writing text and binary diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qprocess.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qprocess.cpp index 4715eb7..ccc16b2 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qprocess.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qprocess.cpp @@ -151,8 +151,7 @@ void QProcessPrivate::Channel::clear() to communicate with them. \ingroup io - \ingroup misc - \mainclass + \reentrant \section1 Running a Process diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qresource.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qresource.cpp index 958c7fc..212f153 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qresource.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qresource.cpp @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Q_GLOBAL_STATIC(QStringList, resourceSearchPaths) \brief The QResource class provides an interface for reading directly from resources. \ingroup io - \mainclass + \reentrant \since 4.2 diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qsettings.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qsettings.cpp index 81bd25a..af38b5a 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qsettings.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qsettings.cpp @@ -2004,8 +2004,7 @@ void QConfFileSettingsPrivate::ensureSectionParsed(QConfFile *confFile, \brief The QSettings class provides persistent platform-independent application settings. \ingroup io - \ingroup misc - \mainclass + \reentrant Users normally expect an application to remember its settings diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qtemporaryfile.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qtemporaryfile.cpp index 2fbf93f..adfcf5e 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qtemporaryfile.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qtemporaryfile.cpp @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ QTemporaryFilePrivate::~QTemporaryFilePrivate() \brief The QTemporaryFile class is an I/O device that operates on temporary files. \ingroup io - \mainclass + QTemporaryFile is used to create unique temporary files safely. The file itself is created by calling open(). The name of the diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qtextstream.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qtextstream.cpp index 151a4a2..9c82976 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qtextstream.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qtextstream.cpp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ static const int QTEXTSTREAM_BUFFERSIZE = 16384; reading and writing text. \ingroup io - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing \reentrant QTextStream can operate on a QIODevice, a QByteArray or a @@ -3088,8 +3088,6 @@ QLocale QTextStream::locale() const \compat \reentrant - \ingroup io - \ingroup text Use QTextStream instead. */ @@ -3116,8 +3114,6 @@ QLocale QTextStream::locale() const \compat \reentrant - \ingroup io - \ingroup text Use QTextStream instead. */ diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qurl.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qurl.cpp index 423f5e2..acbac36 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qurl.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qurl.cpp @@ -47,9 +47,9 @@ \reentrant \ingroup io - \ingroup misc + \ingroup network \ingroup shared - \mainclass + It can parse and construct URLs in both encoded and unencoded form. QUrl also has support for internationalized domain names diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qabstracteventdispatcher.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qabstracteventdispatcher.cpp index a414862..4fa0cd2 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qabstracteventdispatcher.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qabstracteventdispatcher.cpp @@ -168,7 +168,6 @@ void QAbstractEventDispatcherPrivate::releaseTimerId(int timerId) \class QAbstractEventDispatcher \brief The QAbstractEventDispatcher class provides an interface to manage Qt's event queue. - \ingroup application \ingroup events An event dispatcher receives events from the window system and other diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qabstractitemmodel.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qabstractitemmodel.cpp index 61b19a2..d6d1bcf 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qabstractitemmodel.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qabstractitemmodel.cpp @@ -753,7 +753,7 @@ void QAbstractItemModelPrivate::columnsRemoved(const QModelIndex &parent, \brief The QModelIndex class is used to locate data in a data model. \ingroup model-view - \mainclass + This class is used as an index into item models derived from QAbstractItemModel. The index is used by item views, delegates, and @@ -941,7 +941,7 @@ void QAbstractItemModelPrivate::columnsRemoved(const QModelIndex &parent, item model classes. \ingroup model-view - \mainclass + The QAbstractItemModel class defines the standard interface that item models must use to be able to interoperate with other components in the diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qbasictimer.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qbasictimer.cpp index df5941f..7fd975d 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qbasictimer.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qbasictimer.cpp @@ -49,7 +49,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QBasicTimer \brief The QBasicTimer class provides timer events for objects. - \ingroup time \ingroup events This is a fast, lightweight, and low-level class used by Qt diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreapplication.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreapplication.cpp index 86221a1..a2c9de9 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreapplication.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreapplication.cpp @@ -339,9 +339,6 @@ QString qAppName() \brief The QCoreApplication class provides an event loop for console Qt applications. - \ingroup application - \mainclass - This class is used by non-GUI applications to provide their event loop. For non-GUI application that uses Qt, there should be exactly one QCoreApplication object. For GUI applications, see diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreevent.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreevent.cpp index f661d47..9771284 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreevent.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreevent.cpp @@ -54,7 +54,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE event classes. Event objects contain event parameters. \ingroup events - \ingroup environment Qt's main event loop (QCoreApplication::exec()) fetches native window system events from the event queue, translates them into diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qobject.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qobject.cpp index 2afab1a..0e75867 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qobject.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qobject.cpp @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ int QMetaCallEvent::placeMetaCall(QObject *object) \brief The QObject class is the base class of all Qt objects. \ingroup objectmodel - \mainclass + \reentrant QObject is the heart of the \l{Qt object model}. The central diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qpointer.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qpointer.cpp index fb7a81e..624336f 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qpointer.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qpointer.cpp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ \brief The QPointer class is a template class that provides guarded pointers to QObjects. \ingroup objectmodel - \mainclass + A guarded pointer, QPointer<T>, behaves like a normal C++ pointer \c{T *}, except that it is automatically set to 0 when the diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qsharedmemory.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qsharedmemory.cpp index 168bf29..5dbd7c8 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qsharedmemory.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qsharedmemory.cpp @@ -86,7 +86,6 @@ QSharedMemoryPrivate::makePlatformSafeKey(const QString &key, /*! \class QSharedMemory - \ingroup ipc \since 4.4 \brief The QSharedMemory class provides access to a shared memory segment. diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qsignalmapper.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qsignalmapper.cpp index 5e89da2..7b2097d 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qsignalmapper.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qsignalmapper.cpp @@ -66,8 +66,8 @@ public: \class QSignalMapper \brief The QSignalMapper class bundles signals from identifiable senders. - \ingroup io - \mainclass + \ingroup objectmodel + This class collects a set of parameterless signals, and re-emits them with integer, string or widget parameters corresponding to diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qsocketnotifier.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qsocketnotifier.cpp index 4ac1cbb..85a3ea3 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qsocketnotifier.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qsocketnotifier.cpp @@ -56,6 +56,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QSocketNotifier class provides support for monitoring activity on a file descriptor. + \ingroup network \ingroup io The QSocketNotifier makes it possible to integrate Qt's event diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qsystemsemaphore.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qsystemsemaphore.cpp index 95dc8a0..94548f7 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qsystemsemaphore.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qsystemsemaphore.cpp @@ -49,7 +49,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \class QSystemSemaphore - \ingroup ipc \since 4.4 \brief The QSystemSemaphore class provides a general counting system semaphore. diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qtimer.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qtimer.cpp index f40f491..b7454ca 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qtimer.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qtimer.cpp @@ -50,9 +50,8 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QTimer \brief The QTimer class provides repetitive and single-shot timers. - \ingroup time \ingroup events - \mainclass + The QTimer class provides a high-level programming interface for timers. To use it, create a QTimer, connect its timeout() signal diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qtranslator.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qtranslator.cpp index de1157c..b9e6e14 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qtranslator.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qtranslator.cpp @@ -249,8 +249,6 @@ public: output. \ingroup i18n - \ingroup environment - \mainclass An object of this class contains a set of translations from a source language to a target language. QTranslator provides diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qvariant.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qvariant.cpp index 66c4176..54d6073 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qvariant.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qvariant.cpp @@ -1164,9 +1164,8 @@ const QVariant::Handler *QVariant::handler = &qt_kernel_variant_handler; \brief The QVariant class acts like a union for the most common Qt data types. \ingroup objectmodel - \ingroup misc \ingroup shared - \mainclass + Because C++ forbids unions from including types that have non-default constructors or destructors, most interesting Qt diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qwineventnotifier_p.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qwineventnotifier_p.cpp index f54d564..e5ce02c 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qwineventnotifier_p.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qwineventnotifier_p.cpp @@ -52,8 +52,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QWinEventNotifier \brief The QWinEventNotifier class provides support for the Windows Wait functions. - \ingroup io - The QWinEventNotifier class makes it possible to use the wait functions on windows in a asynchronous manner. With this class you can register a HANDLE to an event and get notification when diff --git a/src/corelib/plugin/qlibrary.cpp b/src/corelib/plugin/qlibrary.cpp index 116d617..ea8882f 100644 --- a/src/corelib/plugin/qlibrary.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/plugin/qlibrary.cpp @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Q_GLOBAL_STATIC(QMutex, qt_library_mutex) \reentrant \brief The QLibrary class loads shared libraries at runtime. - \mainclass + \ingroup plugins An instance of a QLibrary object operates on a single shared diff --git a/src/corelib/plugin/qplugin.qdoc b/src/corelib/plugin/qplugin.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3b8f1b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/plugin/qplugin.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \headerfile <QtPlugin> + \title Macros for Defining Plugins + + \brief The <QtPlugin> header files defines macros for defining plugins. + + \sa {How to Create Qt Plugins} +*/ + +/*! + \macro Q_DECLARE_INTERFACE(ClassName, Identifier) + \relates <QtPlugin> + + This macro associates the given \a Identifier (a string literal) + to the interface class called \a ClassName. The \a Identifier must + be unique. For example: + + \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/interfaces.h 3 + + This macro is normally used right after the class definition for + \a ClassName, in a header file. See the + \l{tools/plugandpaint}{Plug & Paint} example for details. + + If you want to use Q_DECLARE_INTERFACE with interface classes + declared in a namespace then you have to make sure the Q_DECLARE_INTERFACE + is not inside a namespace though. For example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qplugin.qdoc 0 + + \sa Q_INTERFACES(), Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2(), {How to Create Qt Plugins} +*/ + +/*! + \macro Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN(ClassName) + \relates <QtPlugin> + \obsolete + + Use Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() instead. This macro is equivalent to + Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2(\a ClassName, \a ClassName). +*/ + +/*! + \macro Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2(PluginName, ClassName) + \relates <QtPlugin> + \since 4.1 + \keyword Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2 + + This macro exports the plugin class \a ClassName for the plugin specified + by \a PluginName. The value of \a PluginName should correspond to the + \l{qmake Variable Reference#TARGET}{TARGET} specified in the plugin's + project file. + + There should be exactly one occurrence of this macro in the source code + for a Qt plugin, and it should be used where the implementation is written + rather than in a header file. + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qplugin.qdoc 1 + + See the \l{tools/plugandpaint}{Plug & Paint} example for details. + + \sa Q_DECLARE_INTERFACE(), {How to Create Qt Plugins} +*/ + +/*! + \macro Q_IMPORT_PLUGIN(PluginName) + \relates <QtPlugin> + + This macro imports the plugin named \a PluginName, corresponding + to the \l{qmake Variable Reference#TARGET}{TARGET} specified in the + plugin's project file. + + Inserting this macro into your application's source code will allow + you to make use of a static plugin. + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qplugin.qdoc 2 + + Static plugins must also be included by the linker when your + application is built. For Qt's predefined plugins, + you can use the \c QTPLUGIN to add + the required plugins to your build. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qplugin.qdoc 3 + + \sa {Static Plugins}, {How to Create Qt Plugins}, {Using qmake} +*/ + +/*! + \macro Q_EXPORT_STATIC_PLUGIN(ClassName) + \relates <QtPlugin> + \internal +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/plugin/qpluginloader.cpp b/src/corelib/plugin/qpluginloader.cpp index 2d9e20e..521063c 100644 --- a/src/corelib/plugin/qpluginloader.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/plugin/qpluginloader.cpp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \reentrant \brief The QPluginLoader class loads a plugin at run-time. - \mainclass + \ingroup plugins QPluginLoader provides access to a \l{How to Create Qt diff --git a/src/corelib/plugin/quuid.cpp b/src/corelib/plugin/quuid.cpp index fd5bc63..400f42d 100644 --- a/src/corelib/plugin/quuid.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/plugin/quuid.cpp @@ -50,7 +50,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QUuid class stores a Universally Unique Identifier (UUID). \reentrant - \ingroup misc Using \e{U}niversally \e{U}nique \e{ID}entifiers (UUID) is a standard way to uniquely identify entities in a distributed diff --git a/src/corelib/thread/qmutex.cpp b/src/corelib/thread/qmutex.cpp index eaa7308..db9a415 100644 --- a/src/corelib/thread/qmutex.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/thread/qmutex.cpp @@ -56,8 +56,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \threadsafe \ingroup thread - \ingroup environment - \mainclass The purpose of a QMutex is to protect an object, data structure or section of code so that only one thread can access it at a time @@ -416,7 +414,6 @@ void QMutex::unlock() \threadsafe \ingroup thread - \ingroup environment Locking and unlocking a QMutex in complex functions and statements or in exception handling code is error-prone and diff --git a/src/corelib/thread/qreadwritelock.cpp b/src/corelib/thread/qreadwritelock.cpp index 6db10a0..8ce58e9 100644 --- a/src/corelib/thread/qreadwritelock.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/thread/qreadwritelock.cpp @@ -57,7 +57,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \threadsafe \ingroup thread - \ingroup environment A read-write lock is a synchronization tool for protecting resources that can be accessed for reading and writing. This type @@ -441,7 +440,6 @@ void QReadWriteLock::unlock() \threadsafe \ingroup thread - \ingroup environment The purpose of QReadLocker (and QWriteLocker) is to simplify QReadWriteLock locking and unlocking. Locking and unlocking @@ -514,7 +512,6 @@ void QReadWriteLock::unlock() \threadsafe \ingroup thread - \ingroup environment The purpose of QWriteLocker (and QReadLocker is to simplify QReadWriteLock locking and unlocking. Locking and unlocking diff --git a/src/corelib/thread/qsemaphore.cpp b/src/corelib/thread/qsemaphore.cpp index 38e800d..df8036f 100644 --- a/src/corelib/thread/qsemaphore.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/thread/qsemaphore.cpp @@ -54,7 +54,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \threadsafe \ingroup thread - \ingroup environment A semaphore is a generalization of a mutex. While a mutex can only be locked once, it's possible to acquire a semaphore diff --git a/src/corelib/thread/qthread.cpp b/src/corelib/thread/qthread.cpp index 53ac3c7..b3575d4 100644 --- a/src/corelib/thread/qthread.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/thread/qthread.cpp @@ -199,8 +199,6 @@ void QAdoptedThread::run() \brief The QThread class provides platform-independent threads. \ingroup thread - \ingroup environment - \mainclass A QThread represents a separate thread of control within the program; it shares data with all the other threads within the diff --git a/src/corelib/thread/qthreadstorage.cpp b/src/corelib/thread/qthreadstorage.cpp index 25194f4..ebdcab7 100644 --- a/src/corelib/thread/qthreadstorage.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/thread/qthreadstorage.cpp @@ -189,8 +189,6 @@ void QThreadStorageData::finish(void **p) \threadsafe \ingroup thread - \ingroup environment - \mainclass QThreadStorage is a template class that provides per-thread data storage. diff --git a/src/corelib/thread/qwaitcondition.qdoc b/src/corelib/thread/qwaitcondition.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae2de6c --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/thread/qwaitcondition.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QWaitCondition + \brief The QWaitCondition class provides a condition variable for + synchronizing threads. + + \threadsafe + + \ingroup thread + + QWaitCondition allows a thread to tell other threads that some + sort of condition has been met. One or many threads can block + waiting for a QWaitCondition to set a condition with wakeOne() or + wakeAll(). Use wakeOne() to wake one randomly selected condition or + wakeAll() to wake them all. + + For example, let's suppose that we have three tasks that should + be performed whenever the user presses a key. Each task could be + split into a thread, each of which would have a + \l{QThread::run()}{run()} body like this: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_corelib_thread_qwaitcondition_unix.cpp 0 + + Here, the \c keyPressed variable is a global variable of type + QWaitCondition. + + A fourth thread would read key presses and wake the other three + threads up every time it receives one, like this: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_corelib_thread_qwaitcondition_unix.cpp 1 + + The order in which the three threads are woken up is undefined. + Also, if some of the threads are still in \c do_something() when + the key is pressed, they won't be woken up (since they're not + waiting on the condition variable) and so the task will not be + performed for that key press. This issue can be solved using a + counter and a QMutex to guard it. For example, here's the new + code for the worker threads: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_corelib_thread_qwaitcondition_unix.cpp 2 + + Here's the code for the fourth thread: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_corelib_thread_qwaitcondition_unix.cpp 3 + + The mutex is necessary because the results of two threads + attempting to change the value of the same variable + simultaneously are unpredictable. + + Wait conditions are a powerful thread synchronization primitive. + The \l{threads/waitconditions}{Wait Conditions} example shows how + to use QWaitCondition as an alternative to QSemaphore for + controlling access to a circular buffer shared by a producer + thread and a consumer thread. + + \sa QMutex, QSemaphore, QThread, {Wait Conditions Example} +*/ + +/*! + \fn QWaitCondition::QWaitCondition() + + Constructs a new wait condition object. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QWaitCondition::~QWaitCondition() + + Destroys the wait condition object. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QWaitCondition::wakeOne() + + Wakes one thread waiting on the wait condition. The thread that + is woken up depends on the operating system's scheduling + policies, and cannot be controlled or predicted. + + If you want to wake up a specific thread, the solution is + typically to use different wait conditions and have different + threads wait on different conditions. + + \sa wakeAll() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QWaitCondition::wakeAll() + + Wakes all threads waiting on the wait condition. The order in + which the threads are woken up depends on the operating system's + scheduling policies and cannot be controlled or predicted. + + \sa wakeOne() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QWaitCondition::wait(QMutex *mutex, unsigned long time) + + Releases the locked \a mutex and waits on the wait condition. The + \a mutex must be initially locked by the calling thread. If \a + mutex is not in a locked state, this function returns + immediately. If \a mutex is a recursive mutex, this function + returns immediately. The \a mutex will be unlocked, and the + calling thread will block until either of these conditions is met: + + \list + \o Another thread signals it using wakeOne() or wakeAll(). This + function will return true in this case. + \o \a time milliseconds has elapsed. If \a time is \c ULONG_MAX + (the default), then the wait will never timeout (the event + must be signalled). This function will return false if the + wait timed out. + \endlist + + The mutex will be returned to the same locked state. This + function is provided to allow the atomic transition from the + locked state to the wait state. + + \sa wakeOne(), wakeAll() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QWaitCondition::wait(QReadWriteLock *readWriteLock, unsigned long time) + \since 4.4 + + Releases the locked \a readWriteLock and waits on the wait + condition. The \a readWriteLock must be initially locked by the + calling thread. If \a readWriteLock is not in a locked state, this + function returns immediately. The \a readWriteLock must not be + locked recursively, otherwise this function will not release the + lock properly. The \a readWriteLock will be unlocked, and the + calling thread will block until either of these conditions is met: + + \list + \o Another thread signals it using wakeOne() or wakeAll(). This + function will return true in this case. + \o \a time milliseconds has elapsed. If \a time is \c ULONG_MAX + (the default), then the wait will never timeout (the event + must be signalled). This function will return false if the + wait timed out. + \endlist + + The \a readWriteLock will be returned to the same locked + state. This function is provided to allow the atomic transition + from the locked state to the wait state. + + \sa wakeOne(), wakeAll() +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qalgorithms.qdoc b/src/corelib/tools/qalgorithms.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f7b7798 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qalgorithms.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,651 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \headerfile <QtAlgorithms> + \title Generic Algorithms + \ingroup classlists + + \brief The <QtAlgorithms> header provides generic template-based algorithms. + + Qt provides a number of global template functions in \c + <QtAlgorithms> that work on containers and perform well-know + algorithms. You can use these algorithms with any \l {container + class} that provides STL-style iterators, including Qt's QList, + QLinkedList, QVector, QMap, and QHash classes. + + These functions have taken their inspiration from similar + functions available in the STL \c <algorithm> header. Most of them + have a direct STL equivalent; for example, qCopyBackward() is the + same as STL's copy_backward() algorithm. + + If STL is available on all your target platforms, you can use the + STL algorithms instead of their Qt counterparts. One reason why + you might want to use the STL algorithms is that STL provides + dozens and dozens of algorithms, whereas Qt only provides the most + important ones, making no attempt to duplicate functionality that + is already provided by the C++ standard. + + Most algorithms take \l {STL-style iterators} as parameters. The + algorithms are generic in the sense that they aren't bound to a + specific iterator class; you can use them with any iterators that + meet a certain set of requirements. + + Let's take the qFill() algorithm as an example. Unlike QVector, + QList has no fill() function that can be used to fill a list with + a particular value. If you need that functionality, you can use + qFill(): + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 0 + + qFill() takes a begin iterator, an end iterator, and a value. + In the example above, we pass \c list.begin() and \c list.end() + as the begin and end iterators, but this doesn't have to be + the case: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 1 + + Different algorithms can have different requirements for the + iterators they accept. For example, qFill() accepts two + \l {forward iterators}. The iterator types required are specified + for each algorithm. If an iterator of the wrong type is passed (for + example, if QList::ConstIterator is passed as an \l {output + iterator}), you will always get a compiler error, although not + necessarily a very informative one. + + Some algorithms have special requirements on the value type + stored in the containers. For example, qEqual() requires that the + value type supports operator==(), which it uses to compare items. + Similarly, qDeleteAll() requires that the value type is a + non-const pointer type (for example, QWidget *). The value type + requirements are specified for each algorithm, and the compiler + will produce an error if a requirement isn't met. + + \target binaryFind example + + The generic algorithms can be used on other container classes + than those provided by Qt and STL. The syntax of STL-style + iterators is modeled after C++ pointers, so it's possible to use + plain arrays as containers and plain pointers as iterators. A + common idiom is to use qBinaryFind() together with two static + arrays: one that contains a list of keys, and another that + contains a list of associated values. For example, the following + code will look up an HTML entity (e.g., \c &) in the \c + name_table array and return the corresponding Unicode value from + the \c value_table if the entity is recognized: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 2 + + This kind of code is for advanced users only; for most + applications, a QMap- or QHash-based approach would work just as + well: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 3 + + \section1 Types of Iterators + + The algorithms have certain requirements on the iterator types + they accept, and these are specified individually for each + function. The compiler will produce an error if a requirement + isn't met. + + \section2 Input Iterators + + An \e{input iterator} is an iterator that can be used for reading + data sequentially from a container. It must provide the following + operators: \c{==} and \c{!=} for comparing two iterators, unary + \c{*} for retrieving the value stored in the item, and prefix + \c{++} for advancing to the next item. + + The Qt containers' iterator types (const and non-const) are all + input iterators. + + \section2 Output Iterators + + An \e{output iterator} is an iterator that can be used for + writing data sequentially to a container or to some output + stream. It must provide the following operators: unary \c{*} for + writing a value (i.e., \c{*it = val}) and prefix \c{++} for + advancing to the next item. + + The Qt containers' non-const iterator types are all output + iterators. + + \section2 Forward Iterators + + A \e{forward iterator} is an iterator that meets the requirements + of both input iterators and output iterators. + + The Qt containers' non-const iterator types are all forward + iterators. + + \section2 Bidirectional Iterators + + A \e{bidirectional iterator} is an iterator that meets the + requirements of forward iterators but that in addition supports + prefix \c{--} for iterating backward. + + The Qt containers' non-const iterator types are all bidirectional + iterators. + + \section2 Random Access Iterators + + The last category, \e{random access iterators}, is the most + powerful type of iterator. It supports all the requirements of a + bidirectional iterator, and supports the following operations: + + \table + \row \i \c{i += n} \i advances iterator \c i by \c n positions + \row \i \c{i -= n} \i moves iterator \c i back by \c n positions + \row \i \c{i + n} or \c{n + i} \i returns the iterator for the item \c + n positions ahead of iterator \c i + \row \i \c{i - n} \i returns the iterator for the item \c n positions behind of iterator \c i + \row \i \c{i - j} \i returns the number of items between iterators \c i and \c j + \row \i \c{i[n]} \i same as \c{*(i + n)} + \row \i \c{i < j} \i returns true if iterator \c j comes after iterator \c i + \endtable + + QList and QVector's non-const iterator types are random access iterators. + + \sa {container classes}, <QtGlobal> +*/ + +/*! \fn OutputIterator qCopy(InputIterator begin1, InputIterator end1, OutputIterator begin2) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Copies the items from range [\a begin1, \a end1) to range [\a + begin2, ...), in the order in which they appear. + + The item at position \a begin1 is assigned to that at position \a + begin2; the item at position \a begin1 + 1 is assigned to that at + position \a begin2 + 1; and so on. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 4 + + \sa qCopyBackward(), {input iterators}, {output iterators} +*/ + +/*! \fn BiIterator2 qCopyBackward(BiIterator1 begin1, BiIterator1 end1, BiIterator2 end2) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Copies the items from range [\a begin1, \a end1) to range [..., + \a end2). + + The item at position \a end1 - 1 is assigned to that at position + \a end2 - 1; the item at position \a end1 - 2 is assigned to that + at position \a end2 - 2; and so on. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 5 + + \sa qCopy(), {bidirectional iterators} +*/ + +/*! \fn bool qEqual(InputIterator1 begin1, InputIterator1 end1, InputIterator2 begin2) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Compares the items in the range [\a begin1, \a end1) with the + items in the range [\a begin2, ...). Returns true if all the + items compare equal; otherwise returns false. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 6 + + This function requires the item type (in the example above, + QString) to implement \c operator==(). + + \sa {input iterators} +*/ + +/*! \fn void qFill(ForwardIterator begin, ForwardIterator end, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Fills the range [\a begin, \a end) with \a value. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 7 + + \sa qCopy(), {forward iterators} +*/ + +/*! \fn void qFill(Container &container, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + This is the same as qFill(\a{container}.begin(), \a{container}.end(), \a value); +*/ + +/*! \fn InputIterator qFind(InputIterator begin, InputIterator end, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Returns an iterator to the first occurrence of \a value in a + container in the range [\a begin, \a end). Returns \a end if \a + value isn't found. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 8 + + This function requires the item type (in the example above, + QString) to implement \c operator==(). + + If the items in the range are in ascending order, you can get + faster results by using qLowerBound() or qBinaryFind() instead of + qFind(). + + \sa qBinaryFind(), {input iterators} +*/ + +/*! \fn void qFind(const Container &container, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + This is the same as qFind(\a{container}.begin(), \a{container}.end(), value); +*/ + +/*! \fn void qCount(InputIterator begin, InputIterator end, const T &value, Size &n) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Returns the number of occurrences of \a value in the range [\a begin, \a end), + which is returned in \a n. \a n is never initialized, the count is added to \a n. + It is the caller's responsibility to initialize \a n. + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 9 + + This function requires the item type (in the example above, + \c int) to implement \c operator==(). + + \sa {input iterators} +*/ + +/*! \fn void qCount(const Container &container, const T &value, Size &n) +\relates <QtAlgorithms> + +\overload + +Instead of operating on iterators, as in the other overload, this function +operates on the specified \a container to obtain the number of instances +of \a value in the variable passed as a reference in argument \a n. +*/ + +/*! \fn void qSwap(T &var1, T &var2) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Exchanges the values of variables \a var1 and \a var2. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 10 +*/ + +/*! \fn void qSort(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Sorts the items in range [\a begin, \a end) in ascending order + using the quicksort algorithm. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 11 + + The sort algorithm is efficient on large data sets. It operates + in \l {linear-logarithmic time}, O(\e{n} log \e{n}). + + This function requires the item type (in the example above, + \c{int}) to implement \c operator<(). + + If neither of the two items is "less than" the other, the items are + taken to be equal. It is then undefined which one of the two + items will appear before the other after the sort. + + \sa qStableSort(), {random access iterators} +*/ + +/*! \fn void qSort(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end, LessThan lessThan) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + Uses the \a lessThan function instead of \c operator<() to + compare the items. + + For example, here's how to sort the strings in a QStringList + in case-insensitive alphabetical order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 12 + + To sort values in reverse order, pass + \l{qGreater()}{qGreater<T>()} as the \a lessThan parameter. For + example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 13 + + If neither of the two items is "less than" the other, the items are + taken to be equal. It is then undefined which one of the two + items will appear before the other after the sort. + + An alternative to using qSort() is to put the items to sort in a + QMap, using the sort key as the QMap key. This is often more + convenient than defining a \a lessThan function. For example, the + following code shows how to sort a list of strings case + insensitively using QMap: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 14 + + \sa QMap +*/ + +/*! \fn void qSort(Container &container) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + This is the same as qSort(\a{container}.begin(), \a{container}.end()); +*/ + +/*! + \fn void qStableSort(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Sorts the items in range [\a begin, \a end) in ascending order + using a stable sorting algorithm. + + If neither of the two items is "less than" the other, the items are + taken to be equal. The item that appeared before the other in the + original container will still appear first after the sort. This + property is often useful when sorting user-visible data. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 15 + + The sort algorithm is efficient on large data sets. It operates + in \l {linear-logarithmic time}, O(\e{n} log \e{n}). + + This function requires the item type (in the example above, + \c{int}) to implement \c operator<(). + + \sa qSort(), {random access iterators} +*/ + +/*! + \fn void qStableSort(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end, LessThan lessThan) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + Uses the \a lessThan function instead of \c operator<() to + compare the items. + + For example, here's how to sort the strings in a QStringList + in case-insensitive alphabetical order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 16 + + Note that earlier versions of Qt allowed using a lessThan function that took its + arguments by non-const reference. From 4.3 and on this is no longer possible, + the arguments has to be passed by const reference or value. + + To sort values in reverse order, pass + \l{qGreater()}{qGreater<T>()} as the \a lessThan parameter. For + example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 17 + + If neither of the two items is "less than" the other, the items are + taken to be equal. The item that appeared before the other in the + original container will still appear first after the sort. This + property is often useful when sorting user-visible data. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void qStableSort(Container &container) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + This is the same as qStableSort(\a{container}.begin(), \a{container}.end()); +*/ + +/*! \fn RandomAccessIterator qLowerBound(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Performs a binary search of the range [\a begin, \a end) and + returns the position of the first ocurrence of \a value. If no + such item is found, returns the position where it should be + inserted. + + The items in the range [\a begin, \e end) must be sorted in + ascending order; see qSort(). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 18 + + This function requires the item type (in the example above, + \c{int}) to implement \c operator<(). + + qLowerBound() can be used in conjunction with qUpperBound() to + iterate over all occurrences of the same value: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 19 + + \sa qUpperBound(), qBinaryFind() +*/ + +/*! + \fn RandomAccessIterator qLowerBound(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end, const T &value, LessThan lessThan) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + Uses the \a lessThan function instead of \c operator<() to + compare the items. + + Note that the items in the range must be sorted according to the order + specified by the \a lessThan object. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void qLowerBound(const Container &container, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + For read-only iteration over containers, this function is broadly equivalent to + qLowerBound(\a{container}.begin(), \a{container}.end(), value). However, since it + returns a const iterator, you cannot use it to modify the container; for example, + to insert items. +*/ + +/*! \fn RandomAccessIterator qUpperBound(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Performs a binary search of the range [\a begin, \a end) and + returns the position of the one-past-the-last occurrence of \a + value. If no such item is found, returns the position where the + item should be inserted. + + The items in the range [\a begin, \e end) must be sorted in + ascending order; see qSort(). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 20 + + This function requires the item type (in the example above, + \c{int}) to implement \c operator<(). + + qUpperBound() can be used in conjunction with qLowerBound() to + iterate over all occurrences of the same value: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 21 + + \sa qLowerBound(), qBinaryFind() +*/ + +/*! + \fn RandomAccessIterator qUpperBound(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end, const T &value, LessThan lessThan) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + Uses the \a lessThan function instead of \c operator<() to + compare the items. + + Note that the items in the range must be sorted according to the order + specified by the \a lessThan object. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void qUpperBound(const Container &container, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + This is the same as qUpperBound(\a{container}.begin(), \a{container}.end(), value); +*/ + + +/*! \fn RandomAccessIterator qBinaryFind(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Performs a binary search of the range [\a begin, \a end) and + returns the position of an occurrence of \a value. If there are + no occurrences of \a value, returns \a end. + + The items in the range [\a begin, \a end) must be sorted in + ascending order; see qSort(). + + If there are many occurrences of the same value, any one of them + could be returned. Use qLowerBound() or qUpperBound() if you need + finer control. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 22 + + This function requires the item type (in the example above, + QString) to implement \c operator<(). + + See the \l{<QtAlgorithms>#binaryFind example}{detailed + description} for an example usage. + + \sa qLowerBound(), qUpperBound(), {random access iterators} +*/ + +/*! \fn RandomAccessIterator qBinaryFind(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end, const T &value, LessThan lessThan) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + Uses the \a lessThan function instead of \c operator<() to + compare the items. + + Note that the items in the range must be sorted according to the order + specified by the \a lessThan object. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void qBinaryFind(const Container &container, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + This is the same as qBinaryFind(\a{container}.begin(), \a{container}.end(), value); +*/ + + +/*! + \fn void qDeleteAll(ForwardIterator begin, ForwardIterator end) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Deletes all the items in the range [\a begin, \a end) using the + C++ \c delete operator. The item type must be a pointer type (for + example, \c{QWidget *}). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 23 + + Notice that qDeleteAll() doesn't remove the items from the + container; it merely calls \c delete on them. In the example + above, we call clear() on the container to remove the items. + + This function can also be used to delete items stored in + associative containers, such as QMap and QHash. Only the objects + stored in each container will be deleted by this function; objects + used as keys will not be deleted. + + \sa {forward iterators} +*/ + +/*! + \fn void qDeleteAll(const Container &c) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + This is the same as qDeleteAll(\a{c}.begin(), \a{c}.end()). +*/ + +/*! \fn LessThan qLess() + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Returns a functional object, or functor, that can be passed to qSort() + or qStableSort(). + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 24 + + \sa {qGreater()}{qGreater<T>()} +*/ + +/*! \fn LessThan qGreater() + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Returns a functional object, or functor, that can be passed to qSort() + or qStableSort(). + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 25 + + \sa {qLess()}{qLess<T>()} +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qbytearray.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qbytearray.cpp index 5197d9a..3cfc88e 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qbytearray.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qbytearray.cpp @@ -590,8 +590,8 @@ QByteArray::Data QByteArray::shared_empty = { Q_BASIC_ATOMIC_INITIALIZER(1), \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \ingroup text - \mainclass + \ingroup string-processing + \reentrant QByteArray can be used to store both raw bytes (including '\\0's) diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qbytearraymatcher.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qbytearraymatcher.cpp index 1c10a4f..37cb9bb 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qbytearraymatcher.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qbytearraymatcher.cpp @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ static inline int bm_find(const uchar *cc, int l, int index, const uchar *puc, u can be quickly matched in a byte array. \ingroup tools - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing This class is useful when you have a sequence of bytes that you want to repeatedly match against some byte arrays (perhaps in a diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qcache.qdoc b/src/corelib/tools/qcache.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4c008fa --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qcache.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,244 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QCache + \brief The QCache class is a template class that provides a cache. + + \ingroup tools + \ingroup shared + + \reentrant + + QCache\<Key, T\> defines a cache that stores objects of type T + associated with keys of type Key. For example, here's the + definition of a cache that stores objects of type Employee + associated with an integer key: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qcache.qdoc 0 + + Here's how to insert an object in the cache: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qcache.qdoc 1 + + The advantage of using QCache over some other key-based data + structure (such as QMap or QHash) is that QCache automatically + takes ownership of the objects that are inserted into the cache and + deletes them to make room for new objects, if necessary. When + inserting an object into the cache, you can specify a \e{cost}, + which should bear some approximate relationship to the amount of + memory taken by the object. When the sum of all objects' costs + (totalCost()) exceeds the cache's limit (maxCost()), QCache starts + deleting objects in the cache to keep under the limit, starting with + less recently accessed objects. + + By default, QCache's maxCost() is 100. You can specify a + different value in the QCache constructor: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qcache.qdoc 2 + + Each time you call insert(), you can specify a cost as third + argument (after the key and a pointer to the object to insert). + After the call, the inserted object is owned by the QCache, which + may delete it at any time to make room for other objects. + + To look up objects in the cache, use object() or + operator[](). This function looks up an object by its key, and + returns either a pointer to the cached object (which is owned by + the cache) or 0. + + If you want to remove an object from the cache for a particular key, + call remove(). This will also delete the object. If you want to + remove an object from the cache without the QCache deleting it, use + take(). + + \sa QPixmapCache, QHash, QMap +*/ + +/*! \fn QCache::QCache(int maxCost = 100) + + Constructs a cache whose contents will never have a total cost + greater than \a maxCost. +*/ + +/*! \fn QCache::~QCache() + + Destroys the cache. Deletes all the objects in the cache. +*/ + +/*! \fn int QCache::maxCost() const + + Returns the maximum allowed total cost of the cache. + + \sa setMaxCost(), totalCost() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QCache::setMaxCost(int cost) + + Sets the maximum allowed total cost of the cache to \a cost. If + the current total cost is greater than \a cost, some objects are + deleted immediately. + + \sa maxCost(), totalCost() +*/ + +/*! \fn int QCache::totalCost() const + + Returns the total cost of the objects in the cache. + + This value is normally below maxCost(), but QCache makes an + exception for Qt's \l{implicitly shared} classes. If a cached + object shares its internal data with another instance, QCache may + keep the object lying around, possibly contributing to making + totalCost() larger than maxCost(). + + \sa setMaxCost() +*/ + +/*! \fn int QCache::size() const + + Returns the number of objects in the cache. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! \fn int QCache::count() const + + Same as size(). +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QCache::isEmpty() const + + Returns true if the cache contains no objects; otherwise + returns false. + + \sa size() +*/ + +/*! \fn QList<Key> QCache::keys() const + + Returns a list of the keys in the cache. +*/ + +/*! \fn void QCache::clear(); + + Deletes all the objects in the cache. + + \sa remove(), take() +*/ + + +/*! \fn bool QCache::insert(const Key &key, T *object, int cost = 1) + + Inserts \a object into the cache with key \a key and + associated cost \a cost. Any object with the same key already in + the cache will be removed. + + After this call, \a object is owned by the QCache and may be + deleted at any time. In particular, if \a cost is greater than + maxCost(), the object will be deleted immediately. + + The function returns true if the object was inserted into the + cache; otherwise it returns false. + + \sa take(), remove() +*/ + +/*! \fn T *QCache::object(const Key &key) const + + Returns the object associated with key \a key, or 0 if the key does + not exist in the cache. + + \warning The returned object is owned by QCache and may be + deleted at any time. + + \sa take(), remove() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QCache::contains(const Key &key) const + + Returns true if the cache contains an object associated with key \a + key; otherwise returns false. + + \sa take(), remove() +*/ + +/*! \fn T *QCache::operator[](const Key &key) const + + Returns the object associated with key \a key, or 0 if the key does + not exist in the cache. + + This is the same as object(). + + \warning The returned object is owned by QCache and may be + deleted at any time. +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QCache::remove(const Key &key) + + Deletes the object associated with key \a key. Returns true if the + object was found in the cache; otherwise returns false. + + \sa take(), clear() +*/ + +/*! \fn T *QCache::take(const Key &key) + + Takes the object associated with key \a key out of the cache + without deleting it. Returns a pointer to the object taken out, or + 0 if the key does not exist in the cache. + + The ownership of the returned object is passed to the caller. + + \sa remove() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QCache::QCache(int maxCost, int dummy) + + Use QCache(int) instead. +*/ + +/*! + \fn T *QCache::find(const Key &key) const + + Use object() instead. +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qchar.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qchar.cpp index ab84603..e9f9552 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qchar.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qchar.cpp @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \class QLatin1Char \brief The QLatin1Char class provides an 8-bit ASCII/Latin-1 character. - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing This class is only useful to avoid the codec for C strings business in the QChar(ch) constructor. You can avoid it by writing @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QChar \brief The QChar class provides a 16-bit Unicode character. - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing \reentrant In Qt, Unicode characters are 16-bit entities without any markup diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qdatetime.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qdatetime.cpp index 08a8385..54384e4 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qdatetime.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qdatetime.cpp @@ -193,8 +193,6 @@ static QString fmtDateTime(const QString& f, const QTime* dt = 0, const QDate* d \reentrant \brief The QDate class provides date functions. - \ingroup time - \mainclass A QDate object contains a calendar date, i.e. year, month, and day numbers, in the Gregorian calendar. (see \l{QDate G and J} {Use of @@ -1411,8 +1409,6 @@ void QDate::julianToGregorian(uint jd, int &y, int &m, int &d) \brief The QTime class provides clock time functions. - \ingroup time - \mainclass A QTime object contains a clock time, i.e. the number of hours, minutes, seconds, and milliseconds since midnight. It can read the @@ -2074,8 +2070,6 @@ int QTime::elapsed() const \reentrant \brief The QDateTime class provides date and time functions. - \ingroup time - \mainclass A QDateTime object contains a calendar date and a clock time (a "datetime"). It is a combination of the QDate and QTime classes. diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qhash.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qhash.cpp index 5e13794..21b73e4 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qhash.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qhash.cpp @@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ void QHashData::checkSanity() \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QHash\<Key, T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. It @@ -1618,7 +1618,7 @@ void QHashData::checkSanity() \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QMultiHash\<Key, T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qiterator.qdoc b/src/corelib/tools/qiterator.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c767be3 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qiterator.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,1431 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QListIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QListIterator class provides a Java-style const iterator for QList and QQueue. + + QList has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + An alternative to using iterators is to use index positions. Most + QList member functions take an index as their first parameter, + making it possible to access, modify, and remove items without + using iterators. + + QListIterator\<T\> allows you to iterate over a QList\<T\> (or a + QQueue\<T\>). If you want to modify the list as you iterate over + it, use QMutableListIterator\<T\> instead. + + The QListIterator constructor takes a QList as argument. After + construction, the iterator is located at the very beginning of + the list (before the first item). Here's how to iterate over all + the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 0 + + The next() function returns the next item in the list and + advances the iterator. Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style + iterators point \e between items rather than directly \e at + items. The first call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the first and second item, and returns the first + item; the second call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the second and third item, and returns the second + item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 1 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. + + Multiple iterators can be used on the same list. If the list is + modified while a QListIterator is active, the QListIterator will + continue iterating over the original list, ignoring the modified + copy. + + \sa QMutableListIterator, QList::const_iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QLinkedListIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QLinkedListIterator class provides a Java-style const iterator for QLinkedList. + + QLinkedList has both \l{Java-style iterators} and + \l{STL-style iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more + high-level and easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the + other hand, they are slightly less efficient. + + QLinkedListIterator\<T\> allows you to iterate over a + QLinkedList\<T\>. If you want to modify the list as you iterate + over it, use QMutableLinkedListIterator\<T\> instead. + + The QLinkedListIterator constructor takes a QLinkedList as + argument. After construction, the iterator is located at the very + beginning of the list (before the first item). Here's how to + iterate over all the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 2 + + The next() function returns the next item in the list and + advances the iterator. Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style + iterators point \e between items rather than directly \e at + items. The first call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the first and second item, and returns the first + item; the second call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the second and third item, and returns the second + item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 3 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. + + Multiple iterators can be used on the same list. If the list is + modified while a QLinkedListIterator is active, the + QLinkedListIterator will continue iterating over the original + list, ignoring the modified copy. + + \sa QMutableLinkedListIterator, QLinkedList::const_iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QVectorIterator + \inmodule QtCore + \brief The QVectorIterator class provides a Java-style const iterator for QVector and QStack. + + QVector has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + An alternative to using iterators is to use index positions. Most + QVector member functions take an index as their first parameter, + making it possible to access, insert, and remove items without + using iterators. + + QVectorIterator\<T\> allows you to iterate over a QVector\<T\> + (or a QStack\<T\>). If you want to modify the vector as you + iterate over it, use QMutableVectorIterator\<T\> instead. + + The QVectorIterator constructor takes a QVector as argument. + After construction, the iterator is located at the very beginning + of the vector (before the first item). Here's how to iterate over + all the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 4 + + The next() function returns the next item in the vector and + advances the iterator. Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style + iterators point \e between items rather than directly \e at + items. The first call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the first and second item, and returns the first + item; the second call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the second and third item, returning the second + item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 5 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. + + Multiple iterators can be used on the same vector. If the vector + is modified while a QVectorIterator is active, the QVectorIterator + will continue iterating over the original vector, ignoring the + modified copy. + + \sa QMutableVectorIterator, QVector::const_iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QSetIterator + \inmodule QtCore + \brief The QSetIterator class provides a Java-style const iterator for QSet. + + QSet supports both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + QSetIterator\<T\> allows you to iterate over a QSet\<T\>. If you + want to modify the set as you iterate over it, use + QMutableSetIterator\<T\> instead. + + The constructor takes a QSet as argument. After construction, the + iterator is located at the very beginning of the set (before + the first item). Here's how to iterate over all the elements + sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 6 + + The next() function returns the next item in the set and + advances the iterator. Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style + iterators point \e between items rather than directly \e at + items. The first call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the first and second item, and returns the first + item; the second call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the second and third item, returning the second + item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 7 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. + + Multiple iterators can be used on the same set. If the set + is modified while a QSetIterator is active, the QSetIterator + will continue iterating over the original set, ignoring the + modified copy. + + \sa QMutableSetIterator, QSet::const_iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QMutableListIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QMutableListIterator class provides a Java-style non-const iterator for QList and QQueue. + + QList has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + An alternative to using iterators is to use index positions. Most + QList member functions take an index as their first parameter, + making it possible to access, insert, and remove items without + using iterators. + + QMutableListIterator\<T\> allows you to iterate over a QList\<T\> + (or a QQueue\<T\>) and modify the list. If you don't want to + modify the list (or have a const QList), use the slightly faster + QListIterator\<T\> instead. + + The QMutableListIterator constructor takes a QList as argument. + After construction, the iterator is located at the very beginning + of the list (before the first item). Here's how to iterate over + all the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 8 + + The next() function returns the next item in the list and + advances the iterator. Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style + iterators point \e between items rather than directly \e at + items. The first call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the first and second item, and returns the first + item; the second call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the second and third item, returning the second + item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 9 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. + + If you want to remove items as you iterate over the list, use + remove(). If you want to modify the value of an item, use + setValue(). If you want to insert a new item in the list, use + insert(). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 10 + + The example traverses a list, replacing negative numbers with + their absolute values, and eliminating zeroes. + + Only one mutable iterator can be active on a given list at any + time. Furthermore, no changes should be done directly to the list + while the iterator is active (as opposed to through the + iterator), since this could invalidate the iterator and lead to + undefined behavior. + + \sa QListIterator, QList::iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QMutableLinkedListIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QMutableLinkedListIterator class provides a Java-style non-const iterator for QLinkedList. + + QLinkedList has both \l{Java-style iterators} and + \l{STL-style iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more + high-level and easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the + other hand, they are slightly less efficient. + + QMutableLinkedListIterator\<T\> allows you to iterate over a + QLinkedList\<T\> and modify the list. If you don't want to modify + the list (or have a const QLinkedList), use the slightly faster + QLinkedListIterator\<T\> instead. + + The QMutableLinkedListIterator constructor takes a QLinkedList as + argument. After construction, the iterator is located at the very + beginning of the list (before the first item). Here's how to + iterate over all the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 11 + + The next() function returns the next item in the list and + advances the iterator. Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style + iterators point \e between items rather than directly \e at + items. The first call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the first and second item, and returns the first + item; the second call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the second and third item, returning the second + item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 12 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. + + If you want to remove items as you iterate over the list, use + remove(). If you want to modify the value of an item, use + setValue(). If you want to insert a new item in the list, use + insert(). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 13 + + The example traverses a list, replacing negative numbers with + their absolute values, and eliminating zeroes. + + Only one mutable iterator can be active on a given list at any + time. Furthermore, no changes should be done directly to the list + while the iterator is active (as opposed to through the + iterator), since this could invalidate the iterator and lead to + undefined behavior. + + \sa QLinkedListIterator, QLinkedList::iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QMutableVectorIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QMutableVectorIterator class provides a Java-style non-const iterator for QVector and QStack. + + QVector has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + An alternative to using iterators is to use index positions. Most + QVector member functions take an index as their first parameter, + making it possible to access, insert, and remove items without + using iterators. + + QMutableVectorIterator\<T\> allows you to iterate over a + QVector\<T\> and modify the vector. If you don't want to modify + the vector (or have a const QVector), use the slightly faster + QVectorIterator\<T\> instead. + + The QMutableVectorIterator constructor takes a QVector as + argument. After construction, the iterator is located at the very + beginning of the list (before the first item). Here's how to + iterate over all the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 14 + + The next() function returns the next item in the vector and + advances the iterator. Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style + iterators point \e between items rather than directly \e at + items. The first call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the first and second item, and returns the first + item; the second call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the second and third item, returning the second + item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 15 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. + + If you want to remove items as you iterate over the vector, use + remove(). If you want to modify the value of an item, use + setValue(). If you want to insert a new item in the vector, use + insert(). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 16 + + The example traverses a vector, replacing negative numbers with + their absolute values, and eliminating zeroes. + + Only one mutable iterator can be active on a given vector at any + time. Furthermore, no changes should be done directly to the + vector while the iterator is active (as opposed to through the + iterator), since this could invalidate the iterator and lead to + undefined behavior. + + \sa QVectorIterator, QVector::iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QMutableSetIterator + \inmodule QtCore + \since 4.2 + + \brief The QMutableSetIterator class provides a Java-style non-const iterator for QSet. + + QSet has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + QMutableSetIterator\<T\> allows you to iterate over a QSet\<T\> + and remove items from the set as you iterate. If you don't want + to modify the set (or have a const QSet), use the slightly faster + QSetIterator\<T\> instead. + + The QMutableSetIterator constructor takes a QSet as argument. + After construction, the iterator is located at the very beginning + of the set (before the first item). Here's how to iterate over + all the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 17 + + The next() function returns the next item in the set and + advances the iterator. Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style + iterators point \e between items rather than directly \e at + items. The first call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the first and second item, and returns the first + item; the second call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the second and third item, returning the second + item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 18 + + If you want to remove items as you iterate over the set, use + remove(). + + Only one mutable iterator can be active on a given set at any + time. Furthermore, no changes should be done directly to the set + while the iterator is active (as opposed to through the + iterator), since this could invalidate the iterator and lead to + undefined behavior. + + \sa QSetIterator, QSet::iterator +*/ + +/*! + \fn QListIterator::QListIterator(const QList<T> &list) + \fn QLinkedListIterator::QLinkedListIterator(const QLinkedList<T> &list) + \fn QMutableListIterator::QMutableListIterator(QList<T> &list) + \fn QMutableLinkedListIterator::QMutableLinkedListIterator(QLinkedList<T> &list) + + Constructs an iterator for traversing \a list. The iterator is + set to be at the front of the list (before the first item). + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QVectorIterator::QVectorIterator(const QVector<T> &vector) + \fn QMutableVectorIterator::QMutableVectorIterator(QVector<T> &vector) + + Constructs an iterator for traversing \a vector. The iterator is + set to be at the front of the vector (before the first item). + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSetIterator::QSetIterator(const QSet<T> &set) + \fn QMutableSetIterator::QMutableSetIterator(QSet<T> &set) + + Constructs an iterator for traversing \a set. The iterator is + set to be at the front of the set (before the first item). + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QMutableListIterator::~QMutableListIterator() + \fn QMutableLinkedListIterator::~QMutableLinkedListIterator() + \fn QMutableVectorIterator::~QMutableVectorIterator() + \fn QMutableSetIterator::~QMutableSetIterator() + + Destroys the iterator. + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMutableListIterator &QMutableListIterator::operator=(QList<T> &list) + \fn QMutableLinkedListIterator &QMutableLinkedListIterator::operator=(QLinkedList<T> &list) + \fn QListIterator &QListIterator::operator=(const QList<T> &list) + \fn QLinkedListIterator &QLinkedListIterator::operator=(const QLinkedList<T> &list) + + Makes the iterator operate on \a list. The iterator is set to be + at the front of the list (before the first item). + + \sa toFront(), toBack() +*/ + +/*! \fn QVectorIterator &QVectorIterator::operator=(const QVector<T> &vector) + \fn QMutableVectorIterator &QMutableVectorIterator::operator=(QVector<T> &vector) + + Makes the iterator operate on \a vector. The iterator is set to be + at the front of the vector (before the first item). + + \sa toFront(), toBack() +*/ + +/*! \fn QSetIterator &QSetIterator::operator=(const QSet<T> &set) + \fn QMutableSetIterator &QMutableSetIterator::operator=(QSet<T> &set) + + Makes the iterator operate on \a set. The iterator is set to be + at the front of the set (before the first item). + + \sa toFront(), toBack() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QListIterator::toFront() + \fn void QLinkedListIterator::toFront() + \fn void QVectorIterator::toFront() + \fn void QSetIterator::toFront() + \fn void QMutableListIterator::toFront() + \fn void QMutableLinkedListIterator::toFront() + \fn void QMutableVectorIterator::toFront() + \fn void QMutableSetIterator::toFront() + + Moves the iterator to the front of the container (before the + first item). + + \sa toBack(), next() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QListIterator::toBack() + \fn void QLinkedListIterator::toBack() + \fn void QVectorIterator::toBack() + \fn void QSetIterator::toBack() + \fn void QMutableListIterator::toBack() + \fn void QMutableLinkedListIterator::toBack() + \fn void QMutableVectorIterator::toBack() + \fn void QMutableSetIterator::toBack() + + Moves the iterator to the back of the container (after the last + item). + + \sa toFront(), previous() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QListIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QLinkedListIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QVectorIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QSetIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QMutableListIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QMutableLinkedListIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QMutableVectorIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QMutableSetIterator::hasNext() const + + Returns true if there is at least one item ahead of the iterator, + i.e. the iterator is \e not at the back of the container; + otherwise returns false. + + \sa hasPrevious(), next() +*/ + +/*! \fn const T &QListIterator::next() + \fn const T &QLinkedListIterator::next() + \fn const T &QVectorIterator::next() + \fn const T &QSetIterator::next() + \fn const T &QMutableSetIterator::next() + + Returns the next item and advances the iterator by one position. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the back of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasNext(), peekNext(), previous() +*/ + +/*! \fn T &QMutableListIterator::next() + \fn T &QMutableLinkedListIterator::next() + \fn T &QMutableVectorIterator::next() + + Returns a reference to the next item, and advances the iterator + by one position. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the back of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasNext(), peekNext(), previous() +*/ + +/*! \fn const T &QListIterator::peekNext() const + \fn const T &QLinkedListIterator::peekNext() const + \fn const T &QVectorIterator::peekNext() const + \fn const T &QSetIterator::peekNext() const + \fn const T &QMutableSetIterator::peekNext() const + + Returns the next item without moving the iterator. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the back of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasNext(), next(), peekPrevious() +*/ + +/*! \fn T &QMutableListIterator::peekNext() const + \fn T &QMutableLinkedListIterator::peekNext() const + \fn T &QMutableVectorIterator::peekNext() const + + Returns a reference to the next item, without moving the iterator. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the back of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasNext(), next(), peekPrevious() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QListIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QLinkedListIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QVectorIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QSetIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QMutableListIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QMutableLinkedListIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QMutableVectorIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QMutableSetIterator::hasPrevious() const + + Returns true if there is at least one item behind the iterator, + i.e. the iterator is \e not at the front of the container; + otherwise returns false. + + \sa hasNext(), previous() +*/ + +/*! \fn const T &QListIterator::previous() + \fn const T &QLinkedListIterator::previous() + \fn const T &QVectorIterator::previous() + \fn const T &QSetIterator::previous() + \fn const T &QMutableSetIterator::previous() + + Returns the previous item and moves the iterator back by one + position. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the front of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasPrevious(), peekPrevious(), next() +*/ + +/*! \fn T &QMutableListIterator::previous() + \fn T &QMutableLinkedListIterator::previous() + \fn T &QMutableVectorIterator::previous() + + Returns a reference to the previous item and moves the iterator + back by one position. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the front of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasPrevious(), peekPrevious(), next() +*/ + +/*! \fn const T &QListIterator::peekPrevious() const + \fn const T &QLinkedListIterator::peekPrevious() const + \fn const T &QVectorIterator::peekPrevious() const + \fn const T &QSetIterator::peekPrevious() const + \fn const T &QMutableSetIterator::peekPrevious() const + + Returns the previous item without moving the iterator. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the front of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasPrevious(), previous(), peekNext() +*/ + +/*! \fn T &QMutableListIterator::peekPrevious() const + \fn T &QMutableLinkedListIterator::peekPrevious() const + \fn T &QMutableVectorIterator::peekPrevious() const + + Returns a reference to the previous item, without moving the iterator. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the front of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasPrevious(), previous(), peekNext() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QListIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QLinkedListIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QVectorIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QSetIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableListIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableLinkedListIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableVectorIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableSetIterator::findNext(const T &value) + + Searches for \a value starting from the current iterator position + forward. Returns true if \a value is found; otherwise returns false. + + After the call, if \a value was found, the iterator is positioned + just after the matching item; otherwise, the iterator is + positioned at the back of the container. + + \sa findPrevious() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QListIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QLinkedListIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QVectorIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QSetIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableListIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableLinkedListIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableVectorIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableSetIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + + Searches for \a value starting from the current iterator position + backward. Returns true if \a value is found; otherwise returns + false. + + After the call, if \a value was found, the iterator is positioned + just before the matching item; otherwise, the iterator is + positioned at the front of the container. + + \sa findNext() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableListIterator::remove() + + Removes the last item that was jumped over using one of the + traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), findPrevious()). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 19 + + \sa insert(), setValue() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableLinkedListIterator::remove() + + Removes the last item that was jumped over using one of the + traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), findPrevious()). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 20 + + \sa insert(), setValue() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableVectorIterator::remove() + + Removes the last item that was jumped over using one of the + traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), findPrevious()). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 21 + + \sa insert(), setValue() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableSetIterator::remove() + + Removes the last item that was jumped over using one of the + traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), findPrevious()). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 22 + + \sa value() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableListIterator::setValue(const T &value) const + + Replaces the value of the last item that was jumped over using + one of the traversal functions with \a value. + + The traversal functions are next(), previous(), findNext(), and + findPrevious(). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 23 + + \sa value(), remove(), insert() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableLinkedListIterator::setValue(const T &value) const + + Replaces the value of the last item that was jumped over using + one of the traversal functions with \a value. + + The traversal functions are next(), previous(), findNext(), and + findPrevious(). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 24 + + \sa value(), remove(), insert() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableVectorIterator::setValue(const T &value) const + + Replaces the value of the last item that was jumped over using + one of the traversal functions with \a value. + + The traversal functions are next(), previous(), findNext(), and + findPrevious(). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 25 + + \sa value(), remove(), insert() +*/ + +/*! \fn const T &QMutableListIterator::value() const + \fn const T &QMutableLinkedListIterator::value() const + \fn const T &QMutableVectorIterator::value() const + \fn const T &QMutableSetIterator::value() const + + Returns the value of the last item that was jumped over using one + of the traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), + findPrevious()). + + After a call to next() or findNext(), value() is equivalent to + peekPrevious(). After a call to previous() or findPrevious(), value() is + equivalent to peekNext(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn T &QMutableListIterator::value() + \fn T &QMutableLinkedListIterator::value() + \fn T &QMutableVectorIterator::value() + \overload + + Returns a non-const reference to the value of the last item that + was jumped over using one of the traversal functions. +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableListIterator::insert(const T &value) + \fn void QMutableLinkedListIterator::insert(const T &value) + \fn void QMutableVectorIterator::insert(const T &value) + + Inserts \a value at the current iterator position. After the + call, the iterator is located just after the inserted item. + + \sa remove(), setValue() +*/ + +/*! + \class QMapIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QMapIterator class provides a Java-style const iterator for QMap and QMultiMap. + + QMap has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + QMapIterator\<Key, T\> allows you to iterate over a QMap (or a + QMultiMap). If you want to modify the map as you iterate over + it, use QMutableMapIterator instead. + + The QMapIterator constructor takes a QMap as argument. After + construction, the iterator is located at the very beginning of + the map (before the first item). Here's how to iterate over all + the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 26 + + The next() function returns the next item in the map and + advances the iterator. The key() and value() functions return the + key and value of the last item that was jumped over. + + Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style iterators point \e between + items rather than directly \e at items. The first call to next() + advances the iterator to the position between the first and + second item, and returns the first item; the second call to + next() advances the iterator to the position between the second + and third item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 27 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 28 + + Multiple iterators can be used on the same map. If the map is + modified while a QMapIterator is active, the QMapIterator will + continue iterating over the original map, ignoring the modified + copy. + + \sa QMutableMapIterator, QMap::const_iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QHashIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QHashIterator class provides a Java-style const iterator for QHash and QMultiHash. + + QHash has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + QHashIterator\<Key, T\> allows you to iterate over a QHash (or a + QMultiHash). If you want to modify the hash as you iterate over + it, use QMutableHashIterator instead. + + The QHashIterator constructor takes a QHash as argument. After + construction, the iterator is located at the very beginning of + the hash (before the first item). Here's how to iterate over all + the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 29 + + The next() function returns the next item in the hash and + advances the iterator. The key() and value() functions return the + key and value of the last item that was jumped over. + + Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style iterators point \e between + items rather than directly \e at items. The first call to next() + advances the iterator to the position between the first and + second item, and returns the first item; the second call to + next() advances the iterator to the position between the second + and third item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 30 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 31 + + Multiple iterators can be used on the same hash. If the hash is + modified while a QHashIterator is active, the QHashIterator will + continue iterating over the original hash, ignoring the modified + copy. + + \sa QMutableHashIterator, QHash::const_iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QMutableMapIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QMutableMapIterator class provides a Java-style non-const iterator for QMap and QMultiMap. + + QMap has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + QMutableMapIterator\<Key, T\> allows you to iterate over a QMap + (or a QMultiMap) and modify the map. If you don't want to modify + the map (or have a const QMap), use the slightly faster + QMapIterator instead. + + The QMutableMapIterator constructor takes a QMap as argument. + After construction, the iterator is located at the very beginning + of the map (before the first item). Here's how to iterate over + all the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 32 + + The next() function returns the next item in the map and + advances the iterator. The key() and value() functions return the + key and value of the last item that was jumped over. + + Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style iterators point \e between + items rather than directly \e at items. The first call to next() + advances the iterator to the position between the first and + second item, and returns the first item; the second call to + next() advances the iterator to the position between the second + and third item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 33 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 34 + + If you want to remove items as you iterate over the map, use + remove(). If you want to modify the value of an item, use + setValue(). + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 35 + + The example removes all (key, value) pairs where the key and the + value are the same. + + Only one mutable iterator can be active on a given map at any + time. Furthermore, no changes should be done directly to the map + while the iterator is active (as opposed to through the + iterator), since this could invalidate the iterator and lead to + undefined behavior. + + \sa QMapIterator, QMap::iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QMutableHashIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QMutableHashIterator class provides a Java-style non-const iterator for QHash and QMultiHash. + + QHash has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + QMutableHashIterator\<Key, T\> allows you to iterate over a QHash + (or a QMultiHash) and modify the hash. If you don't want to modify + the hash (or have a const QHash), use the slightly faster + QHashIterator instead. + + The QMutableHashIterator constructor takes a QHash as argument. + After construction, the iterator is located at the very beginning + of the hash (before the first item). Here's how to iterate over + all the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 36 + + The next() function returns the next item in the hash and + advances the iterator. The key() and value() functions return the + key and value of the last item that was jumped over. + + Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style iterators point \e between + items rather than directly \e at items. The first call to next() + advances the iterator to the position between the first and + second item, and returns the first item; the second call to + next() advances the iterator to the position between the second + and third item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 37 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 38 + + If you want to remove items as you iterate over the hash, use + remove(). If you want to modify the value of an item, use + setValue(). + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 39 + + The example removes all (key, value) pairs where the key and the + value are the same. + + Only one mutable iterator can be active on a given hash at any + time. Furthermore, no changes should be done directly to the hash + while the iterator is active (as opposed to through the + iterator), since this could invalidate the iterator and lead to + undefined behavior. + + \sa QHashIterator, QHash::iterator +*/ + +/*! \fn QMapIterator::QMapIterator(const QMap<Key, T> &map) + \fn QMutableMapIterator::QMutableMapIterator(QMap<Key, T> &map) + + Constructs an iterator for traversing \a map. The iterator is set + to be at the front of the map (before the first item). + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! \fn QHashIterator::QHashIterator(const QHash<Key, T> &hash) + \fn QMutableHashIterator::QMutableHashIterator(QHash<Key, T> &hash) + + Constructs an iterator for traversing \a hash. The iterator is + set to be at the front of the hash (before the first item). + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QMutableMapIterator::~QMutableMapIterator() + \fn QMutableHashIterator::~QMutableHashIterator() + + Destroys the iterator. + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMapIterator &QMapIterator::operator=(const QMap<Key, T> &map) + \fn QMutableMapIterator &QMutableMapIterator::operator=(QMap<Key, T> &map) + + Makes the iterator operate on \a map. The iterator is set to be + at the front of the map (before the first item). + + \sa toFront(), toBack() +*/ + +/*! \fn QHashIterator &QHashIterator::operator=(const QHash<Key, T> &hash) + \fn QMutableHashIterator &QMutableHashIterator::operator=(QHash<Key, T> &hash) + + Makes the iterator operate on \a hash. The iterator is set to be + at the front of the hash (before the first item). + + \sa toFront(), toBack() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMapIterator::toFront() + \fn void QHashIterator::toFront() + \fn void QMutableMapIterator::toFront() + \fn void QMutableHashIterator::toFront() + + Moves the iterator to the front of the container (before the + first item). + + \sa toBack(), next() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMapIterator::toBack() + \fn void QHashIterator::toBack() + \fn void QMutableMapIterator::toBack() + \fn void QMutableHashIterator::toBack() + + Moves the iterator to the back of the container (after the last + item). + + \sa toFront(), previous() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QMapIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QHashIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QMutableMapIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QMutableHashIterator::hasNext() const + + Returns true if there is at least one item ahead of the iterator, + i.e. the iterator is \e not at the back of the container; + otherwise returns false. + + \sa hasPrevious(), next() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMapIterator::Item QMapIterator::next() + \fn QHashIterator::Item QHashIterator::next() + + Returns the next item and advances the iterator by one position. + + Call key() on the return value to obtain the item's key, and + value() to obtain the value. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the back of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasNext(), peekNext(), previous() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMutableMapIterator::Item QMutableMapIterator::next() + \fn QMutableHashIterator::Item QMutableHashIterator::next() + + Returns the next item and advances the iterator by one position. + + Call key() on the return value to obtain the item's key, and + value() to obtain the value. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the back of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasNext(), peekNext(), previous() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMapIterator::Item QMapIterator::peekNext() const + \fn QHashIterator::Item QHashIterator::peekNext() const + + Returns the next item without moving the iterator. + + Call key() on the return value to obtain the item's key, and + value() to obtain the value. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the back of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasNext(), next(), peekPrevious() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMutableMapIterator::Item QMutableMapIterator::peekNext() const + \fn QMutableHashIterator::Item QMutableHashIterator::peekNext() const + + Returns a reference to the next item without moving the iterator. + + Call key() on the return value to obtain the item's key, and + value() to obtain the value. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the back of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasNext(), next(), peekPrevious() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QMapIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QHashIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QMutableMapIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QMutableHashIterator::hasPrevious() const + + Returns true if there is at least one item behind the iterator, + i.e. the iterator is \e not at the front of the container; + otherwise returns false. + + \sa hasNext(), previous() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMapIterator::Item QMapIterator::previous() + \fn QHashIterator::Item QHashIterator::previous() + + Returns the previous item and moves the iterator back by one + position. + + Call key() on the return value to obtain the item's key, and + value() to obtain the value. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the front of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasPrevious(), peekPrevious(), next() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMutableMapIterator::Item QMutableMapIterator::previous() + \fn QMutableHashIterator::Item QMutableHashIterator::previous() + + Returns the previous item and moves the iterator back by one + position. + + Call key() on the return value to obtain the item's key, and + value() to obtain the value. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the front of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasPrevious(), peekPrevious(), next() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMapIterator::Item QMapIterator::peekPrevious() const + \fn QHashIterator::Item QHashIterator::peekPrevious() const + + Returns the previous item without moving the iterator. + + Call key() on the return value to obtain the item's key, and + value() to obtain the value. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the front of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasPrevious(), previous(), peekNext() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMutableMapIterator::Item QMutableMapIterator::peekPrevious() const + \fn QMutableHashIterator::Item QMutableHashIterator::peekPrevious() const + + Returns the previous item without moving the iterator. + + Call key() on the return value to obtain the item's key, and + value() to obtain the value. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the front of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasPrevious(), previous(), peekNext() +*/ + +/*! \fn const T &QMapIterator::value() const + \fn const T &QHashIterator::value() const + + Returns the value of the last item that was jumped over using one + of the traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), + findPrevious()). + + After a call to next() or findNext(), value() is + equivalent to peekPrevious().value(). After a call to previous() + or findPrevious(), value() is equivalent to peekNext().value(). + + \sa key() +*/ + +/*! + \fn const T &QMutableMapIterator::value() const + \fn const T &QMutableHashIterator::value() const + + Returns the value of the last item that was jumped over using one + of the traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), + findPrevious()). + + After a call to next() or findNext(), value() is + equivalent to peekPrevious().value(). After a call to previous() + or findPrevious(), value() is equivalent to peekNext().value(). + + \sa key(), setValue() +*/ + +/*! + \fn T &QMutableMapIterator::value() + \fn T &QMutableHashIterator::value() + \overload + + Returns a non-const reference to the value of + the last item that was jumped over using one + of the traversal functions. +*/ + +/*! \fn const Key &QMapIterator::key() const + \fn const Key &QHashIterator::key() const + \fn const Key &QMutableMapIterator::key() const + \fn const Key &QMutableHashIterator::key() const + + Returns the key of the last item that was jumped over using one + of the traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), + findPrevious()). + + After a call to next() or findNext(), key() is + equivalent to peekPrevious().key(). After a call to previous() or + findPrevious(), key() is equivalent to peekNext().key(). + + \sa value() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QMapIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QHashIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableMapIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableHashIterator::findNext(const T &value) + + Searches for \a value starting from the current iterator position + forward. Returns true if a (key, value) pair with value \a value + is found; otherwise returns false. + + After the call, if \a value was found, the iterator is positioned + just after the matching item; otherwise, the iterator is + positioned at the back of the container. + + \sa findPrevious() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QMapIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QHashIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableMapIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableHashIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + + Searches for \a value starting from the current iterator position + backward. Returns true if a (key, value) pair with value \a value + is found; otherwise returns false. + + After the call, if \a value was found, the iterator is positioned + just before the matching item; otherwise, the iterator is + positioned at the front of the container. + + \sa findNext() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableMapIterator::remove() + \fn void QMutableHashIterator::remove() + + Removes the last item that was jumped over using one of the + traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), findPrevious()). + + \sa setValue() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableMapIterator::setValue(const T &value) + \fn void QMutableHashIterator::setValue(const T &value) + + Replaces the value of the last item that was jumped over using + one of the traversal functions with \a value. + + The traversal functions are next(), previous(), findNext(), and + findPrevious(). + + \sa key(), value(), remove() +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qline.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qline.cpp index e6ad9d1..02c1128 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qline.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qline.cpp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \class QLine - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QLine class provides a two-dimensional vector using integer precision. @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ QDataStream &operator>>(QDataStream &stream, QLine &line) /*! \class QLineF - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QLineF class provides a two-dimensional vector using floating point precision. diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qlinkedlist.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qlinkedlist.cpp index e5c0145..39758ed 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qlinkedlist.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qlinkedlist.cpp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ QLinkedListData QLinkedListData::shared_null = { \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QLinkedList\<T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. It diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qlistdata.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qlistdata.cpp index 4885b43..0993681 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qlistdata.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qlistdata.cpp @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ void **QListData::erase(void **xi) \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QList\<T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. It diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qlocale.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qlocale.cpp index 6913141..c767c7e 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qlocale.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qlocale.cpp @@ -1472,9 +1472,9 @@ QDataStream &operator>>(QDataStream &ds, QLocale &l) \reentrant \ingroup i18n - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing \ingroup shared - \mainclass + QLocale is initialized with a language/country pair in its constructor and offers number-to-string and string-to-number diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qmap.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qmap.cpp index f212f62..6b27e97 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qmap.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qmap.cpp @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ void QMapData::dump() \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QMap\<Key, T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. It @@ -1317,7 +1317,7 @@ void QMapData::dump() \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QMultiMap\<Key, T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qpair.qdoc b/src/corelib/tools/qpair.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9c8ac89 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qpair.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,229 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QPair + \brief The QPair class is a template class that stores a pair of items. + + \ingroup tools + + QPair\<T1, T2\> can be used in your application if the STL \c + pair type is not available. It stores one value of type T1 and + one value of type T2. It can be used as a return value for a + function that needs to return two values, or as the value type of + a \l{generic container}. + + Here's an example of a QPair that stores one QString and one \c + double value: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qpair.qdoc 0 + + The components are accessible as public data members called \l + first and \l second. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qpair.qdoc 1 + + QPair's template data types (T1 and T2) must be \l{assignable + data types}. You cannot, for example, store a QWidget as a value; + instead, store a QWidget *. A few functions have additional + requirements; these requirements are documented on a per-function + basis. + + \sa {Generic Containers} +*/ + +/*! \typedef QPair::first_type + + The type of the first element in the pair (T1). + + \sa first +*/ + +/*! \typedef QPair::second_type + + The type of the second element in the pair (T2). + + \sa second +*/ + +/*! \variable QPair::first + + The first element in the pair. +*/ + +/*! \variable QPair::second + + The second element in the pair. +*/ + +/*! \fn QPair::QPair() + + Constructs an empty pair. The \c first and \c second elements are + initialized with \l{default-constructed values}. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QPair::QPair(const T1 &value1, const T2 &value2) + + Constructs a pair and initializes the \c first element with \a + value1 and the \c second element with \a value2. + + \sa qMakePair() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QPair<T1, T2> &QPair::operator=(const QPair<T1, T2> &other) + + Assigns \a other to this pair. +*/ + +/*! \fn bool operator==(const QPair<T1, T2> &p1, const QPair<T1, T2> &p2) + + \relates QPair + + Returns true if \a p1 is equal to \a p2; otherwise returns false. + Two pairs compare equal if their \c first data members compare + equal and if their \c second data members compare equal. + + This function requires the T1 and T2 types to have an + implementation of \c operator==(). +*/ + +/*! \fn bool operator!=(const QPair<T1, T2> &p1, const QPair<T1, T2> &p2) + + \relates QPair + + Returns true if \a p1 is not equal to \a p2; otherwise returns + false. Two pairs compare as not equal if their \c first data + members are not equal or if their \c second data members are not + equal. + + This function requires the T1 and T2 types to have an + implementation of \c operator==(). +*/ + +/*! \fn bool operator<(const QPair<T1, T2> &p1, const QPair<T1, T2> &p2) + + \relates QPair + + Returns true if \a p1 is less than \a p2; otherwise returns + false. The comparison is done on the \c first members of \a p1 + and \a p2; if they compare equal, the \c second members are + compared to break the tie. + + This function requires the T1 and T2 types to have an + implementation of \c operator<(). +*/ + +/*! \fn bool operator>(const QPair<T1, T2> &p1, const QPair<T1, T2> &p2) + + \relates QPair + + Returns true if \a p1 is greater than \a p2; otherwise returns + false. The comparison is done on the \c first members of \a p1 + and \a p2; if they compare equal, the \c second members are + compared to break the tie. + + This function requires the T1 and T2 types to have an + implementation of \c operator<(). +*/ + +/*! \fn bool operator<=(const QPair<T1, T2> &p1, const QPair<T1, T2> &p2) + + \relates QPair + + Returns true if \a p1 is less than or equal to \a p2; otherwise + returns false. The comparison is done on the \c first members of + \a p1 and \a p2; if they compare equal, the \c second members are + compared to break the tie. + + This function requires the T1 and T2 types to have an + implementation of \c operator<(). +*/ + +/*! \fn bool operator>=(const QPair<T1, T2> &p1, const QPair<T1, T2> &p2) + + \relates QPair + + Returns true if \a p1 is greater than or equal to \a p2; + otherwise returns false. The comparison is done on the \c first + members of \a p1 and \a p2; if they compare equal, the \c second + members are compared to break the tie. + + This function requires the T1 and T2 types to have an + implementation of \c operator<(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn QPair<T1, T2> qMakePair(const T1 &value1, const T2 &value2) + + \relates QPair + + Returns a QPair\<T1, T2\> that contains \a value1 and \a value2. + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qpair.qdoc 2 + + This is equivalent to QPair<T1, T2>(\a value1, \a value2), but + usually requires less typing. +*/ + +/*! \fn QDataStream &operator>>(QDataStream &in, QPair<T1, T2> &pair) + + \relates QPair + + Reads a pair from stream \a in into \a pair. + + This function requires the T1 and T2 types to implement \c operator>>(). + + \sa {Format of the QDataStream operators} +*/ + +/*! \fn QDataStream &operator<<(QDataStream &out, const QPair<T1, T2> &pair) + + \relates QPair + + Writes the pair \a pair to stream \a out. + + This function requires the T1 and T2 types to implement \c operator<<(). + + \sa {Format of the QDataStream operators} +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qpoint.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qpoint.cpp index cba7fef..7c05eaa 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qpoint.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qpoint.cpp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \class QPoint - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QPoint class defines a point in the plane using integer precision. @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ QDebug operator<<(QDebug d, const QPointF &p) /*! \class QPointF - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QPointF class defines a point in the plane using floating point precision. diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qqueue.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qqueue.cpp index 108f103..1c1e6d2 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qqueue.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qqueue.cpp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QQueue\<T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. It diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qrect.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qrect.cpp index eb493f0..bdd09a2 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qrect.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qrect.cpp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \class QRect - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QRect class defines a rectangle in the plane using integer precision. @@ -1324,7 +1324,7 @@ QDebug operator<<(QDebug dbg, const QRect &r) { /*! \class QRectF - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QRectF class defines a rectangle in the plane using floating point precision. diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qregexp.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qregexp.cpp index 8c3662a..bebf141 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qregexp.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qregexp.cpp @@ -83,9 +83,8 @@ int qFindString(const QChar *haystack, int haystackLen, int from, \brief The QRegExp class provides pattern matching using regular expressions. \ingroup tools - \ingroup misc \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \keyword regular expression A regular expression, or "regexp", is a pattern for matching diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qset.qdoc b/src/corelib/tools/qset.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..55baa18 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qset.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,953 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QSet + \brief The QSet class is a template class that provides a hash-table-based set. + + \ingroup tools + \ingroup shared + \reentrant + + + QSet<T> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. It stores + values in an unspecified order and provides very fast lookup of + the values. Internally, QSet<T> is implemented as a QHash. + + Here's an example QSet with QString values: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 0 + + To insert a value into the set, use insert(): + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 1 + + Another way to insert items into the set is to use operator<<(): + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 2 + + To test whether an item belongs to the set or not, use contains(): + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 3 + + If you want to navigate through all the values stored in a QSet, + you can use an iterator. QSet supports both \l{Java-style + iterators} (QSetIterator and QMutableSetIterator) and \l{STL-style + iterators} (QSet::iterator and QSet::const_iterator). Here's how + to iterate over a QSet<QWidget *> using a Java-style iterator: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 4 + + Here's the same code, but using an STL-style iterator: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 5 + + QSet is unordered, so an iterator's sequence cannot be assumed to + be predictable. If ordering by key is required, use a QMap. + + To navigate through a QSet, you can also use \l{foreach}: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 6 + + Items can be removed from the set using remove(). There is also a + clear() function that removes all items. + + QSet's value data type must be an \l{assignable data type}. You + cannot, for example, store a QWidget as a value; instead, store a + QWidget *. In addition, the type must provide \c operator==(), and + there must also be a global qHash() function that returns a hash + value for an argument of the key's type. See the QHash + documentation for a list of types supported by qHash(). + + Internally, QSet uses a hash table to perform lookups. The hash + table automatically grows and shrinks to provide fast lookups + without wasting memory. You can still control the size of the hash + table by calling reserve(), if you already know approximately how + many elements the QSet will contain, but this isn't necessary to + obtain good performance. You can also call capacity() to retrieve + the hash table's size. + + \sa QSetIterator, QMutableSetIterator, QHash, QMap +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::QSet() + + Constructs an empty set. + + \sa clear() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::QSet(const QSet<T> &other) + + Constructs a copy of \a other. + + This operation occurs in \l{constant time}, because QSet is + \l{implicitly shared}. This makes returning a QSet from a + function very fast. If a shared instance is modified, it will be + copied (copy-on-write), and this takes \l{linear time}. + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator=(const QSet<T> &other) + + Assigns the \a other set to this set and returns a reference to + this set. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::operator==(const QSet<T> &other) const + + Returns true if the \a other set is equal to this set; otherwise + returns false. + + Two sets are considered equal if they contain the same elements. + + This function requires the value type to implement \c operator==(). + + \sa operator!=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::operator!=(const QSet<T> &other) const + + Returns true if the \a other set is not equal to this set; otherwise + returns false. + + Two sets are considered equal if they contain the same elements. + + This function requires the value type to implement \c operator==(). + + \sa operator==() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QSet::size() const + + Returns the number of items in the set. + + \sa isEmpty(), count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::isEmpty() const + + Returns true if the set contains no elements; otherwise returns + false. + + \sa size() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QSet::capacity() const + + Returns the number of buckets in the set's internal hash + table. + + The sole purpose of this function is to provide a means of fine + tuning QSet's memory usage. In general, you will rarely ever need + to call this function. If you want to know how many items are in + the set, call size(). + + \sa reserve(), squeeze() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QSet::reserve(int size) + + Ensures that the set's internal hash table consists of at + least \a size buckets. + + This function is useful for code that needs to build a huge set + and wants to avoid repeated reallocation. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 7 + + Ideally, \a size should be slightly more than the maximum number + of elements expected in the set. \a size doesn't have to be prime, + because QSet will use a prime number internally anyway. If \a size + is an underestimate, the worst that will happen is that the QSet + will be a bit slower. + + In general, you will rarely ever need to call this function. + QSet's internal hash table automatically shrinks or grows to + provide good performance without wasting too much memory. + + \sa squeeze(), capacity() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSet::squeeze() + + Reduces the size of the set's internal hash table to save + memory. + + The sole purpose of this function is to provide a means of fine + tuning QSet's memory usage. In general, you will rarely ever + need to call this function. + + \sa reserve(), capacity() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSet::detach() + + \internal + + Detaches this set from any other sets with which it may share + data. + + \sa isDetached() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QSet::isDetached() const + + \internal + + Returns true if the set's internal data isn't shared with any + other set object; otherwise returns false. + + \sa detach() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSet::setSharable(bool sharable) + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSet::clear() + + Removes all elements from the set. + + \sa remove() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::remove(const T &value) + + Removes any occurrence of item \a value from the set. Returns + true if an item was actually removed; otherwise returns false. + + \sa contains(), insert() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator QSet::erase(iterator pos) + \since 4.2 + + Removes the item at the iterator position \a pos from the set, and + returns an iterator positioned at the next item in the set. + + Unlike remove(), this function never causes QSet to rehash its + internal data structure. This means that it can safely be called + while iterating, and won't affect the order of items in the set. + + \sa remove(), find() +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::find(const T &value) const + \since 4.2 + + Returns a const iterator positioned at the item \a value in the + set. If the set contains no item \a value, the function returns + constEnd(). + + \sa constFind(), contains() +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::iterator QSet::find(const T &value) + \since 4.2 + \overload + + Returns a non-const iterator positioned at the item \a value in + the set. If the set contains no item \a value, the function + returns end(). +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::constFind(const T &value) const + \since 4.2 + + Returns a const iterator positioned at the item \a value in the + set. If the set contains no item \a value, the function returns + constEnd(). + + \sa find(), contains() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::contains(const T &value) const + + Returns true if the set contains item \a value; otherwise returns + false. + + \sa insert(), remove(), find() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::contains(const QSet<T> &other) const + \since 4.6 + + Returns true if the set contains all items from the \a other set; + otherwise returns false. + + \sa insert(), remove(), find() +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::begin() const + + Returns a const \l{STL-style iterator} positioned at the first + item in the set. + + \sa constBegin(), end() +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::iterator QSet::begin() + \since 4.2 + \overload + + Returns a non-const \l{STL-style iterator} positioned at the first + item in the set. +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::constBegin() const + + Returns a const \l{STL-style iterator} positioned at the first + item in the set. + + \sa begin(), constEnd() +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::end() const + + Returns a const \l{STL-style iterator} positioned at the imaginary + item after the last item in the set. + + \sa constEnd(), begin() +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::iterator QSet::end() + \since 4.2 + \overload + + Returns a non-const \l{STL-style iterator} pointing to the + imaginary item after the last item in the set. +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::constEnd() const + + Returns a const \l{STL-style iterator} pointing to the imaginary + item after the last item in the set. + + \sa constBegin(), end() +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::Iterator + \since 4.2 + + Qt-style synonym for QSet::iterator. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::ConstIterator + + Qt-style synonym for QSet::const_iterator. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::const_pointer + + Typedef for const T *. Provided for STL compatibility. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::const_reference + + Typedef for const T &. Provided for STL compatibility. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::difference_type + + Typedef for const ptrdiff_t. Provided for STL compatibility. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::key_type + + Typedef for T. Provided for STL compatibility. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::pointer + + Typedef for T *. Provided for STL compatibility. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::reference + + Typedef for T &. Provided for STL compatibility. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::size_type + + Typedef for int. Provided for STL compatibility. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::value_type + + Typedef for T. Provided for STL compatibility. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::insert(const T &value) + + Inserts item \a value into the set, if \a value isn't already + in the set, and returns an iterator pointing at the inserted + item. + + \sa operator<<(), remove(), contains() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::unite(const QSet<T> &other) + + Each item in the \a other set that isn't already in this set is + inserted into this set. A reference to this set is returned. + + \sa operator|=(), intersect(), subtract() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::intersect(const QSet<T> &other) + + Removes all items from this set that are not contained in the + \a other set. A reference to this set is returned. + + \sa operator&=(), unite(), subtract() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::subtract(const QSet<T> &other) + + Removes all items from this set that are contained in the + \a other set. Returns a reference to this set. + + \sa operator-=(), unite(), intersect() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::empty() const + + Returns true if the set is empty. This function is provided + for STL compatibility. It is equivalent to isEmpty(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::count() const + + Same as size(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator<<(const T &value) + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator+=(const T &value) + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator|=(const T &value) + + Inserts a new item \a value and returns a reference to the set. + If \a value already exists in the set, the set is left unchanged. + + \sa insert() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator-=(const T &value) + + Removes the occurrence of item \a value from the set, if + it is found, and returns a reference to the set. If the + \a value is not contained the set, nothing is removed. + + \sa remove() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator|=(const QSet<T> &other) + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator+=(const QSet<T> &other) + + Same as unite(\a other). + + \sa operator|(), operator&=(), operator-=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator&=(const QSet<T> &other) + + Same as intersect(\a other). + + \sa operator&(), operator|=(), operator-=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator&=(const T &value) + + \overload + + Same as intersect(\e{other}), if we consider \e{other} to be a set + that contains the singleton \a value. +*/ + + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator-=(const QSet<T> &other) + + Same as subtract(\a{other}). + + \sa operator-(), operator|=(), operator&=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> QSet::operator|(const QSet<T> &other) const + \fn QSet<T> QSet::operator+(const QSet<T> &other) const + + Returns a new QSet that is the union of this set and the + \a other set. + + \sa unite(), operator|=(), operator&(), operator-() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> QSet::operator&(const QSet<T> &other) const + + Returns a new QSet that is the intersection of this set and the + \a other set. + + \sa intersect(), operator&=(), operator|(), operator-() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> QSet::operator-(const QSet<T> &other) const + + Returns a new QSet that is the set difference of this set and + the \a other set, i.e., this set - \a other set. + + \sa subtract(), operator-=(), operator|(), operator&() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> QSet::operator-(const QSet<T> &other) + \fn QSet<T> QSet::operator|(const QSet<T> &other) + \fn QSet<T> QSet::operator+(const QSet<T> &other) + \fn QSet<T> QSet::operator&(const QSet<T> &other) + \internal + + These will go away in Qt 5. +*/ + +/*! + \class QSet::iterator + \since 4.2 + \brief The QSet::iterator class provides an STL-style non-const iterator for QSet. + + QSet features both \l{STL-style iterators} and + \l{Java-style iterators}. The STL-style iterators are more + low-level and more cumbersome to use; on the other hand, they are + slightly faster and, for developers who already know STL, have + the advantage of familiarity. + + QSet<T>::iterator allows you to iterate over a QSet and to remove + items (using QSet::erase()) while you iterate. (QSet doesn't let + you \e modify a value through an iterator, because that + would potentially require moving the value in the internal hash + table used by QSet.) If you want to iterate over a const QSet, + you should use QSet::const_iterator. It is generally good + practice to use QSet::const_iterator on a non-const QSet as well, + unless you need to change the QSet through the iterator. Const + iterators are slightly faster, and can improve code readability. + + QSet\<T\>::iterator allows you to iterate over a QSet\<T\> and + modify it as you go (using QSet::erase()). However, + + The default QSet::iterator constructor creates an uninitialized + iterator. You must initialize it using a function like + QSet::begin(), QSet::end(), or QSet::insert() before you can + start iterating. Here's a typical loop that prints all the items + stored in a set: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 8 + + Here's a loop that removes certain items (all those that start + with 'J') from a set while iterating: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 9 + + STL-style iterators can be used as arguments to \l{generic + algorithms}. For example, here's how to find an item in the set + using the qFind() algorithm: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 10 + + Multiple iterators can be used on the same set. However, you may + not attempt to modify the container while iterating on it. + + \sa QSet::const_iterator, QMutableSetIterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QSet::const_iterator + \brief The QSet::const_iterator class provides an STL-style const iterator for QSet. + \since 4.2 + + QSet features both \l{STL-style iterators} and + \l{Java-style iterators}. The STL-style iterators are more + low-level and more cumbersome to use; on the other hand, they are + slightly faster and, for developers who already know STL, have + the advantage of familiarity. + + QSet\<Key, T\>::const_iterator allows you to iterate over a QSet. + If you want to modify the QSet as you iterate over it, you must + use QSet::iterator instead. It is generally good practice to use + QSet::const_iterator on a non-const QSet as well, unless you need + to change the QSet through the iterator. Const iterators are + slightly faster, and can improve code readability. + + The default QSet::const_iterator constructor creates an + uninitialized iterator. You must initialize it using a function + like QSet::begin(), QSet::end(), or QSet::insert() before you can + start iterating. Here's a typical loop that prints all the items + stored in a set: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 11 + + STL-style iterators can be used as arguments to \l{generic + algorithms}. For example, here's how to find an item in the set + using the qFind() algorithm: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 12 + + Multiple iterators can be used on the same set. However, you may + not attempt to modify the container while iterating on it. + + \sa QSet::iterator, QSetIterator +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator::iterator() + \fn QSet::const_iterator::const_iterator() + + Constructs an uninitialized iterator. + + Functions like operator*() and operator++() should not be called + on an uninitialized iterator. Use operator=() to assign a value + to it before using it. + + \sa QSet::begin(), QSet::end() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator::iterator(typename Hash::iterator i) + \fn QSet::const_iterator::const_iterator(typename Hash::const_iterator i) + + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::iterator::iterator_category + \typedef QSet::const_iterator::iterator_category + + Synonyms for \e {std::bidirectional_iterator_tag} indicating + these iterators are bidirectional iterators. + */ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::iterator::difference_type + \typedef QSet::const_iterator::difference_type + + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::iterator::value_type + \typedef QSet::const_iterator::value_type + + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::iterator::pointer + \typedef QSet::const_iterator::pointer + + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::iterator::reference + \typedef QSet::const_iterator::reference + + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator::iterator(const iterator &other) + \fn QSet::const_iterator::const_iterator(const const_iterator &other) + + Constructs a copy of \a other. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::const_iterator::const_iterator(const iterator &other) + \since 4.2 + \overload + + Constructs a copy of \a other. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator &QSet::iterator::operator=(const iterator &other) + \fn QSet::const_iterator &QSet::const_iterator::operator=(const const_iterator &other) + + Assigns \a other to this iterator. +*/ + +/*! + \fn const T &QSet::iterator::operator*() const + \fn const T &QSet::const_iterator::operator*() const + + Returns a reference to the current item. + + \sa operator->() +*/ + +/*! + \fn const T *QSet::iterator::operator->() const + \fn const T *QSet::const_iterator::operator->() const + + Returns a pointer to the current item. + + \sa operator*() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::iterator::operator==(const iterator &other) const + \fn bool QSet::const_iterator::operator==(const const_iterator &other) const + + Returns true if \a other points to the same item as this + iterator; otherwise returns false. + + \sa operator!=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::iterator::operator==(const const_iterator &other) const + \fn bool QSet::iterator::operator!=(const const_iterator &other) const + + \overload +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::iterator::operator!=(const iterator &other) const + \fn bool QSet::const_iterator::operator!=(const const_iterator &other) const + + Returns true if \a other points to a different item than this + iterator; otherwise returns false. + + \sa operator==() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator &QSet::iterator::operator++() + \fn QSet::const_iterator &QSet::const_iterator::operator++() + + The prefix ++ operator (\c{++it}) advances the iterator to the + next item in the set and returns an iterator to the new current + item. + + Calling this function on QSet::constEnd() leads to + undefined results. + + \sa operator--() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator QSet::iterator::operator++(int) + \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::const_iterator::operator++(int) + + \overload + + The postfix ++ operator (\c{it++}) advances the iterator to the + next item in the set and returns an iterator to the previously + current item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator &QSet::iterator::operator--() + \fn QSet::const_iterator &QSet::const_iterator::operator--() + + The prefix -- operator (\c{--it}) makes the preceding item + current and returns an iterator to the new current item. + + Calling this function on QSet::begin() leads to undefined + results. + + \sa operator++() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator QSet::iterator::operator--(int) + \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::const_iterator::operator--(int) + + \overload + + The postfix -- operator (\c{it--}) makes the preceding item + current and returns an iterator to the previously current item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator QSet::iterator::operator+(int j) const + \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::const_iterator::operator+(int j) const + + Returns an iterator to the item at \a j positions forward from + this iterator. (If \a j is negative, the iterator goes backward.) + + This operation can be slow for large \a j values. + + \sa operator-() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator QSet::iterator::operator-(int j) const + \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::const_iterator::operator-(int j) const + + Returns an iterator to the item at \a j positions backward from + this iterator. (If \a j is negative, the iterator goes forward.) + + This operation can be slow for large \a j values. + + \sa operator+() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator &QSet::iterator::operator+=(int j) + \fn QSet::const_iterator &QSet::const_iterator::operator+=(int j) + + Advances the iterator by \a j items. (If \a j is negative, the + iterator goes backward.) + + This operation can be slow for large \a j values. + + \sa operator-=(), operator+() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator &QSet::iterator::operator-=(int j) + \fn QSet::const_iterator &QSet::const_iterator::operator-=(int j) + + Makes the iterator go back by \a j items. (If \a j is negative, + the iterator goes forward.) + + This operation can be slow for large \a j values. + + \sa operator+=(), operator-() +*/ + +/*! \fn QList<T> QSet<T>::toList() const + + Returns a new QList containing the elements in the set. The + order of the elements in the QList is undefined. + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 13 + + \sa fromList(), QList::fromSet(), qSort() +*/ + +/*! \fn QList<T> QSet<T>::values() const + + Returns a new QList containing the elements in the set. The + order of the elements in the QList is undefined. + + This is the same as toList(). + + \sa fromList(), QList::fromSet(), qSort() +*/ + + +/*! \fn QSet<T> QSet<T>::fromList(const QList<T> &list) + + Returns a new QSet object containing the data contained in \a + list. Since QSet doesn't allow duplicates, the resulting QSet + might be smaller than the \a list, because QList can contain + duplicates. + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 14 + + \sa toList(), QList::toSet() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream &operator<<(QDataStream &out, const QSet<T> &set) + \relates QSet + + Writes the \a set to stream \a out. + + This function requires the value type to implement \c operator<<(). + + \sa \link datastreamformat.html Format of the QDataStream operators \endlink +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream &operator>>(QDataStream &in, QSet<T> &set) + \relates QSet + + Reads a set from stream \a in into \a set. + + This function requires the value type to implement \c operator>>(). + + \sa \link datastreamformat.html Format of the QDataStream operators \endlink +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qshareddata.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qshareddata.cpp index 9f49898..70290d8 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qshareddata.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qshareddata.cpp @@ -44,245 +44,242 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! - \class QSharedData - \brief The QSharedData class is a base class for shared data objects. - \reentrant - \ingroup misc + \class QSharedData + \brief The QSharedData class is a base class for shared data objects. + \reentrant - QSharedData is designed to be used with QSharedDataPointer or - QExplicitlySharedDataPointer to implement custom \l{implicitly - shared} or explicitly shared classes. QSharedData provides - \l{thread-safe} reference counting. + QSharedData is designed to be used with QSharedDataPointer or + QExplicitlySharedDataPointer to implement custom \l{implicitly + shared} or explicitly shared classes. QSharedData provides + \l{thread-safe} reference counting. - See QSharedDataPointer and QExplicitlySharedDataPointer for details. + See QSharedDataPointer and QExplicitlySharedDataPointer for details. */ /*! \fn QSharedData::QSharedData() - Constructs a QSharedData object with a reference count of 0. + Constructs a QSharedData object with a reference count of 0. */ /*! \fn QSharedData::QSharedData(const QSharedData& other) - Constructs a QSharedData object with reference count 0. - \a other is ignored. + Constructs a QSharedData object with reference count 0. + \a other is ignored. */ /*! - \class QSharedDataPointer - \brief The QSharedDataPointer class represents a pointer to an implicitly shared object. - \since 4.0 - \reentrant - \ingroup misc - \mainclass + \class QSharedDataPointer + \brief The QSharedDataPointer class represents a pointer to an implicitly shared object. + \since 4.0 + \reentrant - QSharedDataPointer\<T\> makes writing your own \l {implicitly - shared} classes easy. QSharedDataPointer implements \l {thread-safe} - reference counting, ensuring that adding QSharedDataPointers to your - \l {reentrant} classes won't make them non-reentrant. + QSharedDataPointer\<T\> makes writing your own \l {implicitly + shared} classes easy. QSharedDataPointer implements \l {thread-safe} + reference counting, ensuring that adding QSharedDataPointers to your + \l {reentrant} classes won't make them non-reentrant. - \l {Implicit sharing} is used by many Qt classes to combine the - speed and memory efficiency of pointers with the ease of use of - classes. See the \l{Shared Classes} page for more information. + \l {Implicit sharing} is used by many Qt classes to combine the + speed and memory efficiency of pointers with the ease of use of + classes. See the \l{Shared Classes} page for more information. - \target Employee example - Suppose you want to make an \c Employee class implicitly shared. The - procedure is: + \target Employee example + Suppose you want to make an \c Employee class implicitly shared. The + procedure is: - \list + \list - \o Define the class \c Employee to have a single data member of + \o Define the class \c Employee to have a single data member of type \c {QSharedDataPointer<EmployeeData>}. - \o Define the \c EmployeeData class derived from \l QSharedData to + \o Define the \c EmployeeData class derived from \l QSharedData to contain all the data members you would normally have put in the \c Employee class. - \endlist - - To show this in practice, we review the source code for the - implicitly shared \c Employee class. In the header file we define the - two classes \c Employee and \c EmployeeData. - - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 0 - - In class \c Employee, note the single data member, a \e {d pointer} - of type \c {QSharedDataPointer<EmployeeData>}. All accesses of - employee data must go through the \e {d pointer's} \c - {operator->()}. For write accesses, \c {operator->()} will - automatically call detach(), which creates a copy of the shared data - object if the shared data object's reference count is greater than - 1. This ensures that writes to one \c Employee object don't affect - any other \c Employee objects that share the same \c EmployeeData - object. - - Class \c EmployeeData inherits QSharedData, which provides the - \e{behind the scenes} reference counter. \c EmployeeData has a default - constructor, a copy constructor, and a destructor. Normally, trivial - implementations of these are all that is needed in the \e {data} - class for an implicitly shared class. - - Implementing the two constructors for class \c Employee is also - straightforward. Both create a new instance of \c EmployeeData - and assign it to the \e{d pointer} . - - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 1 - \codeline - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 2 - - Note that class \c Employee also has a trivial copy constructor - defined, which is not strictly required in this case. - - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 7 - - The copy constructor is not strictly required here, because class \c - EmployeeData is included in the same file as class \c Employee - (\c{employee.h}). However, including the private subclass of - QSharedData in the same file as the public class containing the - QSharedDataPointer is not typical. Normally, the idea is to hide the - private subclass of QSharedData from the user by putting it in a - separate file which would not be included in the public file. In - this case, we would normally put class \c EmployeeData in a separate - file, which would \e{not} be included in \c{employee.h}. Instead, we - would just predeclare the private subclass \c EmployeeData in \c - {employee.h} this way: - - \code - class EmployeeData; - \endcode - - If we had done it that way here, the copy constructor shown would be - required. Since the copy constructor is trivial, you might as well - just always include it. - - Behind the scenes, QSharedDataPointer automatically increments the - reference count whenever an \c Employee object is copied, assigned, - or passed as a parameter. It decrements the reference count whenever - an \c Employee object is deleted or goes out of scope. The shared - \c EmployeeData object is deleted automatically if and when the - reference count reaches 0. - - In a non-const member function of \c Employee, whenever the \e {d - pointer} is dereferenced, QSharedDataPointer automatically calls - detach() to ensure that the function operates on its own copy of the - data. - - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 3 - \codeline - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 4 - - Note that if detach() is called more than once in a member function - due to multiple dereferences of the \e {d pointer}, detach() will - only create a copy of the shared data the first time it is called, - if at all, because on the second and subsequent calls of detach(), - the reference count will be 1 again. - - But note that in the second \c Employee constructor, which takes an - employee ID and a name, both setId() and setName() are called, but - they don't cause \e{copy on write}, because the reference count for - the newly constructed \c EmployeeData object has just been set to 1. - - In \c Employee's \e const member functions, dereferencing the \e {d - pointer} does \e not cause detach() to be called. - - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 5 - \codeline - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 6 - - Notice that there is no need to implement a copy constructor or an - assignment operator for the \c Employee class, because the copy - constructor and assignment operator provided by the C++ compiler - will do the \e{member by member} shallow copy required. The only - member to copy is the \e {d pointer}, which is a QSharedDataPointer, - whose \c {operator=()} just increments the reference count of the - shared \c EmployeeData object. - - \target Implicit vs Explicit Sharing - \section1 Implicit vs Explicit Sharing - - Implicit sharing might not be right for the \c Employee class. - Consider a simple example that creates two instances of the - implicitly shared \c Employee class. - - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/main.cpp 0 - - After the second employee e2 is created and e1 is assigned to it, - both \c e1 and \c e2 refer to Albrecht Durer, employee 1001. Both \c - Employee objects point to the same instance of \c EmployeeData, - which has reference count 2. Then \c {e1.setName("Hans Holbein")} is - called to change the employee name, but because the reference count - is greater than 1, a \e{copy on write} is performed before the name - is changed. Now \c e1 and \c e2 point to different \c EmployeeData - objects. They have different names, but both have ID 1001, which is - probably not what you want. You can, of course, just continue with - \c {e1.setId(1002)}, if you really mean to create a second, unique - employee, but if you only want to change the employee's name - everywhere, consider using \l {QExplicitlySharedDataPointer} - {explicit sharing} in the \c Employee class instead of implicit - sharing. - - If you declare the \e {d pointer} in the \c Employee class to be - \c {QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<EmployeeData>}, then explicit - sharing is used and \e{copy on write} operations are not performed - automatically (i.e. detach() is not called in non-const - functions). In that case, after \c {e1.setName("Hans Holbein")}, the - employee's name has been changed, but both e1 and e2 still refer to - the same instance of \c EmployeeData, so there is only one employee - with ID 1001. - - In the member function documentation, \e{d pointer} always refers - to the internal pointer to the shared data object. - - \sa QSharedData, QExplicitlySharedDataPointer + \endlist + + To show this in practice, we review the source code for the + implicitly shared \c Employee class. In the header file we define the + two classes \c Employee and \c EmployeeData. + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 0 + + In class \c Employee, note the single data member, a \e {d pointer} + of type \c {QSharedDataPointer<EmployeeData>}. All accesses of + employee data must go through the \e {d pointer's} \c + {operator->()}. For write accesses, \c {operator->()} will + automatically call detach(), which creates a copy of the shared data + object if the shared data object's reference count is greater than + 1. This ensures that writes to one \c Employee object don't affect + any other \c Employee objects that share the same \c EmployeeData + object. + + Class \c EmployeeData inherits QSharedData, which provides the + \e{behind the scenes} reference counter. \c EmployeeData has a default + constructor, a copy constructor, and a destructor. Normally, trivial + implementations of these are all that is needed in the \e {data} + class for an implicitly shared class. + + Implementing the two constructors for class \c Employee is also + straightforward. Both create a new instance of \c EmployeeData + and assign it to the \e{d pointer} . + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 1 + \codeline + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 2 + + Note that class \c Employee also has a trivial copy constructor + defined, which is not strictly required in this case. + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 7 + + The copy constructor is not strictly required here, because class \c + EmployeeData is included in the same file as class \c Employee + (\c{employee.h}). However, including the private subclass of + QSharedData in the same file as the public class containing the + QSharedDataPointer is not typical. Normally, the idea is to hide the + private subclass of QSharedData from the user by putting it in a + separate file which would not be included in the public file. In + this case, we would normally put class \c EmployeeData in a separate + file, which would \e{not} be included in \c{employee.h}. Instead, we + would just predeclare the private subclass \c EmployeeData in \c + {employee.h} this way: + + \code + class EmployeeData; + \endcode + + If we had done it that way here, the copy constructor shown would be + required. Since the copy constructor is trivial, you might as well + just always include it. + + Behind the scenes, QSharedDataPointer automatically increments the + reference count whenever an \c Employee object is copied, assigned, + or passed as a parameter. It decrements the reference count whenever + an \c Employee object is deleted or goes out of scope. The shared + \c EmployeeData object is deleted automatically if and when the + reference count reaches 0. + + In a non-const member function of \c Employee, whenever the \e {d + pointer} is dereferenced, QSharedDataPointer automatically calls + detach() to ensure that the function operates on its own copy of the + data. + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 3 + \codeline + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 4 + + Note that if detach() is called more than once in a member function + due to multiple dereferences of the \e {d pointer}, detach() will + only create a copy of the shared data the first time it is called, + if at all, because on the second and subsequent calls of detach(), + the reference count will be 1 again. + + But note that in the second \c Employee constructor, which takes an + employee ID and a name, both setId() and setName() are called, but + they don't cause \e{copy on write}, because the reference count for + the newly constructed \c EmployeeData object has just been set to 1. + + In \c Employee's \e const member functions, dereferencing the \e {d + pointer} does \e not cause detach() to be called. + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 5 + \codeline + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 6 + + Notice that there is no need to implement a copy constructor or an + assignment operator for the \c Employee class, because the copy + constructor and assignment operator provided by the C++ compiler + will do the \e{member by member} shallow copy required. The only + member to copy is the \e {d pointer}, which is a QSharedDataPointer, + whose \c {operator=()} just increments the reference count of the + shared \c EmployeeData object. + + \target Implicit vs Explicit Sharing + \section1 Implicit vs Explicit Sharing + + Implicit sharing might not be right for the \c Employee class. + Consider a simple example that creates two instances of the + implicitly shared \c Employee class. + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/main.cpp 0 + + After the second employee e2 is created and e1 is assigned to it, + both \c e1 and \c e2 refer to Albrecht Durer, employee 1001. Both \c + Employee objects point to the same instance of \c EmployeeData, + which has reference count 2. Then \c {e1.setName("Hans Holbein")} is + called to change the employee name, but because the reference count + is greater than 1, a \e{copy on write} is performed before the name + is changed. Now \c e1 and \c e2 point to different \c EmployeeData + objects. They have different names, but both have ID 1001, which is + probably not what you want. You can, of course, just continue with + \c {e1.setId(1002)}, if you really mean to create a second, unique + employee, but if you only want to change the employee's name + everywhere, consider using \l {QExplicitlySharedDataPointer} + {explicit sharing} in the \c Employee class instead of implicit + sharing. + + If you declare the \e {d pointer} in the \c Employee class to be + \c {QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<EmployeeData>}, then explicit + sharing is used and \e{copy on write} operations are not performed + automatically (i.e. detach() is not called in non-const + functions). In that case, after \c {e1.setName("Hans Holbein")}, the + employee's name has been changed, but both e1 and e2 still refer to + the same instance of \c EmployeeData, so there is only one employee + with ID 1001. + + In the member function documentation, \e{d pointer} always refers + to the internal pointer to the shared data object. + + \sa QSharedData, QExplicitlySharedDataPointer */ /*! \fn T& QSharedDataPointer::operator*() - Provides access to the shared data object's members. - This function calls detach(). + Provides access to the shared data object's members. + This function calls detach(). */ /*! \fn const T& QSharedDataPointer::operator*() const - Provides const access to the shared data object's members. - This function does \e not call detach(). + Provides const access to the shared data object's members. + This function does \e not call detach(). */ /*! \fn T* QSharedDataPointer::operator->() - Provides access to the shared data object's members. - This function calls detach(). + Provides access to the shared data object's members. + This function calls detach(). */ /*! \fn const T* QSharedDataPointer::operator->() const - Provides const access to the shared data object's members. - This function does \e not call detach(). + Provides const access to the shared data object's members. + This function does \e not call detach(). */ /*! \fn QSharedDataPointer::operator T*() - Returns a pointer to the shared data object. - This function calls detach(). + Returns a pointer to the shared data object. + This function calls detach(). - \sa data(), constData() + \sa data(), constData() */ /*! \fn QSharedDataPointer::operator const T*() const - Returns a pointer to the shared data object. - This function does \e not call detach(). + Returns a pointer to the shared data object. + This function does \e not call detach(). */ /*! \fn T* QSharedDataPointer::data() - Returns a pointer to the shared data object. - This function calls detach(). + Returns a pointer to the shared data object. + This function calls detach(). - \sa constData() + \sa constData() */ /*! \fn const T* QSharedDataPointer::data() const - Returns a pointer to the shared data object. - This function does \e not call detach(). + Returns a pointer to the shared data object. + This function does \e not call detach(). */ /*! \fn const T* QSharedDataPointer::constData() const - Returns a const pointer to the shared data object. - This function does \e not call detach(). + Returns a const pointer to the shared data object. + This function does \e not call detach(). - \sa data() + \sa data() */ /*! \fn void QSharedDataPointer::swap(QSharedDataPointer &other) @@ -291,154 +288,152 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE */ /*! \fn bool QSharedDataPointer::operator==(const QSharedDataPointer<T>& other) const - Returns true if \a other and \e this have the same \e{d pointer}. - This function does \e not call detach(). + Returns true if \a other and \e this have the same \e{d pointer}. + This function does \e not call detach(). */ /*! \fn bool QSharedDataPointer::operator!=(const QSharedDataPointer<T>& other) const - Returns true if \a other and \e this do \e not have the same - \e{d pointer}. This function does \e not call detach(). + Returns true if \a other and \e this do \e not have the same + \e{d pointer}. This function does \e not call detach(). */ /*! \fn QSharedDataPointer::QSharedDataPointer() - Constructs a QSharedDataPointer initialized with a null \e{d pointer}. + Constructs a QSharedDataPointer initialized with a null \e{d pointer}. */ /*! \fn QSharedDataPointer::~QSharedDataPointer() - Decrements the reference count of the shared data object. - If the reference count becomes 0, the shared data object - is deleted. \e This is then destroyed. + Decrements the reference count of the shared data object. + If the reference count becomes 0, the shared data object + is deleted. \e This is then destroyed. */ /*! \fn QSharedDataPointer::QSharedDataPointer(T* sharedData) - Constructs a QSharedDataPointer with \e{d pointer} set to - \a sharedData and increments \a{sharedData}'s reference count. + Constructs a QSharedDataPointer with \e{d pointer} set to + \a sharedData and increments \a{sharedData}'s reference count. */ /*! \fn QSharedDataPointer::QSharedDataPointer(const QSharedDataPointer<T>& other) - Sets the \e{d pointer} of \e this to the \e{d pointer} in - \a other and increments the reference count of the shared - data object. + Sets the \e{d pointer} of \e this to the \e{d pointer} in + \a other and increments the reference count of the shared + data object. */ /*! \fn QSharedDataPointer<T>& QSharedDataPointer::operator=(const QSharedDataPointer<T>& other) - Sets the \e{d pointer} of \e this to the \e{d pointer} of - \a other and increments the reference count of the shared - data object. The reference count of the old shared data - object of \e this is decremented. If the reference count - of the old shared data object becomes 0, the old shared - data object is deleted. + Sets the \e{d pointer} of \e this to the \e{d pointer} of + \a other and increments the reference count of the shared + data object. The reference count of the old shared data + object of \e this is decremented. If the reference count + of the old shared data object becomes 0, the old shared + data object is deleted. */ /*! \fn QSharedDataPointer& QSharedDataPointer::operator=(T* sharedData) - Sets the \e{d pointer} og \e this to \a sharedData and increments - \a{sharedData}'s reference count. The reference count of the old - shared data object of \e this is decremented. If the reference - count of the old shared data object becomes 0, the old shared data - object is deleted. + Sets the \e{d pointer} og \e this to \a sharedData and increments + \a{sharedData}'s reference count. The reference count of the old + shared data object of \e this is decremented. If the reference + count of the old shared data object becomes 0, the old shared data + object is deleted. */ /*! \fn bool QSharedDataPointer::operator!() const - Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is null. + Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is null. */ /*! \fn void QSharedDataPointer::detach() - If the shared data object's reference count is greater than 1, this - function creates a deep copy of the shared data object and sets the - \e{d pointer} of \e this to the copy. - - This function is called automatically by non-const member - functions of QSharedDataPointer if \e{copy on write} is - required. You don't need to call it yourself. + If the shared data object's reference count is greater than 1, this + function creates a deep copy of the shared data object and sets the + \e{d pointer} of \e this to the copy. + + This function is called automatically by non-const member + functions of QSharedDataPointer if \e{copy on write} is + required. You don't need to call it yourself. */ /*! \fn T *QSharedDataPointer::clone() \since 4.5 - Creates and returns a deep copy of the current data. This function - is called by detach() when the reference count is greater than 1 in - order to create the new copy. This function uses the \e {operator - new} and calls the copy constructor of the type T. + Creates and returns a deep copy of the current data. This function + is called by detach() when the reference count is greater than 1 in + order to create the new copy. This function uses the \e {operator + new} and calls the copy constructor of the type T. - This function is provided so that you may support "virtual copy - constructors" for your own types. In order to so, you should declare - a template-specialization of this function for your own type, like - the example below: + This function is provided so that you may support "virtual copy + constructors" for your own types. In order to so, you should declare + a template-specialization of this function for your own type, like + the example below: - \code + \code template<> EmployeeData *QSharedDataPointer<EmployeeData>::clone() { return d->clone(); } - \endcode + \endcode - In the example above, the template specialization for the clone() - function calls the \e {EmployeeData::clone()} virtual function. A - class derived from EmployeeData could override that function and - return the proper polymorphic type. + In the example above, the template specialization for the clone() + function calls the \e {EmployeeData::clone()} virtual function. A + class derived from EmployeeData could override that function and + return the proper polymorphic type. */ /*! - \class QExplicitlySharedDataPointer - \brief The QExplicitlySharedDataPointer class represents a pointer to an explicitly shared object. - \since 4.4 - \reentrant - \ingroup misc - \mainclass - - QExplicitlySharedDataPointer\<T\> makes writing your own explicitly - shared classes easy. QExplicitlySharedDataPointer implements - \l {thread-safe} reference counting, ensuring that adding - QExplicitlySharedDataPointers to your \l {reentrant} classes won't - make them non-reentrant. - - Except for one big difference, QExplicitlySharedDataPointer is just - like QSharedDataPointer. The big difference is that member functions - of QExplicitlySharedDataPointer \e{do not} do the automatic - \e{copy on write} operation (detach()) that non-const members of - QSharedDataPointer do before allowing the shared data object to be - modified. There is a detach() function available, but if you really - want to detach(), you have to call it yourself. This means that - QExplicitlySharedDataPointers behave like regular C++ pointers, - except that by doing reference counting and not deleting the shared - data object until the reference count is 0, they avoid the dangling - pointer problem. - - It is instructive to compare QExplicitlySharedDataPointer with - QSharedDataPointer by way of an example. Consider the \l {Employee - example} in QSharedDataPointer, modified to use explicit sharing as - explained in the discussion \l {Implicit vs Explicit Sharing}. - - Note that if you use this class but find you are calling detach() a - lot, you probably should be using QSharedDataPointer instead. - - In the member function documentation, \e{d pointer} always refers - to the internal pointer to the shared data object. - - \sa QSharedData, QSharedDataPointer + \class QExplicitlySharedDataPointer + \brief The QExplicitlySharedDataPointer class represents a pointer to an explicitly shared object. + \since 4.4 + \reentrant + + QExplicitlySharedDataPointer\<T\> makes writing your own explicitly + shared classes easy. QExplicitlySharedDataPointer implements + \l {thread-safe} reference counting, ensuring that adding + QExplicitlySharedDataPointers to your \l {reentrant} classes won't + make them non-reentrant. + + Except for one big difference, QExplicitlySharedDataPointer is just + like QSharedDataPointer. The big difference is that member functions + of QExplicitlySharedDataPointer \e{do not} do the automatic + \e{copy on write} operation (detach()) that non-const members of + QSharedDataPointer do before allowing the shared data object to be + modified. There is a detach() function available, but if you really + want to detach(), you have to call it yourself. This means that + QExplicitlySharedDataPointers behave like regular C++ pointers, + except that by doing reference counting and not deleting the shared + data object until the reference count is 0, they avoid the dangling + pointer problem. + + It is instructive to compare QExplicitlySharedDataPointer with + QSharedDataPointer by way of an example. Consider the \l {Employee + example} in QSharedDataPointer, modified to use explicit sharing as + explained in the discussion \l {Implicit vs Explicit Sharing}. + + Note that if you use this class but find you are calling detach() a + lot, you probably should be using QSharedDataPointer instead. + + In the member function documentation, \e{d pointer} always refers + to the internal pointer to the shared data object. + + \sa QSharedData, QSharedDataPointer */ /*! \fn T& QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator*() const - Provides access to the shared data object's members. + Provides access to the shared data object's members. */ /*! \fn T* QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator->() - Provides access to the shared data object's members. + Provides access to the shared data object's members. */ /*! \fn const T* QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator->() const - Provides const access to the shared data object's members. + Provides const access to the shared data object's members. */ /*! \fn T* QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::data() const - Returns a pointer to the shared data object. + Returns a pointer to the shared data object. */ /*! \fn const T* QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::constData() const - Returns a const pointer to the shared data object. + Returns a const pointer to the shared data object. - \sa data() + \sa data() */ /*! \fn void QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::swap(QExplicitlySharedDataPointer &other) @@ -447,114 +442,114 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE */ /*! \fn bool QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator==(const QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<T>& other) const - Returns true if \a other and \e this have the same \e{d pointer}. + Returns true if \a other and \e this have the same \e{d pointer}. */ /*! \fn bool QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator==(const T* ptr) const - Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is \a ptr. + Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is \a ptr. */ /*! \fn bool QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator!=(const QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<T>& other) const - Returns true if \a other and \e this do \e not have the same - \e{d pointer}. + Returns true if \a other and \e this do \e not have the same + \e{d pointer}. */ /*! \fn bool QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator!=(const T* ptr) const - Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is \e not \a ptr. + Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is \e not \a ptr. */ /*! \fn QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::QExplicitlySharedDataPointer() - Constructs a QExplicitlySharedDataPointer initialized with a null - \e{d pointer}. + Constructs a QExplicitlySharedDataPointer initialized with a null + \e{d pointer}. */ /*! \fn QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::~QExplicitlySharedDataPointer() - Decrements the reference count of the shared data object. - If the reference count becomes 0, the shared data object - is deleted. \e This is then destroyed. + Decrements the reference count of the shared data object. + If the reference count becomes 0, the shared data object + is deleted. \e This is then destroyed. */ /*! \fn QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::QExplicitlySharedDataPointer(T* sharedData) - Constructs a QExplicitlySharedDataPointer with \e{d pointer} - set to \a sharedData and increments \a{sharedData}'s reference - count. + Constructs a QExplicitlySharedDataPointer with \e{d pointer} + set to \a sharedData and increments \a{sharedData}'s reference + count. */ /*! \fn QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::QExplicitlySharedDataPointer(const QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<T>& other) - This standard copy constructor sets the \e {d pointer} of \e this to - the \e {d pointer} in \a other and increments the reference count of - the shared data object. + This standard copy constructor sets the \e {d pointer} of \e this to + the \e {d pointer} in \a other and increments the reference count of + the shared data object. */ /*! \fn QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::QExplicitlySharedDataPointer(const QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<X>& other) - This copy constructor is different in that it allows \a other to be - a different type of explicitly shared data pointer but one that has - a compatible shared data object. It performs a static cast of the - \e{d pointer} in \a other and sets the \e {d pointer} of \e this to - the converted \e{d pointer}. It increments the reference count of - the shared data object. - */ + This copy constructor is different in that it allows \a other to be + a different type of explicitly shared data pointer but one that has + a compatible shared data object. It performs a static cast of the + \e{d pointer} in \a other and sets the \e {d pointer} of \e this to + the converted \e{d pointer}. It increments the reference count of + the shared data object. +*/ /*! \fn QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<T>& QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator=(const QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<T>& other) - Sets the \e{d pointer} of \e this to the \e{d pointer} of - \a other and increments the reference count of the shared - data object. The reference count of the old shared data - object of \e this is decremented. If the reference count - of the old shared data object becomes 0, the old shared - data object is deleted. + Sets the \e{d pointer} of \e this to the \e{d pointer} of + \a other and increments the reference count of the shared + data object. The reference count of the old shared data + object of \e this is decremented. If the reference count + of the old shared data object becomes 0, the old shared + data object is deleted. */ /*! \fn QExplicitlySharedDataPointer& QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator=(T* sharedData) - Sets the \e{d pointer} of \e this to \a sharedData and - increments \a{sharedData}'s reference count. The reference - count of the old shared data object of \e this is decremented. - If the reference count of the old shared data object becomes - 0, the old shared data object is deleted. + Sets the \e{d pointer} of \e this to \a sharedData and + increments \a{sharedData}'s reference count. The reference + count of the old shared data object of \e this is decremented. + If the reference count of the old shared data object becomes + 0, the old shared data object is deleted. */ /*! \fn void QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::reset() - Resets \e this to be null. i.e., this function sets the - \e{d pointer} of \e this to 0, but first it decrements - the reference count of the shared data object and deletes - the shared data object if the reference count became 0. + Resets \e this to be null. i.e., this function sets the + \e{d pointer} of \e this to 0, but first it decrements + the reference count of the shared data object and deletes + the shared data object if the reference count became 0. */ /*! \fn QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator bool () const - Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is \e not null. + Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is \e not null. */ /*! \fn bool QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator!() const - Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is null. + Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is null. */ /*! \fn void QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::detach() - If the shared data object's reference count is greater than 1, this - function creates a deep copy of the shared data object and sets the - \e{d pointer} of \e this to the copy. + If the shared data object's reference count is greater than 1, this + function creates a deep copy of the shared data object and sets the + \e{d pointer} of \e this to the copy. - Because QExplicitlySharedDataPointer does not do the automatic - \e{copy on write} operations that members of QSharedDataPointer do, - detach() is \e not called automatically anywhere in the member - functions of this class. If you find that you are calling detach() - everywhere in your code, consider using QSharedDataPointer instead. + Because QExplicitlySharedDataPointer does not do the automatic + \e{copy on write} operations that members of QSharedDataPointer do, + detach() is \e not called automatically anywhere in the member + functions of this class. If you find that you are calling detach() + everywhere in your code, consider using QSharedDataPointer instead. */ /*! \fn T *QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::clone() \since 4.5 - Creates and returns a deep copy of the current data. This function - is called by detach() when the reference count is greater than 1 in - order to create the new copy. This function uses the \e {operator - new} and calls the copy constructor of the type T. + Creates and returns a deep copy of the current data. This function + is called by detach() when the reference count is greater than 1 in + order to create the new copy. This function uses the \e {operator + new} and calls the copy constructor of the type T. - See QSharedDataPointer::clone() for an explanation of how to use it. + See QSharedDataPointer::clone() for an explanation of how to use it. */ /*! - \typedef QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::Type + \typedef QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::Type - This is the type of the shared data object. The \e{d pointer} - points to an object of this type. - */ + This is the type of the shared data object. The \e{d pointer} + points to an object of this type. +*/ QT_END_NAMESPACE diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qsharedpointer.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qsharedpointer.cpp index 60c7db4..834531e 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qsharedpointer.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qsharedpointer.cpp @@ -50,7 +50,6 @@ \since 4.5 \reentrant - \ingroup misc The QSharedPointer is an automatic, shared pointer in C++. It behaves exactly like a normal pointer for normal purposes, @@ -358,7 +357,6 @@ \brief The QWeakPointer class holds a weak reference to a shared pointer \since 4.5 \reentrant - \ingroup misc The QWeakPointer is an automatic weak reference to a pointer in C++. It cannot be used to dereference the pointer diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qsize.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qsize.cpp index 6168fe9..a165917 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qsize.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qsize.cpp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \class QSize - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QSize class defines the size of a two-dimensional object using integer point precision. @@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ QDebug operator<<(QDebug dbg, const QSize &s) { \brief The QSizeF class defines the size of a two-dimensional object using floating point precision. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting A size is specified by a width() and a height(). It can be set in the constructor and changed using the setWidth(), setHeight(), or diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qstack.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qstack.cpp index f89149a..f97e546 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qstack.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qstack.cpp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QStack\<T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. It implements diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qstring.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qstring.cpp index dc23142..1c513c3 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qstring.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qstring.cpp @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ const QString::Null QString::null = { }; \internal - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing When you get an object of type QCharRef, if you can assign to it, the assignment will apply to the character in the string from @@ -381,8 +381,8 @@ const QString::Null QString::null = { }; \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \ingroup text - \mainclass + \ingroup string-processing + QString stores a string of 16-bit \l{QChar}s, where each QChar corresponds one Unicode 4.0 character. (Unicode characters @@ -6939,7 +6939,7 @@ QString QString::fromRawData(const QChar *unicode, int size) /*! \class QLatin1String \brief The QLatin1String class provides a thin wrapper around an ASCII/Latin-1 encoded string literal. - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing \reentrant Many of QString's member functions are overloaded to accept @@ -7561,7 +7561,7 @@ QDataStream &operator>>(QDataStream &in, QString &str) \brief The QStringRef class provides a thin wrapper around QString substrings. \reentrant \ingroup tools - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing QStringRef provides a read-only subset of the QString API. diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qstringbuilder.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qstringbuilder.cpp index 344e95b..04fbb93 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qstringbuilder.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qstringbuilder.cpp @@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \ingroup text - \mainclass + \ingroup string-processing + Unlike \c QLatin1String, a \c QLatin1Literal can retrieve its size without iterating over the literal. @@ -92,8 +92,8 @@ \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \ingroup text - \mainclass + \ingroup string-processing + To build a QString by multiple concatenations, QString::operator+() is typically used. This causes \e{n - 1} reallocations when building diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qstringlist.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qstringlist.cpp index 952609e..231f74e 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qstringlist.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qstringlist.cpp @@ -77,8 +77,8 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \ingroup text - \mainclass + \ingroup string-processing + \reentrant QStringList inherits from QList<QString>. Like QList, QStringList is diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qstringmatcher.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qstringmatcher.cpp index 75e1d45..8eb8238 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qstringmatcher.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qstringmatcher.cpp @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ static inline int bm_find(const ushort *uc, uint l, int index, const ushort *puc can be quickly matched in a Unicode string. \ingroup tools - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing This class is useful when you have a sequence of \l{QChar}s that you want to repeatedly match against some strings (perhaps in a diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qtextboundaryfinder.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qtextboundaryfinder.cpp index 956a963..0cc3218 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qtextboundaryfinder.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qtextboundaryfinder.cpp @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ static void init(QTextBoundaryFinder::BoundaryType type, const QChar *chars, int \since 4.4 \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing \reentrant QTextBoundaryFinder allows to find Unicode text boundaries in a diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qtimeline.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qtimeline.cpp index 11d4c43..c0ca931 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qtimeline.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qtimeline.cpp @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ void QTimeLinePrivate::setCurrentTime(int msecs) \class QTimeLine \brief The QTimeLine class provides a timeline for controlling animations. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup animation It's most commonly used to animate a GUI control by calling a slot periodically. You can construct a timeline by passing its duration in diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qvarlengtharray.qdoc b/src/corelib/tools/qvarlengtharray.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9cc7bef --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qvarlengtharray.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,274 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QVarLengthArray + \brief The QVarLengthArray class provides a low-level variable-length array. + + \ingroup tools + \reentrant + + The C++ language doesn't support variable-length arrays on the stack. + For example, the following code won't compile: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qvarlengtharray.qdoc 0 + + The alternative is to allocate the array on the heap (with + \c{new}): + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qvarlengtharray.qdoc 1 + + However, if myfunc() is called very frequently from the + application's inner loop, heap allocation can be a major source + of slowdown. + + QVarLengthArray is an attempt to work around this gap in the C++ + language. It allocates a certain number of elements on the stack, + and if you resize the array to a larger size, it automatically + uses the heap instead. Stack allocation has the advantage that + it is much faster than heap allocation. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qvarlengtharray.qdoc 2 + + In the example above, QVarLengthArray will preallocate 1024 + elements on the stack and use them unless \c{n + 1} is greater + than 1024. If you omit the second template argument, + QVarLengthArray's default of 256 is used. + + QVarLengthArray's value type must be an \l{assignable data type}. + This covers most data types that are commonly used, but the + compiler won't let you, for example, store a QWidget as a value; + instead, store a QWidget *. + + QVarLengthArray, like QVector, provides a resizable array data + structure. The main differences between the two classes are: + + \list + \o QVarLengthArray's API is much more low-level. It provides no + iterators and lacks much of QVector's functionality. + + \o QVarLengthArray doesn't initialize the memory if the value is + a basic type. (QVector always does.) + + \o QVector uses \l{implicit sharing} as a memory optimization. + QVarLengthArray doesn't provide that feature; however, it + usually produces slightly better performance due to reduced + overhead, especially in tight loops. + \endlist + + In summary, QVarLengthArray is a low-level optimization class + that only makes sense in very specific cases. It is used a few + places inside Qt and was added to Qt's public API for the + convenience of advanced users. + + \sa QVector, QList, QLinkedList +*/ + +/*! \fn QVarLengthArray::QVarLengthArray(int size) + + Constructs an array with an initial size of \a size elements. + + If the value type is a primitive type (e.g., char, int, float) or + a pointer type (e.g., QWidget *), the elements are not + initialized. For other types, the elements are initialized with a + \l{default-constructed value}. +*/ + +/*! \fn QVarLengthArray::~QVarLengthArray() + + Destroys the array. +*/ + +/*! \fn int QVarLengthArray::size() const + + Returns the number of elements in the array. + + \sa isEmpty(), resize() +*/ + +/*! \fn int QVarLengthArray::count() const + + Same as size(). + + \sa isEmpty(), resize() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QVarLengthArray::isEmpty() const + + Returns true if the array has size 0; otherwise returns false. + + \sa size(), resize() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QVarLengthArray::clear() + + Removes all the elements from the array. + + Same as resize(0). +*/ + +/*! \fn void QVarLengthArray::resize(int size) + + Sets the size of the array to \a size. If \a size is greater than + the current size, elements are added to the end. If \a size is + less than the current size, elements are removed from the end. + + If the value type is a primitive type (e.g., char, int, float) or + a pointer type (e.g., QWidget *), new elements are not + initialized. For other types, the elements are initialized with a + \l{default-constructed value}. + + \sa size() +*/ + +/*! \fn int QVarLengthArray::capacity() const + + Returns the maximum number of elements that can be stored in the + array without forcing a reallocation. + + The sole purpose of this function is to provide a means of fine + tuning QVarLengthArray's memory usage. In general, you will rarely ever + need to call this function. If you want to know how many items are + in the array, call size(). + + \sa reserve() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QVarLengthArray::reserve(int size) + + Attempts to allocate memory for at least \a size elements. If you + know in advance how large the array can get, you can call this + function and if you call resize() often, you are likely to get + better performance. If \a size is an underestimate, the worst + that will happen is that the QVarLengthArray will be a bit + slower. + + The sole purpose of this function is to provide a means of fine + tuning QVarLengthArray's memory usage. In general, you will + rarely ever need to call this function. If you want to change the + size of the array, call resize(). + + \sa capacity() +*/ + +/*! \fn T &QVarLengthArray::operator[](int i) + + Returns a reference to the item at index position \a i. + + \a i must be a valid index position in the array (i.e., 0 <= \a i + < size()). + + \sa data() +*/ + +/*! \fn const T &QVarLengthArray::operator[](int i) const + + \overload +*/ + + +/*! + \fn void QVarLengthArray::append(const T &t) + + Appends item \a t to the array, extending the array if necessary. + + \sa removeLast() +*/ + + +/*! + \fn inline void QVarLengthArray::removeLast() + \since 4.5 + + Decreases the size of the array by one. The allocated size is not changed. + + \sa append() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QVarLengthArray::append(const T *buf, int size) + + Appends \a size amount of items referenced by \a buf to this array. +*/ + + +/*! \fn T *QVarLengthArray::data() + + Returns a pointer to the data stored in the array. The pointer can + be used to access and modify the items in the array. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qvarlengtharray.qdoc 3 + + The pointer remains valid as long as the array isn't reallocated. + + This function is mostly useful to pass an array to a function + that accepts a plain C++ array. + + \sa constData(), operator[]() +*/ + +/*! \fn const T *QVarLengthArray::data() const + + \overload +*/ + +/*! \fn const T *QVarLengthArray::constData() const + + Returns a const pointer to the data stored in the array. The + pointer can be used to access the items in the array. The + pointer remains valid as long as the array isn't reallocated. + + This function is mostly useful to pass an array to a function + that accepts a plain C++ array. + + \sa data(), operator[]() +*/ + +/*! \fn QVarLengthArray<T, Prealloc> &QVarLengthArray::operator=(const QVarLengthArray<T, Prealloc> &other) + Assigns \a other to this array and returns a reference to this array. + */ + +/*! \fn QVarLengthArray::QVarLengthArray(const QVarLengthArray<T, Prealloc> &other) + Constructs a copy of \a other. + */ + diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qvector.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qvector.cpp index 8e454ed..64ef368 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qvector.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qvector.cpp @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ int QVectorData::grow(int sizeofTypedData, int size, int sizeofT, bool excessive \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QVector\<T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. It diff --git a/src/corelib/xml/qxmlstream.cpp b/src/corelib/xml/qxmlstream.cpp index fa396f1..7924bd0 100644 --- a/src/corelib/xml/qxmlstream.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/xml/qxmlstream.cpp @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ QXmlStreamEntityResolver *QXmlStreamReader::entityResolver() const \brief The QXmlStreamReader class provides a fast parser for reading well-formed XML via a simple streaming API. - \mainclass + \ingroup xml-tools QXmlStreamReader is a faster and more convenient replacement for @@ -2792,7 +2792,7 @@ QStringRef QXmlStreamReader::documentEncoding() const \brief The QXmlStreamWriter class provides an XML writer with a simple streaming API. - \mainclass + \inmodule QtXml \ingroup xml-tools diff --git a/src/gui/accessible/qaccessible.cpp b/src/gui/accessible/qaccessible.cpp index abeca0d..9084817 100644 --- a/src/gui/accessible/qaccessible.cpp +++ b/src/gui/accessible/qaccessible.cpp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE relating to accessibility. \ingroup accessibility - \mainclass + Accessible applications can be used by people who are not able to use applications by conventional means. diff --git a/src/gui/dialogs/qabstractprintdialog.cpp b/src/gui/dialogs/qabstractprintdialog.cpp index ac4c9e8..9e91382 100644 --- a/src/gui/dialogs/qabstractprintdialog.cpp +++ b/src/gui/dialogs/qabstractprintdialog.cpp @@ -59,6 +59,8 @@ class QPrintDialogPrivate : public QAbstractPrintDialogPrivate \brief The QAbstractPrintDialog class provides a base implementation for print dialogs used to configure printers. + \ingroup printing + This class implements getter and setter functions that are used to customize settings shown in print dialogs, but it is not used directly. Use QPrintDialog to display a print dialog in your application. @@ -357,7 +359,8 @@ void QAbstractPrintDialogPrivate::setPrinter(QPrinter *newPrinter) \brief The QPrintDialog class provides a dialog for specifying the printer's configuration. - \ingroup dialogs + \ingroup standard-dialogs + \ingroup printing The dialog allows users to change document-related settings, such as the paper size and orientation, type of print (color or diff --git a/src/gui/dialogs/qcolordialog.cpp b/src/gui/dialogs/qcolordialog.cpp index 4a40b48..766dcb4 100644 --- a/src/gui/dialogs/qcolordialog.cpp +++ b/src/gui/dialogs/qcolordialog.cpp @@ -1510,9 +1510,7 @@ static const Qt::WindowFlags DefaultWindowFlags = \class QColorDialog \brief The QColorDialog class provides a dialog widget for specifying colors. - \mainclass - \ingroup dialogs - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup standard-dialogs The color dialog's function is to allow users to choose colors. For example, you might use this in a drawing program to allow the diff --git a/src/gui/dialogs/qdialog.cpp b/src/gui/dialogs/qdialog.cpp index cd808b3..5b53637 100644 --- a/src/gui/dialogs/qdialog.cpp +++ b/src/gui/dialogs/qdialog.cpp @@ -76,9 +76,9 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QDialog \brief The QDialog class is the base class of dialog windows. - \ingroup dialogs + \ingroup dialog-classes \ingroup abstractwidgets - \mainclass + A dialog window is a top-level window mostly used for short-term tasks and brief communications with the user. QDialogs may be diff --git a/src/gui/dialogs/qerrormessage.cpp b/src/gui/dialogs/qerrormessage.cpp index bc9972c..c83f33c 100644 --- a/src/gui/dialogs/qerrormessage.cpp +++ b/src/gui/dialogs/qerrormessage.cpp @@ -133,8 +133,7 @@ QSize QErrorMessageTextView::sizeHint() const \brief The QErrorMessage class provides an error message display dialog. - \ingroup dialogs - \ingroup misc + \ingroup standard-dialog An error message widget consists of a text label and a checkbox. The checkbox lets the user control whether the same error message will be diff --git a/src/gui/dialogs/qfiledialog.cpp b/src/gui/dialogs/qfiledialog.cpp index f548912..015ee59 100644 --- a/src/gui/dialogs/qfiledialog.cpp +++ b/src/gui/dialogs/qfiledialog.cpp @@ -89,8 +89,8 @@ Q_GUI_EXPORT _qt_filedialog_save_filename_hook qt_filedialog_save_filename_hook /*! \class QFileDialog \brief The QFileDialog class provides a dialog that allow users to select files or directories. - \ingroup dialogs - \mainclass + \ingroup standard-dialogs + The QFileDialog class enables a user to traverse the file system in order to select one or many files or a directory. diff --git a/src/gui/dialogs/qfontdialog.cpp b/src/gui/dialogs/qfontdialog.cpp index 3e57585..512dc65 100644 --- a/src/gui/dialogs/qfontdialog.cpp +++ b/src/gui/dialogs/qfontdialog.cpp @@ -112,9 +112,8 @@ static const Qt::WindowFlags DefaultWindowFlags = /*! \class QFontDialog - \ingroup dialogs - \ingroup text - \mainclass + \ingroup standard-dialogs + \brief The QFontDialog class provides a dialog widget for selecting a font. A font dialog is created through one of the static getFont() diff --git a/src/gui/dialogs/qinputdialog.cpp b/src/gui/dialogs/qinputdialog.cpp index a2b8304..39a6b07 100644 --- a/src/gui/dialogs/qinputdialog.cpp +++ b/src/gui/dialogs/qinputdialog.cpp @@ -425,8 +425,8 @@ void QInputDialogPrivate::_q_currentRowChanged(const QModelIndex &newIndex, \class QInputDialog \brief The QInputDialog class provides a simple convenience dialog to get a single value from the user. - \ingroup dialogs - \mainclass + \ingroup standard-dialogs + The input value can be a string, a number or an item from a list. A label must be set to tell the user what they should enter. diff --git a/src/gui/dialogs/qmessagebox.cpp b/src/gui/dialogs/qmessagebox.cpp index 7a81ea5..e8a4f0d 100644 --- a/src/gui/dialogs/qmessagebox.cpp +++ b/src/gui/dialogs/qmessagebox.cpp @@ -434,8 +434,8 @@ void QMessageBoxPrivate::_q_buttonClicked(QAbstractButton *button) \brief The QMessageBox class provides a modal dialog for informing the user or for asking the user a question and receiving an answer. - \ingroup dialogs - \mainclass + \ingroup standard-dialogs + A message box displays a primary \l{QMessageBox::text}{text} to alert the user to a situation, an \l{QMessageBox::informativeText} diff --git a/src/gui/dialogs/qpagesetupdialog.cpp b/src/gui/dialogs/qpagesetupdialog.cpp index 5ca4935..a91eaea 100644 --- a/src/gui/dialogs/qpagesetupdialog.cpp +++ b/src/gui/dialogs/qpagesetupdialog.cpp @@ -45,6 +45,52 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE +/*! + \class QPageSetupDialog + + \brief The QPageSetupDialog class provides a configuration dialog + for the page-related options on a printer. + + \ingroup standard-dialogs + \ingroup printing + + On Windows and Mac OS X the page setup dialog is implemented using + the native page setup dialogs. + + Note that on Windows and Mac OS X custom paper sizes won't be + reflected in the native page setup dialogs. Additionally, custom + page margins set on a QPrinter won't show in the native Mac OS X + page setup dialog. + + \sa QPrinter, QPrintDialog +*/ + + +/*! + \fn QPageSetupDialog::QPageSetupDialog(QPrinter *printer, QWidget *parent) + + Constructs a page setup dialog that configures \a printer with \a + parent as the parent widget. +*/ + +/*! + \since 4.5 + + \fn QPageSetupDialog::QPageSetupDialog(QWidget *parent) + + Constructs a page setup dialog that configures a default-constructed + QPrinter with \a parent as the parent widget. + + \sa printer() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QPrinter *QPageSetupDialog::printer() + + Returns the printer that was passed to the QPageSetupDialog + constructor. +*/ + // hack class QPageSetupDialogPrivate : public QAbstractPageSetupDialogPrivate { diff --git a/src/gui/dialogs/qprintdialog.qdoc b/src/gui/dialogs/qprintdialog.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b52edff --- /dev/null +++ b/src/gui/dialogs/qprintdialog.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT +/*! + \fn QPrinter *QPrintDialog::printer() const + + Returns a pointer to the printer this dialog configures, or 0 if + this dialog does not operate on any printer. + + This function is available for Unix platforms only. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QPrintDialog::setPrinter(QPrinter *printer, bool pickupSettings) + + Sets this dialog to configure printer \a printer, or no printer if \a printer + is null. If \a pickupSettings is true, the dialog reads most of + its settings from \a printer. If \a pickupSettings is false (the + default) the dialog keeps its old settings. + + This function is available for Unix platforms only. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QPrintDialog::addButton(QPushButton *button) + + Adds the \a button to the layout of the print dialog. The added + buttons are arranged from the left to the right below the + last groupbox of the printdialog. + + This function is available for Unix platforms only. +*/ +#endif diff --git a/src/gui/dialogs/qprintpreviewdialog.cpp b/src/gui/dialogs/qprintpreviewdialog.cpp index ee16fe5..c053b81 100644 --- a/src/gui/dialogs/qprintpreviewdialog.cpp +++ b/src/gui/dialogs/qprintpreviewdialog.cpp @@ -625,6 +625,9 @@ void QPrintPreviewDialogPrivate::_q_zoomFactorChanged() \brief The QPrintPreviewDialog class provides a dialog for previewing and configuring page layouts for printer output. + \ingroup standard-dialogs + \ingroup printing + Using QPrintPreviewDialog in your existing application is straightforward: diff --git a/src/gui/dialogs/qprogressdialog.cpp b/src/gui/dialogs/qprogressdialog.cpp index 1ca1515..d55eadb 100644 --- a/src/gui/dialogs/qprogressdialog.cpp +++ b/src/gui/dialogs/qprogressdialog.cpp @@ -196,8 +196,8 @@ void QProgressDialogPrivate::_q_disconnectOnClose() /*! \class QProgressDialog \brief The QProgressDialog class provides feedback on the progress of a slow operation. - \ingroup dialogs - \mainclass + \ingroup standard-dialogs + A progress dialog is used to give the user an indication of how long an operation is going to take, and to demonstrate that the diff --git a/src/gui/embedded/qdirectpainter_qws.cpp b/src/gui/embedded/qdirectpainter_qws.cpp index bae6ed9..bba862b 100644 --- a/src/gui/embedded/qdirectpainter_qws.cpp +++ b/src/gui/embedded/qdirectpainter_qws.cpp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \class QDirectPainter - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup qws \brief The QDirectPainter class provides direct access to the diff --git a/src/gui/embedded/qlock.cpp b/src/gui/embedded/qlock.cpp index 0f88832..c32e9b5 100644 --- a/src/gui/embedded/qlock.cpp +++ b/src/gui/embedded/qlock.cpp @@ -128,7 +128,6 @@ public: \brief The QLock class is a wrapper for a System V shared semaphore. \ingroup qws - \ingroup io \internal diff --git a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsgridlayout.cpp b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsgridlayout.cpp index ee7048f..0fb284f 100644 --- a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsgridlayout.cpp +++ b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsgridlayout.cpp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ \brief The QGraphicsGridLayout class provides a grid layout for managing widgets in Graphics View. \since 4.4 - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup graphicsview-api The most common way to use QGraphicsGridLayout is to construct an object diff --git a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsitem.cpp b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsitem.cpp index 37d969b..675fc0d 100644 --- a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsitem.cpp +++ b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsitem.cpp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ \brief The QGraphicsItem class is the base class for all graphical items in a QGraphicsScene. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup graphicsview-api It provides a light-weight foundation for writing your own custom items. @@ -6900,7 +6900,7 @@ QGraphicsObject::QGraphicsObject(QGraphicsItemPrivate &dd, QGraphicsItem *parent \brief The QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem class provides a common base for all path items. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup graphicsview-api This class does not fully implement an item by itself; in particular, it does not implement boundingRect() and paint(), which are inherited by @@ -7035,7 +7035,6 @@ QPainterPath QAbstractGraphicsShapeItem::opaqueArea() const \brief The QGraphicsPathItem class provides a path item that you can add to a QGraphicsScene. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api To set the item's path, pass a QPainterPath to QGraphicsPathItem's @@ -7238,7 +7237,6 @@ QVariant QGraphicsPathItem::extension(const QVariant &variant) const \brief The QGraphicsRectItem class provides a rectangle item that you can add to a QGraphicsScene. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api To set the item's rectangle, pass a QRectF to QGraphicsRectItem's @@ -7483,7 +7481,6 @@ QVariant QGraphicsRectItem::extension(const QVariant &variant) const \brief The QGraphicsEllipseItem class provides an ellipse item that you can add to a QGraphicsScene. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api QGraphicsEllipseItem respresents an ellipse with a fill and an outline, @@ -7800,7 +7797,6 @@ QVariant QGraphicsEllipseItem::extension(const QVariant &variant) const \brief The QGraphicsPolygonItem class provides a polygon item that you can add to a QGraphicsScene. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api To set the item's polygon, pass a QPolygonF to @@ -8034,7 +8030,6 @@ QVariant QGraphicsPolygonItem::extension(const QVariant &variant) const \brief The QGraphicsLineItem class provides a line item that you can add to a QGraphicsScene. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api To set the item's line, pass a QLineF to QGraphicsLineItem's @@ -8296,7 +8291,6 @@ QVariant QGraphicsLineItem::extension(const QVariant &variant) const \brief The QGraphicsPixmapItem class provides a pixmap item that you can add to a QGraphicsScene. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api To set the item's pixmap, pass a QPixmap to QGraphicsPixmapItem's @@ -8660,7 +8654,6 @@ QVariant QGraphicsPixmapItem::extension(const QVariant &variant) const \brief The QGraphicsTextItem class provides a text item that you can add to a QGraphicsScene to display formatted text. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api If you only need to show plain text in an item, consider using QGraphicsSimpleTextItem @@ -9525,7 +9518,6 @@ void QGraphicsSimpleTextItemPrivate::updateBoundingRect() \brief The QGraphicsSimpleTextItem class provides a simple text path item that you can add to a QGraphicsScene. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api To set the item's text, you can either pass a QString to @@ -9761,7 +9753,6 @@ QVariant QGraphicsSimpleTextItem::extension(const QVariant &variant) const \brief The QGraphicsItemGroup class provides treating a group of items as one. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api A QGraphicsItemGroup is a special type of compound item that diff --git a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsitemanimation.cpp b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsitemanimation.cpp index 0d7a3c6..c9b95ad 100644 --- a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsitemanimation.cpp +++ b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsitemanimation.cpp @@ -44,7 +44,6 @@ \brief The QGraphicsItemAnimation class provides simple animation support for QGraphicsItem. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api The QGraphicsItemAnimation class animates a QGraphicsItem. You can diff --git a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicslayout.cpp b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicslayout.cpp index 3f039c6..58c174c 100644 --- a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicslayout.cpp +++ b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicslayout.cpp @@ -57,7 +57,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QGraphicsLayout class provides the base class for all layouts in Graphics View. \since 4.4 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api QGraphicsLayout is an abstract class that defines a virtual API for diff --git a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicslayoutitem.cpp b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicslayoutitem.cpp index 83e4888..6a25ade 100644 --- a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicslayoutitem.cpp +++ b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicslayoutitem.cpp @@ -264,7 +264,6 @@ void QGraphicsLayoutItemPrivate::setSizeComponent( \brief The QGraphicsLayoutItem class can be inherited to allow your custom items to be managed by layouts. \since 4.4 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api QGraphicsLayoutItem is an abstract class that defines a set of virtual diff --git a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicslinearlayout.cpp b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicslinearlayout.cpp index c0ff00e..185780a 100644 --- a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicslinearlayout.cpp +++ b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicslinearlayout.cpp @@ -44,7 +44,6 @@ \brief The QGraphicsLinearLayout class provides a horizontal or vertical layout for managing widgets in Graphics View. \since 4.4 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api The default orientation for a linear layout is Qt::Horizontal. You can diff --git a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsproxywidget.cpp b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsproxywidget.cpp index 784ee0e..4f626a2 100644 --- a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsproxywidget.cpp +++ b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsproxywidget.cpp @@ -67,7 +67,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QGraphicsProxyWidget class provides a proxy layer for embedding a QWidget in a QGraphicsScene. \since 4.4 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api QGraphicsProxyWidget embeds QWidget-based widgets, for example, a diff --git a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsscene.cpp b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsscene.cpp index 21ea72f..3f13a86 100644 --- a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsscene.cpp +++ b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsscene.cpp @@ -44,9 +44,8 @@ \brief The QGraphicsScene class provides a surface for managing a large number of 2D graphical items. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api - \mainclass + The class serves as a container for QGraphicsItems. It is used together with QGraphicsView for visualizing graphical items, such as lines, diff --git a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsscenebsptreeindex.cpp b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsscenebsptreeindex.cpp index 2ebf944..d68183c 100644 --- a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsscenebsptreeindex.cpp +++ b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsscenebsptreeindex.cpp @@ -44,9 +44,8 @@ \brief The QGraphicsSceneBspTreeIndex class provides an implementation of a BSP indexing algorithm for discovering items in QGraphicsScene. \since 4.6 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api - \mainclass + \internal QGraphicsSceneBspTreeIndex index use a BSP(Binary Space Partitioning) diff --git a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicssceneevent.cpp b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicssceneevent.cpp index b89d6ba..90f1531 100644 --- a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicssceneevent.cpp +++ b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicssceneevent.cpp @@ -44,7 +44,6 @@ \brief The QGraphicsSceneEvent class provides a base class for all graphics view related events. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api When a QGraphicsView receives Qt mouse, keyboard, and drag and @@ -86,7 +85,6 @@ \brief The QGraphicsSceneMouseEvent class provides mouse events in the graphics view framework. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api When a QGraphicsView receives a QMouseEvent, it translates it to @@ -111,7 +109,6 @@ \brief The QGraphicsSceneWheelEvent class provides wheel events in the graphics view framework. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api \l{QWheelEvent}{QWheelEvent}s received by a QGraphicsView are translated @@ -128,7 +125,6 @@ \brief The QGraphicsSceneContextMenuEvent class provides context menu events in the graphics view framework. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api A QContextMenuEvent received by a QGraphicsView is translated @@ -160,7 +156,6 @@ \brief The QGraphicsSceneHoverEvent class provides hover events in the graphics view framework. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api When a QGraphicsView receives a QHoverEvent event, it translates @@ -176,7 +171,6 @@ \brief The QGraphicsSceneHelpEvent class provides events when a tooltip is requested. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api When a QGraphicsView receives a QEvent of type @@ -201,7 +195,6 @@ \brief The QGraphicsSceneDragDropEvent class provides events for drag and drop in the graphics view framework. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api QGraphicsView inherits the drag and drop functionality provided @@ -226,7 +219,6 @@ \brief The QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent class provides events for widget resizing in the graphics view framework. \since 4.4 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api A QGraphicsWidget sends itself a QGraphicsSceneResizeEvent immediately @@ -243,7 +235,6 @@ \brief The QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent class provides events for widget moving in the graphics view framework. \since 4.4 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api A QGraphicsWidget sends itself a QGraphicsSceneMoveEvent immediately when diff --git a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicssceneindex.cpp b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicssceneindex.cpp index 37a2fc3..feb44bb 100644 --- a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicssceneindex.cpp +++ b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicssceneindex.cpp @@ -43,9 +43,8 @@ \brief The QGraphicsSceneIndex class provides a base class to implement a custom indexing algorithm for discovering items in QGraphicsScene. \since 4.6 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api - \mainclass + \internal The QGraphicsSceneIndex class provides a base class to implement diff --git a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicstransform.cpp b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicstransform.cpp index 95f137d..86f5b08 100644 --- a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicstransform.cpp +++ b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicstransform.cpp @@ -44,6 +44,7 @@ \brief The QGraphicsTransform class is an abstract base class for building advanced transformations on QGraphicsItems. \since 4.6 + \ingroup graphicsview-api As an alternative to QGraphicsItem::transform, QGraphicsTransform lets you create and control advanced transformations that can be configured diff --git a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsview.cpp b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsview.cpp index 91e654c..e9029c3 100644 --- a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsview.cpp +++ b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicsview.cpp @@ -48,9 +48,8 @@ static const int QGRAPHICSVIEW_PREALLOC_STYLE_OPTIONS = 503; // largest prime < \brief The QGraphicsView class provides a widget for displaying the contents of a QGraphicsScene. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api - \mainclass + QGraphicsView visualizes the contents of a QGraphicsScene in a scrollable viewport. To create a scene with geometrical items, see QGraphicsScene's diff --git a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicswidget.cpp b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicswidget.cpp index 4b41f1f..a833d4b 100644 --- a/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicswidget.cpp +++ b/src/gui/graphicsview/qgraphicswidget.cpp @@ -74,7 +74,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QGraphicsWidget class is the base class for all widget items in a QGraphicsScene. \since 4.4 - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api QGraphicsWidget is an extended base item that provides extra functionality diff --git a/src/gui/image/qbitmap.cpp b/src/gui/image/qbitmap.cpp index a1497bc..bef1738 100644 --- a/src/gui/image/qbitmap.cpp +++ b/src/gui/image/qbitmap.cpp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QBitmap \brief The QBitmap class provides monochrome (1-bit depth) pixmaps. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup shared The QBitmap class is a monochrome off-screen paint device used diff --git a/src/gui/image/qicon.cpp b/src/gui/image/qicon.cpp index 677cc44..5a88e29 100644 --- a/src/gui/image/qicon.cpp +++ b/src/gui/image/qicon.cpp @@ -445,9 +445,9 @@ Q_GLOBAL_STATIC_WITH_ARGS(QFactoryLoader, loaderV2, \brief The QIcon class provides scalable icons in different modes and states. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup shared - \mainclass + A QIcon can generate smaller, larger, active, and disabled pixmaps from the set of pixmaps it is given. Such pixmaps are used by Qt diff --git a/src/gui/image/qiconengine.cpp b/src/gui/image/qiconengine.cpp index 8e39607..930834d 100644 --- a/src/gui/image/qiconengine.cpp +++ b/src/gui/image/qiconengine.cpp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QIconEngine class provides an abstract base class for QIcon renderers. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \bold {Use QIconEngineV2 instead.} @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ void QIconEngine::addFile(const QString &/*fileName*/, const QSize &/*size*/, QI \brief The QIconEngineV2 class provides an abstract base class for QIcon renderers. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \since 4.3 An icon engine renders \l{QIcon}s. With icon engines, you can diff --git a/src/gui/image/qimage.cpp b/src/gui/image/qimage.cpp index 09bc8c8..3faca46 100644 --- a/src/gui/image/qimage.cpp +++ b/src/gui/image/qimage.cpp @@ -333,9 +333,9 @@ bool QImageData::checkForAlphaPixels() const /*! \class QImage - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant \brief The QImage class provides a hardware-independent image diff --git a/src/gui/image/qimagereader.cpp b/src/gui/image/qimagereader.cpp index 06c8f21..b127de7 100644 --- a/src/gui/image/qimagereader.cpp +++ b/src/gui/image/qimagereader.cpp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ for reading images from files or other devices. \reentrant - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup io The most common way to read images is through QImage and QPixmap's diff --git a/src/gui/image/qimagewriter.cpp b/src/gui/image/qimagewriter.cpp index c734169..1f06493 100644 --- a/src/gui/image/qimagewriter.cpp +++ b/src/gui/image/qimagewriter.cpp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ for writing images to files or other devices. \reentrant - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup io QImageWriter supports setting format specific options, such as the diff --git a/src/gui/image/qmovie.cpp b/src/gui/image/qmovie.cpp index c341e5e..179e6bb 100644 --- a/src/gui/image/qmovie.cpp +++ b/src/gui/image/qmovie.cpp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ \brief The QMovie class is a convenience class for playing movies with QImageReader. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting First, create a QMovie object by passing either the name of a file or a pointer to a QIODevice containing an animated image format to QMovie's diff --git a/src/gui/image/qpicture.cpp b/src/gui/image/qpicture.cpp index fbc2a5d..7b02dca 100644 --- a/src/gui/image/qpicture.cpp +++ b/src/gui/image/qpicture.cpp @@ -69,9 +69,9 @@ void qt_format_text(const QFont &fnt, const QRectF &_r, \brief The QPicture class is a paint device that records and replays QPainter commands. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup shared - \mainclass + A picture serializes painter commands to an IO device in a platform-independent format. They are sometimes referred to as meta-files. @@ -1298,7 +1298,7 @@ QList<QByteArray> QPicture::outputFormats() \brief The QPictureIO class contains parameters for loading and saving pictures. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup io QPictureIO contains a QIODevice object that is used for picture data diff --git a/src/gui/image/qpixmap.cpp b/src/gui/image/qpixmap.cpp index 81440b3..0fad1c7 100644 --- a/src/gui/image/qpixmap.cpp +++ b/src/gui/image/qpixmap.cpp @@ -1550,9 +1550,9 @@ QPixmap QPixmap::transformed(const QMatrix &matrix, Qt::TransformationMode mode) \brief The QPixmap class is an off-screen image representation that can be used as a paint device. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup shared - \mainclass + Qt provides four classes for handling image data: QImage, QPixmap, QBitmap and QPicture. QImage is designed and optimized for I/O, diff --git a/src/gui/image/qpixmapcache.cpp b/src/gui/image/qpixmapcache.cpp index 762c98f..cef5c49 100644 --- a/src/gui/image/qpixmapcache.cpp +++ b/src/gui/image/qpixmapcache.cpp @@ -51,8 +51,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QPixmapCache class provides an application-wide cache for pixmaps. - \ingroup environment - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting This class is a tool for optimized drawing with QPixmap. You can use it to store temporary pixmaps that are expensive to generate diff --git a/src/gui/image/qpixmapfilter.cpp b/src/gui/image/qpixmapfilter.cpp index cd80b10..968ecd7 100644 --- a/src/gui/image/qpixmapfilter.cpp +++ b/src/gui/image/qpixmapfilter.cpp @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ public: /*! \class QPixmapFilter \since 4.5 - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QPixmapFilter class provides the basic functionality for pixmap filter classes. Pixmap filter can be for example colorize or blur. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ QRectF QPixmapFilter::boundingRectFor(const QRectF &rect) const /*! \class QPixmapConvolutionFilter \since 4.5 - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QPixmapConvolutionFilter class provides convolution filtering for pixmaps. @@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ static void grayscale(const QImage &image, QImage &dest, const QRect& rect = QRe /*! \class QPixmapColorizeFilter \since 4.5 - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QPixmapColorizeFilter class provides colorizing filtering for pixmaps. @@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ public: /*! \class QPixmapDropShadowFilter \since 4.5 - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QPixmapDropShadowFilter class is a convenience class for drawing pixmaps with drop shadows. diff --git a/src/gui/inputmethod/qinputcontextfactory.cpp b/src/gui/inputmethod/qinputcontextfactory.cpp index 39b9b03..9010edf 100644 --- a/src/gui/inputmethod/qinputcontextfactory.cpp +++ b/src/gui/inputmethod/qinputcontextfactory.cpp @@ -86,7 +86,6 @@ Q_GLOBAL_STATIC_WITH_ARGS(QFactoryLoader, loader, \class QInputContextFactory \brief The QInputContextFactory class creates QInputContext objects. - \ingroup appearance The input context factory creates a QInputContext object for a given key with QInputContextFactory::create(). diff --git a/src/gui/itemviews/qabstractitemdelegate.cpp b/src/gui/itemviews/qabstractitemdelegate.cpp index 22b96fc..447538a 100644 --- a/src/gui/itemviews/qabstractitemdelegate.cpp +++ b/src/gui/itemviews/qabstractitemdelegate.cpp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE data items from a model. \ingroup model-view - \mainclass + A QAbstractItemDelegate provides the interface and common functionality for delegates in the model/view architecture. Delegates display diff --git a/src/gui/itemviews/qabstractitemview.cpp b/src/gui/itemviews/qabstractitemview.cpp index 7b51483..9eb71b7 100644 --- a/src/gui/itemviews/qabstractitemview.cpp +++ b/src/gui/itemviews/qabstractitemview.cpp @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ void QAbstractItemViewPrivate::checkMouseMove(const QPersistentModelIndex &index item view classes. \ingroup model-view - \mainclass + QAbstractItemView class is the base class for every standard view that uses a QAbstractItemModel. QAbstractItemView is an abstract diff --git a/src/gui/itemviews/qcolumnview.cpp b/src/gui/itemviews/qcolumnview.cpp index fd8106f..9597656 100644 --- a/src/gui/itemviews/qcolumnview.cpp +++ b/src/gui/itemviews/qcolumnview.cpp @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QColumnView class provides a model/view implementation of a column view. \ingroup model-view \ingroup advanced - \mainclass + QColumnView displays a model in a number of QListViews, one for each hierarchy in the tree. This is sometimes referred to as a cascading list. diff --git a/src/gui/itemviews/qheaderview.cpp b/src/gui/itemviews/qheaderview.cpp index 96df758..f7b5b6f 100644 --- a/src/gui/itemviews/qheaderview.cpp +++ b/src/gui/itemviews/qheaderview.cpp @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ QDataStream &operator>>(QDataStream &in, QHeaderViewPrivate::SectionSpan &span) item views. \ingroup model-view - \mainclass + A QHeaderView displays the headers used in item views such as the QTableView and QTreeView classes. It takes the place of Qt3's \c QHeader diff --git a/src/gui/itemviews/qitemdelegate.cpp b/src/gui/itemviews/qitemdelegate.cpp index 1e36f72..56af0f4 100644 --- a/src/gui/itemviews/qitemdelegate.cpp +++ b/src/gui/itemviews/qitemdelegate.cpp @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ QSizeF QItemDelegatePrivate::doTextLayout(int lineWidth) const data items from a model. \ingroup model-view - \mainclass + QItemDelegate can be used to provide custom display features and editor widgets for item views based on QAbstractItemView subclasses. Using a diff --git a/src/gui/itemviews/qlistview.cpp b/src/gui/itemviews/qlistview.cpp index b055d32..ea38f5f 100644 --- a/src/gui/itemviews/qlistview.cpp +++ b/src/gui/itemviews/qlistview.cpp @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \ingroup model-view \ingroup advanced - \mainclass + A QListView presents items stored in a model, either as a simple non-hierarchical list, or as a collection of icons. This class is used diff --git a/src/gui/itemviews/qlistwidget.cpp b/src/gui/itemviews/qlistwidget.cpp index a1f8288..232b4d2 100644 --- a/src/gui/itemviews/qlistwidget.cpp +++ b/src/gui/itemviews/qlistwidget.cpp @@ -1125,7 +1125,7 @@ void QListWidgetPrivate::_q_dataChanged(const QModelIndex &topLeft, \brief The QListWidget class provides an item-based list widget. \ingroup model-view - \mainclass + QListWidget is a convenience class that provides a list view similar to the one supplied by QListView, but with a classic item-based interface for diff --git a/src/gui/itemviews/qstringlistmodel.cpp b/src/gui/itemviews/qstringlistmodel.cpp index d57de1a..9462dfe 100644 --- a/src/gui/itemviews/qstringlistmodel.cpp +++ b/src/gui/itemviews/qstringlistmodel.cpp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QStringListModel class provides a model that supplies strings to views. \ingroup model-view - \mainclass + QStringListModel is an editable model that can be used for simple cases where you need to display a number of strings in a view diff --git a/src/gui/itemviews/qstyleditemdelegate.cpp b/src/gui/itemviews/qstyleditemdelegate.cpp index a8ea218..ae7c86d 100644 --- a/src/gui/itemviews/qstyleditemdelegate.cpp +++ b/src/gui/itemviews/qstyleditemdelegate.cpp @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ public: data items from a model. \ingroup model-view - \mainclass + \since 4.4 When displaying data from models in Qt item views, e.g., a diff --git a/src/gui/itemviews/qtableview.cpp b/src/gui/itemviews/qtableview.cpp index 61c2b60..a9db9f5 100644 --- a/src/gui/itemviews/qtableview.cpp +++ b/src/gui/itemviews/qtableview.cpp @@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ void QTableViewPrivate::drawCell(QPainter *painter, const QStyleOptionViewItemV4 \ingroup model-view \ingroup advanced - \mainclass + A QTableView implements a table view that displays items from a model. This class is used to provide standard tables that were diff --git a/src/gui/itemviews/qtablewidget.cpp b/src/gui/itemviews/qtablewidget.cpp index de8ebde..b04aea2 100644 --- a/src/gui/itemviews/qtablewidget.cpp +++ b/src/gui/itemviews/qtablewidget.cpp @@ -1486,7 +1486,7 @@ QTableWidgetItem &QTableWidgetItem::operator=(const QTableWidgetItem &other) \brief The QTableWidget class provides an item-based table view with a default model. \ingroup model-view - \mainclass + Table widgets provide standard table display facilities for applications. The items in a QTableWidget are provided by QTableWidgetItem. diff --git a/src/gui/itemviews/qtreeview.cpp b/src/gui/itemviews/qtreeview.cpp index 539a642..7dad192 100644 --- a/src/gui/itemviews/qtreeview.cpp +++ b/src/gui/itemviews/qtreeview.cpp @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \ingroup model-view \ingroup advanced - \mainclass + A QTreeView implements a tree representation of items from a model. This class is used to provide standard hierarchical lists that diff --git a/src/gui/itemviews/qtreewidget.cpp b/src/gui/itemviews/qtreewidget.cpp index f48e393..0bc2bee 100644 --- a/src/gui/itemviews/qtreewidget.cpp +++ b/src/gui/itemviews/qtreewidget.cpp @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ public: \brief The QTreeModel class manages the items stored in a tree view. \ingroup model-view - \mainclass + */ /*! @@ -2329,7 +2329,7 @@ void QTreeWidgetPrivate::_q_dataChanged(const QModelIndex &topLeft, tree model. \ingroup model-view - \mainclass + The QTreeWidget class is a convenience class that provides a standard tree widget with a classic item-based interface similar to that used by diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qaction.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qaction.cpp index 7c343fc..4b44452 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qaction.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qaction.cpp @@ -182,8 +182,8 @@ void QActionPrivate::setShortcutEnabled(bool enable, QShortcutMap &map) \brief The QAction class provides an abstract user interface action that can be inserted into widgets. - \ingroup application - \mainclass + \ingroup mainwindow-classes + \omit * parent and widget are different diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qactiongroup.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qactiongroup.cpp index 5d429e4..9a12dea 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qactiongroup.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qactiongroup.cpp @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ void QActionGroupPrivate::_q_actionHovered() \class QActionGroup \brief The QActionGroup class groups actions together. - \ingroup application + \ingroup mainwindow-classes In some situations it is useful to group actions together. For example, if you have a \gui{Left Align} action, a \gui{Right diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qapplication.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qapplication.cpp index df85809..574d845 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qapplication.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qapplication.cpp @@ -174,9 +174,6 @@ QApplicationPrivate::~QApplicationPrivate() \brief The QApplication class manages the GUI application's control flow and main settings. - \ingroup application - \mainclass - QApplication contains the main event loop, where all events from the window system and other sources are processed and dispatched. It also handles the application's initialization, finalization, and provides session @@ -4107,9 +4104,6 @@ bool QApplicationPrivate::notify_helper(QObject *receiver, QEvent * e) \class QSessionManager \brief The QSessionManager class provides access to the session manager. - \ingroup application - \ingroup environment - A session manager in a desktop environment (in which Qt GUI applications live) keeps track of a session, which is a group of running applications, each of which has a particular state. The state of an application contains diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qboxlayout.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qboxlayout.cpp index 5dd77e8..ce86c36 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qboxlayout.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qboxlayout.cpp @@ -452,7 +452,6 @@ void QBoxLayoutPrivate::calcHfw(int w) vertically. \ingroup geomanagement - \ingroup appearance QBoxLayout takes the space it gets (from its parent layout or from the parentWidget()), divides it up into a row of boxes, and makes @@ -1271,8 +1270,6 @@ QBoxLayout::Direction QBoxLayout::direction() const \brief The QHBoxLayout class lines up widgets horizontally. \ingroup geomanagement - \ingroup appearance - \mainclass This class is used to construct horizontal box layout objects. See QBoxLayout for details. @@ -1389,8 +1386,6 @@ QHBoxLayout::~QHBoxLayout() \brief The QVBoxLayout class lines up widgets vertically. \ingroup geomanagement - \ingroup appearance - \mainclass This class is used to construct vertical box layout objects. See QBoxLayout for details. diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qclipboard.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qclipboard.cpp index 2779717..fce4f65 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qclipboard.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qclipboard.cpp @@ -58,10 +58,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QClipboard \brief The QClipboard class provides access to the window system clipboard. - \ingroup io - \ingroup environment - \mainclass - The clipboard offers a simple mechanism to copy and paste data between applications. diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qcursor.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qcursor.cpp index b83843b..16749b7 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qcursor.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qcursor.cpp @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \ingroup appearance \ingroup shared - \mainclass + This class is mainly used to create mouse cursors that are associated with particular widgets and to get and set the position diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qdesktopwidget.qdoc b/src/gui/kernel/qdesktopwidget.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e6673a --- /dev/null +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qdesktopwidget.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QDesktopWidget + \brief The QDesktopWidget class provides access to screen information on multi-head systems. + + \ingroup advanced + \ingroup desktop + + QApplication::desktop() function should be used to get an instance + of the QDesktopWidget. + + Systems with more than one graphics card and monitor can manage the + physical screen space available either as multiple desktops, or as a + large virtual desktop, which usually has the size of the bounding + rectangle of all the screens (see virtualDesktop). For an + application, one of the available screens is the primary screen, i.e. + the screen where the main widget resides (see primaryScreen). All + windows opened in the context of the application should be + constrained to the boundaries of the primary screen; for example, + it would be inconvenient if a dialog box popped up on a different + screen, or split over two screens. + + The QDesktopWidget provides information about the geometry of the + available screens with screenGeometry(). The number of screens + available is returned by screenCount, and the screenCountChanged + signal is emitted when screens are added or removed during runtime. + The screen number that a particular point or widget is located in + is returned by screenNumber(). + + Widgets provided by Qt use this class, for example, to place + tooltips, menus and dialog boxes according to the parent or + application widget. Applications can use this class to save window + positions, or to place child widgets and dialogs on one particular + screen. + + \img qdesktopwidget.png Managing Multiple Screens + + In the illustration above, Application One's primary screen is + screen 0, and App Two's primary screen is screen 1. + + \target multiple screens note + \note QDesktopWidget inherits the QWidget properties, width() and + height(), which specify the size of the desktop. However, for + desktops with multiple screens, the size of the desktop is the union + of all the screen sizes, so width() and height() should \e not be + used for computing the size of a widget to be placed on one of the + screens. The correct width and height values are obtained using + availableGeometry() or screenGeometry() for a particular screen. + + \sa QApplication, QApplication::desktop(), QX11Info::appRootWindow() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDesktopWidget::QDesktopWidget() + + \internal + + Creates the desktop widget. + + If the system supports a virtual desktop, this widget will have + the size of the virtual desktop; otherwise this widget will have + the size of the primary screen. + + Instead of using QDesktopWidget directly, use QApplication::desktop(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDesktopWidget::~QDesktopWidget() + + \internal + + Destroys the desktop widget and frees any allocated resources. +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QDesktopWidget::numScreens() const + + Returns the number of available screens. + + \obsolete + + This function is deprecated. Use screenCount instead. + + \sa primaryScreen +*/ + +/*! + \fn QWidget *QDesktopWidget::screen(int screen) + + Returns a widget that represents the screen with index \a screen + (a value of -1 means the default screen). + + If the system uses a virtual desktop, the returned widget will + have the geometry of the entire virtual desktop; i.e., bounding + every \a screen. + + \sa primaryScreen, screenCount, virtualDesktop +*/ + +/*! + \fn const QRect QDesktopWidget::availableGeometry(int screen) const + + Returns the available geometry of the screen with index \a screen. What + is available will be subrect of screenGeometry() based on what the + platform decides is available (for example excludes the dock and menu bar + on Mac OS X, or the task bar on Windows). The default screen is used if + \a screen is -1. + + \sa screenNumber(), screenGeometry() +*/ + +/*! + \fn const QRect QDesktopWidget::availableGeometry(const QWidget *widget) const + \overload + + Returns the available geometry of the screen which contains \a widget. + + \sa screenGeometry() +*/ + +/*! + \fn const QRect QDesktopWidget::availableGeometry(const QPoint &p) const + \overload + + Returns the available geometry of the screen which contains \a p. + + \sa screenGeometry() +*/ + + +/*! + \fn const QRect QDesktopWidget::screenGeometry(int screen) const + + Returns the geometry of the screen with index \a screen. The default + screen is used if \a screen is -1. + + \sa screenNumber() +*/ + +/*! + \fn const QRect QDesktopWidget::screenGeometry(const QWidget *widget) const + \overload + + Returns the geometry of the screen which contains \a widget. +*/ + +/*! + \fn const QRect QDesktopWidget::screenGeometry(const QPoint &p) const + \overload + + Returns the geometry of the screen which contains \a p. +*/ + + +/*! + \fn int QDesktopWidget::screenNumber(const QWidget *widget) const + + Returns the index of the screen that contains the largest + part of \a widget, or -1 if the widget not on a screen. + + \sa primaryScreen +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QDesktopWidget::screenNumber(const QPoint &point) const + + \overload + Returns the index of the screen that contains the \a point, or the + screen which is the shortest distance from the \a point. + + \sa primaryScreen +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QDesktopWidget::resizeEvent(QResizeEvent *event) + \reimp +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QDesktopWidget::resized(int screen) + + This signal is emitted when the size of \a screen changes. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QDesktopWidget::workAreaResized(int screen) + + This signal is emitted when the work area available on \a screen changes. +*/ + +/*! + \property QDesktopWidget::screenCount + \brief the number of screens currently available on the system. + + \since 4.6 + + \sa screenCountChanged() +*/ + +/*! + \property QDesktopWidget::primaryScreen + \brief the index of the screen that is configured to be the primary screen + on the system. +*/ + +/*! + \property QDesktopWidget::virtualDesktop + + \brief if the system manages the available screens in a virtual desktop. + + For virtual desktops, screen() will always return the same widget. + The size of the virtual desktop is the size of this desktop + widget. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QDesktopWidget::screenCountChanged(int newCount) + + \since 4.6 + + This signal is emitted when the number of screens changes to \a newCount. + + \sa screenCount +*/ diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qformlayout.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qformlayout.cpp index 4e632de..b3ecc35 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qformlayout.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qformlayout.cpp @@ -1006,10 +1006,8 @@ QStyle* QFormLayoutPrivate::getStyle() const \since 4.4 \brief The QFormLayout class manages forms of input widgets and their associated labels. - \ingroup appearance \ingroup geomanagement - \mainclass QFormLayout is a convenience layout class that lays out its children in a two-column form. The left column consists of labels diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qgridlayout.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qgridlayout.cpp index 6624b77..1f25c63 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qgridlayout.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qgridlayout.cpp @@ -980,8 +980,7 @@ QRect QGridLayoutPrivate::cellRect(int row, int col) const \brief The QGridLayout class lays out widgets in a grid. \ingroup geomanagement - \ingroup appearance - \mainclass + QGridLayout takes the space made available to it (by its parent layout or by the parentWidget()), divides it up into rows and diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qkeymapper.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qkeymapper.cpp index 0730ef6..7143358 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qkeymapper.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qkeymapper.cpp @@ -51,7 +51,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \class QKeyMapper \since 4.2 - \ingroup application \internal \sa QObject diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qkeysequence.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qkeysequence.cpp index 99e2632..50fe849 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qkeysequence.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qkeysequence.cpp @@ -152,9 +152,8 @@ void Q_AUTOTEST_EXPORT qt_set_sequence_auto_mnemonic(bool b) { qt_sequence_no_mn \brief The QKeySequence class encapsulates a key sequence as used by shortcuts. - \ingroup misc \ingroup shared - \mainclass + In its most common form, a key sequence describes a combination of keys that must be used together to perform some action. Key sequences diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qlayout.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qlayout.cpp index e3cde49..07c017d 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qlayout.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qlayout.cpp @@ -75,7 +75,6 @@ static int menuBarHeightForWidth(QWidget *menubar, int w) \class QLayout \brief The QLayout class is the base class of geometry managers. - \ingroup appearance \ingroup geomanagement This is an abstract base class inherited by the concrete classes diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qlayoutitem.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qlayoutitem.cpp index 47fe5e6..54f37bf 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qlayoutitem.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qlayoutitem.cpp @@ -87,7 +87,6 @@ QSizePolicy::operator QVariant() const \brief The QLayoutItem class provides an abstract item that a QLayout manipulates. - \ingroup appearance \ingroup geomanagement This is used by custom layouts. @@ -116,7 +115,6 @@ QSizePolicy::operator QVariant() const /*! \class QSpacerItem - \ingroup appearance \ingroup geomanagement \brief The QSpacerItem class provides blank space in a layout. @@ -144,7 +142,6 @@ QSizePolicy::operator QVariant() const /*! \class QWidgetItem - \ingroup appearance \ingroup geomanagement \brief The QWidgetItem class is a layout item that represents a widget. diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qmime_mac.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qmime_mac.cpp index f4d4707..9e8de67 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qmime_mac.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qmime_mac.cpp @@ -126,9 +126,8 @@ CFStringRef qt_mac_mime_typeUTI = CFSTR("com.pasteboard.trolltech.marker"); \l{http://developer.apple.com/macosx/uniformtypeidentifiers.html}{Uniform Type Identifier (UTI)} format. \since 4.2 - \ingroup io + \ingroup draganddrop - \ingroup misc Qt's drag and drop and clipboard facilities use the MIME standard. On X11, this maps trivially to the Xdnd protocol. On diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qmime_win.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qmime_win.cpp index 63f37af..7f82f53 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qmime_win.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qmime_win.cpp @@ -219,9 +219,7 @@ Q_GLOBAL_STATIC(QWindowsMimeList, theMimeList); /*! \class QWindowsMime \brief The QWindowsMime class maps open-standard MIME to Window Clipboard formats. - \ingroup io \ingroup draganddrop - \ingroup misc Qt's drag-and-drop and clipboard facilities use the MIME standard. On X11, this maps trivially to the Xdnd protocol, but on Windows diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qpalette.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qpalette.cpp index 24e735c..c5ae66b 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qpalette.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qpalette.cpp @@ -399,8 +399,8 @@ void QPalette::setColorGroup(ColorGroup cg, const QColorGroup &g) \ingroup appearance \ingroup shared - \ingroup multimedia - \mainclass + \ingroup painting + A palette consists of three color groups: \e Active, \e Disabled, and \e Inactive. All widgets in Qt contain a palette and diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qshortcut.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qshortcut.cpp index 194f648..1c5917c 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qshortcut.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qshortcut.cpp @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QShortcut class is used to create keyboard shortcuts. \ingroup events - \mainclass + The QShortcut class provides a way of connecting keyboard shortcuts to Qt's \l{signals and slots} mechanism, so that diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qsizepolicy.qdoc b/src/gui/kernel/qsizepolicy.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..200deb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qsizepolicy.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,521 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QSizePolicy + \brief The QSizePolicy class is a layout attribute describing horizontal + and vertical resizing policy. + + \ingroup geomanagement + + The size policy of a widget is an expression of its willingness to + be resized in various ways, and affects how the widget is treated + by the \l{Layout Management}{layout engine}. Each widget returns a + QSizePolicy that describes the horizontal and vertical resizing + policy it prefers when being laid out. You can change this for + a specific widget by changing its QWidget::sizePolicy property. + + QSizePolicy contains two independent QSizePolicy::Policy values + and two stretch factors; one describes the widgets's horizontal + size policy, and the other describes its vertical size policy. It + also contains a flag to indicate whether the height and width of + its preferred size are related. + + The horizontal and vertical policies can be set in the + constructor, and altered using the setHorizontalPolicy() and + setVerticalPolicy() functions. The stretch factors can be set + using the setHorizontalStretch() and setVerticalStretch() + functions. The flag indicating whether the widget's + \l{QWidget::sizeHint()}{sizeHint()} is width-dependent (such as a + menu bar or a word-wrapping label) can be set using the + setHeightForWidth() function. + + The current size policies and stretch factors be retrieved using + the horizontalPolicy(), verticalPolicy(), horizontalStretch() and + verticalStretch() functions. Alternatively, use the transpose() + function to swap the horizontal and vertical policies and + stretches. The hasHeightForWidth() function returns the current + status of the flag indicating the size hint dependencies. + + Use the expandingDirections() function to determine whether the + associated widget can make use of more space than its + \l{QWidget::sizeHint()}{sizeHint()} function indicates, as well as + find out in which directions it can expand. + + Finally, the QSizePolicy class provides operators comparing this + size policy to a given policy, as well as a QVariant operator + storing this QSizePolicy as a QVariant object. + + \sa QSize, QWidget::sizeHint(), QWidget::sizePolicy, + QLayoutItem::sizeHint() +*/ + +/*! + \enum QSizePolicy::PolicyFlag + + These flags are combined together to form the various \l{Policy} + values: + + \value GrowFlag The widget can grow beyond its size hint if necessary. + \value ExpandFlag The widget should get as much space as possible. + \value ShrinkFlag The widget can shrink below its size hint if necessary. + \value IgnoreFlag The widget's size hint is ignored. The widget will get + as much space as possible. + + \sa Policy +*/ + +/*! + \enum QSizePolicy::Policy + + This enum describes the various per-dimension sizing types used + when constructing a QSizePolicy. + + \value Fixed The QWidget::sizeHint() is the only acceptable + alternative, so the widget can never grow or shrink (e.g. the + vertical direction of a push button). + + \value Minimum The sizeHint() is minimal, and sufficient. The + widget can be expanded, but there is no advantage to it being + larger (e.g. the horizontal direction of a push button). + It cannot be smaller than the size provided by sizeHint(). + + \value Maximum The sizeHint() is a maximum. The widget can be + shrunk any amount without detriment if other widgets need the + space (e.g. a separator line). + It cannot be larger than the size provided by sizeHint(). + + \value Preferred The sizeHint() is best, but the widget can be + shrunk and still be useful. The widget can be expanded, but there + is no advantage to it being larger than sizeHint() (the default + QWidget policy). + + \value Expanding The sizeHint() is a sensible size, but the + widget can be shrunk and still be useful. The widget can make use + of extra space, so it should get as much space as possible (e.g. + the horizontal direction of a horizontal slider). + + \value MinimumExpanding The sizeHint() is minimal, and sufficient. + The widget can make use of extra space, so it should get as much + space as possible (e.g. the horizontal direction of a horizontal + slider). + + \value Ignored The sizeHint() is ignored. The widget will get as + much space as possible. + + \sa PolicyFlag, setHorizontalPolicy(), setVerticalPolicy() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSizePolicy::QSizePolicy() + + Constructs a QSizePolicy object with \l Fixed as its horizontal + and vertical policies. + + The policies can be altered using the setHorizontalPolicy() and + setVerticalPolicy() functions. Use the setHeightForWidth() + function if the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the + width of the widget (for example, a QLabel with line wrapping). + + \sa setHorizontalStretch(), setVerticalStretch() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSizePolicy::QSizePolicy(Policy horizontal, Policy vertical) + + Constructs a QSizePolicy object with the given \a horizontal and + \a vertical policies, and DefaultType as the control type. + + Use setHeightForWidth() if the preferred height of the widget is + dependent on the width of the widget (for example, a QLabel with + line wrapping). + + \sa setHorizontalStretch(), setVerticalStretch() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSizePolicy::QSizePolicy(Policy horizontal, Policy vertical, ControlType type) + \since 4.3 + + Constructs a QSizePolicy object with the given \a horizontal and + \a vertical policies, and the specified control \a type. + + Use setHeightForWidth() if the preferred height of the widget is + dependent on the width of the widget (for example, a QLabel with + line wrapping). + + \sa setHorizontalStretch(), setVerticalStretch(), controlType() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSizePolicy::Policy QSizePolicy::horizontalPolicy() const + + Returns the horizontal component of the size policy. + + \sa setHorizontalPolicy(), verticalPolicy(), horizontalStretch() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSizePolicy::Policy QSizePolicy::verticalPolicy() const + + Returns the vertical component of the size policy. + + \sa setVerticalPolicy(), horizontalPolicy(), verticalStretch() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSizePolicy::setHorizontalPolicy(Policy policy) + + Sets the horizontal component to the given \a policy. + + \sa horizontalPolicy(), setVerticalPolicy(), setHorizontalStretch() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSizePolicy::setVerticalPolicy(Policy policy) + + Sets the vertical component to the given \a policy. + + \sa verticalPolicy(), setHorizontalPolicy(), setVerticalStretch() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Qt::Orientations QSizePolicy::expandingDirections() const + + Returns whether a widget can make use of more space than the + QWidget::sizeHint() function indicates. + + A value of Qt::Horizontal or Qt::Vertical means that the widget + can grow horizontally or vertically (i.e., the horizontal or + vertical policy is \l Expanding or \l MinimumExpanding), whereas + Qt::Horizontal | Qt::Vertical means that it can grow in both + dimensions. + + \sa horizontalPolicy(), verticalPolicy() +*/ + +/*! + \fn ControlType QSizePolicy::controlType() const + \since 4.3 + + Returns the control type associated with the widget for which + this size policy applies. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSizePolicy::setControlType(ControlType type) + \since 4.3 + + Sets the control type associated with the widget for which this + size policy applies to \a type. + + The control type specifies the type of the widget for which this + size policy applies. It is used by some styles, notably + QMacStyle, to insert proper spacing between widgets. For example, + the Mac OS X Aqua guidelines specify that push buttons should be + separated by 12 pixels, whereas vertically stacked radio buttons + only require 6 pixels. + + \sa QStyle::layoutSpacing() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSizePolicy::setHeightForWidth(bool dependent) + + Sets the flag determining whether the widget's preferred height + depends on its width, to \a dependent. + + \sa hasHeightForWidth() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSizePolicy::hasHeightForWidth() const + + Returns true if the widget's preferred height depends on its + width; otherwise returns false. + + \sa setHeightForWidth() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSizePolicy::operator==(const QSizePolicy &other) const + + Returns true if this policy is equal to \a other; otherwise + returns false. + + \sa operator!=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSizePolicy::operator!=(const QSizePolicy &other) const + + Returns true if this policy is different from \a other; otherwise + returns false. + + \sa operator==() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QSizePolicy::horizontalStretch() const + + Returns the horizontal stretch factor of the size policy. + + \sa setHorizontalStretch(), verticalStretch(), horizontalPolicy() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QSizePolicy::verticalStretch() const + + Returns the vertical stretch factor of the size policy. + + \sa setVerticalStretch(), horizontalStretch(), verticalPolicy() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSizePolicy::setHorizontalStretch(uchar stretchFactor) + + Sets the horizontal stretch factor of the size policy to the given \a + stretchFactor. + + \sa horizontalStretch(), setVerticalStretch(), setHorizontalPolicy() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSizePolicy::setVerticalStretch(uchar stretchFactor) + + Sets the vertical stretch factor of the size policy to the given + \a stretchFactor. + + \sa verticalStretch(), setHorizontalStretch(), setVerticalPolicy() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSizePolicy::transpose() + + Swaps the horizontal and vertical policies and stretches. +*/ + +/*! + \enum QSizePolicy::ControlType + \since 4.3 + + This enum specifies the different types of widgets in terms of + layout interaction: + + \value DefaultType The default type, when none is specified. + \value ButtonBox A QDialogButtonBox instance. + \value CheckBox A QCheckBox instance. + \value ComboBox A QComboBox instance. + \value Frame A QFrame instance. + \value GroupBox A QGroupBox instance. + \value Label A QLabel instance. + \value Line A QFrame instance with QFrame::HLine or QFrame::VLine. + \value LineEdit A QLineEdit instance. + \value PushButton A QPushButton instance. + \value RadioButton A QRadioButton instance. + \value Slider A QAbstractSlider instance. + \value SpinBox A QAbstractSpinBox instance. + \value TabWidget A QTabWidget instance. + \value ToolButton A QToolButton instance. + + \sa setControlType(), controlType() +*/ + +#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT +/*! + \typedef QSizePolicy::SizeType + \compat + + Use the QSizePolicy::Policy enum instead. +*/ + +/*! + \enum QSizePolicy::ExpandData + \compat + + Use the Qt::Orientations enum instead. + + \value NoDirection Use 0 instead. + \value Horizontally Use Qt::Horizontal instead. + \value Vertically Use Qt::Vertical instead. + \value BothDirections Use Qt::Horizontal | Qt::Vertical instead. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSizePolicy::mayShrinkHorizontally() const + + Use the horizontalPolicy() function combined with the + QSizePolicy::PolicyFlag enum instead. + + \oldcode + bool policy = mayShrinkHorizontally(); + \newcode + bool policy = horizontalPolicy() & QSizePolicy::ShrinkFlag; + \endcode +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSizePolicy::mayShrinkVertically() const + + Use the verticalPolicy() function combined with the + QSizePolicy::PolicyFlag enum instead. + + \oldcode + bool policy = mayShrinkVertically(); + \newcode + bool policy = verticalPolicy() & QSizePolicy::ShrinkFlag; + \endcode +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSizePolicy::mayGrowHorizontally() const + + Use the horizontalPolicy() function combined with the + QSizePolicy::PolicyFlag enum instead. + + \oldcode + bool policy = mayGrowHorizontally(); + \newcode + bool policy = horizontalPolicy() & QSizePolicy::GrowFlag; + \endcode +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSizePolicy::mayGrowVertically() const + + Use the verticalPolicy() function combined with the + QSizePolicy::PolicyFlag enum instead. + + \oldcode + bool policy = mayGrowVertically(); + \newcode + bool policy = verticalPolicy() & QSizePolicy::GrowFlag; + \endcode +*/ + +/*! + \fn Qt::QSizePolicy::Orientations QSizePolicy::expanding() const + + Use expandingDirections() instead. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSizePolicy::QSizePolicy(Policy horizontal, Policy vertical, bool dependent) + + Use the QSizePolicy() constructor and the setHeightForWidth() + function instead. + + \oldcode + QSizePolicy *policy = new QSizePolicy(horizontal, vertical, dependent); + \newcode + QSizePolicy *policy = new QSizePolicy(horizontal, vertical); + policy->setHeightForWidth(dependent); + \endcode +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSizePolicy::QSizePolicy(Policy horizontal, Policy vertical, uchar horizontalStretch, + uchar verticalStretch, bool dependent) + + Use the QSizePolicy() constructor and call the + setHorizontalStretch(), setVerticalStretch(), and + setHeightForWidth() functions instead. + + \oldcode + QSizePolicy *policy = new QSizePolicy(horizontal, vertical, + horizontalStretch, verticalStretch, + dependent); + \newcode + QSizePolicy *policy = new QSizePolicy(horizontal, vertical); + policy->setHorizontalStretch(horizontalStretch); + policy->setVerticalStretch(verticalStretch); + policy->setHeightForWidth(dependent); + \endcode +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSizePolicy::Policy QSizePolicy::horData() const + + Use horizontalPolicy() instead. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSizePolicy::Policy QSizePolicy::verData() const + + Use verticalPolicy() instead. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSizePolicy::setHorData(Policy policy) + + Use setHorizontalPolicy() instead. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSizePolicy::setVerData(Policy policy) + + Use setVerticalPolicy() instead. +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint QSizePolicy::horStretch() const + + Use horizontalStretch() instead. +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint QSizePolicy::verStretch() const + + Use verticalStretch() instead. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSizePolicy::setHorStretch(uchar stretch) + + Use setHorizontalStretch() instead. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSizePolicy::setVerStretch(uchar stretch) + + Use setVerticalStretch() instead. +*/ +#endif diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qsound.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qsound.cpp index 3fb750e..e5c263b 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qsound.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qsound.cpp @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ public: \brief The QSound class provides access to the platform audio facilities. \ingroup multimedia - \mainclass + Qt provides the most commonly required audio operation in GUI applications: asynchronously playing a sound file. This is most diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qstackedlayout.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qstackedlayout.cpp index 4025b73..c7e25b0 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qstackedlayout.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qstackedlayout.cpp @@ -65,8 +65,6 @@ public: only one widget is visible at a time. \ingroup geomanagement - \ingroup appearance - \mainclass QStackedLayout can be used to create a user interface similar to the one provided by QTabWidget. There is also a convenience diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qtooltip.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qtooltip.cpp index 3ea9cb4..8193c55 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qtooltip.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qtooltip.cpp @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE widget. \ingroup helpsystem - \mainclass + The tip is a short piece of text reminding the user of the widget's function. It is drawn immediately below the given diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qwhatsthis.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qwhatsthis.cpp index 5a37801..6d0bc33 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qwhatsthis.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qwhatsthis.cpp @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE widget, i.e. answering the question "What's This?". \ingroup helpsystem - \mainclass + "What's This?" help is part of an application's online help system, and provides users with information about the diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qwidget.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qwidget.cpp index c00f953..515eed9 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qwidget.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qwidget.cpp @@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ void QWidget::setAutoFillBackground(bool enabled) \brief The QWidget class is the base class of all user interface objects. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + The widget is the atom of the user interface: it receives mouse, keyboard and other events from the window system, and paints a representation of @@ -2692,7 +2692,7 @@ void QWidget::showFullScreen() Calling this function only affects \l{isWindow()}{windows}. On X11, this function may not work properly with certain window - managers. See \l{geometry.html}{Window Geometry} for an explanation. + managers. See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an explanation. \sa setWindowState(), showNormal(), showMinimized(), show(), hide(), isVisible() */ @@ -3041,8 +3041,8 @@ void QWidget::setDisabled(bool disable) \brief geometry of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame - See the \link geometry.html Window Geometry documentation\endlink - for an overview of geometry issues with windows. + See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry + issues with windows. By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's platform and screen geometry. @@ -3068,8 +3068,8 @@ QRect QWidget::frameGeometry() const \brief the x coordinate of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame - See the \link geometry.html Window Geometry documentation\endlink - for an overview of window geometry. + See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry + issues with windows. By default, this property has a value of 0. @@ -3088,8 +3088,8 @@ int QWidget::x() const \brief the y coordinate of the widget relative to its parent and including any window frame - See the \link geometry.html Window Geometry documentation\endlink - for an overview of window geometry. + See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry + issues with windows. By default, this property has a value of 0. @@ -3121,8 +3121,8 @@ int QWidget::y() const \warning Calling move() or setGeometry() inside moveEvent() can lead to infinite recursion. - See the \link geometry.html Window Geometry documentation\endlink - for an overview of window geometry. + See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry + issues with windows. \sa frameGeometry, size x(), y() */ @@ -3152,8 +3152,8 @@ QPoint QWidget::pos() const \warning Calling setGeometry() inside resizeEvent() or moveEvent() can lead to infinite recursion. - See the \link geometry.html Window Geometry documentation\endlink - for an overview of window geometry. + See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry + issues with windows. By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's platform and screen geometry. @@ -3202,8 +3202,8 @@ QPoint QWidget::pos() const \property QWidget::width \brief the width of the widget excluding any window frame - See the \link geometry.html Window Geometry documentation\endlink - for an overview of window geometry. + See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry + issues with windows. \note Do not use this function to find the width of a screen on a \l{QDesktopWidget}{multiple screen desktop}. Read @@ -3219,8 +3219,8 @@ QPoint QWidget::pos() const \property QWidget::height \brief the height of the widget excluding any window frame - See the \link geometry.html Window Geometry documentation\endlink - for an overview of window geometry. + See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry + issues with windows. \note Do not use this function to find the height of a screen on a \l {QDesktopWidget} {multiple screen desktop}. Read @@ -3239,8 +3239,8 @@ QPoint QWidget::pos() const The rect property equals QRect(0, 0, width(), height()). - See the \link geometry.html Window Geometry documentation\endlink - for an overview of window geometry. + See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry + issues with windows. By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's platform and screen geometry. @@ -6228,8 +6228,8 @@ void QWidget::setGeometry(const QRect &r) \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_kernel_qwidget.cpp 11 - See the \link geometry.html Window Geometry documentation\endlink - for an overview of geometry issues with windows. + See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry + issues with windows. Use QMainWindow::saveState() to save the geometry and the state of toolbars and dock widgets. @@ -6270,8 +6270,8 @@ QByteArray QWidget::saveGeometry() const \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_kernel_qwidget.cpp 12 - See the \link geometry.html Window Geometry documentation\endlink - for an overview of geometry issues with windows. + See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry + issues with windows. Use QMainWindow::restoreState() to restore the geometry and the state of toolbars and dock widgets. diff --git a/src/gui/kernel/qwidgetaction.cpp b/src/gui/kernel/qwidgetaction.cpp index 911d332..a397e39 100644 --- a/src/gui/kernel/qwidgetaction.cpp +++ b/src/gui/kernel/qwidgetaction.cpp @@ -54,6 +54,8 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE for inserting custom widgets into action based containers, such as toolbars. + \ingroup mainwindow-classes + Most actions in an application are represented as items in menus or buttons in toolbars. However sometimes more complex widgets are necessary. For example a zoom action in a word processor may be @@ -100,9 +102,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE DirectConnection. \endlist - \ingroup application - \mainclass - \sa QAction, QActionGroup, QWidget */ diff --git a/src/gui/math3d/qgenericmatrix.cpp b/src/gui/math3d/qgenericmatrix.cpp index 271571c..1c924c7 100644 --- a/src/gui/math3d/qgenericmatrix.cpp +++ b/src/gui/math3d/qgenericmatrix.cpp @@ -47,6 +47,8 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QGenericMatrix \brief The QGenericMatrix class is a template class that represents a NxM transformation matrix with N columns and M rows. \since 4.6 + \ingroup painting + \ingroup painting-3D The QGenericMatrix template has four parameters: diff --git a/src/gui/math3d/qmatrix4x4.cpp b/src/gui/math3d/qmatrix4x4.cpp index a67a832..dc17eda 100644 --- a/src/gui/math3d/qmatrix4x4.cpp +++ b/src/gui/math3d/qmatrix4x4.cpp @@ -52,6 +52,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QMatrix4x4 \brief The QMatrix4x4 class represents a 4x4 transformation matrix in 3D space. \since 4.6 + \ingroup painting-3D \sa QVector3D, QGenericMatrix */ diff --git a/src/gui/math3d/qquaternion.cpp b/src/gui/math3d/qquaternion.cpp index 9e56966..b2c598f 100644 --- a/src/gui/math3d/qquaternion.cpp +++ b/src/gui/math3d/qquaternion.cpp @@ -51,6 +51,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QQuaternion \brief The QQuaternion class represents a quaternion consisting of a vector and scalar. \since 4.6 + \ingroup painting-3D Quaternions are used to represent rotations in 3D space, and consist of a 3D rotation axis specified by the x, y, and z diff --git a/src/gui/math3d/qvector2d.cpp b/src/gui/math3d/qvector2d.cpp index f7fef6c..1662020 100644 --- a/src/gui/math3d/qvector2d.cpp +++ b/src/gui/math3d/qvector2d.cpp @@ -53,6 +53,8 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QVector2D \brief The QVector2D class represents a vector or vertex in 2D space. \since 4.6 + \ingroup painting + \ingroup painting-3D The QVector2D class can also be used to represent vertices in 2D space. We therefore do not need to provide a separate vertex class. diff --git a/src/gui/math3d/qvector3d.cpp b/src/gui/math3d/qvector3d.cpp index 2915d3a..0e3f4e1 100644 --- a/src/gui/math3d/qvector3d.cpp +++ b/src/gui/math3d/qvector3d.cpp @@ -53,6 +53,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QVector3D \brief The QVector3D class represents a vector or vertex in 3D space. \since 4.6 + \ingroup painting-3D Vectors are one of the main building blocks of 3D representation and drawing. They consist of three coordinates, traditionally called diff --git a/src/gui/math3d/qvector4d.cpp b/src/gui/math3d/qvector4d.cpp index dd64103..a2efff7 100644 --- a/src/gui/math3d/qvector4d.cpp +++ b/src/gui/math3d/qvector4d.cpp @@ -53,6 +53,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QVector4D \brief The QVector4D class represents a vector or vertex in 4D space. \since 4.6 + \ingroup painting-3D The QVector4D class can also be used to represent vertices in 4D space. We therefore do not need to provide a separate vertex class. diff --git a/src/gui/painting/qbrush.cpp b/src/gui/painting/qbrush.cpp index be5db6b..931d7ff 100644 --- a/src/gui/painting/qbrush.cpp +++ b/src/gui/painting/qbrush.cpp @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ struct QGradientBrushData : public QBrushData /*! \class QBrush - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup shared \brief The QBrush class defines the fill pattern of shapes drawn @@ -1153,7 +1153,7 @@ QDataStream &operator>>(QDataStream &s, QBrush &b) /*! \class QGradient - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup shared \brief The QGradient class is used in combination with QBrush to @@ -1517,7 +1517,7 @@ bool QGradient::operator==(const QGradient &gradient) /*! \class QLinearGradient - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QLinearGradient class is used in combination with QBrush to specify a linear gradient brush. @@ -1696,7 +1696,7 @@ void QLinearGradient::setFinalStop(const QPointF &stop) /*! \class QRadialGradient - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QRadialGradient class is used in combination with QBrush to specify a radial gradient brush. @@ -1953,7 +1953,7 @@ void QRadialGradient::setFocalPoint(const QPointF &focalPoint) /*! \class QConicalGradient - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QConicalGradient class is used in combination with QBrush to specify a conical gradient brush. diff --git a/src/gui/painting/qcolor.cpp b/src/gui/painting/qcolor.cpp index 11a9ae7..4e93f04 100644 --- a/src/gui/painting/qcolor.cpp +++ b/src/gui/painting/qcolor.cpp @@ -66,9 +66,9 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QColor \brief The QColor class provides colors based on RGB, HSV or CMYK values. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup appearance - \mainclass + A color is normally specified in terms of RGB (red, green, and blue) components, but it is also possible to specify it in terms diff --git a/src/gui/painting/qcolormap.qdoc b/src/gui/painting/qcolormap.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e4a88f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/gui/painting/qcolormap.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QColormap + \ingroup painting + + \brief The QColormap class maps device independent QColors to device + dependent pixel values. +*/ + +/*! \enum QColormap::Mode + + This enum describes how QColormap maps device independent RGB + values to device dependent pixel values. + + \value Direct Pixel values are derived directly from the RGB + values, also known as "True Color." + + \value Indexed Pixel values represent indexes into a vector of + available colors, i.e. QColormap uses the index of the color that + most closely matches an RGB value. + + \value Gray Similar to \c Indexed, pixel values represent a vector + of available gray tones. QColormap uses the index of the gray + tone that most closely matches the computed gray tone of an RGB + value. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QColormap QColormap::instance(int screen) + + Returns the colormap for the specified \a screen. If \a screen is + -1, this function returns the colormap for the default screen. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QColormap::QColormap(const QColormap &colormap) + + Constructs a copy of another \a colormap. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QColormap::~QColormap() + + Destroys the colormap. +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QColormap::size() const + + Returns the size of the colormap for \c Indexed and \c Gray modes; + Returns -1 for \c Direct mode. + + \sa colormap() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint QColormap::pixel(const QColor &color) const + + Returns a device dependent pixel value for the \a color. + + \sa colorAt() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QColormap::depth() const + + Returns the depth of the device. + + \sa size() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QColormap::Mode QColormap::mode() const + + Returns the mode of this colormap. + + \sa QColormap::Mode +*/ + +/*! + \fn const QColor QColormap::colorAt(uint pixel) const + + Returns a QColor for the \a pixel. + + \sa pixel() +*/ + +/*! + \fn const QVector<QColor> QColormap::colormap() const + + Returns a vector of colors which represents the devices colormap + for \c Indexed and \c Gray modes. This function returns an empty + vector for \c Direct mode. + + \sa size() +*/ + +/*! \fn HPALETTE QColormap::hPal() + + This function is only available on Windows. + + Returns an handle to the HPALETTE used by this colormap. If no + HPALETTE is being used, this function returns zero. +*/ + +/*! \since 4.2 + + \fn QColormap &QColormap::operator=(const QColormap &colormap) + + Assigns the given \a colormap to \e this color map and returns + a reference to \e this color map. +*/ diff --git a/src/gui/painting/qmatrix.cpp b/src/gui/painting/qmatrix.cpp index ce71a84..abff9bf 100644 --- a/src/gui/painting/qmatrix.cpp +++ b/src/gui/painting/qmatrix.cpp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE coordinate system. \obsolete - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting A matrix specifies how to translate, scale, shear or rotate the coordinate system, and is typically used when rendering graphics. diff --git a/src/gui/painting/qpaintdevice.qdoc b/src/gui/painting/qpaintdevice.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5933484 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/gui/painting/qpaintdevice.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,289 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QPaintDevice + \brief The QPaintDevice class is the base class of objects that + can be painted. + + \ingroup painting + + A paint device is an abstraction of a two-dimensional space that + can be drawn using a QPainter. Its default coordinate system has + its origin located at the top-left position. X increases to the + right and Y increases downwards. The unit is one pixel. + + The drawing capabilities of QPaintDevice are currently implemented + by the QWidget, QImage, QPixmap, QGLPixelBuffer, QPicture, and + QPrinter subclasses. + + To implement support for a new backend, you must derive from + QPaintDevice and reimplement the virtual paintEngine() function to + tell QPainter which paint engine should be used to draw on this + particular device. Note that you also must create a corresponding + paint engine to be able to draw on the device, i.e derive from + QPaintEngine and reimplement its virtual functions. + + \warning Qt requires that a QApplication object exists before + any paint devices can be created. Paint devices access window + system resources, and these resources are not initialized before + an application object is created. + + The QPaintDevice class provides several functions returning the + various device metrics: The depth() function returns its bit depth + (number of bit planes). The height() function returns its height + in default coordinate system units (e.g. pixels for QPixmap and + QWidget) while heightMM() returns the height of the device in + millimeters. Similiarily, the width() and widthMM() functions + return the width of the device in default coordinate system units + and in millimeters, respectively. Alternatively, the protected + metric() function can be used to retrieve the metric information + by specifying the desired PaintDeviceMetric as argument. + + The logicalDpiX() and logicalDpiY() functions return the + horizontal and vertical resolution of the device in dots per + inch. The physicalDpiX() and physicalDpiY() functions also return + the resolution of the device in dots per inch, but note that if + the logical and vertical resolution differ, the corresponding + QPaintEngine must handle the mapping. Finally, the numColors() + function returns the number of different colors available for the + paint device. + + \sa QPaintEngine, QPainter, {The Coordinate System}, {The Paint + System} +*/ + +/*! + \enum QPaintDevice::PaintDeviceMetric + + Describes the various metrics of a paint device. + + \value PdmWidth The width of the paint device in default + coordinate system units (e.g. pixels for QPixmap and QWidget). See + also width(). + + \value PdmHeight The height of the paint device in default + coordinate system units (e.g. pixels for QPixmap and QWidget). See + also height(). + + \value PdmWidthMM The width of the paint device in millimeters. See + also widthMM(). + + \value PdmHeightMM The height of the paint device in millimeters. See + also heightMM(). + + \value PdmNumColors The number of different colors available for + the paint device. See also numColors(). + + \value PdmDepth The bit depth (number of bit planes) of the paint + device. See also depth(). + + \value PdmDpiX The horizontal resolution of the device in dots per + inch. See also logicalDpiX(). + + \value PdmDpiY The vertical resolution of the device in dots per inch. See + also logicalDpiY(). + + \value PdmPhysicalDpiX The horizontal resolution of the device in + dots per inch. See also physicalDpiX(). + + \value PdmPhysicalDpiY The vertical resolution of the device in + dots per inch. See also physicalDpiY(). + + \sa metric() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QPaintDevice::QPaintDevice() + + Constructs a paint device. This constructor can be invoked only from + subclasses of QPaintDevice. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QPaintDevice::~QPaintDevice() + + Destroys the paint device and frees window system resources. +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QPaintDevice::devType() const + + \internal + + Returns the device type identifier, which is QInternal::Widget + if the device is a QWidget, QInternal::Pixmap if it's a + QPixmap, QInternal::Printer if it's a QPrinter, + QInternal::Picture if it's a QPicture, or + QInternal::UnknownDevice in other cases. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QPaintDevice::paintingActive() const + + Returns true if the device is currently being painted on, i.e. someone has + called QPainter::begin() but not yet called QPainter::end() for + this device; otherwise returns false. + + \sa QPainter::isActive() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QPaintEngine *QPaintDevice::paintEngine() const + + Returns a pointer to the paint engine used for drawing on the + device. +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QPaintDevice::metric(PaintDeviceMetric metric) const + + Returns the metric information for the given paint device \a metric. + + \sa PaintDeviceMetric +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QPaintDevice::width() const + + Returns the width of the paint device in default coordinate system + units (e.g. pixels for QPixmap and QWidget). + + \sa widthMM() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QPaintDevice::height() const + + Returns the height of the paint device in default coordinate + system units (e.g. pixels for QPixmap and QWidget). + + \sa heightMM() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QPaintDevice::widthMM() const + + Returns the width of the paint device in millimeters. Due to platform + limitations it may not be possible to use this function to determine + the actual physical size of a widget on the screen. + + \sa width() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QPaintDevice::heightMM() const + + Returns the height of the paint device in millimeters. Due to platform + limitations it may not be possible to use this function to determine + the actual physical size of a widget on the screen. + + \sa height() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QPaintDevice::numColors() const + + Returns the number of different colors available for the paint + device. Since this value is an int, it will not be sufficient to represent + the number of colors on 32 bit displays, in this case INT_MAX is + returned instead. +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QPaintDevice::depth() const + + Returns the bit depth (number of bit planes) of the paint device. +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QPaintDevice::logicalDpiX() const + + Returns the horizontal resolution of the device in dots per inch, + which is used when computing font sizes. For X11, this is usually + the same as could be computed from widthMM(). + + Note that if the logicalDpiX() doesn't equal the physicalDpiX(), + the corresponding QPaintEngine must handle the resolution mapping. + + \sa logicalDpiY(), physicalDpiX() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QPaintDevice::logicalDpiY() const + + Returns the vertical resolution of the device in dots per inch, + which is used when computing font sizes. For X11, this is usually + the same as could be computed from heightMM(). + + Note that if the logicalDpiY() doesn't equal the physicalDpiY(), + the corresponding QPaintEngine must handle the resolution mapping. + + \sa logicalDpiX(), physicalDpiY() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QPaintDevice::physicalDpiX() const + + Returns the horizontal resolution of the device in dots per inch. + For example, when printing, this resolution refers to the physical + printer's resolution. The logical DPI on the other hand, refers to + the resolution used by the actual paint engine. + + Note that if the physicalDpiX() doesn't equal the logicalDpiX(), + the corresponding QPaintEngine must handle the resolution mapping. + + \sa physicalDpiY(), logicalDpiX() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QPaintDevice::physicalDpiY() const + + Returns the horizontal resolution of the device in dots per inch. + For example, when printing, this resolution refers to the physical + printer's resolution. The logical DPI on the other hand, refers to + the resolution used by the actual paint engine. + + Note that if the physicalDpiY() doesn't equal the logicalDpiY(), + the corresponding QPaintEngine must handle the resolution mapping. + + \sa physicalDpiX(), logicalDpiY() +*/ diff --git a/src/gui/painting/qpaintengine.cpp b/src/gui/painting/qpaintengine.cpp index a8518ea..07fec96 100644 --- a/src/gui/painting/qpaintengine.cpp +++ b/src/gui/painting/qpaintengine.cpp @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ QFont QTextItem::font() const /*! \class QPaintEngine - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QPaintEngine class provides an abstract definition of how QPainter draws to a given device on a given platform. diff --git a/src/gui/painting/qpainter.cpp b/src/gui/painting/qpainter.cpp index 0762138..ab35ead 100644 --- a/src/gui/painting/qpainter.cpp +++ b/src/gui/painting/qpainter.cpp @@ -924,8 +924,8 @@ void QPainterPrivate::updateState(QPainterState *newState) \brief The QPainter class performs low-level painting on widgets and other paint devices. - \ingroup multimedia - \mainclass + \ingroup painting + \reentrant QPainter provides highly optimized functions to do most of the diff --git a/src/gui/painting/qpainterpath.cpp b/src/gui/painting/qpainterpath.cpp index ed57e63..5bc4bdb 100644 --- a/src/gui/painting/qpainterpath.cpp +++ b/src/gui/painting/qpainterpath.cpp @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ static void qt_debug_path(const QPainterPath &path) /*! \class QPainterPath - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup shared \brief The QPainterPath class provides a container for painting operations, @@ -2396,7 +2396,7 @@ void qt_path_stroke_cubic_to(qfixed c1x, qfixed c1y, /*! \since 4.1 \class QPainterPathStroker - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QPainterPathStroker class is used to generate fillable outlines for a given painter path. diff --git a/src/gui/painting/qpen.cpp b/src/gui/painting/qpen.cpp index 047fd9b..51929a2 100644 --- a/src/gui/painting/qpen.cpp +++ b/src/gui/painting/qpen.cpp @@ -52,9 +52,9 @@ typedef QPenPrivate QPenData; /*! \class QPen - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \brief The QPen class defines how a QPainter should draw lines and outlines of shapes. diff --git a/src/gui/painting/qpolygon.cpp b/src/gui/painting/qpolygon.cpp index 87a9848..044b2c5 100644 --- a/src/gui/painting/qpolygon.cpp +++ b/src/gui/painting/qpolygon.cpp @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ static void qt_polygon_isect_line(const QPointF &p1, const QPointF &p2, const QP \reentrant - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup shared A QPolygon object is a QVector<QPoint>. The easiest way to add @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ QDebug operator<<(QDebug dbg, const QPolygon &a) floating point precision. \reentrant - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup shared A QPolygonF is a QVector<QPointF>. The easiest way to add points diff --git a/src/gui/painting/qprinter.cpp b/src/gui/painting/qprinter.cpp index f8399af..666719f 100644 --- a/src/gui/painting/qprinter.cpp +++ b/src/gui/painting/qprinter.cpp @@ -268,8 +268,8 @@ void QPrinterPrivate::addToManualSetList(QPrintEngine::PrintEnginePropertyKey ke \brief The QPrinter class is a paint device that paints on a printer. - \ingroup multimedia - \mainclass + \ingroup printing + This device represents a series of pages of printed output, and is used in almost exactly the same way as other paint devices such as @@ -2204,7 +2204,7 @@ bool QPrinter::isOptionEnabled( PrinterOption option ) const \class QPrintEngine \reentrant - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup printing \brief The QPrintEngine class defines an interface for how QPrinter interacts with a given printing subsystem. diff --git a/src/gui/painting/qprinterinfo.qdoc b/src/gui/painting/qprinterinfo.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e3cbe96 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/gui/painting/qprinterinfo.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QPrinterInfo + + \brief The QPrinterInfo class gives access to information about + existing printers. + + \ingroup printing + + Use the static functions to generate a list of QPrinterInfo + objects. Each QPrinterInfo object in the list represents a single + printer and can be queried for name, supported paper sizes, and + whether or not it is the default printer. + + \since 4.4 +*/ + +/*! + \fn QList<QPrinterInfo> QPrinterInfo::availablePrinters() + + Returns a list of available printers on the system. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QPrinterInfo QPrinterInfo::defaultPrinter() + + Returns the default printer on the system. + + The return value should be checked using isNull() before being + used, in case there is no default printer. + + \sa isNull() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QPrinterInfo::QPrinterInfo() + + Constructs an empty QPrinterInfo object. + + \sa isNull() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QPrinterInfo::QPrinterInfo(const QPrinterInfo& src) + + Constructs a copy of \a src. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QPrinterInfo::QPrinterInfo(const QPrinter& printer) + + Constructs a QPrinterInfo object from \a printer. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QPrinterInfo::~QPrinterInfo() + + Destroys the QPrinterInfo object. References to the values in the + object become invalid. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QPrinterInfo& QPrinterInfo::operator=(const QPrinterInfo& src) + + Sets the QPrinterInfo object to be equal to \a src. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QString QPrinterInfo::printerName() const + + Returns the name of the printer. + + \sa QPrinter::setPrinterName() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QPrinterInfo::isNull() const + + Returns whether this QPrinterInfo object holds a printer definition. + + An empty QPrinterInfo object could result for example from calling + defaultPrinter() when there are no printers on the system. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QPrinterInfo::isDefault() const + + Returns whether this printer is the default printer. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QList< QPrinter::PaperSize> QPrinterInfo::supportedPaperSizes() const + \since 4.4 + + Returns a list of supported paper sizes by the printer. + + Not all printer drivers support this query, so the list may be empty. + On Mac OS X 10.3, this function always returns an empty list. +*/ diff --git a/src/gui/painting/qregion.cpp b/src/gui/painting/qregion.cpp index 4e75911..4ddc8f3 100644 --- a/src/gui/painting/qregion.cpp +++ b/src/gui/painting/qregion.cpp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QRegion \brief The QRegion class specifies a clip region for a painter. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup shared QRegion is used with QPainter::setClipRegion() to limit the paint diff --git a/src/gui/painting/qstylepainter.cpp b/src/gui/painting/qstylepainter.cpp index 959caa9..93512d0 100644 --- a/src/gui/painting/qstylepainter.cpp +++ b/src/gui/painting/qstylepainter.cpp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE elements inside a widget. \ingroup appearance - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting QStylePainter extends QPainter with a set of high-level \c draw...() functions implemented on top of QStyle's API. The diff --git a/src/gui/painting/qtransform.cpp b/src/gui/painting/qtransform.cpp index 8832a3d..859767b 100644 --- a/src/gui/painting/qtransform.cpp +++ b/src/gui/painting/qtransform.cpp @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QTransform \brief The QTransform class specifies 2D transformations of a coordinate system. \since 4.3 - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting A transformation specifies how to translate, scale, shear, rotate or project the coordinate system, and is typically used when diff --git a/src/gui/styles/qmacstyle.qdoc b/src/gui/styles/qmacstyle.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..171ddb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/gui/styles/qmacstyle.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,261 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + + +/*! + \class QMacStyle + \brief The QMacStyle class provides a Mac OS X style using the Apple Appearance Manager. + + \ingroup appearance + + This class is implemented as a wrapper to the HITheme + APIs, allowing applications to be styled according to the current + theme in use on Mac OS X. This is done by having primitives + in QStyle implemented in terms of what Mac OS X would normally theme. + + \warning This style is only available on Mac OS X because it relies on the + HITheme APIs. + + There are additional issues that should be taken + into consideration to make an application compatible with the + \link http://developer.apple.com/documentation/UserExperience/Conceptual/OSXHIGuidelines/index.html + Apple Human Interface Guidelines \endlink. Some of these issues are outlined + below. + + \list + + \i Layout - The restrictions on window layout are such that some + aspects of layout that are style-dependent cannot be achieved + using QLayout. Changes are being considered (and feedback would be + appreciated) to make layouts QStyle-able. Some of the restrictions + involve horizontal and vertical widget alignment and widget size + (covered below). + + \i Widget size - Mac OS X allows widgets to have specific fixed sizes. Qt + does not fully implement this behavior so as to maintain cross-platform + compatibility. As a result some widgets sizes may be inappropriate (and + subsequently not rendered correctly by the HITheme APIs).The + QWidget::sizeHint() will return the appropriate size for many + managed widgets (widgets enumerated in \l QStyle::ContentsType). + + \i Effects - QMacStyle uses HITheme for performing most of the drawing, but + also uses emulation in a few cases where HITheme does not provide the + required functionality (for example, tab bars on Panther, the toolbar + separator, etc). We tried to make the emulation as close to the original as + possible. Please report any issues you see in effects or non-standard + widgets. + + \endlist + + There are other issues that need to be considered in the feel of + your application (including the general color scheme to match the + Aqua colors). The Guidelines mentioned above will remain current + with new advances and design suggestions for Mac OS X. + + Note that the functions provided by QMacStyle are + reimplementations of QStyle functions; see QStyle for their + documentation. + + \img qmacstyle.png + \sa QWindowsXPStyle, QWindowsStyle, QPlastiqueStyle, QCDEStyle, QMotifStyle +*/ + + +/*! + \enum QMacStyle::WidgetSizePolicy + + \value SizeSmall + \value SizeLarge + \value SizeMini + \value SizeDefault + \omitvalue SizeNone +*/ + +/*! \fn QMacStyle::QMacStyle() + Constructs a QMacStyle object. +*/ + +/*! \fn QMacStyle::~QMacStyle() + Destructs a QMacStyle object. +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMacStyle::polish(QPalette &pal) + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMacStyle::polish(QApplication *) + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMacStyle::unpolish(QApplication *) + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMacStyle::polish(QWidget* w) + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMacStyle::unpolish(QWidget* w) + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn int QMacStyle::pixelMetric(PixelMetric metric, const QStyleOption *opt, const QWidget *widget) const + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn QPalette QMacStyle::standardPalette() const + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn int QMacStyle::styleHint(StyleHint sh, const QStyleOption *opt, const QWidget *w, QStyleHintReturn *hret) const + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn QPixmap QMacStyle::generatedIconPixmap(QIcon::Mode iconMode, const QPixmap &pixmap, const QStyleOption *opt) const + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn QPixmap QMacStyle::standardPixmap(StandardPixmap standardPixmap, const QStyleOption *opt, const QWidget *widget) const + \reimp +*/ + +/*! + \enum QMacStyle::FocusRectPolicy + + This type is used to signify a widget's focus rectangle policy. + + \value FocusEnabled show a focus rectangle when the widget has focus. + \value FocusDisabled never show a focus rectangle for the widget. + \value FocusDefault show a focus rectangle when the widget has + focus and the widget is a QSpinWidget, QDateTimeEdit, QLineEdit, + QListBox, QListView, editable QTextEdit, or one of their + subclasses. +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMacStyle::setFocusRectPolicy(QWidget *w, FocusRectPolicy policy) + \obsolete + Sets the focus rectangle policy of \a w. The \a policy can be one of + \l{QMacStyle::FocusRectPolicy}. + + This is now simply an interface to the Qt::WA_MacShowFocusRect attribute and the + FocusDefault value does nothing anymore. If you want to set a widget back + to its default value, you must save the old value of the attribute before + you change it. + + \sa focusRectPolicy() QWidget::setAttribute() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMacStyle::FocusRectPolicy QMacStyle::focusRectPolicy(const QWidget *w) + \obsolete + Returns the focus rectangle policy for the widget \a w. + + The focus rectangle policy can be one of \l{QMacStyle::FocusRectPolicy}. + + In 4.3 and up this function will simply test for the + Qt::WA_MacShowFocusRect attribute and will never return + QMacStyle::FocusDefault. + + \sa setFocusRectPolicy(), QWidget::testAttribute() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMacStyle::setWidgetSizePolicy(const QWidget *widget, WidgetSizePolicy policy) + + \obsolete + + Call QWidget::setAttribute() with Qt::WA_MacMiniSize, Qt::WA_MacSmallSize, + or Qt::WA_MacNormalSize instead. +*/ + +/*! \fn QMacStyle::WidgetSizePolicy QMacStyle::widgetSizePolicy(const QWidget *widget) + \obsolete + + Call QWidget::testAttribute() with Qt::WA_MacMiniSize, Qt::WA_MacSmallSize, + or Qt::WA_MacNormalSize instead. +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMacStyle::drawPrimitive(PrimitiveElement pe, const QStyleOption *opt, QPainter *p, const QWidget *w) const + + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMacStyle::drawControl(ControlElement ce, const QStyleOption *opt, QPainter *p, const QWidget *w) const + + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn QRect QMacStyle::subElementRect(SubElement sr, const QStyleOption *opt, const QWidget *widget) const + + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMacStyle::drawComplexControl(ComplexControl cc, const QStyleOptionComplex *opt, QPainter *p, const QWidget *widget) const + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn QStyle::SubControl QMacStyle::hitTestComplexControl(ComplexControl cc, const QStyleOptionComplex *opt, const QPoint &pt, const QWidget *widget) const + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn QRect QMacStyle::subControlRect(ComplexControl cc, const QStyleOptionComplex *opt, SubControl sc, const QWidget *widget) const + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn QSize QMacStyle::sizeFromContents(ContentsType ct, const QStyleOption *opt, const QSize &csz, const QWidget *widget) const + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMacStyle::drawItemText(QPainter *p, const QRect &r, int flags, const QPalette &pal, bool enabled, const QString &text, QPalette::ColorRole textRole) const + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QMacStyle::event(QEvent *e) + \reimp +*/ + +/*! \fn QIcon QMacStyle::standardIconImplementation(StandardPixmap standardIcon, const QStyleOption *opt, const QWidget *widget) const + \internal +*/ + +/*! \fn int QMacStyle::layoutSpacingImplementation(QSizePolicy::ControlType control1, QSizePolicy::ControlType control2, Qt::Orientation orientation, const QStyleOption *option, const QWidget *widget) const + + \internal +*/ + diff --git a/src/gui/styles/qstyleoption.cpp b/src/gui/styles/qstyleoption.cpp index eabbb8d..04ecbc4 100644 --- a/src/gui/styles/qstyleoption.cpp +++ b/src/gui/styles/qstyleoption.cpp @@ -4937,7 +4937,7 @@ QStyleOptionSizeGrip::QStyleOptionSizeGrip(int version) \brief The QStyleOptionGraphicsItem class is used to describe the parameters needed to draw a QGraphicsItem. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup graphicsview-api For performance reasons, the access to the member variables is direct (i.e., using the \c . or \c -> operator). This low-level feel diff --git a/src/gui/text/qabstracttextdocumentlayout.cpp b/src/gui/text/qabstracttextdocumentlayout.cpp index 8b21c8f..f2ddeb6 100644 --- a/src/gui/text/qabstracttextdocumentlayout.cpp +++ b/src/gui/text/qabstracttextdocumentlayout.cpp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QAbstractTextDocumentLayout class is an abstract base class used to implement custom layouts for QTextDocuments. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing The standard layout provided by Qt can handle simple word processing including inline images, lists and tables. diff --git a/src/gui/text/qfont.cpp b/src/gui/text/qfont.cpp index d838f45..21277c5 100644 --- a/src/gui/text/qfont.cpp +++ b/src/gui/text/qfont.cpp @@ -408,11 +408,11 @@ QFontEngineData::~QFontEngineData() \brief The QFont class specifies a font used for drawing text. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup appearance \ingroup shared - \ingroup text - \mainclass + \ingroup richtext-processing + When you create a QFont object you specify various attributes that you want the font to have. Qt will use the font with the specified @@ -2270,9 +2270,8 @@ QDataStream &operator>>(QDataStream &s, QFont &font) \brief The QFontInfo class provides general information about fonts. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup appearance \ingroup shared - \ingroup text The QFontInfo class provides the same access functions as QFont, e.g. family(), pointSize(), italic(), weight(), fixedPitch(), diff --git a/src/gui/text/qfontdatabase.cpp b/src/gui/text/qfontdatabase.cpp index 03ecc84..7f0a7aa 100644 --- a/src/gui/text/qfontdatabase.cpp +++ b/src/gui/text/qfontdatabase.cpp @@ -1295,9 +1295,7 @@ QString QFontDatabase::styleString(const QFontInfo &fontInfo) \brief The QFontDatabase class provides information about the fonts available in the underlying window system. - \ingroup environment - \ingroup multimedia - \ingroup text + \ingroup appearance The most common uses of this class are to query the database for the list of font families() and for the pointSizes() and styles() @@ -2427,7 +2425,7 @@ QStringList QFontDatabase::applicationFontFamilies(int id) means that all QPainter::drawText() calls outside the GUI thread will not produce readable output. - \sa threads.html#painting-in-threads + \sa {Thread-Support in Qt Modules#Painting In Threads}{Painting In Threads} */ diff --git a/src/gui/text/qfontmetrics.cpp b/src/gui/text/qfontmetrics.cpp index b3d1a5f..c017f8b 100644 --- a/src/gui/text/qfontmetrics.cpp +++ b/src/gui/text/qfontmetrics.cpp @@ -75,9 +75,8 @@ extern int qt_defaultDpi(); \brief The QFontMetrics class provides font metrics information. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup shared - \ingroup text QFontMetrics functions calculate the size of characters and strings for a given font. There are three ways you can create a @@ -941,9 +940,8 @@ int QFontMetrics::lineWidth() const \brief The QFontMetricsF class provides font metrics information. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \ingroup shared - \ingroup text QFontMetricsF functions calculate the size of characters and strings for a given font. You can construct a QFontMetricsF object diff --git a/src/gui/text/qsyntaxhighlighter.cpp b/src/gui/text/qsyntaxhighlighter.cpp index 5c54500..cdb30ef 100644 --- a/src/gui/text/qsyntaxhighlighter.cpp +++ b/src/gui/text/qsyntaxhighlighter.cpp @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ void QSyntaxHighlighterPrivate::reformatBlock(QTextBlock block) \since 4.1 - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing The QSyntaxHighlighter class is a base class for implementing QTextEdit syntax highlighters. A syntax highligher automatically diff --git a/src/gui/text/qtextcursor.cpp b/src/gui/text/qtextcursor.cpp index f97146d..88ab9d0 100644 --- a/src/gui/text/qtextcursor.cpp +++ b/src/gui/text/qtextcursor.cpp @@ -854,9 +854,9 @@ QTextLayout *QTextCursorPrivate::blockLayout(QTextBlock &block) const{ \brief The QTextCursor class offers an API to access and modify QTextDocuments. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing \ingroup shared - \mainclass + Text cursors are objects that are used to access and modify the contents and underlying structure of text documents via a programming interface diff --git a/src/gui/text/qtextdocument.cpp b/src/gui/text/qtextdocument.cpp index 6fa3e90..bfed368 100644 --- a/src/gui/text/qtextdocument.cpp +++ b/src/gui/text/qtextdocument.cpp @@ -247,8 +247,8 @@ QTextCodec *Qt::codecForHtml(const QByteArray &ba) \brief The QTextDocument class holds formatted text that can be viewed and edited using a QTextEdit. - \ingroup text - \mainclass + \ingroup richtext-processing + QTextDocument is a container for structured rich text documents, providing support for styled text and various types of document elements, such as diff --git a/src/gui/text/qtextdocumentfragment.cpp b/src/gui/text/qtextdocumentfragment.cpp index da7025c..953e965 100644 --- a/src/gui/text/qtextdocumentfragment.cpp +++ b/src/gui/text/qtextdocumentfragment.cpp @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ void QTextDocumentFragmentPrivate::insert(QTextCursor &_cursor) const \brief The QTextDocumentFragment class represents a piece of formatted text from a QTextDocument. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing \ingroup shared A QTextDocumentFragment is a fragment of rich text, that can be inserted into diff --git a/src/gui/text/qtextdocumentwriter.cpp b/src/gui/text/qtextdocumentwriter.cpp index 33a5018..bdb5247 100644 --- a/src/gui/text/qtextdocumentwriter.cpp +++ b/src/gui/text/qtextdocumentwriter.cpp @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ public: \brief The QTextDocumentWriter class provides a format-independent interface for writing a QTextDocument to files or other devices. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing \ingroup io To write a document, construct a QTextDocumentWriter object with either a diff --git a/src/gui/text/qtextformat.cpp b/src/gui/text/qtextformat.cpp index 075f2ff..950e45c 100644 --- a/src/gui/text/qtextformat.cpp +++ b/src/gui/text/qtextformat.cpp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QTextLength class encapsulates the different types of length used in a QTextDocument. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing When we specify a value for the length of an element in a text document, we often need to provide some other information so that the length is @@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ Q_GUI_EXPORT QDataStream &operator>>(QDataStream &stream, QTextFormat &fmt) \brief The QTextFormat class provides formatting information for a QTextDocument. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing \ingroup shared A QTextFormat is a generic class used for describing the format of @@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ Q_GUI_EXPORT QDataStream &operator>>(QDataStream &stream, QTextFormat &fmt) associate the format with a QTextObject. It is used to represent lists, frames, and tables inside the document. - \sa {Text Processing Classes} + \sa {Rich Text Processing} */ /*! @@ -1184,7 +1184,7 @@ bool QTextFormat::operator==(const QTextFormat &rhs) const \brief The QTextCharFormat class provides formatting information for characters in a QTextDocument. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing The character format of text in a document specifies the visual properties of the text, as well as information about its role in a hypertext document. @@ -1797,7 +1797,7 @@ QFont QTextCharFormat::font() const \brief The QTextBlockFormat class provides formatting information for blocks of text in a QTextDocument. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing A document is composed of a list of blocks, represented by QTextBlock objects. Each block can contain an item of some kind, such as a @@ -2088,7 +2088,7 @@ QList<QTextOption::Tab> QTextBlockFormat::tabPositions() const \brief The QTextListFormat class provides formatting information for lists in a QTextDocument. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing A list is composed of one or more items, represented as text blocks. The list's format specifies the appearance of items in the list. @@ -2198,7 +2198,7 @@ QTextListFormat::QTextListFormat(const QTextFormat &fmt) \brief The QTextFrameFormat class provides formatting information for frames in a QTextDocument. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing A text frame groups together one or more blocks of text, providing a layer of structure larger than the paragraph. The format of a frame specifies @@ -2524,7 +2524,7 @@ qreal QTextFrameFormat::rightMargin() const \brief The QTextTableFormat class provides formatting information for tables in a QTextDocument. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing A table is a group of cells ordered into rows and columns. Each table contains at least one row and one column. Each cell contains a block. @@ -2730,7 +2730,7 @@ QTextTableFormat::QTextTableFormat(const QTextFormat &fmt) \brief The QTextImageFormat class provides formatting information for images in a QTextDocument. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing Inline images are represented by an object replacement character (0xFFFC in Unicode) which has an associated QTextImageFormat. The @@ -2999,7 +2999,7 @@ QTextTableCellFormat::QTextTableCellFormat(const QTextFormat &fmt) \brief The QTextTableCellFormat class provides formatting information for table cells in a QTextDocument. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing The table cell format of a table cell in a document specifies the visual properties of the table cell. diff --git a/src/gui/text/qtextlayout.cpp b/src/gui/text/qtextlayout.cpp index 242dbbf..cde5b5f 100644 --- a/src/gui/text/qtextlayout.cpp +++ b/src/gui/text/qtextlayout.cpp @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ static QFixed alignLine(QTextEngine *eng, const QScriptLine &line) \brief The QTextInlineObject class represents an inline object in a QTextLayout. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing This class is only used if the text layout is used to lay out parts of a QTextDocument. @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Qt::LayoutDirection QTextInlineObject::textDirection() const \brief The QTextLayout class is used to lay out and paint a single paragraph of text. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing It offers most features expected from a modern text layout engine, including Unicode compliant rendering, line breaking and @@ -1368,7 +1368,7 @@ void QTextLayout::drawCursor(QPainter *p, const QPointF &pos, int cursorPosition \brief The QTextLine class represents a line of text inside a QTextLayout. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing A text line is usually created by QTextLayout::createLine(). diff --git a/src/gui/text/qtextlist.cpp b/src/gui/text/qtextlist.cpp index 8348c92..3e5d7b0 100644 --- a/src/gui/text/qtextlist.cpp +++ b/src/gui/text/qtextlist.cpp @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ public: \brief The QTextList class provides a decorated list of items in a QTextDocument. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing A list contains a sequence of text blocks, each of which is marked with a bullet point or other symbol. Multiple levels of lists can be used, and diff --git a/src/gui/text/qtextobject.cpp b/src/gui/text/qtextobject.cpp index 5dc0c48..4ac0276 100644 --- a/src/gui/text/qtextobject.cpp +++ b/src/gui/text/qtextobject.cpp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QTextObject class is a base class for different kinds of objects that can group parts of a QTextDocument together. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing The common grouping text objects are lists (QTextList), frames (QTextFrame), and tables (QTextTable). A text object has an @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ QTextDocumentPrivate *QTextObject::docHandle() const \brief The QTextBlockGroup class provides a container for text blocks within a QTextDocument. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing Block groups can be used to organize blocks of text within a document. They maintain an up-to-date list of the text blocks that belong to @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ QTextFrameLayoutData::~QTextFrameLayoutData() \brief The QTextFrame class represents a frame in a QTextDocument. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing Text frames provide structure for the text in a document. They are used as generic containers for other document elements. @@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ void QTextFramePrivate::remove_me() \brief The iterator class provides an iterator for reading the contents of a QTextFrame. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing A frame consists of an arbitrary sequence of \l{QTextBlock}s and child \l{QTextFrame}s. This class provides a way to iterate over the @@ -799,7 +799,7 @@ QTextFrame::iterator &QTextFrame::iterator::operator--() \brief The QTextBlockUserData class is used to associate custom data with blocks of text. \since 4.1 - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing QTextBlockUserData provides an abstract interface for container classes that are used to associate application-specific user data with text blocks in a QTextDocument. @@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ QTextBlockUserData::~QTextBlockUserData() \brief The QTextBlock class provides a container for text fragments in a QTextDocument. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing A text block encapsulates a block or paragraph of text in a QTextDocument. QTextBlock provides read-only access to the block/paragraph structure of @@ -924,7 +924,7 @@ QTextBlockUserData::~QTextBlockUserData() \brief The QTextBlock::iterator class provides an iterator for reading the contents of a QTextBlock. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing A block consists of a sequence of text fragments. This class provides a way to iterate over these, and read their contents. It does not provide @@ -1525,7 +1525,7 @@ QTextBlock::iterator &QTextBlock::iterator::operator--() \brief The QTextFragment class holds a piece of text in a QTextDocument with a single QTextCharFormat. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing A text fragment describes a piece of text that is stored with a single character format. Text in which the character format changes can be diff --git a/src/gui/text/qtextoption.cpp b/src/gui/text/qtextoption.cpp index ca30ed4..20ba9bf 100644 --- a/src/gui/text/qtextoption.cpp +++ b/src/gui/text/qtextoption.cpp @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ QList<QTextOption::Tab> QTextOption::tabs() const \brief The QTextOption class provides a description of general rich text properties. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing QTextOption is used to encapsulate common rich text properties in a single object. It contains information about text alignment, layout direction, diff --git a/src/gui/text/qtexttable.cpp b/src/gui/text/qtexttable.cpp index 9097b4e..576758e 100644 --- a/src/gui/text/qtexttable.cpp +++ b/src/gui/text/qtexttable.cpp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QTextTableCell class represents the properties of a cell in a QTextTable. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing Table cells are pieces of document structure that belong to a table. The table orders cells into particular rows and columns; cells can @@ -492,7 +492,7 @@ void QTextTablePrivate::update() const \brief The QTextTable class represents a table in a QTextDocument. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing A table is a group of cells ordered into rows and columns. Each table contains at least one row and one column. Each cell contains a block, and diff --git a/src/gui/util/qsystemtrayicon.cpp b/src/gui/util/qsystemtrayicon.cpp index f4d2f7f..64591c7 100644 --- a/src/gui/util/qsystemtrayicon.cpp +++ b/src/gui/util/qsystemtrayicon.cpp @@ -65,7 +65,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QSystemTrayIcon \brief The QSystemTrayIcon class provides an icon for an application in the system tray. \since 4.2 - \ingroup application \ingroup desktop Modern operating systems usually provide a special area on the desktop, diff --git a/src/gui/util/qundogroup.cpp b/src/gui/util/qundogroup.cpp index 9fcfe95..07a3a3d 100644 --- a/src/gui/util/qundogroup.cpp +++ b/src/gui/util/qundogroup.cpp @@ -61,7 +61,6 @@ public: \class QUndoGroup \brief The QUndoGroup class is a group of QUndoStack objects. \since 4.2 - \ingroup misc For an overview of the Qt's undo framework, see the \link qundo.html overview\endlink. diff --git a/src/gui/util/qundostack.cpp b/src/gui/util/qundostack.cpp index a5e8004..065cc24 100644 --- a/src/gui/util/qundostack.cpp +++ b/src/gui/util/qundostack.cpp @@ -52,7 +52,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QUndoCommand \brief The QUndoCommand class is the base class of all commands stored on a QUndoStack. \since 4.2 - \ingroup misc For an overview of Qt's Undo Framework, see the \l{Overview of Qt's Undo Framework}{overview document}. @@ -292,7 +291,6 @@ const QUndoCommand *QUndoCommand::child(int index) const \class QUndoStack \brief The QUndoStack class is a stack of QUndoCommand objects. \since 4.2 - \ingroup misc For an overview of Qt's Undo Framework, see the \l{Overview of Qt's Undo Framework}{overview document}. diff --git a/src/gui/util/qundoview.cpp b/src/gui/util/qundoview.cpp index 0241500..079a62f 100644 --- a/src/gui/util/qundoview.cpp +++ b/src/gui/util/qundoview.cpp @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ QIcon QUndoModel::cleanIcon() const \class QUndoView \brief The QUndoView class displays the contents of a QUndoStack. \since 4.2 - \ingroup misc + \ingroup advanced QUndoView is a QListView which displays the list of commands pushed on an undo stack. diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qbuttongroup.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qbuttongroup.cpp index 8b89a86..26a9d51 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qbuttongroup.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qbuttongroup.cpp @@ -48,8 +48,6 @@ \ingroup organizers \ingroup geomanagement - \ingroup appearance - \mainclass QButtonGroup provides an abstract container into which button widgets can be placed. It does not provide a visual representation of this container diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qcalendarwidget.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qcalendarwidget.cpp index 8d5d0c7..377b4bb 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qcalendarwidget.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qcalendarwidget.cpp @@ -1960,7 +1960,7 @@ void QCalendarWidgetPrivate::_q_editingFinished() \brief The QCalendarWidget class provides a monthly based calendar widget allowing the user to select a date. \since 4.2 - \mainclass + \ingroup advanced \image cleanlooks-calendarwidget.png diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qcheckbox.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qcheckbox.cpp index 8cdf3b9..faec9d0 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qcheckbox.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qcheckbox.cpp @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ public: \brief The QCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + A QCheckBox is an option button that can be switched on (checked) or off (unchecked). Checkboxes are typically used to represent features in an diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qcombobox.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qcombobox.cpp index f3027be..0f54bac 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qcombobox.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qcombobox.cpp @@ -863,7 +863,7 @@ QComboBox::QComboBox(bool rw, QWidget *parent, const char *name) \brief The QComboBox widget is a combined button and popup list. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + A QComboBox provides a means of presenting a list of options to the user in a way that takes up the minimum amount of screen space. diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qcommandlinkbutton.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qcommandlinkbutton.cpp index 3d12ce9..206221f 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qcommandlinkbutton.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qcommandlinkbutton.cpp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QCommandLinkButton widget provides a Vista style command link button. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + The command link is a new control that was introduced by Windows Vista. It's intended use is similar to that of a radio button in that it is used to choose diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qdatetimeedit.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qdatetimeedit.cpp index 2900d39..0fca0b7 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qdatetimeedit.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qdatetimeedit.cpp @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QDateTimeEdit class provides a widget for editing dates and times. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + QDateTimeEdit allows the user to edit dates by using the keyboard or the arrow keys to increase and decrease date and time values. The @@ -1505,7 +1505,7 @@ void QDateTimeEdit::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event) the QDateTimeEdit widget. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + Many of the properties and functions provided by QTimeEdit are implemented in QDateTimeEdit. The following properties are most relevant to users of this @@ -1567,7 +1567,7 @@ QTimeEdit::QTimeEdit(const QTime &time, QWidget *parent) the QDateTimeEdit widget. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + Many of the properties and functions provided by QDateEdit are implemented in QDateTimeEdit. The following properties are most relevant to users of this diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qdial.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qdial.cpp index 3fe7c68..90f1c85 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qdial.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qdial.cpp @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ int QDialPrivate::valueFromPoint(const QPoint &p) const \brief The QDial class provides a rounded range control (like a speedometer or potentiometer). \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + QDial is used when the user needs to control a value within a program-definable range, and the range either wraps around diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qdialogbuttonbox.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qdialogbuttonbox.cpp index 5560367..515efc4 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qdialogbuttonbox.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qdialogbuttonbox.cpp @@ -57,8 +57,8 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QDialogButtonBox class is a widget that presents buttons in a layout that is appropriate to the current widget style. - \ingroup application - \mainclass + \ingroup dialog-classes + Dialogs and message boxes typically present buttons in a layout that conforms to the interface guidelines for that platform. Invariably, diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qdockwidget.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qdockwidget.cpp index a521921..1193b3e 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qdockwidget.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qdockwidget.cpp @@ -1069,7 +1069,7 @@ void QDockWidgetPrivate::setWindowState(bool floating, bool unplug, const QRect inside a QMainWindow or floated as a top-level window on the desktop. - \ingroup application + \ingroup mainwindow-classes QDockWidget provides the concept of dock widgets, also know as tool palettes or utility windows. Dock windows are secondary diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qfocusframe.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qfocusframe.cpp index 2c88a2e..65dc7d0 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qfocusframe.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qfocusframe.cpp @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ void QFocusFrame::initStyleOption(QStyleOption *option) const outside of a widget's normal paintable area. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + Normally an application will not need to create its own QFocusFrame as QStyle will handle this detail for diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qfontcombobox.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qfontcombobox.cpp index 24af989..d3f5bf9 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qfontcombobox.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qfontcombobox.cpp @@ -276,7 +276,6 @@ void QFontComboBoxPrivate::_q_currentChanged(const QString &text) \since 4.2 \ingroup basicwidgets - \ingroup text The combobox is populated with an alphabetized list of font family names, such as Arial, Helvetica, and Times New Roman. diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qframe.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qframe.cpp index a7861ad..62f2ddf 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qframe.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qframe.cpp @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ inline void QFramePrivate::init() \brief The QFrame class is the base class of widgets that can have a frame. \ingroup abstractwidgets - \mainclass + QMenu uses this to "raise" the menu above the surrounding screen. QProgressBar has a "sunken" look. QLabel has a flat look. diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qgroupbox.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qgroupbox.cpp index 03a08e8..daf92c0 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qgroupbox.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qgroupbox.cpp @@ -147,8 +147,6 @@ void QGroupBoxPrivate::click() \ingroup organizers \ingroup geomanagement - \ingroup appearance - \mainclass A group box provides a frame, a title and a keyboard shortcut, and displays various other widgets inside itself. The title is on top, diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qlabel.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qlabel.cpp index fd97c8f..a9c7e12 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qlabel.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qlabel.cpp @@ -61,8 +61,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QLabel widget provides a text or image display. \ingroup basicwidgets - \ingroup text - \mainclass QLabel is used for displaying text or an image. No user interaction functionality is provided. The visual appearance of diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qlcdnumber.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qlcdnumber.cpp index c4c97ab..d6f5e61 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qlcdnumber.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qlcdnumber.cpp @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ public: \brief The QLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + It can display a number in just about any size. It can display decimal, hexadecimal, octal or binary numbers. It is easy to diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qlineedit.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qlineedit.cpp index 3f44bc8..b88cd9ae 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qlineedit.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qlineedit.cpp @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ void QLineEdit::initStyleOption(QStyleOptionFrame *option) const \brief The QLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + A line edit allows the user to enter and edit a single line of plain text with a useful collection of editing functions, diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qmainwindow.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qmainwindow.cpp index 88059a0..e19961f 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qmainwindow.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qmainwindow.cpp @@ -146,8 +146,8 @@ void QMainWindowPrivate::init() \class QMainWindow \brief The QMainWindow class provides a main application window. - \ingroup application - \mainclass + \ingroup mainwindow-classes + \tableofcontents diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qmdiarea.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qmdiarea.cpp index 2390c25..e206bcf 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qmdiarea.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qmdiarea.cpp @@ -43,8 +43,8 @@ \class QMdiArea \brief The QMdiArea widget provides an area in which MDI windows are displayed. \since 4.3 - \ingroup application - \mainclass + \ingroup mainwindow-classes + QMdiArea functions, essentially, like a window manager for MDI windows. For instance, it draws the windows it manages on itself diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qmdisubwindow.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qmdisubwindow.cpp index c645429..d51bd99 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qmdisubwindow.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qmdisubwindow.cpp @@ -44,8 +44,8 @@ \brief The QMdiSubWindow class provides a subwindow class for QMdiArea. \since 4.3 - \ingroup application - \mainclass + \ingroup mainwindow-classes + QMdiSubWindow represents a top-level window in a QMdiArea, and consists of a title bar with window decorations, an internal widget, and diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qmenu.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qmenu.cpp index eb3b6b1..da63b0d 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qmenu.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qmenu.cpp @@ -1200,9 +1200,9 @@ void QMenu::initStyleOption(QStyleOptionMenuItem *option, const QAction *action) \brief The QMenu class provides a menu widget for use in menu bars, context menus, and other popup menus. - \ingroup application + \ingroup mainwindow-classes \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + A menu widget is a selection menu. It can be either a pull-down menu in a menu bar or a standalone context menu. Pull-down menus diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qmenubar.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qmenubar.cpp index 640ac5b..2989f94 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qmenubar.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qmenubar.cpp @@ -590,8 +590,7 @@ void QMenuBar::initStyleOption(QStyleOptionMenuItem *option, const QAction *acti \class QMenuBar \brief The QMenuBar class provides a horizontal menu bar. - \ingroup application - \mainclass + \ingroup mainwindow-classes A menu bar consists of a list of pull-down menu items. You add menu items with addMenu(). For example, asuming that \c menubar @@ -715,7 +714,7 @@ void QMenuBar::initStyleOption(QStyleOptionMenuItem *option, const QAction *acti \section1 Examples The \l{mainwindows/menus}{Menus} example shows how to use QMenuBar - and QMenu. The other \l{Qt Examples#Main Windows}{main window + and QMenu. The other \l{Main Window Examples}{main window application examples} also provide menus using these classes. \sa QMenu, QShortcut, QAction, diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qplaintextedit.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qplaintextedit.cpp index e489f3b..16b7c1e 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qplaintextedit.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qplaintextedit.cpp @@ -111,8 +111,7 @@ public: \since 4.4 \brief The QPlainTextDocumentLayout class implements a plain text layout for QTextDocument - \ingroup text - + \ingroup richtext-processing A QPlainTextDocumentLayout is required for text documents that can be display or edited in a QPlainTextEdit. See @@ -1007,8 +1006,8 @@ void QPlainTextEditPrivate::ensureViewportLayouted() \brief The QPlainTextEdit class provides a widget that is used to edit and display plain text. - \ingroup text - \mainclass + \ingroup richtext-processing + \tableofcontents diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qprintpreviewwidget.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qprintpreviewwidget.cpp index ade6223..40ea5a1 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qprintpreviewwidget.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qprintpreviewwidget.cpp @@ -452,7 +452,7 @@ void QPrintPreviewWidgetPrivate::setZoomFactor(qreal _zoomFactor) \brief The QPrintPreviewWidget class provides a widget for previewing page layouts for printer output. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup printing QPrintPreviewDialog uses a QPrintPreviewWidget internally, and the purpose of QPrintPreviewWidget is to make it possible to embed the diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qprogressbar.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qprogressbar.cpp index b35b9d3..9f91cf7 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qprogressbar.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qprogressbar.cpp @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ bool QProgressBarPrivate::repaintRequired() const \brief The QProgressBar widget provides a horizontal or vertical progress bar. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + A progress bar is used to give the user an indication of the progress of an operation and to reassure them that the application diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qpushbutton.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qpushbutton.cpp index 94b39e0..f991620 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qpushbutton.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qpushbutton.cpp @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QPushButton widget provides a command button. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + The push button, or command button, is perhaps the most commonly used widget in any graphical user interface. Push (click) a button diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qradiobutton.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qradiobutton.cpp index feada97..4b5cead 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qradiobutton.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qradiobutton.cpp @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ void QRadioButtonPrivate::init() \brief The QRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text label. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + A QRadioButton is an option button that can be switched on (checked) or off (unchecked). Radio buttons typically present the user with a "one diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qrubberband.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qrubberband.cpp index 5b61bd4..a04bc55 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qrubberband.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qrubberband.cpp @@ -98,9 +98,6 @@ void QRubberBand::initStyleOption(QStyleOptionRubberBand *option) const \brief The QRubberBand class provides a rectangle or line that can indicate a selection or a boundary. - \ingroup misc - \mainclass - A rubber band is often used to show a new bounding area (as in a QSplitter or a QDockWidget that is undocking). Historically this has been implemented using a QPainter and XOR, but this approach diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qscrollarea.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qscrollarea.cpp index 32d3c2b..31e558b 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qscrollarea.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qscrollarea.cpp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE another widget. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + A scroll area is used to display the contents of a child widget within a frame. If the widget exceeds the size of the frame, the diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qsizegrip.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qsizegrip.cpp index 080e328..8a1a0e6 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qsizegrip.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qsizegrip.cpp @@ -165,9 +165,8 @@ Qt::Corner QSizeGripPrivate::corner() const \brief The QSizeGrip class provides a resize handle for resizing top-level windows. - \ingroup application + \ingroup mainwindow-classes \ingroup basicwidgets - \ingroup appearance This widget works like the standard Windows resize handle. In the X11 version this resize handle generally works differently from diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qslider.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qslider.cpp index 0b7e7c1..d9c98e1 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qslider.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qslider.cpp @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ QStyle::SubControl QSliderPrivate::newHoverControl(const QPoint &pos) \brief The QSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + The slider is the classic widget for controlling a bounded value. It lets the user move a slider handle along a horizontal or vertical diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qspinbox.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qspinbox.cpp index c903610..f17c15f 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qspinbox.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qspinbox.cpp @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ public: \brief The QSpinBox class provides a spin box widget. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + QSpinBox is designed to handle integers and discrete sets of values (e.g., month names); use QDoubleSpinBox for floating point @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ void QSpinBox::fixup(QString &input) const takes doubles. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + QDoubleSpinBox allows the user to choose a value by clicking the up and down buttons or by pressing Up or Down on the keyboard to diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qsplashscreen.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qsplashscreen.cpp index e4f7307..2357164 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qsplashscreen.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qsplashscreen.cpp @@ -72,9 +72,6 @@ public: \brief The QSplashScreen widget provides a splash screen that can be shown during application startup. - \ingroup misc - \mainclass - A splash screen is a widget that is usually displayed when an application is being started. Splash screens are often used for applications that have long start up times (e.g. database or diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qsplitter.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qsplitter.cpp index 98cf2a8..0aa89f4 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qsplitter.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qsplitter.cpp @@ -931,7 +931,7 @@ QSplitterLayoutStruct *QSplitterPrivate::insertWidget(int index, QWidget *w) \brief The QSplitter class implements a splitter widget. \ingroup organizers - \mainclass + A splitter lets the user control the size of child widgets by dragging the boundary between the children. Any number of widgets may be controlled by a diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qstackedwidget.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qstackedwidget.cpp index da942d1..7dedf4a 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qstackedwidget.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qstackedwidget.cpp @@ -65,8 +65,7 @@ public: \ingroup organizers \ingroup geomanagement - \ingroup appearance - \mainclass + QStackedWidget can be used to create a user interface similar to the one provided by QTabWidget. It is a convenience layout widget diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qstatusbar.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qstatusbar.cpp index ed2d5d8..eb58c61 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qstatusbar.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qstatusbar.cpp @@ -158,9 +158,9 @@ QRect QStatusBarPrivate::messageRect() const \brief The QStatusBar class provides a horizontal bar suitable for presenting status information. - \ingroup application + \ingroup mainwindow-classes \ingroup helpsystem - \mainclass + Each status indicator falls into one of three categories: diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qtabbar.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qtabbar.cpp index 410c26f..5166390 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qtabbar.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qtabbar.cpp @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ void QTabBar::initStyleOption(QStyleOptionTab *option, int tabIndex) const \brief The QTabBar class provides a tab bar, e.g. for use in tabbed dialogs. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + QTabBar is straightforward to use; it draws the tabs using one of the predefined \link QTabBar::Shape shapes\endlink, and emits a diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qtabwidget.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qtabwidget.cpp index 6828c50..14a554a 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qtabwidget.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qtabwidget.cpp @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \ingroup organizers \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + A tab widget provides a tab bar (see QTabBar) and a "page area" that is used to display pages related to each tab. By default, the diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qtextbrowser.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qtextbrowser.cpp index 803b6fb..7a67a8d 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qtextbrowser.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qtextbrowser.cpp @@ -580,7 +580,7 @@ void QTextBrowserPrivate::restoreHistoryEntry(const HistoryEntry entry) \class QTextBrowser \brief The QTextBrowser class provides a rich text browser with hypertext navigation. - \ingroup text + \ingroup richtext-processing This class extends QTextEdit (in read-only mode), adding some navigation functionality so that users can follow links in hypertext documents. diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qtextedit.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qtextedit.cpp index a82adf7..a6e3c83 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qtextedit.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qtextedit.cpp @@ -333,8 +333,8 @@ void QTextEditPrivate::_q_ensureVisible(const QRectF &_rect) \brief The QTextEdit class provides a widget that is used to edit and display both plain and rich text. - \ingroup text - \mainclass + \ingroup richtext-processing + \tableofcontents diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qtoolbar.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qtoolbar.cpp index 37c7998..ef0847b 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qtoolbar.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qtoolbar.cpp @@ -412,8 +412,8 @@ void QToolBarPrivate::plug(const QRect &r) \brief The QToolBar class provides a movable panel that contains a set of controls. - \ingroup application - \mainclass + \ingroup mainwindow-classes + Toolbar buttons are added by adding \e actions, using addAction() or insertAction(). Groups of buttons can be separated using diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qtoolbox.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qtoolbox.cpp index 803c6ab..378ed17 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qtoolbox.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qtoolbox.cpp @@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ void QToolBoxButton::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *) \brief The QToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget items. - \mainclass + \ingroup basicwidgets A toolbox is a widget that displays a column of tabs one above the diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qtoolbutton.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qtoolbutton.cpp index bb8c32f..4ca3d62 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qtoolbutton.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qtoolbutton.cpp @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ bool QToolButtonPrivate::hasMenu() const commands or options, usually used inside a QToolBar. \ingroup basicwidgets - \mainclass + A tool button is a special button that provides quick-access to specific commands or options. As opposed to a normal command diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qvalidator.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qvalidator.cpp index 7db0247..8f43097 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qvalidator.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qvalidator.cpp @@ -55,9 +55,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QValidator \brief The QValidator class provides validation of input text. - \ingroup misc - \mainclass - The class itself is abstract. Two subclasses, \l QIntValidator and \l QDoubleValidator, provide basic numeric-range checking, and \l QRegExpValidator provides general checking using a custom regular @@ -246,8 +243,6 @@ void QValidator::fixup(QString &) const \brief The QIntValidator class provides a validator that ensures a string contains a valid integer within a specified range. - \ingroup misc - Example of use: \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_widgets_qvalidator.cpp 0 @@ -497,8 +492,6 @@ public: \brief The QDoubleValidator class provides range checking of floating-point numbers. - \ingroup misc - QDoubleValidator provides an upper bound, a lower bound, and a limit on the number of digits after the decimal point. It does not provide a fixup() function. @@ -767,8 +760,6 @@ QDoubleValidator::Notation QDoubleValidator::notation() const \brief The QRegExpValidator class is used to check a string against a regular expression. - \ingroup misc - QRegExpValidator uses a regular expression (regexp) to determine whether an input string is \l Acceptable, \l Intermediate, or \l Invalid. The regexp can either be supplied diff --git a/src/gui/widgets/qworkspace.cpp b/src/gui/widgets/qworkspace.cpp index d8bcf9b..cd98671 100644 --- a/src/gui/widgets/qworkspace.cpp +++ b/src/gui/widgets/qworkspace.cpp @@ -834,7 +834,6 @@ QSize QWorkspaceTitleBar::sizeHint() const \obsolete \brief The QWorkspace widget provides a workspace window that can be used in an MDI application. - \ingroup application This class is deprecated. Use QMdiArea instead. diff --git a/src/network/access/qftp.cpp b/src/network/access/qftp.cpp index 5d5c978..308037a 100644 --- a/src/network/access/qftp.cpp +++ b/src/network/access/qftp.cpp @@ -1294,9 +1294,9 @@ int QFtpPrivate::addCommand(QFtpCommand *cmd) \class QFtp \brief The QFtp class provides an implementation of the client side of FTP protocol. - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \inmodule QtNetwork - \mainclass + This class provides a direct interface to FTP that allows you to have more control over the requests. However, for new diff --git a/src/network/access/qhttp.cpp b/src/network/access/qhttp.cpp index 9d0b413..e789a9c 100644 --- a/src/network/access/qhttp.cpp +++ b/src/network/access/qhttp.cpp @@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ public: \obsolete \brief The QHttpHeader class contains header information for HTTP. - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \inmodule QtNetwork In most cases you should use the more specialized derivatives of @@ -1011,7 +1011,7 @@ public: \obsolete \brief The QHttpResponseHeader class contains response header information for HTTP. - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \inmodule QtNetwork This class is used by the QHttp class to report the header @@ -1216,7 +1216,7 @@ public: \obsolete \brief The QHttpRequestHeader class contains request header information for HTTP. - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \inmodule QtNetwork This class is used in the QHttp class to report the header @@ -1421,9 +1421,9 @@ QString QHttpRequestHeader::toString() const \brief The QHttp class provides an implementation of the HTTP protocol. - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \inmodule QtNetwork - \mainclass + This class provides a direct interface to HTTP that allows you to download and upload data with the HTTP protocol. diff --git a/src/network/access/qnetworkrequest.cpp b/src/network/access/qnetworkrequest.cpp index cc83e40..721f8c4 100644 --- a/src/network/access/qnetworkrequest.cpp +++ b/src/network/access/qnetworkrequest.cpp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QNetworkRequest class holds one request to be sent with the Network Access API. \since 4.4 - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \inmodule QtNetwork QNetworkRequest is part of the Network Access API and is the class diff --git a/src/network/kernel/qauthenticator.cpp b/src/network/kernel/qauthenticator.cpp index d0e60f7..fc9ff8b 100644 --- a/src/network/kernel/qauthenticator.cpp +++ b/src/network/kernel/qauthenticator.cpp @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ static QByteArray qNtlmPhase3(QAuthenticatorPrivate *ctx, const QByteArray& phas \since 4.3 \reentrant - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \inmodule QtNetwork The QAuthenticator class is usually used in the diff --git a/src/network/kernel/qhostaddress.cpp b/src/network/kernel/qhostaddress.cpp index 2391732..84bfee5 100644 --- a/src/network/kernel/qhostaddress.cpp +++ b/src/network/kernel/qhostaddress.cpp @@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ void QNetmaskAddress::setPrefixLength(QAbstractSocket::NetworkLayerProtocol prot /*! \class QHostAddress \brief The QHostAddress class provides an IP address. - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \inmodule QtNetwork This class holds an IPv4 or IPv6 address in a platform- and diff --git a/src/network/kernel/qhostinfo.cpp b/src/network/kernel/qhostinfo.cpp index 0b8e15c..ee1369d 100644 --- a/src/network/kernel/qhostinfo.cpp +++ b/src/network/kernel/qhostinfo.cpp @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ void QHostInfoAgent::staticCleanup() \reentrant \inmodule QtNetwork - \ingroup io + \ingroup network QHostInfo uses the lookup mechanisms provided by the operating system to find the IP address(es) associated with a host name, diff --git a/src/network/kernel/qnetworkinterface.cpp b/src/network/kernel/qnetworkinterface.cpp index f4088f8..d6ce745 100644 --- a/src/network/kernel/qnetworkinterface.cpp +++ b/src/network/kernel/qnetworkinterface.cpp @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ QString QNetworkInterfacePrivate::makeHwAddress(int len, uchar *data) \since 4.2 \reentrant - \ingroup io + \ingroup network Each network interface can contain zero or more IP addresses, which in turn can be associated with a netmask and/or a broadcast @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ void QNetworkAddressEntry::setBroadcast(const QHostAddress &newBroadcast) \since 4.2 \reentrant - \ingroup io + \ingroup network QNetworkInterface represents one network interface attached to the host where the program is being run. Each network interface may diff --git a/src/network/kernel/qnetworkproxy.cpp b/src/network/kernel/qnetworkproxy.cpp index 4a8d997..0fa54ed 100644 --- a/src/network/kernel/qnetworkproxy.cpp +++ b/src/network/kernel/qnetworkproxy.cpp @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ \brief The QNetworkProxy class provides a network layer proxy. \reentrant - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \inmodule QtNetwork QNetworkProxy provides the method for configuring network layer @@ -1118,7 +1118,7 @@ void QNetworkProxyQuery::setUrl(const QUrl &url) \brief The QNetworkProxyFactory class provides fine-grained proxy selection. \since 4.5 - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \inmodule QtNetwork QNetworkProxyFactory is an extension to QNetworkProxy, allowing diff --git a/src/network/kernel/qurlinfo.cpp b/src/network/kernel/qurlinfo.cpp index 626bce2..5ab200c 100644 --- a/src/network/kernel/qurlinfo.cpp +++ b/src/network/kernel/qurlinfo.cpp @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ public: \brief The QUrlInfo class stores information about URLs. \ingroup io - \ingroup misc + \ingroup network The information about a URL that can be retrieved includes name(), permissions(), owner(), group(), size(), lastModified(), diff --git a/src/network/socket/qabstractsocket.cpp b/src/network/socket/qabstractsocket.cpp index 49ffe3d..1ebe213 100644 --- a/src/network/socket/qabstractsocket.cpp +++ b/src/network/socket/qabstractsocket.cpp @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ common to all socket types. \reentrant - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \inmodule QtNetwork QAbstractSocket is the base class for QTcpSocket and QUdpSocket diff --git a/src/network/socket/qnativesocketengine.cpp b/src/network/socket/qnativesocketengine.cpp index a1643fe..45b06cb 100644 --- a/src/network/socket/qnativesocketengine.cpp +++ b/src/network/socket/qnativesocketengine.cpp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ \brief The QNativeSocketEngine class provides low level access to a socket. \reentrant - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \inmodule QtNetwork QtSocketLayer provides basic socket functionality provided by the diff --git a/src/network/socket/qtcpserver.cpp b/src/network/socket/qtcpserver.cpp index 11d5c3a..a73c2ac 100644 --- a/src/network/socket/qtcpserver.cpp +++ b/src/network/socket/qtcpserver.cpp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ \brief The QTcpServer class provides a TCP-based server. \reentrant - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \inmodule QtNetwork This class makes it possible to accept incoming TCP connections. diff --git a/src/network/socket/qtcpsocket.cpp b/src/network/socket/qtcpsocket.cpp index af1cee7..604143a 100644 --- a/src/network/socket/qtcpsocket.cpp +++ b/src/network/socket/qtcpsocket.cpp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ \brief The QTcpSocket class provides a TCP socket. \reentrant - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \inmodule QtNetwork TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is a reliable, diff --git a/src/network/socket/qudpsocket.cpp b/src/network/socket/qudpsocket.cpp index 3883ff5..0d055f7 100644 --- a/src/network/socket/qudpsocket.cpp +++ b/src/network/socket/qudpsocket.cpp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ \reentrant \brief The QUdpSocket class provides a UDP socket. - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \inmodule QtNetwork UDP (User Datagram Protocol) is a lightweight, unreliable, diff --git a/src/network/ssl/qssl.cpp b/src/network/ssl/qssl.cpp index c4f792e..1913b49 100644 --- a/src/network/ssl/qssl.cpp +++ b/src/network/ssl/qssl.cpp @@ -49,7 +49,8 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QSsl namespace declares enums common to all SSL classes in QtNetwork. \since 4.3 - \ingroup io + \ingroup network + \ingroup ssl \inmodule QtNetwork */ diff --git a/src/network/ssl/qsslcertificate.cpp b/src/network/ssl/qsslcertificate.cpp index 7e4bd7f..2782e1b 100644 --- a/src/network/ssl/qsslcertificate.cpp +++ b/src/network/ssl/qsslcertificate.cpp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ \since 4.3 \reentrant - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \ingroup ssl \inmodule QtNetwork diff --git a/src/network/ssl/qsslcipher.cpp b/src/network/ssl/qsslcipher.cpp index e13733a..d8ad88b 100644 --- a/src/network/ssl/qsslcipher.cpp +++ b/src/network/ssl/qsslcipher.cpp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ \since 4.3 \reentrant - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \ingroup ssl \inmodule QtNetwork diff --git a/src/network/ssl/qsslconfiguration.cpp b/src/network/ssl/qsslconfiguration.cpp index f207e99..87db324 100644 --- a/src/network/ssl/qsslconfiguration.cpp +++ b/src/network/ssl/qsslconfiguration.cpp @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ template<> void QSharedDataPointer<QSslConfigurationPrivate>::detach() \reentrant \inmodule QtNetwork - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \ingroup ssl QSslConfiguration is used by Qt networking classes to relay diff --git a/src/network/ssl/qsslerror.cpp b/src/network/ssl/qsslerror.cpp index 3536bc4..8fbd61f 100644 --- a/src/network/ssl/qsslerror.cpp +++ b/src/network/ssl/qsslerror.cpp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ \since 4.3 \reentrant - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \ingroup ssl \inmodule QtNetwork diff --git a/src/network/ssl/qsslkey.cpp b/src/network/ssl/qsslkey.cpp index 185d1e5..c5c7277 100644 --- a/src/network/ssl/qsslkey.cpp +++ b/src/network/ssl/qsslkey.cpp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ \since 4.3 \reentrant - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \ingroup ssl \inmodule QtNetwork diff --git a/src/network/ssl/qsslsocket.cpp b/src/network/ssl/qsslsocket.cpp index 390b1fc..cdbcb86 100644 --- a/src/network/ssl/qsslsocket.cpp +++ b/src/network/ssl/qsslsocket.cpp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ \since 4.3 \reentrant - \ingroup io + \ingroup network \ingroup ssl \inmodule QtNetwork diff --git a/src/opengl/qgl.cpp b/src/opengl/qgl.cpp index 67c02f2..e031fb5 100644 --- a/src/opengl/qgl.cpp +++ b/src/opengl/qgl.cpp @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ QGLSignalProxy *QGLSignalProxy::instance() \brief The QGL namespace specifies miscellaneous identifiers used in the Qt OpenGL module. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting-3D */ /*! @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ QGLSignalProxy *QGLSignalProxy::instance() \brief The QGLFormat class specifies the display format of an OpenGL rendering context. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting-3D A display format has several characteristics: \list @@ -1554,7 +1554,7 @@ Q_OPENGL_EXPORT QGLShareRegister* qgl_share_reg() \class QGLContext \brief The QGLContext class encapsulates an OpenGL rendering context. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting-3D An OpenGL rendering context is a complete set of OpenGL state variables. The rendering context's \l {QGL::FormatOption} {format} @@ -2775,8 +2775,8 @@ const QGLContext* QGLContext::currentContext() \class QGLWidget \brief The QGLWidget class is a widget for rendering OpenGL graphics. - \ingroup multimedia - \mainclass + \ingroup painting-3D + QGLWidget provides functionality for displaying OpenGL graphics integrated into a Qt application. It is very simple to use. You diff --git a/src/opengl/qglcolormap.cpp b/src/opengl/qglcolormap.cpp index 0d38ce7..cdbf1c8 100644 --- a/src/opengl/qglcolormap.cpp +++ b/src/opengl/qglcolormap.cpp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ QGLWidgets. \module OpenGL - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting-3D \ingroup shared QGLColormap provides a platform independent way of specifying and diff --git a/src/opengl/qglframebufferobject.cpp b/src/opengl/qglframebufferobject.cpp index b93cee8..db33297 100644 --- a/src/opengl/qglframebufferobject.cpp +++ b/src/opengl/qglframebufferobject.cpp @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ public: \since 4.6 - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting-3D A framebuffer object has several characteristics: \list @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ void QGLFramebufferObjectPrivate::init(const QSize &sz, QGLFramebufferObject::At \brief The QGLFramebufferObject class encapsulates an OpenGL framebuffer object. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting-3D The QGLFramebufferObject class encapsulates an OpenGL framebuffer object, defined by the \c{GL_EXT_framebuffer_object} extension. In diff --git a/src/opengl/qglpixelbuffer.cpp b/src/opengl/qglpixelbuffer.cpp index 884bb36..4140bdf 100644 --- a/src/opengl/qglpixelbuffer.cpp +++ b/src/opengl/qglpixelbuffer.cpp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ \brief The QGLPixelBuffer class encapsulates an OpenGL pbuffer. \since 4.1 - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting-3D Rendering into a pbuffer is normally done using full hardware acceleration. This can be significantly faster than rendering diff --git a/src/opengl/qglshaderprogram.cpp b/src/opengl/qglshaderprogram.cpp index e3627ff..f8bffd3 100644 --- a/src/opengl/qglshaderprogram.cpp +++ b/src/opengl/qglshaderprogram.cpp @@ -55,6 +55,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QGLShaderProgram \brief The QGLShaderProgram class allows OpenGL shader programs to be linked and used. \since 4.6 + \ingroup painting-3D \section1 Introduction @@ -181,6 +182,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QGLShader \brief The QGLShader class allows OpenGL shaders to be compiled. \since 4.6 + \ingroup painting-3D This class supports shaders written in the OpenGL Shading Language (GLSL) and in the OpenGL/ES Shading Language (GLSL/ES). diff --git a/src/qt3support/sql/q3sqlfieldinfo.qdoc b/src/qt3support/sql/q3sqlfieldinfo.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6f6f359 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/sql/q3sqlfieldinfo.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,234 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3SqlFieldInfo + \brief The Q3SqlFieldInfo class stores meta data associated with a SQL field. + + \compat + + Q3SqlFieldInfo objects only store meta data; field values are + stored in QSqlField objects. + + All values must be set in the constructor, and may be retrieved + using isRequired(), type(), length(), precision(), defaultValue(), + name(), isGenerated() and typeID(). + + \sa Q3SqlRecordInfo +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3SqlFieldInfo::Q3SqlFieldInfo(const QString& name, + QVariant::Type typ, + int required, + int len, + int prec, + const QVariant& defValue, + int typeID, + bool generated, + bool trim, + bool calculated) + + Constructs a Q3SqlFieldInfo with the following parameters: + \table + \row \i \a name \i the name of the field. + \row \i \a typ \i the field's type in a QVariant. + \row \i \a required \i greater than 0 if the field is required, 0 + if its value can be NULL and less than 0 if it cannot be + determined whether the field is required or not. + \row \i \a len \i the length of the field. Note that for + non-character types some databases return either the length in + bytes or the number of digits. -1 signifies that the length cannot + be determined. + \row \i \a prec \i the precision of the field, or -1 if the field + has no precision or it cannot be determined. + \row \i \a defValue \i the default value that is inserted into + the table if none is specified by the user. QVariant() if there is + no default value or it cannot be determined. + \row \i \a typeID \i the internal typeID of the database system + (only useful for low-level programming). 0 if unknown. + \row \i \a generated \i TRUE indicates that this field should be + included in auto-generated SQL statments, e.g. in Q3SqlCursor. + \row \i \a trim \i TRUE indicates that widgets should remove + trailing whitespace from character fields. This does not affect + the field value but only its representation inside widgets. + \row \i \a calculated \i TRUE indicates that the value of this + field is calculated. The value of calculated fields can by + modified by subclassing Q3SqlCursor and overriding + Q3SqlCursor::calculateField(). + \endtable +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3SqlFieldInfo::~Q3SqlFieldInfo() + + Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3SqlFieldInfo::Q3SqlFieldInfo(const QSqlField & other) + + Creates a Q3SqlFieldInfo object with the type and the name of the + QSqlField \a other. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3SqlFieldInfo::operator==(const Q3SqlFieldInfo& other) const + + Assigns \a other to this field info and returns a reference to it. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSqlField Q3SqlFieldInfo::toField() const + + Returns an empty QSqlField based on the information in this + Q3SqlFieldInfo. +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3SqlFieldInfo::isRequired() const + + Returns a value greater than 0 if the field is required (NULL + values are not allowed), 0 if it isn't required (NULL values are + allowed) or less than 0 if it cannot be determined whether the + field is required or not. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QVariant::Type Q3SqlFieldInfo::type() const + + Returns the field's type or QVariant::Invalid if the type is + unknown. +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3SqlFieldInfo::length() const + + Returns the field's length. For fields storing text the return + value is the maximum number of characters the field can hold. For + non-character fields some database systems return the number of + bytes needed or the number of digits allowed. If the length cannot + be determined -1 is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3SqlFieldInfo::precision() const + + Returns the field's precision or -1 if the field has no precision + or it cannot be determined. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QVariant Q3SqlFieldInfo::defaultValue() const + + Returns the field's default value or an empty QVariant if the + field has no default value or the value couldn't be determined. + The default value is the value inserted in the database when it + is not explicitly specified by the user. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QString Q3SqlFieldInfo::name() const + + Returns the name of the field in the SQL table. +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3SqlFieldInfo::typeID() const + + Returns the internal type identifier as returned from the database + system. The return value is 0 if the type is unknown. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3SqlFieldInfo::isGenerated() const + + Returns TRUE if the field should be included in auto-generated + SQL statments, e.g. in Q3SqlCursor; otherwise returns FALSE. + + \sa setGenerated() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3SqlFieldInfo::isTrim() const + + Returns TRUE if trailing whitespace should be removed from + character fields; otherwise returns FALSE. + + \sa setTrim() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3SqlFieldInfo::isCalculated() const + + Returns TRUE if the field is calculated; otherwise returns FALSE. + + \sa setCalculated() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3SqlFieldInfo::setTrim(bool trim) + + If \a trim is TRUE widgets should remove trailing whitespace from + character fields. This does not affect the field value but only + its representation inside widgets. + + \sa isTrim() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3SqlFieldInfo::setGenerated(bool generated) + + \a generated set to FALSE indicates that this field should not appear + in auto-generated SQL statements (for example in Q3SqlCursor). + + \sa isGenerated() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3SqlFieldInfo::setCalculated(bool calculated) + + \a calculated set to TRUE indicates that this field is a calculated + field. The value of calculated fields can by modified by subclassing + Q3SqlCursor and overriding Q3SqlCursor::calculateField(). + + \sa isCalculated() +*/ diff --git a/src/qt3support/sql/q3sqlrecordinfo.qdoc b/src/qt3support/sql/q3sqlrecordinfo.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ce60f6d --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/sql/q3sqlrecordinfo.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3SqlRecordInfo + \brief The Q3SqlRecordInfo class encapsulates a set of database field meta data. + + \compat + + This class is a list that holds a set of database field meta + data. Use contains() to see if a given field name exists in the + record, and use find() to get a QSqlFieldInfo record for a named + field. + + \sa Q3SqlFieldInfo +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3SqlRecordInfo::Q3SqlRecordInfo() + + Constructs an empty record info object. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3SqlRecordInfo::Q3SqlRecordInfo(const Q3SqlFieldInfoList& other) + \fn Q3SqlRecordInfo::Q3SqlRecordInfo(const QSqlRecord& other) + + Constructs a copy of \a other. +*/ + +/*! + \fn size_type Q3SqlRecordInfo::contains(const QString& fieldName) const + + Returns the number of times a field called \a fieldName occurs in + the record. Returns 0 if no field by that name could be found. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3SqlFieldInfo Q3SqlRecordInfo::find(const QString& fieldName) const + + Returns a QSqlFieldInfo object for the first field in the record + which has the field name \a fieldName. If no matching field is + found then an empty QSqlFieldInfo object is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSqlRecord Q3SqlRecordInfo::toRecord() const + + Returns an empty QSqlRecord based on the field information + in this Q3SqlRecordInfo. +*/ diff --git a/src/qt3support/tools/q3asciicache.qdoc b/src/qt3support/tools/q3asciicache.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b86113f --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/tools/q3asciicache.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,465 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3AsciiCache + \brief The Q3AsciiCache class is a template class that provides a cache based on char* keys. + \compat + + Q3AsciiCache is implemented as a template class. Define a template + instance Q3AsciiCache\<X\> to create a cache that operates on + pointers to X (X*). + + A cache is a least recently used (LRU) list of cache items. The + cache items are accessed via \c char* keys. For Unicode keys use + the Q3Cache template instead, which uses QString keys. A Q3Cache + has the same performace as a Q3AsciiCache. + + Each cache item has a cost. The sum of item costs, totalCost(), + will not exceed the maximum cache cost, maxCost(). If inserting a + new item would cause the total cost to exceed the maximum cost, + the least recently used items in the cache are removed. + + Apart from insert(), by far the most important function is find() + (which also exists as operator[]()). This function looks up an + item, returns it, and by default marks it as being the most + recently used item. + + There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the + cache. Calling \link Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete() + setAutoDelete(TRUE)\endlink tells the cache to delete items that + are removed. The default is to not delete items when then are + removed (i.e., remove() and take() are equivalent). + + When inserting an item into the cache, only the pointer is copied, + not the item itself. This is called a shallow copy. It is possible + to make the cache copy all of the item's data (known as a deep + copy) when an item is inserted. insert() calls the virtual + function Q3PtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted. + Inherit a cache and reimplement newItem() if you want deep copies. + + When removing a cache item the virtual function + Q3PtrCollection::deleteItem() is called. Its default implementation + in Q3AsciiCache is to delete the item if \link + Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + There is a Q3AsciiCacheIterator which may be used to traverse the + items in the cache in arbitrary order. + + \sa Q3AsciiCacheIterator, Q3Cache, Q3IntCache +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3AsciiCache::Q3AsciiCache( const Q3AsciiCache<type> &c ) + + \internal + + Do not use. A Q3AsciiCache cannot be copied. Calls qFatal() in debug version. +*/ + + +/*! + \fn Q3AsciiCache::Q3AsciiCache( int maxCost, int size, bool caseSensitive, bool copyKeys ) + + Constructs a cache whose contents will never have a total cost + greater than \a maxCost and which is expected to contain less than + \a size items. + + \a size is actually the size of an internal hash array; it's + usually best to make it prime and at least 50% bigger than the + largest expected number of items in the cache. + + Each inserted item has an associated cost. When inserting a new + item, if the total cost of all items in the cache will exceed \a + maxCost, the cache will start throwing out the older (least + recently used) items until there is enough room for the new item + to be inserted. + + If \a caseSensitive is TRUE (the default), the cache keys are case + sensitive; if it is FALSE, they are case-insensitive. + Case-insensitive comparison only affects the 26 letters in + US-ASCII. If \a copyKeys is TRUE (the default), Q3AsciiCache makes + a copy of the cache keys, otherwise it copies just the const char + * pointer - slightly faster if you can guarantee that the keys + will never change, but very risky. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3AsciiCache::~Q3AsciiCache() + + Removes all items from the cache and destroys it. + All iterators that access this cache will be reset. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3AsciiCache<type>& Q3AsciiCache::operator=( const Q3AsciiCache<type> &c ) + + \internal + + Do not use. A Q3AsciiCache cannot be copied. Calls qFatal() in debug version. +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3AsciiCache::maxCost() const + + Returns the maximum allowed total cost of the cache. + + \sa setMaxCost() totalCost() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3AsciiCache::totalCost() const + + Returns the total cost of the items in the cache. This is an + integer in the range 0 to maxCost(). + + \sa setMaxCost() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3AsciiCache::setMaxCost( int m ) + + Sets the maximum allowed total cost of the cache to \a m. If the + current total cost is greater than \a m, some items are removed + immediately. + + \sa maxCost() totalCost() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3AsciiCache::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the cache. + + \sa totalCost() size() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3AsciiCache::size() const + + Returns the size of the hash array used to implement the cache. + This should be a bit bigger than count() is likely to be. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3AsciiCache::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3AsciiCache::insert( const char *k, const type *d, int c, int p ) + + Inserts the item \a d into the cache using key \a k, and with an + associated cost of \a c. Returns TRUE if the item is successfully + inserted. Returns FALSE if the item is not inserted, for example, + if the cost of the item exceeds maxCost(). + + The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high, + Q3AsciiCache will remove old, least recently used items until there + is room for this new item. + + Items with duplicate keys can be inserted. + + The parameter \a p is internal and should be left at the default + value (0). + + \warning If this function returns FALSE, you must delete \a d + yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using \a d after + calling this function, because any other insertions into the + cache, from anywhere in the application or within Qt itself, could + cause the object to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to + become invalid. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3AsciiCache::remove( const char *k ) + + Removes the item with key \a k and returns TRUE if the item was + present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE. + + The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e., if + you have called \link Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete() + setAutoDelete(TRUE)\endlink. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was + inserted last is removed. + + All iterators that refer to the removed item are set to point to + the next item in the cache's traversal order. + + \sa take(), clear() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiCache::take( const char *k ) + + Takes the item associated with \a k out of the cache without + deleting it and returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0 + if the key does not exist in the cache. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was + inserted last is taken. + + All iterators that refer to the taken item are set to point to the + next item in the cache's traversal order. + + \sa remove(), clear() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3AsciiCache::clear() + + Removes all items from the cache, and deletes them if \link + Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink has been + enabled. + + All cache iterators that operate on this cache are reset. + + \sa remove() take() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiCache::find( const char *k, bool ref ) const + + Returns the item with key \a k, or 0 if the key does not exist + in the cache. If \a ref is TRUE (the default), the item is moved + to the front of the least recently used list. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was + inserted last is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiCache::operator[]( const char *k ) const + + Returns the item with key \a k, or 0 if \a k does not exist in + the cache, and moves the item to the front of the least recently + used list. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was + inserted last is returned. + + This is the same as find( k, TRUE ). + + \sa find() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3AsciiCache::statistics() const + + A debug-only utility function. Prints out cache usage, hit/miss, + and distribution information using qDebug(). This function does + nothing in the release library. +*/ + +/*! + \class Q3AsciiCacheIterator + \brief The Q3AsciiCacheIterator class provides an iterator for Q3AsciiCache collections. + \compat + + Note that the traversal order is arbitrary; you are not guaranteed + any particular order. If new objects are inserted into the cache + while the iterator is active, the iterator may or may not see + them. + + Multiple iterators are completely independent, even when they + operate on the same Q3AsciiCache. Q3AsciiCache updates all iterators + that refer an item when that item is removed. + + Q3AsciiCacheIterator provides an operator++() and an operator+=() + to traverse the cache; current() and currentKey() to access the + current cache item and its key. It also provides atFirst() and + atLast(), which return TRUE if the iterator points to the first or + last item in the cache respectively. The isEmpty() function + returns TRUE if the cache is empty; and count() returns the number + of items in the cache. + + Note that atFirst() and atLast() refer to the iterator's arbitrary + ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. + + \sa Q3AsciiCache +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3AsciiCacheIterator::Q3AsciiCacheIterator( const Q3AsciiCache<type> &cache ) + + Constructs an iterator for \a cache. The current iterator item is + set to point to the first item in the \a cache. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3AsciiCacheIterator::Q3AsciiCacheIterator (const Q3AsciiCacheIterator<type> & ci) + + Constructs an iterator for the same cache as \a ci. The new + iterator starts at the same item as ci.current() but moves + independently from there on. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3AsciiCacheIterator<type>& Q3AsciiCacheIterator::operator=( const Q3AsciiCacheIterator<type> &ci ) + + Makes this an iterator for the same cache as \a ci. The new + iterator starts at the same item as ci.current(), but moves + independently thereafter. +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3AsciiCacheIterator::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the cache over which this iterator + operates. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3AsciiCacheIterator::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the cache is empty, i.e. count() == 0; otherwise + returns FALSE. + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3AsciiCacheIterator::atFirst() const + + Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the first item in the + cache; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the + iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least + recently used list. + + \sa toFirst(), atLast() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3AsciiCacheIterator::atLast() const + + Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; + otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the iterator's + arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently + used list. + + \sa toLast(), atFirst() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiCacheIterator::toFirst() + + Sets the iterator to point to the first item in the cache and + returns a pointer to the item. + + Sets the iterator to 0 and returns 0 if the cache is empty. + + \sa toLast() isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiCacheIterator::toLast() + + Sets the iterator to point to the last item in the cache and + returns a pointer to the item. + + Sets the iterator to 0 and returns 0 if the cache is empty. + + \sa toFirst() isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3AsciiCacheIterator::operator type *() const + + Cast operator. Returns a pointer to the current iterator item. + Same as current(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiCacheIterator::current() const + + Returns a pointer to the current iterator item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn const char *Q3AsciiCacheIterator::currentKey() const + + Returns the key for the current iterator item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiCacheIterator::operator()() + + Makes the succeeding item current and returns the original current + item. + + If the current iterator item was the last item in the cache or if + it was 0, 0 is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiCacheIterator::operator+=( uint jump ) + + Returns the item \a jump positions after the current item, or 0 + if it is beyond the last item. Makes this the current item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiCacheIterator::operator-=( uint jump ) + + Returns the item \a jump positions before the current item, or 0 + if it is before the first item. Makes this the current item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiCacheIterator::operator++() + + Prefix ++ makes the iterator point to the item just after + current(), and makes that the new current item for the iterator. If + current() was the last item, operator++() returns 0. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiCacheIterator::operator--() + + Prefix -- makes the iterator point to the item just before + current(), and makes that the new current item for the iterator. If + current() was the first item, operator--() returns 0. +*/ + diff --git a/src/qt3support/tools/q3asciidict.qdoc b/src/qt3support/tools/q3asciidict.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1262a37 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/tools/q3asciidict.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,416 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3AsciiDict + \brief The Q3AsciiDict class is a template class that provides a dictionary based on char* keys. + \compat + + Q3AsciiDict is implemented as a template class. Define a template + instance Q3AsciiDict\<X\> to create a dictionary that operates on + pointers to X (X*). + + A dictionary is a collection of key-value pairs. The key is a + char* used for insertion, removal and lookup. The value is a + pointer. Dictionaries provide very fast insertion and lookup. + + Q3AsciiDict cannot handle Unicode keys; use the Q3Dict template + instead, which uses QString keys. A Q3Dict has the same + performace as a Q3AsciiDict. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3asciidict.qdoc 0 + In this example we use a dictionary to keep track of the line + edits we're using. We insert each line edit into the dictionary + with a unique name and then access the line edits via the + dictionary. See Q3PtrDict, Q3IntDict and Q3Dict. + + See Q3Dict for full details, including the choice of dictionary + size, and how deletions are handled. + + \sa Q3AsciiDictIterator, Q3Dict, Q3IntDict, Q3PtrDict +*/ + + +/*! + \fn Q3AsciiDict::Q3AsciiDict( int size, bool caseSensitive, bool copyKeys ) + + Constructs a dictionary optimized for less than \a size entries. + + We recommend setting \a size to a suitably large prime number (a + bit larger than the expected number of entries). This makes the + hash distribution better and will improve lookup performance. + + When \a caseSensitive is TRUE (the default) Q3AsciiDict treats + "abc" and "Abc" as different keys; when it is FALSE "abc" and + "Abc" are the same. Case-insensitive comparison only considers the + 26 letters in US-ASCII. + + If \a copyKeys is TRUE (the default), the dictionary copies keys + using strcpy(); if it is FALSE, the dictionary just copies the + pointers. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3AsciiDict::Q3AsciiDict( const Q3AsciiDict<type> &dict ) + + Constructs a copy of \a dict. + + Each item in \a dict is inserted into this dictionary. Only the + pointers are copied (shallow copy). +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3AsciiDict::~Q3AsciiDict() + + Removes all items from the dictionary and destroys it. + + The items are deleted if auto-delete is enabled. + + All iterators that access this dictionary will be reset. + + \sa setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3AsciiDict<type> &Q3AsciiDict::operator=(const Q3AsciiDict<type> &dict) + + Assigns \a dict to this dictionary and returns a reference to this + dictionary. + + This dictionary is first cleared and then each item in \a dict is + inserted into this dictionary. Only the pointers are copied + (shallow copy) unless newItem() has been reimplemented(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3AsciiDict::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the dictionary. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3AsciiDict::size() const + + Returns the size of the internal hash array (as specified in the + constructor). + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3AsciiDict::resize( uint newsize ) + + Changes the size of the hashtable to \a newsize. The contents of + the dictionary are preserved but all iterators on the dictionary + become invalid. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3AsciiDict::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0; + otherwise it returns FALSE. + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3AsciiDict::insert( const char *key, const type *item ) + + Inserts the \a key with the \a item into the dictionary. + + Multiple items can have the same key, in which case only the last + item will be accessible using \l operator[](). + + \a item may not be 0. + + \sa replace() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3AsciiDict::replace( const char *key, const type *item ) + + Replaces an item that has a key equal to \a key with \a item. + + If the item does not already exist, it will be inserted. + + \a item may not be 0. + + Equivalent to: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3asciidict.qdoc 1 + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most + recently inserted item will be replaced. + + \sa insert() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3AsciiDict::remove( const char *key ) + + Removes the item associated with \a key from the dictionary. + Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the key existed in the + dictionary; otherwise returns FALSE. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most + recently inserted item will be removed. + + The removed item is deleted if \link + Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + All dictionary iterators that refer to the removed item will be + set to point to the next item in the dictionary traversal order. + + \sa take(), clear(), setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiDict::take( const char *key ) + + Takes the item associated with \a key out of the dictionary + without deleting it (even if \link Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete() + auto-deletion\endlink is enabled). + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most + recently inserted item will be taken. + + Returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0 if the key does not + exist in the dictionary. + + All dictionary iterators that refer to the taken item will be set + to point to the next item in the dictionary traversal order. + + \sa remove(), clear(), setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3AsciiDict::clear() + + Removes all items from the dictionary. + + The removed items are deleted if \link + Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + All dictionary iterators that operate on dictionary are reset. + + \sa remove(), take(), setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiDict::find( const char *key ) const + + Returns the item associated with \a key, or 0 if the key does not + exist in the dictionary. + + This function uses an internal hashing algorithm to optimize + lookup. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the item that + was most recently inserted will be found. + + Equivalent to the [] operator. + + \sa operator[]() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiDict::operator[]( const char *key ) const + + Returns the item associated with \a key, or 0 if the key does + not exist in the dictionary. + + This function uses an internal hashing algorithm to optimize + lookup. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the item that + was most recently inserted will be found. + + Equivalent to the find() function. + + \sa find() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3AsciiDict::statistics() const + + Debugging-only function that prints out the dictionary + distribution using qDebug(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& Q3AsciiDict::read( QDataStream &s, + Q3PtrCollection::Item &item ) + + Reads a dictionary item from the stream \a s and returns a + reference to the stream. + + The default implementation sets \a item to 0. + + \sa write() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& Q3AsciiDict::write(QDataStream &s, Q3PtrCollection::Item item) const + + Writes a dictionary \a item to the stream \a s and returns a + reference to the stream. + + \sa read() +*/ + +/*! + \class Q3AsciiDictIterator + \brief The Q3AsciiDictIterator class provides an iterator for Q3AsciiDict collections. + \compat + + Q3AsciiDictIterator is implemented as a template class. Define a + template instance Q3AsciiDictIterator\<X\> to create a dictionary + iterator that operates on Q3AsciiDict\<X\> (dictionary of X*). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3asciidict.qdoc 2 + In the example we insert some line edits into a dictionary, then + iterate over the dictionary printing the strings associated with + those line edits. + + Note that the traversal order is arbitrary; you are not guaranteed + any particular order. + + Multiple iterators may independently traverse the same dictionary. + A Q3AsciiDict knows about all the iterators that are operating on + the dictionary. When an item is removed from the dictionary, + Q3AsciiDict updates all the iterators that are referring to the + removed item to point to the next item in the (arbitrary) + traversal order. + + \sa Q3AsciiDict +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3AsciiDictIterator::Q3AsciiDictIterator( const Q3AsciiDict<type> &dict ) + + Constructs an iterator for \a dict. The current iterator item is + set to point on the first item in the \a dict. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3AsciiDictIterator::~Q3AsciiDictIterator() + + Destroys the iterator. +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3AsciiDictIterator::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the dictionary this iterator + operates over. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3AsciiDictIterator::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0, + otherwise returns FALSE. + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiDictIterator::toFirst() + + Sets the current iterator item to point to the first item in the + dictionary and returns a pointer to the item. If the dictionary is + empty it sets the current item to 0 and returns 0. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3AsciiDictIterator::operator type *() const + + Cast operator. Returns a pointer to the current iterator item. + Same as current(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiDictIterator::current() const + + Returns a pointer to the current iterator item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn const char *Q3AsciiDictIterator::currentKey() const + + Returns a pointer to the key for the current iterator item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiDictIterator::operator()() + + Makes the succeeding item current and returns the original current + item. + + If the current iterator item was the last item in the dictionary + or if it was 0, 0 is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiDictIterator::operator++() + + Prefix ++ makes the succeeding item current and returns the new + current item. + + If the current iterator item was the last item in the dictionary + or if it was 0, 0 is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3AsciiDictIterator::operator+=( uint jump ) + + Sets the current item to the item \a jump positions after the + current item, and returns a pointer to that item. + + If that item is beyond the last item or if the dictionary is + empty, it sets the current item to 0 and returns 0. +*/ diff --git a/src/qt3support/tools/q3cache.qdoc b/src/qt3support/tools/q3cache.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..20b777f --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/tools/q3cache.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,461 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3Cache + \brief The Q3Cache class is a template class that provides a cache based on QString keys. + \compat + + A cache is a least recently used (LRU) list of cache items. Each + cache item has a key and a certain cost. The sum of item costs, + totalCost(), never exceeds the maximum cache cost, maxCost(). If + inserting a new item would cause the total cost to exceed the + maximum cost, the least recently used items in the cache are + removed. + + Q3Cache is a template class. Q3Cache\<X\> defines a cache that + operates on pointers to X, or X*. + + Apart from insert(), by far the most important function is find() + (which also exists as operator[]()). This function looks up an + item, returns it, and by default marks it as being the most + recently used item. + + There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the + cache. Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) for a cache tells it to delete + items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when + they are removed (i.e., remove() and take() are equivalent). + + When inserting an item into the cache, only the pointer is copied, + not the item itself. This is called a shallow copy. It is possible + to make the cache copy all of the item's data (known as a deep + copy) when an item is inserted. insert() calls the virtual + function Q3PtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted. + Inherit a cache and reimplement newItem() if you want deep copies. + + When removing a cache item, the virtual function + Q3PtrCollection::deleteItem() is called. The default + implementation deletes the item if auto-deletion is enabled, and + does nothing otherwise. + + There is a Q3CacheIterator that can be used to traverse the items + in the cache in arbitrary order. + + In Q3Cache, the cache items are accessed via QString keys, which + are Unicode strings. If you want to use non-Unicode, plain 8-bit + \c char* keys, use the Q3AsciiCache template. A Q3Cache has the + same performance as a Q3AsciiCache. + + \sa Q3CacheIterator, Q3AsciiCache, Q3IntCache +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3Cache::Q3Cache( const Q3Cache<type> &c ) + + \internal + + Do not use. A Q3Cache cannot be copied. Calls qFatal() in debug version. +*/ + + +/*! + \fn Q3Cache::Q3Cache( int maxCost, int size, bool caseSensitive ) + + Constructs a cache whose contents will never have a total cost + greater than \a maxCost and which is expected to contain less than + \a size items. + + \a size is actually the size of an internal hash array; it's + usually best to make it a prime number and at least 50% bigger + than the largest expected number of items in the cache. + + Each inserted item has an associated cost. When inserting a new + item, if the total cost of all items in the cache will exceed \a + maxCost, the cache will start throwing out the older (least + recently used) items until there is enough room for the new item + to be inserted. + + If \a caseSensitive is TRUE (the default), the cache keys are case + sensitive; if it is FALSE, they are case-insensitive. + Case-insensitive comparison considers all Unicode letters. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3Cache::~Q3Cache() + + Removes all items from the cache and destroys it. All iterators + that access this cache will be reset. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3Cache<type>& Q3Cache::operator=( const Q3Cache<type> &c ) + + \internal + + Do not use. A Q3Cache cannot be copied. Calls qFatal() in debug version. +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3Cache::maxCost() const + + Returns the maximum allowed total cost of the cache. + + \sa setMaxCost() totalCost() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3Cache::totalCost() const + + Returns the total cost of the items in the cache. This is an + integer in the range 0 to maxCost(). + + \sa setMaxCost() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3Cache::setMaxCost( int m ) + + Sets the maximum allowed total cost of the cache to \a m. If the + current total cost is greater than \a m, some items are deleted + immediately. + + \sa maxCost() totalCost() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3Cache::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the cache. + + \sa totalCost() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3Cache::size() const + + Returns the size of the hash array used to implement the cache. + This should be a bit bigger than count() is likely to be. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3Cache::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3Cache::insert( const QString &k, const type *d, int c, int p ) + + Inserts the item \a d into the cache with key \a k and associated + cost, \a c. Returns TRUE if it is successfully inserted; otherwise + returns FALSE. + + The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high, + Q3Cache will remove old, least recently used items until there is + room for this new item. + + The parameter \a p is internal and should be left at the default + value (0). + + \warning If this function returns FALSE (which could happen, e.g. + if the cost of this item alone exceeds maxCost()) you must delete + \a d yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using \a d + after calling this function because any other insertions into the + cache, from anywhere in the application or within Qt itself, could + cause the object to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to + become invalid. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3Cache::remove( const QString &k ) + + Removes the item associated with \a k, and returns TRUE if the + item was present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE. + + The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e., if + you have called setAutoDelete(TRUE). + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was + inserted last is removed. + + All iterators that refer to the removed item are set to point to + the next item in the cache's traversal order. + + \sa take(), clear() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3Cache::take( const QString &k ) + + Takes the item associated with \a k out of the cache without + deleting it, and returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0 + if the key does not exist in the cache. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was + inserted last is taken. + + All iterators that refer to the taken item are set to point to the + next item in the cache's traversal order. + + \sa remove(), clear() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3Cache::clear() + + Removes all items from the cache and deletes them if auto-deletion + has been enabled. + + All cache iterators that operate this on cache are reset. + + \sa remove() take() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3Cache::find( const QString &k, bool ref ) const + + Returns the item associated with key \a k, or 0 if the key does + not exist in the cache. If \a ref is TRUE (the default), the item + is moved to the front of the least recently used list. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was + inserted last is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3Cache::operator[]( const QString &k ) const + + Returns the item associated with key \a k, or 0 if \a k does not + exist in the cache, and moves the item to the front of the least + recently used list. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was + inserted last is returned. + + This is the same as find( k, TRUE ). + + \sa find() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3Cache::statistics() const + + A debug-only utility function. Prints out cache usage, hit/miss, + and distribution information using qDebug(). This function does + nothing in the release library. +*/ + +/***************************************************************************** + Q3CacheIterator documentation + *****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3CacheIterator qcache.h + \brief The Q3CacheIterator class provides an iterator for Q3Cache collections. + \compat + + Note that the traversal order is arbitrary; you are not guaranteed + any particular order. If new objects are inserted into the cache + while the iterator is active, the iterator may or may not see + them. + + Multiple iterators are completely independent, even when they + operate on the same Q3Cache. Q3Cache updates all iterators that + refer an item when that item is removed. + + Q3CacheIterator provides an operator++(), and an operator+=() to + traverse the cache. The current() and currentKey() functions are + used to access the current cache item and its key. The atFirst() + and atLast() return TRUE if the iterator points to the first or + last item in the cache respectively. The isEmpty() function + returns TRUE if the cache is empty, and count() returns the number + of items in the cache. + + Note that atFirst() and atLast() refer to the iterator's arbitrary + ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. + + \sa Q3Cache +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3CacheIterator::Q3CacheIterator( const Q3Cache<type> &cache ) + + Constructs an iterator for \a cache. The current iterator item is + set to point to the first item in the \a cache. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3CacheIterator::Q3CacheIterator (const Q3CacheIterator<type> & ci) + + Constructs an iterator for the same cache as \a ci. The new + iterator starts at the same item as ci.current(), but moves + independently from there on. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3CacheIterator<type>& Q3CacheIterator::operator=( const Q3CacheIterator<type> &ci ) + + Makes this an iterator for the same cache as \a ci. The new + iterator starts at the same item as ci.current(), but moves + independently thereafter. +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3CacheIterator::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the cache on which this iterator + operates. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3CacheIterator::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the cache is empty, i.e. count() == 0; otherwise + it returns FALSE. + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3CacheIterator::atFirst() const + + Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the first item in the + cache; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the + iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least + recently used list. + + \sa toFirst(), atLast() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3CacheIterator::atLast() const + + Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; + otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the iterator's + arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently + used list. + + \sa toLast(), atFirst() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3CacheIterator::toFirst() + + Sets the iterator to point to the first item in the cache and + returns a pointer to the item. + + Sets the iterator to 0 and returns 0 if the cache is empty. + + \sa toLast() isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3CacheIterator::toLast() + + Sets the iterator to point to the last item in the cache and + returns a pointer to the item. + + Sets the iterator to 0 and returns 0 if the cache is empty. + + \sa toFirst() isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3CacheIterator::operator type *() const + + Cast operator. Returns a pointer to the current iterator item. + Same as current(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3CacheIterator::current() const + + Returns a pointer to the current iterator item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QString Q3CacheIterator::currentKey() const + + Returns the key for the current iterator item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3CacheIterator::operator()() + + Makes the succeeding item current and returns the original current + item. + + If the current iterator item was the last item in the cache or if + it was 0, 0 is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3CacheIterator::operator+=( uint jump ) + + Returns the item \a jump positions after the current item, or 0 if + it is beyond the last item. Makes this the current item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3CacheIterator::operator-=( uint jump ) + + Returns the item \a jump positions before the current item, or 0 + if it is before the first item. Makes this the current item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3CacheIterator::operator++() + + Prefix++ makes the iterator point to the item just after current() + and makes that the new current item for the iterator. If current() + was the last item, operator++() returns 0. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3CacheIterator::operator--() + + Prefix-- makes the iterator point to the item just before + current() and makes that the new current item for the iterator. If + current() was the first item, operator--() returns 0. +*/ + diff --git a/src/qt3support/tools/q3dict.qdoc b/src/qt3support/tools/q3dict.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2234c2d --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/tools/q3dict.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,446 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3Dict + \brief The Q3Dict class is a template class that provides a + dictionary based on QString keys. + \compat + + Q3Dict is implemented as a template class. Define a template + instance Q3Dict\<X\> to create a dictionary that operates on + pointers to X (X *). + + A dictionary is a collection of key-value pairs. The key is a + QString used for insertion, removal and lookup. The value is a + pointer. Dictionaries provide very fast insertion and lookup. + + If you want to use non-Unicode, plain 8-bit \c char* keys, use the + Q3AsciiDict template. A Q3Dict has the same performance as a + Q3AsciiDict. If you want to have a dictionary that maps QStrings to + QStrings use QMap. + + The size() of the dictionary is very important. In order to get + good performance, you should use a suitably large prime number. + Suitable means equal to or larger than the maximum expected number + of dictionary items. Size is set in the constructor but may be + changed with resize(). + + Items are inserted with insert(); 0 pointers cannot be inserted. + Items are removed with remove(). All the items in a dictionary can + be removed with clear(). The number of items in the dictionary is + returned by count(). If the dictionary contains no items isEmpty() + returns TRUE. You can change an item's value with replace(). Items + are looked up with operator[](), or with find() which return a + pointer to the value or 0 if the given key does not exist. You can + take an item out of the dictionary with take(). + + Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) for a dictionary tells it to delete + items that are removed. The default behavior is not to delete + items when they are removed. + + When an item is inserted, the key is converted (hashed) to an + integer index into an internal hash array. This makes lookup very + fast. + + Items with equal keys are allowed. When inserting two items with + the same key, only the last inserted item will be accessible (last + in, first out) until it is removed. + + The Q3DictIterator class can traverse the dictionary, but only in + an arbitrary order. Multiple iterators may independently traverse + the same dictionary. + + When inserting an item into a dictionary, only the pointer is + copied, not the item itself, i.e. a shallow copy is made. It is + possible to make the dictionary copy all of the item's data (a + deep copy) when an item is inserted. insert() calls the virtual + function Q3PtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted. + Inherit a dictionary and reimplement newItem() if you want deep + copies. + + When removing a dictionary item, the virtual function + Q3PtrCollection::deleteItem() is called. Q3Dict's default + implementation is to delete the item if auto-deletion is enabled. + + \sa Q3DictIterator, Q3AsciiDict, Q3IntDict, Q3PtrDict +*/ + + +/*! + \fn Q3Dict::Q3Dict( int size, bool caseSensitive ) + + Constructs a dictionary optimized for less than \a size entries. + + We recommend setting \a size to a suitably large prime number + (e.g. a prime that's slightly larger than the expected number of + entries). This makes the hash distribution better which will lead + to faster lookup. + + If \a caseSensitive is TRUE (the default), keys which differ only + by case are considered different. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3Dict::Q3Dict( const Q3Dict<type> &dict ) + + Constructs a copy of \a dict. + + Each item in \a dict is inserted into this dictionary. Only the + pointers are copied (shallow copy). +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3Dict::~Q3Dict() + + Removes all items from the dictionary and destroys it. If + setAutoDelete() is TRUE, each value is deleted. All iterators that + access this dictionary will be reset. + + \sa setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3Dict<type> &Q3Dict::operator=(const Q3Dict<type> &dict) + + Assigns \a dict to this dictionary and returns a reference to this + dictionary. + + This dictionary is first cleared, then each item in \a dict is + inserted into this dictionary. Only the pointers are copied + (shallow copy), unless newItem() has been reimplemented. +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3Dict::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the dictionary. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3Dict::size() const + + Returns the size of the internal hash array (as specified in the + constructor). + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3Dict::resize( uint newsize ) + + Changes the size of the hash table to \a newsize. The contents of + the dictionary are preserved, but all iterators on the dictionary + become invalid. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3Dict::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0; + otherwise returns FALSE. + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3Dict::insert( const QString &key, const type *item ) + + Inserts the key \a key with value \a item into the dictionary. + + Multiple items can have the same key, in which case only the last + item will be accessible using \l operator[](). + + \a item may not be 0. + + \sa replace() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3Dict::replace( const QString &key, const type *item ) + + Replaces the value of the key, \a key with \a item. + + If the item does not already exist, it will be inserted. + + \a item may not be 0. + + Equivalent to: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3dict.qdoc 0 + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the last item + that was inserted will be replaced. + + \sa insert() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3Dict::remove( const QString &key ) + + Removes the item with \a key from the dictionary. Returns TRUE if + successful, i.e. if the item is in the dictionary; otherwise + returns FALSE. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the last item + that was inserted will be removed. + + The removed item is deleted if \link + Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + All dictionary iterators that refer to the removed item will be + set to point to the next item in the dictionary's traversal order. + + \sa take(), clear(), setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3Dict::take( const QString &key ) + + Takes the item with \a key out of the dictionary without deleting + it (even if \link Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete() + auto-deletion\endlink is enabled). + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the last item + that was inserted will be taken. + + Returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0 if the key does not + exist in the dictionary. + + All dictionary iterators that refer to the taken item will be set + to point to the next item in the dictionary traversal order. + + \sa remove(), clear(), setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3Dict::clear() + + Removes all items from the dictionary. + + The removed items are deleted if \link + Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + All dictionary iterators that operate on the dictionary are reset. + + \sa remove(), take(), setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3Dict::find( const QString &key ) const + + Returns the item with key \a key, or 0 if the key does not exist + in the dictionary. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most + recently inserted item will be found. + + Equivalent to the [] operator. + + \sa operator[]() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3Dict::operator[]( const QString &key ) const + + Returns the item with key \a key, or 0 if the key does not + exist in the dictionary. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most + recently inserted item will be found. + + Equivalent to the find() function. + + \sa find() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3Dict::statistics() const + + Debugging-only function that prints out the dictionary + distribution using qDebug(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& Q3Dict::read( QDataStream &s, Q3PtrCollection::Item &item ) + + Reads a dictionary item from the stream \a s and returns a + reference to the stream. + + The default implementation sets \a item to 0. + + \sa write() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& Q3Dict::write( QDataStream &s, Q3PtrCollection::Item item ) const + + Writes a dictionary \a item to the stream \a s and returns a + reference to the stream. + + \sa read() +*/ + +/*! + \class Q3DictIterator + \brief The Q3DictIterator class provides an iterator for Q3Dict collections. + \compat + + Q3DictIterator is implemented as a template class. Define a + template instance Q3DictIterator\<X\> to create a dictionary + iterator that operates on Q3Dict\<X\> (dictionary of X*). + + The traversal order is arbitrary; when we speak of the "first", + "last" and "next" item we are talking in terms of this arbitrary + order. + + Multiple iterators may independently traverse the same dictionary. + A Q3Dict knows about all the iterators that are operating on the + dictionary. When an item is removed from the dictionary, Q3Dict + updates all iterators that are referring to the removed item to + point to the next item in the (arbitrary) traversal order. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3dict.qdoc 1 + In the example we insert some pointers to line edits into a + dictionary, then iterate over the dictionary printing the strings + associated with the line edits. + + \sa Q3Dict +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3DictIterator::Q3DictIterator( const Q3Dict<type> &dict ) + + Constructs an iterator for \a dict. The current iterator item is + set to point to the first item in the dictionary, \a dict. First + in this context means first in the arbitrary traversal order. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3DictIterator::~Q3DictIterator() + + Destroys the iterator. +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3DictIterator::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the dictionary over which the + iterator is operating. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3DictIterator::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0; + otherwise returns FALSE. + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3DictIterator::toFirst() + + Resets the iterator, making the first item the first current item. + First in this context means first in the arbitrary traversal + order. Returns a pointer to this item. + + If the dictionary is empty it sets the current item to 0 and + returns 0. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3DictIterator::operator*() + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3DictIterator::operator type*() const + + Cast operator. Returns a pointer to the current iterator item. + Same as current(). +*/ + + +/*! + \fn type *Q3DictIterator::current() const + + Returns a pointer to the current iterator item's value. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QString Q3DictIterator::currentKey() const + + Returns the current iterator item's key. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3DictIterator::operator()() + + Makes the next item current and returns the original current item. + + If the current iterator item was the last item in the dictionary + or if it was 0, 0 is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3DictIterator::operator++() + + Prefix ++ makes the next item current and returns the new current + item. + + If the current iterator item was the last item in the dictionary + or if it was 0, 0 is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3DictIterator::operator+=( uint jump ) + \internal + Sets the current item to the item \a jump positions after the current item, + and returns a pointer to that item. + + If that item is beyond the last item or if the dictionary is empty, + it sets the current item to 0 and returns 0. +*/ diff --git a/src/qt3support/tools/q3intcache.qdoc b/src/qt3support/tools/q3intcache.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..770532e --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/tools/q3intcache.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,446 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3IntCache + \brief The Q3IntCache class is a template class that provides a cache based on long keys. + \compat + + Q3IntCache is implemented as a template class. Define a template + instance Q3IntCache\<X\> to create a cache that operates on + pointers to X, or X*. + + A cache is a least recently used (LRU) list of cache items, + accessed via \c long keys. Each cache item has a cost. The sum + of item costs, totalCost(), will not exceed the maximum cache + cost, maxCost(). If inserting a new item would cause the total + cost to exceed the maximum cost, the least recently used items in + the cache are removed. + + Apart from insert(), by far the most important function is find() + (which also exists as operator[]). This function looks up an + item, returns it, and by default marks it as being the most + recently used item. + + There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the + cache. Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) for a cache tells it to delete + items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when + they are removed (i.e. remove() and take() are equivalent). + + When inserting an item into the cache, only the pointer is copied, + not the item itself. This is called a shallow copy. It is possible + to make the cache copy all of the item's data (known as a deep + copy) when an item is inserted. insert() calls the virtual + function Q3PtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted. + Inherit a dictionary and reimplement newItem() if you want deep + copies. + + When removing a cache item, the item will be automatically + deleted if auto-deletion is enabled. + + There is a Q3IntCacheIterator which may be used to traverse the + items in the cache in arbitrary order. + + \sa Q3IntCacheIterator, Q3Cache, Q3AsciiCache +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3IntCache::Q3IntCache( const Q3IntCache<type> &c ) + + \internal + + Do not use. A Q3IntCache cannot be copied. Calls qFatal() in debug version. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3IntCache::Q3IntCache( int maxCost, int size ) + + Constructs a cache whose contents will never have a total cost + greater than \a maxCost and which is expected to contain less than + \a size items. + + \a size is actually the size of an internal hash array; it's + usually best to make it prime and at least 50% bigger than the + largest expected number of items in the cache. + + Each inserted item is associated with a cost. When inserting a new + item, if the total cost of all items in the cache will exceed \a + maxCost, the cache will start throwing out the older (least + recently used) items until there is enough room for the new item + to be inserted. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3IntCache::~Q3IntCache() + + Removes all items from the cache and then destroys the int cache. + If auto-deletion is enabled the cache's items are deleted. All + iterators that access this cache will be reset. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3IntCache<type>& Q3IntCache::operator=( const Q3IntCache<type> &c ) + + \internal + + Do not use. A Q3IntCache cannot be copied. Calls qFatal() in debug version. +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3IntCache::maxCost() const + + Returns the maximum allowed total cost of the cache. + + \sa setMaxCost() totalCost() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3IntCache::totalCost() const + + Returns the total cost of the items in the cache. This is an + integer in the range 0 to maxCost(). + + \sa setMaxCost() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3IntCache::setMaxCost( int m ) + + Sets the maximum allowed total cost of the cache to \a m. If the + current total cost is greater than \a m, some items are removed + immediately. + + \sa maxCost() totalCost() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3IntCache::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the cache. + + \sa totalCost() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3IntCache::size() const + + Returns the size of the hash array used to implement the cache. + This should be a bit larger than count() is likely to be. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3IntCache::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3IntCache::insert( long k, const type *d, int c, int p ) + + Inserts the item \a d into the cache with key \a k and assigns it + a cost of \a c (default 1). Returns TRUE if it succeeds; otherwise + returns FALSE. + + The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high, + Q3IntCache will remove old, least-used items until there is room + for this new item. + + The parameter \a p is internal and should be left at the default + value (0). + + \warning If this function returns FALSE (for example, the cost \c, + exceeds maxCost()), you must delete \a d yourself. Additionally, + be very careful about using \a d after calling this function. Any + other insertions into the cache, from anywhere in the application + or within Qt itself, could cause the object to be discarded from + the cache and the pointer to become invalid. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3IntCache::remove( long k ) + + Removes the item associated with \a k, and returns TRUE if the + item was present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE. + + The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e. if you + have called setAutoDelete(TRUE). + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was + inserted most recently is removed. + + All iterators that refer to the removed item are set to point to + the next item in the cache's traversal order. + + \sa take(), clear() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type * Q3IntCache::take( long k ) + + Takes the item associated with \a k out of the cache without + deleting it, and returns a pointer to the item taken out or 0 if + the key does not exist in the cache. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was + inserted most recently is taken. + + All iterators that refer to the taken item are set to point to the + next item in the cache's traversal order. + + \sa remove(), clear() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3IntCache::clear() + + Removes all items from the cache, and deletes them if + auto-deletion has been enabled. + + All cache iterators that operate this on cache are reset. + + \sa remove() take() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type * Q3IntCache::find( long k, bool ref ) const + + Returns the item associated with \a k, or 0 if the key does not + exist in the cache. If \a ref is TRUE (the default), the item is + moved to the front of the least recently used list. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was + inserted most recently is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type * Q3IntCache::operator[]( long k ) const + + Returns the item associated with \a k, or 0 if \a k does not exist + in the cache, and moves the item to the front of the least + recently used list. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was + inserted most recently is returned. + + This is the same as find( k, TRUE ). + + \sa find() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3IntCache::statistics() const + + A debug-only utility function. Prints out cache usage, hit/miss, + and distribution information using qDebug(). This function does + nothing in the release library. +*/ + +/*! + \class Q3IntCacheIterator + \brief The Q3IntCacheIterator class provides an iterator for Q3IntCache collections. + \compat + + Note that the traversal order is arbitrary; you are not guaranteed + any particular order. If new objects are inserted into the cache + while the iterator is active, the iterator may or may not see + them. + + Multiple iterators are completely independent, even when they + operate on the same Q3IntCache. Q3IntCache updates all iterators + that refer an item when that item is removed. + + Q3IntCacheIterator provides an operator++(), and an operator+=() to + traverse the cache; current() and currentKey() to access the + current cache item and its key; atFirst() atLast(), which return + TRUE if the iterator points to the first/last item in the cache; + isEmpty(), which returns TRUE if the cache is empty; and count(), + which returns the number of items in the cache. + + Note that atFirst() and atLast() refer to the iterator's arbitrary + ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. + + \sa Q3IntCache +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3IntCacheIterator::Q3IntCacheIterator( const Q3IntCache<type> &cache ) + + Constructs an iterator for \a cache. The current iterator item is + set to point to the first item in the \a cache (or rather, the + first item is defined to be the item at which this constructor + sets the iterator to point). +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3IntCacheIterator::Q3IntCacheIterator (const Q3IntCacheIterator<type> & ci) + + Constructs an iterator for the same cache as \a ci. The new + iterator starts at the same item as ci.current(), but moves + independently from there on. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3IntCacheIterator<type>& Q3IntCacheIterator::operator=( const Q3IntCacheIterator<type> &ci ) + + Makes this an iterator for the same cache as \a ci. The new + iterator starts at the same item as ci.current(), but moves + independently thereafter. +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3IntCacheIterator::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the cache on which this iterator + operates. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3IntCacheIterator::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3IntCacheIterator::atFirst() const + + Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the first item in the + cache; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the + iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least + recently used list. + + \sa toFirst(), atLast() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3IntCacheIterator::atLast() const + + Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; + otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the iterator's + arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently + used list. + + \sa toLast(), atFirst() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3IntCacheIterator::toFirst() + + Sets the iterator to point to the first item in the cache and + returns a pointer to the item. + + Sets the iterator to 0, and returns 0, if the cache is empty. + + \sa toLast() isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3IntCacheIterator::toLast() + + Sets the iterator to point to the last item in the cache and + returns a pointer to the item. + + Sets the iterator to 0, and returns 0, if the cache is empty. + + \sa toFirst() isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3IntCacheIterator::operator type *() const + + Cast operator. Returns a pointer to the current iterator item. + Same as current(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3IntCacheIterator::current() const + + Returns a pointer to the current iterator item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn long Q3IntCacheIterator::currentKey() const + + Returns the key for the current iterator item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3IntCacheIterator::operator()() + + Makes the succeeding item current and returns the original current + item. + + If the current iterator item was the last item in the cache or if + it was 0, 0 is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3IntCacheIterator::operator+=( uint jump ) + + Returns the item \a jump positions after the current item, or 0 if + it is beyond the last item. Makes this the current item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3IntCacheIterator::operator-=( uint jump ) + + Returns the item \a jump positions before the current item, or 0 + if it is beyond the first item. Makes this the current item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3IntCacheIterator::operator++() + + Prefix ++ makes the iterator point to the item just after + current(), and makes it the new current item for the iterator. If + current() was the last item, operator--() returns 0. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3IntCacheIterator::operator--() + + Prefix -- makes the iterator point to the item just before + current(), and makes it the new current item for the iterator. If + current() was the first item, operator--() returns 0. +*/ diff --git a/src/qt3support/tools/q3intdict.qdoc b/src/qt3support/tools/q3intdict.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..731050d --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/tools/q3intdict.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,390 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3IntDict + \brief The Q3IntDict class is a template class that provides a dictionary based on long keys.\ + \compat + + Q3IntDict is implemented as a template class. Define a template + instance Q3IntDict\<X\> to create a dictionary that operates on + pointers to X (X*). + + A dictionary is a collection of key-value pairs. The key is an \c + long used for insertion, removal and lookup. The value is a + pointer. Dictionaries provide very fast insertion and lookup. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3intdict.qdoc 0 + + See Q3Dict for full details, including the choice of dictionary + size, and how deletions are handled. + + \sa Q3IntDictIterator, Q3Dict, Q3AsciiDict, Q3PtrDict +*/ + + +/*! + \fn Q3IntDict::Q3IntDict( int size ) + + Constructs a dictionary using an internal hash array of size \a + size. + + Setting \a size to a suitably large prime number (equal to or + greater than the expected number of entries) makes the hash + distribution better which leads to faster lookup. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3IntDict::Q3IntDict( const Q3IntDict<type> &dict ) + + Constructs a copy of \a dict. + + Each item in \a dict is inserted into this dictionary. Only the + pointers are copied (shallow copy). +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3IntDict::~Q3IntDict() + + Removes all items from the dictionary and destroys it. + + All iterators that access this dictionary will be reset. + + \sa setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3IntDict<type> &Q3IntDict::operator=(const Q3IntDict<type> &dict) + + Assigns \a dict to this dictionary and returns a reference to this + dictionary. + + This dictionary is first cleared and then each item in \a dict is + inserted into this dictionary. Only the pointers are copied + (shallow copy), unless newItem() has been reimplemented. +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3IntDict::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the dictionary. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3IntDict::size() const + + Returns the size of the internal hash array (as specified in the + constructor). + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3IntDict::resize( uint newsize ) + + Changes the size of the hashtable to \a newsize. The contents of + the dictionary are preserved, but all iterators on the dictionary + become invalid. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3IntDict::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3IntDict::insert( long key, const type *item ) + + Insert item \a item into the dictionary using key \a key. + + Multiple items can have the same key, in which case only the last + item will be accessible using \l operator[](). + + \a item may not be 0. + + \sa replace() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3IntDict::replace( long key, const type *item ) + + If the dictionary has key \a key, this key's item is replaced with + \a item. If the dictionary doesn't contain key \a key, \a item is + inserted into the dictionary using key \a key. + + \a item may not be 0. + + Equivalent to: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3intdict.qdoc 1 + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most + recently inserted item will be replaced. + + \sa insert() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3IntDict::remove( long key ) + + Removes the item associated with \a key from the dictionary. + Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the \a key is in the + dictionary; otherwise returns FALSE. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most + recently inserted item will be removed. + + The removed item is deleted if \link + Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + All dictionary iterators that refer to the removed item will be + set to point to the next item in the dictionary's traversal + order. + + \sa take(), clear(), setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3IntDict::take( long key ) + + Takes the item associated with \a key out of the dictionary + without deleting it (even if \link Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete() + auto-deletion\endlink is enabled). + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most + recently inserted item will be taken. + + Returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0 if the key does not + exist in the dictionary. + + All dictionary iterators that refer to the taken item will be set + to point to the next item in the dictionary's traversing order. + + \sa remove(), clear(), setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3IntDict::clear() + + Removes all items from the dictionary. + + The removed items are deleted if \link + Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + All dictionary iterators that access this dictionary will be reset. + + \sa remove(), take(), setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3IntDict::find( long key ) const + + Returns the item associated with \a key, or 0 if the key does not + exist in the dictionary. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most + recently inserted item will be found. + + Equivalent to operator[]. + + \sa operator[]() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3IntDict::operator[]( long key ) const + + Returns the item associated with \a key, or 0 if the key does not + exist in the dictionary. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most + recently inserted item will be found. + + Equivalent to the find() function. + + \sa find() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3IntDict::statistics() const + + Debugging-only function that prints out the dictionary + distribution using qDebug(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& Q3IntDict::read( QDataStream &s, Q3PtrCollection::Item &item ) + + Reads a dictionary item from the stream \a s and returns a + reference to the stream. + + The default implementation sets \a item to 0. + + \sa write() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& Q3IntDict::write( QDataStream &s, Q3PtrCollection::Item item ) const + + Writes a dictionary \a item to the stream \a s and returns a + reference to the stream. + + \sa read() +*/ + +/*! + \class Q3IntDictIterator + \brief The Q3IntDictIterator class provides an iterator for Q3IntDict collections. + \compat + + Q3IntDictIterator is implemented as a template class. Define a + template instance Q3IntDictIterator\<X\> to create a dictionary + iterator that operates on Q3IntDict\<X\> (dictionary of X*). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3intdict.qdoc 2 + + Note that the traversal order is arbitrary; you are not guaranteed the + order shown above. + + Multiple iterators may independently traverse the same dictionary. + A Q3IntDict knows about all the iterators that are operating on the + dictionary. When an item is removed from the dictionary, Q3IntDict + updates all iterators that refer the removed item to point to the + next item in the traversal order. + + \sa Q3IntDict +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3IntDictIterator::Q3IntDictIterator( const Q3IntDict<type> &dict ) + + Constructs an iterator for \a dict. The current iterator item is + set to point to the 'first' item in the \a dict. The first item + refers to the first item in the dictionary's arbitrary internal + ordering. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3IntDictIterator::~Q3IntDictIterator() + + Destroys the iterator. +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3IntDictIterator::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the dictionary this iterator + operates over. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3IntDictIterator::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise eturns FALSE. + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3IntDictIterator::toFirst() + + Sets the current iterator item to point to the first item in the + dictionary and returns a pointer to the item. The first item + refers to the first item in the dictionary's arbitrary internal + ordering. If the dictionary is empty it sets the current item to + 0 and returns 0. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3IntDictIterator::operator type *() const + + Cast operator. Returns a pointer to the current iterator item. + Same as current(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3IntDictIterator::current() const + + Returns a pointer to the current iterator item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn long Q3IntDictIterator::currentKey() const + + Returns the key for the current iterator item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3IntDictIterator::operator()() + + Makes the succeeding item current and returns the original current + item. + + If the current iterator item was the last item in the dictionary + or if it was 0, 0 is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3IntDictIterator::operator++() + + Prefix ++ makes the succeeding item current and returns the new + current item. + + If the current iterator item was the last item in the dictionary + or if it was 0, 0 is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3IntDictIterator::operator+=( uint jump ) + + Sets the current item to the item \a jump positions after the + current item, and returns a pointer to that item. + + If that item is beyond the last item or if the dictionary is + empty, it sets the current item to 0 and returns 0. +*/ diff --git a/src/qt3support/tools/q3memarray.qdoc b/src/qt3support/tools/q3memarray.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eb0648c --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/tools/q3memarray.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,523 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3MemArray + \brief The Q3MemArray class is a template class that provides arrays of simple types. + \compat + + Q3MemArray is implemented as a template class. Define a template + instance Q3MemArray\<X\> to create an array that contains X items. + + Q3MemArray stores the array elements directly in the array. It can + only deal with simple types (i.e. C++ types, structs, and classes + that have no constructors, destructors, or virtual functions). + Q3MemArray uses bitwise operations to copy and compare array + elements. + + The Q3PtrVector collection class is also a kind of array. Like most + old Qt collection classes, it uses pointers to the contained items. + + Q3MemArray uses explicit sharing with a + reference count. If more than one array shares common data and one + of the arrays is modified, all the arrays are modified. + + The benefit of sharing is that a program does not need to duplicate + data when it is not required, which results in lower memory use + and less copying of data. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3memarray.qdoc 0 + + Program output: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3memarray.qdoc 1 + + Note concerning the use of Q3MemArray for manipulating structs or + classes: Compilers will often pad the size of structs of odd sizes + up to the nearest word boundary. This will then be the size + Q3MemArray will use for its bitwise element comparisons. Because + the remaining bytes will typically be uninitialized, this can + cause find() etc. to fail to find the element. Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3memarray.qdoc 2 + + To work around this, make sure that you use a struct where + sizeof() returns the same as the sum of the sizes of the members + either by changing the types of the struct members or by adding + dummy members. + + Q3MemArray data can be traversed by iterators (see begin() and + end()). The number of items is returned by count(). The array can + be resized with resize() and filled using fill(). + + You can make a shallow copy of the array with assign() (or + operator=()) and a deep copy with duplicate(). + + Search for values in the array with find() and contains(). For + sorted arrays (see sort()) you can search using bsearch(). + + You can set the data directly using setRawData() and + resetRawData(), although this requires care. +*/ + +/*! \fn Q3MemArray::operator QVector<type>() const + + Automatically converts the Q3MemArray<type> into a QVector<type>. +*/ + +/*! \typedef Q3MemArray::Iterator + A Q3MemArray iterator. + \sa begin() end() +*/ +/*! \typedef Q3MemArray::ConstIterator + A const Q3MemArray iterator. + \sa begin() end() +*/ +/*! \typedef Q3MemArray::ValueType + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3MemArray::Q3MemArray() + + Constructs a null array. + + \sa isNull() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3MemArray::Q3MemArray( int size ) + + Constructs an array with room for \a size elements. Makes a null + array if \a size == 0. + + The elements are left uninitialized. + + \sa resize(), isNull() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3MemArray::Q3MemArray( const Q3MemArray<type> &a ) + + Constructs a shallow copy of \a a. + + \sa assign() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3MemArray::Q3MemArray(const QVector<type> &vector) + + Constructs a copy of \a vector. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3MemArray::Q3MemArray(int arg1, int arg2) + + Constructs an array \e{without allocating} array space. The + arguments \a arg1 and \a arg2 should be zero. Use at your own + risk. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3MemArray::~Q3MemArray() + + Dereferences the array data and deletes it if this was the last + reference. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3MemArray<type> &Q3MemArray::operator=( const Q3MemArray<type> &a ) + + Assigns a shallow copy of \a a to this array and returns a + reference to this array. + + Equivalent to assign( a ). +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3MemArray::data() const + + Returns a pointer to the actual array data. + + The array is a null array if data() == 0 (null pointer). + + \sa isNull() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3MemArray::nrefs() const + + Returns the reference count for the shared array data. This + reference count is always greater than zero. +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3MemArray::size() const + + Returns the size of the array (maximum number of elements). + + The array is a null array if size() == 0. + + \sa isNull(), resize() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3MemArray::count() const + + Returns the same as size(). + + \sa size() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3MemArray::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the array is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + + isEmpty() is equivalent to isNull() for Q3MemArray (unlike + QString). +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3MemArray::isNull() const + + Returns TRUE if the array is null; otherwise returns FALSE. + + A null array has size() == 0 and data() == 0. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3MemArray::resize( uint size, Optimization optim ) + + Resizes (expands or shrinks) the array to \a size elements. The + array becomes a null array if \a size == 0. + + Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the memory cannot be + allocated. + + New elements are not initialized. + + \a optim is either Q3GArray::MemOptim (the default) or + Q3GArray::SpeedOptim. When optimizing for speed rather than memory + consumption, the array uses a smart grow and shrink algorithm that + might allocate more memory than is actually needed for \a size + elements. This speeds up subsequent resize operations, for example + when appending many elements to an array, since the space has + already been allocated. + + \sa size() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3MemArray::resize( uint size ) + + \overload + + Resizes (expands or shrinks) the array to \a size elements. The + array becomes a null array if \a size == 0. + + Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated; + otherwise returns FALSE. + + New elements are not initialized. + + \sa size() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3MemArray::truncate( uint pos ) + + Truncates the array at position \a pos. + + Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated; + otherwise returns FALSE. + + Equivalent to resize(\a pos). + + \sa resize() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3MemArray::fill( const type &v, int size ) + + Fills the array with the value \a v. If \a size is specified as + different from -1, then the array will be resized before being + filled. + + Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \a size is -1, or \a size is + != -1 and the memory can be allocated; otherwise returns FALSE. + + \sa resize() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3MemArray::detach() + + Detaches this array from shared array data; i.e. it makes a + private, deep copy of the data. + + Copying will be performed only if the \link nrefs() reference + count\endlink is greater than one. + + \sa copy() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3MemArray<type> Q3MemArray::copy() const + + Returns a deep copy of this array. + + \sa detach(), duplicate() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3MemArray<type> &Q3MemArray::assign( const Q3MemArray<type> &a ) + + Shallow copy. Dereferences the current array and references the + data contained in \a a instead. Returns a reference to this array. + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3MemArray<type> &Q3MemArray::assign( const type *data, uint size ) + + \overload + + Shallow copy. Dereferences the current array and references the + array data \a data, which contains \a size elements. Returns a + reference to this array. + + Do not delete \a data later; Q3MemArray will call free() on it + at the right time. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3MemArray<type> &Q3MemArray::duplicate( const Q3MemArray<type> &a ) + + Deep copy. Dereferences the current array and obtains a copy of + the data contained in \a a instead. Returns a reference to this + array. + + \sa copy() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3MemArray<type> &Q3MemArray::duplicate( const type *data, uint size ) + + \overload + + Deep copy. Dereferences the current array and obtains a copy of + the array data \a data instead. Returns a reference to this array. + The size of the array is given by \a size. + + \sa copy() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3MemArray<type> &Q3MemArray::setRawData( const type *data, uint size ) + + Sets raw data and returns a reference to the array. + + Dereferences the current array and sets the new array data to \a + data and the new array size to \a size. Do not attempt to resize + or re-assign the array data when raw data has been set. Call + resetRawData(\a data, \a size) to reset the array. + + Setting raw data is useful because it sets Q3MemArray data without + allocating memory or copying data. + + Example I (intended use): + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3memarray.qdoc 3 + + Example II (you don't want to do this): + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3memarray.qdoc 4 + + \warning If you do not call resetRawData(), Q3MemArray will attempt + to deallocate or reallocate the raw data, which might not be too + good. Be careful. + + \sa resetRawData() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3MemArray::resetRawData( const type *data, uint size ) + + Removes internal references to the raw data that was set using + setRawData(). This means that Q3MemArray no longer has access to + the \a data, so you are free to manipulate \a data as you wish. + You can now use the Q3MemArray without affecting the original \a + data, for example by calling setRawData() with a pointer to some + other data. + + The arguments must be the \a data and length, \a size, that were + passed to setRawData(). This is for consistency checking. + + \sa setRawData() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3MemArray::find( const type &v, uint index ) const + + Finds the first occurrence of \a v, starting at position \a index. + + Returns the position of \a v, or -1 if \a v could not be found. + + \sa contains() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3MemArray::contains( const type &v ) const + + Returns the number of times \a v occurs in the array. + + \sa find() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3MemArray::sort() + + Sorts the array elements in ascending order, using bitwise + comparison (memcmp()). + + \sa bsearch() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3MemArray::bsearch( const type &v ) const + + In a sorted array (as sorted by sort()), finds the first + occurrence of \a v by using a binary search. For a sorted + array this is generally much faster than find(), which does + a linear search. + + Returns the position of \a v, or -1 if \a v could not be found. + + \sa sort(), find() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type &Q3MemArray::operator[]( int index ) const + + Returns a reference to the element at position \a index in the + array. + + This can be used to both read and set an element. Equivalent to + at(). + + \sa at() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type &Q3MemArray::at( uint index ) const + + Returns a reference to the element at position \a index in the array. + + This can be used to both read and set an element. + + \sa operator[]() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3MemArray::operator const type *() const + + Cast operator. Returns a pointer to the array. + + \sa data() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3MemArray::operator==( const Q3MemArray<type> &a ) const + + Returns TRUE if this array is equal to \a a; otherwise returns + FALSE. + + The two arrays are compared bitwise. + + \sa operator!=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3MemArray::operator!=( const Q3MemArray<type> &a ) const + + Returns TRUE if this array is different from \a a; otherwise + returns FALSE. + + The two arrays are compared bitwise. + + \sa operator==() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Iterator Q3MemArray::begin() + + Returns an iterator pointing at the beginning of this array. This + iterator can be used in the same way as the iterators of + Q3ValueList and QMap, for example. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Iterator Q3MemArray::end() + + Returns an iterator pointing behind the last element of this + array. This iterator can be used in the same way as the iterators + of Q3ValueList and QMap, for example. +*/ + +/*! + \fn ConstIterator Q3MemArray::begin() const + + \overload + + Returns a const iterator pointing at the beginning of this array. + This iterator can be used in the same way as the iterators of + Q3ValueList and QMap, for example. +*/ + +/*! + \fn ConstIterator Q3MemArray::end() const + + \overload + + Returns a const iterator pointing behind the last element of this + array. This iterator can be used in the same way as the iterators + of Q3ValueList and QMap, for example. +*/ diff --git a/src/qt3support/tools/q3ptrdict.qdoc b/src/qt3support/tools/q3ptrdict.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..531b085 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/tools/q3ptrdict.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,388 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3PtrDict + \brief The Q3PtrDict class is a template class that provides a dictionary based on void* keys. + \compat + + Q3PtrDict is implemented as a template class. Define a template + instance Q3PtrDict\<X\> to create a dictionary that operates on + pointers to X (X*). + + A dictionary is a collection of key-value pairs. The key is a + void* used for insertion, removal and lookup. The value is a + pointer. Dictionaries provide very fast insertion and lookup. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3ptrdict.qdoc 0 + In this example we use a dictionary to add an extra property (a + char*) to the line edits we're using. + + See Q3Dict for full details, including the choice of dictionary + size, and how deletions are handled. + + \sa Q3PtrDictIterator, Q3Dict, Q3AsciiDict, Q3IntDict +*/ + + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrDict::Q3PtrDict( int size ) + + Constructs a dictionary using an internal hash array with the size + \a size. + + Setting \a size to a suitably large prime number (equal to or + greater than the expected number of entries) makes the hash + distribution better and improves lookup performance. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrDict::Q3PtrDict( const Q3PtrDict<type> &dict ) + + Constructs a copy of \a dict. + + Each item in \a dict is inserted into this dictionary. Only the + pointers are copied (shallow copy). +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrDict::~Q3PtrDict() + + Removes all items from the dictionary and destroys it. + + All iterators that access this dictionary will be reset. + + \sa setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrDict<type> &Q3PtrDict::operator=(const Q3PtrDict<type> &dict) + + Assigns \a dict to this dictionary and returns a reference to this + dictionary. + + This dictionary is first cleared and then each item in \a dict is + inserted into the dictionary. Only the pointers are copied + (shallow copy), unless newItem() has been reimplemented. +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3PtrDict::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the dictionary. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3PtrDict::size() const + + Returns the size of the internal hash table (as specified in the + constructor). + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrDict::resize( uint newsize ) + + Changes the size of the hash table to \a newsize. The contents of + the dictionary are preserved, but all iterators on the dictionary + become invalid. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrDict::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrDict::insert( void *key, const type *item ) + + Inserts the \a key with the \a item into the dictionary. + + Multiple items can have the same key, in which case only the last + item will be accessible using \l operator[](). + + \a item may not be 0. + + \sa replace() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrDict::replace( void *key, const type *item ) + + If the dictionary has key \a key, this key's item is replaced with + \a item. If the dictionary doesn't contain key \a key, \a item is + inserted into the dictionary using key \a key. + + \a item may not be 0. + + Equivalent to + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3ptrdict.qdoc 1 + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most + recently inserted item will be replaced. + + \sa insert() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrDict::remove( void *key ) + + Removes the item associated with \a key from the dictionary. + Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \a key is in the dictionary; + otherwise returns FALSE. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most + recently inserted item will be removed. + + The removed item is deleted if \link + Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + All dictionary iterators that refer to the removed item will be + set to point to the next item in the dictionary traversal order. + + \sa take(), clear(), setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrDict::take( void *key ) + + Takes the item associated with \a key out of the dictionary + without deleting it (even if \link Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete() + auto-deletion\endlink is enabled). + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most + recently inserted item will be removed. + + Returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0 if the key does not + exist in the dictionary. + + All dictionary iterators that refer to the taken item will be set + to point to the next item in the dictionary traversal order. + + \sa remove(), clear(), setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrDict::clear() + + Removes all items from the dictionary. + + The removed items are deleted if \link + Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + All dictionary iterators that access this dictionary will be + reset. + + \sa remove(), take(), setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrDict::find( void *key ) const + + Returns the item associated with \a key, or 0 if the key does not + exist in the dictionary. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most + recently inserted item will be found. + + Equivalent to operator[]. + + \sa operator[]() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrDict::operator[]( void *key ) const + + Returns the item associated with \a key, or 0 if the key does not + exist in the dictionary. + + If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most + recently inserted item will be found. + + Equivalent to the find() function. + + \sa find() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrDict::statistics() const + + Debugging-only function that prints out the dictionary + distribution using qDebug(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& Q3PtrDict::read( QDataStream &s, Q3PtrCollection::Item &item ) + + Reads a dictionary item from the stream \a s and returns a + reference to the stream. + + The default implementation sets \a item to 0. + + \sa write() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& Q3PtrDict::write( QDataStream &s, Q3PtrCollection::Item item) const + + Writes a dictionary \a item to the stream \a s and returns a + reference to the stream. + + \sa read() +*/ + +/*! + \class Q3PtrDictIterator + \brief The Q3PtrDictIterator class provides an iterator for Q3PtrDict collections. + \compat + + Q3PtrDictIterator is implemented as a template class. Define a + template instance Q3PtrDictIterator\<X\> to create a dictionary + iterator that operates on Q3PtrDict\<X\> (dictionary of X*). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3ptrdict.qdoc 2 + In the example we insert some line edits into a dictionary, + associating a string with each. We then iterate over the + dictionary printing the associated strings. + + Multiple iterators may independently traverse the same dictionary. + A Q3PtrDict knows about all the iterators that are operating on the + dictionary. When an item is removed from the dictionary, Q3PtrDict + updates all iterators that refer the removed item to point to the + next item in the traversing order. + + \sa Q3PtrDict +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrDictIterator::Q3PtrDictIterator( const Q3PtrDict<type> &dict ) + + Constructs an iterator for \a dict. The current iterator item is + set to point on the first item in the \a dict. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrDictIterator::~Q3PtrDictIterator() + + Destroys the iterator. +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3PtrDictIterator::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the dictionary this iterator + operates on. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrDictIterator::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrDictIterator::toFirst() + + Sets the current iterator item to point to the first item in the + dictionary and returns a pointer to the item. If the dictionary is + empty, it sets the current item to 0 and returns 0. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrDictIterator::operator type *() const + + Cast operator. Returns a pointer to the current iterator item. + Same as current(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrDictIterator::current() const + + Returns a pointer to the current iterator item's value. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void *Q3PtrDictIterator::currentKey() const + + Returns the current iterator item's key. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrDictIterator::operator()() + + Makes the succeeding item current and returns the original current + item. + + If the current iterator item was the last item in the dictionary + or if it was 0, 0 is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrDictIterator::operator++() + + Prefix ++ makes the succeeding item current and returns the new + current item. + + If the current iterator item was the last item in the dictionary + or if it was 0, 0 is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrDictIterator::operator+=( uint jump ) + + Sets the current item to the item \a jump positions after the + current item and returns a pointer to that item. + + If that item is beyond the last item or if the dictionary is + empty, it sets the current item to 0 and returns 0. +*/ diff --git a/src/qt3support/tools/q3ptrlist.qdoc b/src/qt3support/tools/q3ptrlist.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b2b9c3f --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/tools/q3ptrlist.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,1157 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3PtrList + \brief The Q3PtrList class is a template class that provides a list. + \compat + + Q3ValueList is an STL-compatible alternative to this class. + + Define a template instance Q3PtrList\<X\> to create a list that + operates on pointers to X (X*). + + The list class is indexable and has a \link at() current + index\endlink and a \link current() current item\endlink. The + first item corresponds to index position 0. The current index is + -1 if the current item is 0. + + Items are inserted with prepend(), insert() or append(). Items are + removed with remove(), removeRef(), removeFirst() and + removeLast(). You can search for an item using find(), findNext(), + findRef() or findNextRef(). The list can be sorted with sort(). + You can count the number of occurrences of an item with contains() + or containsRef(). You can get a pointer to the current item with + current(), to an item at a particular index position in the list + with at() or to the first or last item with getFirst() and + getLast(). You can also iterate over the list with first(), + last(), next() and prev() (which all update current()). The list's + deletion property is set with setAutoDelete(). + + \target example + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3ptrlist.qdoc 0 + + The output is + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3ptrlist.qdoc 1 + + Q3PtrList has several member functions for traversing the list, but + using a Q3PtrListIterator can be more practical. Multiple list + iterators may traverse the same list, independently of each other + and of the current list item. + + In the example above we make the call setAutoDelete(true). + Enabling auto-deletion tells the list to delete items that are + removed. The default is to not delete items when they are removed + but this would cause a memory leak in the example because there + are no other references to the list items. + + When inserting an item into a list only the pointer is copied, not + the item itself, i.e. a shallow copy. It is possible to make the + list copy all of the item's data (deep copy) when an item is + inserted. insert(), inSort() and append() call the virtual + function Q3PtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted. + Inherit a list and reimplement newItem() to have deep copies. + + When removing an item from a list, the virtual function + Q3PtrCollection::deleteItem() is called. Q3PtrList's default + implementation is to delete the item if auto-deletion is enabled. + + The virtual function compareItems() can be reimplemented to + compare two list items. This function is called from all list + functions that need to compare list items, for instance + remove(const type*). If you only want to deal with pointers, there + are functions that compare pointers instead, for instance + removeRef(const type*). These functions are somewhat faster than + those that call compareItems(). + + List items are stored as \c void* in an internal Q3LNode, which + also holds pointers to the next and previous list items. The + functions currentNode(), removeNode(), and takeNode() operate + directly on the Q3LNode, but they should be used with care. The + data component of the node is available through Q3LNode::getData(). + + The Q3StrList class is a list of \c char*. + It reimplements newItem(), deleteItem() and compareItems(). (But + see QStringList for a list of Unicode QStrings.) + + \sa Q3PtrListIterator +*/ + + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrList::Q3PtrList() + + Constructs an empty list. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrList::Q3PtrList( const Q3PtrList<type> &list ) + + Constructs a copy of \a list. + + Each item in \a list is \link append() appended\endlink to this + list. Only the pointers are copied (shallow copy). +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrList::~Q3PtrList() + + Removes all items from the list and destroys the list. + + All list iterators that access this list will be reset. + + \sa setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrList<type> &Q3PtrList::operator=(const Q3PtrList<type> &list) + + Assigns \a list to this list and returns a reference to this list. + + This list is first cleared and then each item in \a list is \link + append() appended\endlink to this list. Only the pointers are + copied (shallow copy) unless newItem() has been reimplemented. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrList::operator==(const Q3PtrList<type> &list ) const + + Compares this list with \a list. Returns TRUE if the lists contain + the same data; otherwise returns FALSE. +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3PtrList::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the list. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrList::operator!=(const Q3PtrList<type> &list ) const + + Compares this list with \a list. Returns TRUE if the lists contain + different data; otherwise returns FALSE. +*/ + + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrList::sort() + + Sorts the list by the result of the virtual compareItems() + function. + + The heap sort algorithm is used for sorting. It sorts n items with + O(n*log n) comparisons. This is the asymptotic optimal solution of + the sorting problem. + + If the items in your list support operator<() and operator==(), + you might be better off with Q3SortedList because it implements the + compareItems() function for you using these two operators. + + \sa inSort() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrList::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the list is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrList::insert( uint index, const type *item ) + + Inserts the \a item at position \a index in the list. + + Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \a index is in range; + otherwise returns FALSE. The valid range is 0 to count() + (inclusively). The item is appended if \a index == count(). + + The inserted item becomes the current list item. + + \a item must not be 0. + + \sa append(), current(), replace() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrList::replace( uint index, const type *item ) + + Replaces the item at position \a index with the new \a item. + + Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. \a index is in the range 0 to + count()-1. + + \sa append(), current(), insert() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrList::inSort( const type *item ) + + Inserts the \a item at its sorted position in the list. + + The sort order depends on the virtual compareItems() function. All + items must be inserted with inSort() to maintain the sorting + order. + + The inserted item becomes the current list item. + + \a item must not be 0. + + \warning Using inSort() is slow. An alternative, especially if you + have lots of items, is to simply append() or insert() them and + then use sort(). inSort() takes up to O(n) compares. That means + inserting n items in your list will need O(n^2) compares whereas + sort() only needs O(n*log n) for the same task. So use inSort() + only if you already have a presorted list and want to insert just + a few additional items. + + \sa insert(), compareItems(), current(), sort() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrList::append( const type *item ) + + Inserts the \a item at the end of the list. + + The inserted item becomes the current list item. This is + equivalent to \c{insert( count(), item )}. + + \a item must not be 0. + + \sa insert(), current(), prepend() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrList::prepend( const type *item ) + + Inserts the \a item at the start of the list. + + The inserted item becomes the current list item. This is + equivalent to \c{insert( 0, item )}. + + \a item must not be 0. + + \sa append(), insert(), current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrList::remove( uint index ) + + Removes the item at position \a index in the list. + + Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \a index is in range; + otherwise returns FALSE. The valid range is \c{0..(count() - 1)} + inclusive. + + The removed item is deleted if \link setAutoDelete() + auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item + if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last + item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item. + + All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to + point to the new current item. + + \sa take(), clear(), setAutoDelete(), current() removeRef() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrList::remove() + + \overload + + Removes the current list item. + + Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the current item isn't 0; + otherwise returns FALSE. + + The removed item is deleted if \link setAutoDelete() + auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item + if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last + item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item. The + current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty. + + All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to + point to the new current item. + + \sa take(), clear(), setAutoDelete(), current() removeRef() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrList::remove( const type *item ) + + \overload + + Removes the first occurrence of \a item from the list. + + Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \a item is in the list; + otherwise returns FALSE. + + The removed item is deleted if \link setAutoDelete() + auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + The compareItems() function is called when searching for the item + in the list. If compareItems() is not reimplemented, it is more + efficient to call removeRef(). + + If \a item is NULL then the current item is removed from the list. + + The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item + if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last + item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item. The + current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty. + + All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to + point to the new current item. + + \sa removeRef(), take(), clear(), setAutoDelete(), compareItems(), + current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrList::removeRef( const type *item ) + + Removes the first occurrence of \a item from the list. + + Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \a item is in the list; + otherwise returns FALSE. + + The removed item is deleted if \link setAutoDelete() + auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + Equivalent to: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3ptrlist.qdoc 2 + + The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item + if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last + item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item. The + current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty. + + All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to + point to the new current item. + + \sa remove(), clear(), setAutoDelete(), current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrList::removeNode( Q3LNode *node ) + + Removes the \a node from the list. + + This node must exist in the list, otherwise the program may crash. + + The removed item is deleted if \link setAutoDelete() + auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + The first item in the list will become the new current list item. + The current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty. + + All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to + point to the item succeeding this item or to the preceding item if + the removed item was the last item. + + \warning Do not call this function unless you are an expert. + + \sa takeNode(), currentNode() remove() removeRef() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrList::removeFirst() + + Removes the first item from the list. Returns TRUE if successful, + i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + + The removed item is deleted if \link setAutoDelete() + auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + The first item in the list becomes the new current list item. The + current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty. + + All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to + point to the new current item. + + \sa removeLast(), setAutoDelete(), current() remove() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrList::removeLast() + + Removes the last item from the list. Returns TRUE if successful, + i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + + The removed item is deleted if \link setAutoDelete() + auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + The last item in the list becomes the new current list item. The + current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty. + + All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to + point to the new current item. + + \sa removeFirst(), setAutoDelete(), current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrList::take( uint index ) + + Takes the item at position \a index out of the list without + deleting it (even if \link setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink + is enabled). + + Returns a pointer to the item taken out of the list, or 0 if the + index is out of range. The valid range is \c{0..(count() - 1)} + inclusive. + + The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item + if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last + item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item. The + current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty. + + All list iterators that refer to the taken item will be set to + point to the new current item. + + \sa remove(), clear(), current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrList::take() + + \overload + + Takes the current item out of the list without deleting it (even + if \link setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled). + + Returns a pointer to the item taken out of the list, or 0 if + the current item is 0. + + The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item + if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last + item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item. The + current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty. + + All list iterators that refer to the taken item will be set to + point to the new current item. + + \sa remove(), clear(), current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrList::takeNode( Q3LNode *node ) + + Takes the \a node out of the list without deleting its item (even + if \link setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled). + Returns a pointer to the item taken out of the list. + + This node must exist in the list, otherwise the program may crash. + + The first item in the list becomes the new current list item. + + All list iterators that refer to the taken item will be set to + point to the item succeeding this item or to the preceding item if + the taken item was the last item. + + \warning Do not call this function unless you are an expert. + + \sa removeNode(), currentNode() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrList::clear() + + Removes all items from the list. + + The removed items are deleted if \link setAutoDelete() + auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. + + All list iterators that access this list will be reset. + + \sa remove(), take(), setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3PtrList::find( const type *item ) + + Finds the first occurrence of \a item in the list. + + If the item is found, the list sets the current item to point to + the found item and returns the index of this item. If the item is + not found, the list sets the current item to 0, the current + index to -1, and returns -1. + + The compareItems() function is called when searching for the item + in the list. If compareItems() is not reimplemented, it is more + efficient to call findRef(). + + \sa findNext(), findRef(), compareItems(), current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3PtrList::findNext( const type *item ) + + Finds the next occurrence of \a item in the list, starting from + the current list item. + + If the item is found, the list sets the current item to point to + the found item and returns the index of this item. If the item is + not found, the list sets the current item to 0, the current + index to -1, and returns -1. + + The compareItems() function is called when searching for the item + in the list. If compareItems() is not reimplemented, it is more + efficient to call findNextRef(). + + \sa find(), findNextRef(), compareItems(), current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3PtrList::findRef( const type *item ) + + Finds the first occurrence of \a item in the list. + + If the item is found, the list sets the current item to point to + the found item and returns the index of this item. If the item is + not found, the list sets the current item to 0, the current + index to -1, and returns -1. + + Calling this function is much faster than find() because find() + compares \a item with each list item using compareItems(), whereas + this function only compares the pointers. + + \sa findNextRef(), find(), current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3PtrList::findNextRef( const type *item ) + + Finds the next occurrence of \a item in the list, starting from + the current list item. + + If the item is found, the list sets the current item to point to + the found item and returns the index of this item. If the item is + not found, the list sets the current item to 0, the current + index to -1, and returns -1. + + Calling this function is much faster than findNext() because + findNext() compares \a item with each list item using + compareItems(), whereas this function only compares the pointers. + + \sa findRef(), findNext(), current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3PtrList::contains( const type *item ) const + + Returns the number of occurrences of \a item in the list. + + The compareItems() function is called when looking for the \a item + in the list. If compareItems() is not reimplemented, it is more + efficient to call containsRef(). + + This function does not affect the current list item. + + \sa containsRef(), compareItems() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3PtrList::containsRef( const type *item ) const + + Returns the number of occurrences of \a item in the list. + + Calling this function is much faster than contains() because + contains() compares \a item with each list item using + compareItems(), whereas his function only compares the pointers. + + This function does not affect the current list item. + + \sa contains() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrList::at( uint index ) + + Returns a pointer to the item at position \a index in the list, or + 0 if the index is out of range. + + Sets the current list item to this item if \a index is valid. The + valid range is \c{0..(count() - 1)} inclusive. + + This function is very efficient. It starts scanning from the first + item, last item, or current item, whichever is closest to \a + index. + + \sa current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3PtrList::at() const + + \overload + + Returns the index of the current list item. The returned value is + -1 if the current item is 0. + + \sa current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrList::current() const + + Returns a pointer to the current list item. The current item may + be 0 (implies that the current index is -1). + + \sa at() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3LNode *Q3PtrList::currentNode() const + + Returns a pointer to the current list node. + + The node can be kept and removed later using removeNode(). The + advantage is that the item can be removed directly without + searching the list. + + \warning Do not call this function unless you are an expert. + + \sa removeNode(), takeNode(), current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrList::getFirst() const + + Returns a pointer to the first item in the list, or 0 if the list + is empty. + + This function does not affect the current list item. + + \sa first(), getLast() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrList::getLast() const + + Returns a pointer to the last item in the list, or 0 if the list + is empty. + + This function does not affect the current list item. + + \sa last(), getFirst() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrList::first() + + Returns a pointer to the first item in the list and makes this the + current list item; returns 0 if the list is empty. + + \sa getFirst(), last(), next(), prev(), current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrList::last() + + Returns a pointer to the last item in the list and makes this the + current list item; returns 0 if the list is empty. + + \sa getLast(), first(), next(), prev(), current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrList::next() + + Returns a pointer to the item succeeding the current item. Returns + 0 if the current item is 0 or equal to the last item. + + Makes the succeeding item current. If the current item before this + function call was the last item, the current item will be set to + 0. If the current item was 0, this function does nothing. + + \sa first(), last(), prev(), current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrList::prev() + + Returns a pointer to the item preceding the current item. Returns + 0 if the current item is 0 or equal to the first item. + + Makes the preceding item current. If the current item before this + function call was the first item, the current item will be set to + 0. If the current item was 0, this function does nothing. + + \sa first(), last(), next(), current() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrList::toVector( Q3GVector *vec ) const + + Stores all list items in the vector \a vec. + + The vector must be of the same item type, otherwise the result + will be undefined. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef Q3PtrList::iterator + + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \typedef Q3PtrList::Iterator + + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \typedef Q3PtrList::ConstIterator + + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \typedef Q3PtrList::const_iterator + + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrList::constBegin() const + + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrList::constEnd() const + + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrList::erase(Iterator) + + \internal +*/ + + +/***************************************************************************** + Q3PtrListIterator documentation + *****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3PtrListIterator + \brief The Q3PtrListIterator class provides an iterator for + Q3PtrList collections. + \compat + + Define a template instance Q3PtrListIterator\<X\> to create a list + iterator that operates on Q3PtrList\<X\> (list of X*). + + The following example is similar to the + example in the Q3PtrList class documentation, + but it uses Q3PtrListIterator. The class Employee is + defined there. + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3ptrlist.qdoc 3 + + The output is + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3ptrlist.qdoc 4 + + Using a list iterator is a more robust way of traversing the list + than using the Q3PtrList member functions \link Q3PtrList::first() + first\endlink(), \link Q3PtrList::next() next\endlink(), \link + Q3PtrList::current() current\endlink(), etc., as many iterators can + traverse the same list independently. + + An iterator has its own current list item and can get the next and + previous list items. It doesn't modify the list in any way. + + When an item is removed from the list, all iterators that point to + that item are updated to point to Q3PtrList::current() instead to + avoid dangling references. + + \sa Q3PtrList +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrListIterator::Q3PtrListIterator( const Q3PtrList<type> &list ) + + Constructs an iterator for \a list. The current iterator item is + set to point on the first item in the \a list. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrListIterator::~Q3PtrListIterator() + + Destroys the iterator. +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3PtrListIterator::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the list this iterator operates on. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrListIterator::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the list is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrListIterator::atFirst() const + + Returns TRUE if the current iterator item is the first list item; + otherwise returns FALSE. + + \sa toFirst(), atLast() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrListIterator::atLast() const + + Returns TRUE if the current iterator item is the last list item; + otherwise returns FALSE. + + \sa toLast(), atFirst() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrListIterator::toFirst() + + Sets the current iterator item to point to the first list item and + returns a pointer to the item. Sets the current item to 0 and + returns 0 if the list is empty. + + \sa toLast(), atFirst() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrListIterator::toLast() + + Sets the current iterator item to point to the last list item and + returns a pointer to the item. Sets the current item to 0 and + returns 0 if the list is empty. + + \sa toFirst(), atLast() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrListIterator::operator type *() const + + Cast operator. Returns a pointer to the current iterator item. + Same as current(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrListIterator::operator*() + + Asterisk operator. Returns a pointer to the current iterator item. + Same as current(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrListIterator::current() const + + Returns a pointer to the current iterator item. If the iterator is + positioned before the first item in the list or after the last + item in the list, 0 is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrListIterator::operator()() + + Makes the succeeding item current and returns the original current + item. + + If the current iterator item was the last item in the list or if + it was 0, 0 is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrListIterator::operator++() + + Prefix ++ makes the succeeding item current and returns the new + current item. + + If the current iterator item was the last item in the list or if + it was 0, 0 is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrListIterator::operator+=( uint jump ) + + Sets the current item to the item \a jump positions after the + current item and returns a pointer to that item. + + If that item is beyond the last item or if the list is empty, it + sets the current item to 0 and returns 0 +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrListIterator::operator--() + + Prefix - makes the preceding item current and returns the new + current item. + + If the current iterator item was the first item in the list or if + it was 0, 0 is returned. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrListIterator::operator-=( uint jump ) + + Returns the item \a jump positions before the current item or 0 + if it is beyond the first item. Makes this the current item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrListIterator<type>& Q3PtrListIterator::operator=( const Q3PtrListIterator<type> &it ) + + Assignment. Makes a copy of the iterator \a it and returns a + reference to this iterator. +*/ + +/*! + \class Q3StrList + \brief The Q3StrList class provides a doubly-linked list of char*. + \compat + + If you want a string list of \l{QString}s use QStringList. + + This class is a Q3PtrList\<char\> instance (a list of char*). + + Q3StrList can make deep or shallow copies of the strings that are + inserted. + + A deep copy means that memory is allocated for the string and then + the string data is copied into that memory. A shallow copy is just + a copy of the pointer value and not of the string data itself. + + The disadvantage of shallow copies is that because a pointer can + be deleted only once, the program must put all strings in a + central place and know when it is safe to delete them (i.e. when + the strings are no longer referenced by other parts of the + program). This can make the program more complex. The advantage of + shallow copies is that they consume far less memory than deep + copies. It is also much faster to copy a pointer (typically 4 or 8 + bytes) than to copy string data. + + A Q3StrList that operates on deep copies will, by default, turn on + auto-deletion (see setAutoDelete()). Thus, by default Q3StrList + will deallocate any string copies it allocates. + + The virtual compareItems() function is reimplemented and does a + case-sensitive string comparison. The inSort() function will + insert strings in sorted order. In general it is fastest to insert + the strings as they come and sort() at the end; inSort() is useful + when you just have to add a few extra strings to an already sorted + list. + + The Q3StrListIterator class is an iterator for Q3StrList. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3StrList::operator QList<QByteArray>() const + + Automatically converts a Q3StrList into a QList<QByteArray>. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3StrList::Q3StrList( bool deepCopies ) + + Constructs an empty list of strings. Will make deep copies of all + inserted strings if \a deepCopies is TRUE, or use shallow copies + if \a deepCopies is FALSE. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3StrList::Q3StrList(const Q3StrList &list) + \fn Q3StrList::Q3StrList(const QList<QByteArray> &list) + + Constructs a copy of \a list. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3StrList::~Q3StrList() + + Destroys the list. All strings are removed. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3StrList& Q3StrList::operator=(const Q3StrList& list) + \fn Q3StrList &Q3StrList::operator=(const QList<QByteArray> &list) + + Assigns \a list to this list and returns a reference to this list. +*/ + +/*! + \class Q3StrIList + \brief The Q3StrIList class provides a doubly-linked list of char* + with case-insensitive comparison. + \compat + + This class is a Q3PtrList\<char\> instance (a list of char*). + + Q3StrIList is identical to Q3StrList except that the virtual + compareItems() function is reimplemented to compare strings + case-insensitively. The inSort() function inserts strings in a + sorted order. In general it is fastest to insert the strings as + they come and sort() at the end; inSort() is useful when you just + have to add a few extra strings to an already sorted list. + + The Q3StrListIterator class works for Q3StrIList. + + \sa QStringList +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3StrIList::Q3StrIList( bool deepCopies ) + + Constructs a list of strings. Will make deep copies of all + inserted strings if \a deepCopies is TRUE, or use shallow copies + if \a deepCopies is FALSE. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3StrIList::~Q3StrIList() + + Destroys the list. All strings are removed. +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3PtrList::compareItems( Q3PtrCollection::Item item1, + Q3PtrCollection::Item item2 ) + + This virtual function compares two list items. + + Returns: + \list + \i zero if \a item1 == \a item2 + \i nonzero if \a item1 != \a item2 + \endlist + + This function returns \e int rather than \e bool so that + reimplementations can return three values and use it to sort by: + + \list + \i 0 if \a item1 == \a item2 + \i \> 0 (positive integer) if \a item1 \> \a item2 + \i \< 0 (negative integer) if \a item1 \< \a item2 + \endlist + + inSort() requires that compareItems() is implemented as described + here. + + This function should not modify the list because some const + functions call compareItems(). + + The default implementation compares the pointers. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& Q3PtrList::read( QDataStream& s, + Q3PtrCollection::Item& item ) + + Reads a list item from the stream \a s and returns a reference to + the stream. + + The default implementation sets \a item to 0. + + \sa write() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& Q3PtrList::write( QDataStream& s, + Q3PtrCollection::Item item ) const + + Writes a list item, \a item to the stream \a s and returns a + reference to the stream. + + The default implementation does nothing. + + \sa read() +*/ + +/*! \fn iterator Q3PtrList::begin() +\internal +*/ +/*! \fn const_iterator Q3PtrList::begin() const +\internal +*/ +/*! \fn iterator Q3PtrList::end() +\internal +*/ +/*! \fn const_iterator Q3PtrList::end() const +\internal +*/ + +/*! + \class Q3StrListIterator + \brief The Q3StrListIterator class is an iterator for the Q3StrList + and Q3StrIList classes. + \compat + + This class is a Q3PtrListIterator\<char\> instance. It can traverse + the strings in the Q3StrList and Q3StrIList classes. +*/ + + +/* + \class Q3PtrListAutoDelete + \brief The Q3PtrListAutoDelete class is a template class that provides a list that auto-deletes its data. + \compat + + A Q3PtrListAutoDelete is identical to a Q3PtrList with + setAutoDelete(TRUE). +*/ diff --git a/src/qt3support/tools/q3ptrqueue.qdoc b/src/qt3support/tools/q3ptrqueue.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c60193c --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/tools/q3ptrqueue.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,230 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3PtrQueue + \brief The Q3PtrQueue class is a template class that provides a queue. + \compat + + Q3ValueVector can be used as an STL-compatible alternative to this + class. + + A template instance Q3PtrQueue\<X\> is a queue that operates on + pointers to X (X*). + + A queue is a first in, first out structure. Items are added to the + tail of the queue with enqueue() and retrieved from the head with + dequeue(). You can peek at the head item without dequeing it using + head(). + + You can control the queue's deletion policy with setAutoDelete(). + + For compatibility with the Q3PtrCollection classes, current() and + remove() are provided; both operate on the head(). + + \sa Q3PtrList Q3PtrStack +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrQueue::Q3PtrQueue () + + Creates an empty queue with autoDelete() set to FALSE. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrQueue::Q3PtrQueue( const Q3PtrQueue<type>& queue ) + + Creates a queue from \a queue. + + Only the pointers are copied; the items are not. The autoDelete() + flag is set to FALSE. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrQueue::~Q3PtrQueue() + + Destroys the queue. Items in the queue are deleted if autoDelete() + is TRUE. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrQueue<type>& Q3PtrQueue::operator= (const Q3PtrQueue<type>& queue) + + Assigns \a queue to this queue and returns a reference to this + queue. + + This queue is first cleared and then each item in \a queue is + enqueued to this queue. Only the pointers are copied. + + \warning The autoDelete() flag is not modified. If it is TRUE for + both \a queue and this queue, deleting the two lists will cause \e + double-deletion of the items. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrQueue::isEmpty() const + + Returns TRUE if the queue is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + + \sa count() dequeue() head() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrQueue::enqueue (const type* d) + + Adds item \a d to the tail of the queue. + + \sa count() dequeue() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type* Q3PtrQueue::dequeue () + + Takes the head item from the queue and returns a pointer to it. + Returns 0 if the queue is empty. + + \sa enqueue() count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrQueue::remove() + + Removes the head item from the queue, and returns TRUE if there + was an item, i.e. the queue wasn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + + The item is deleted if autoDelete() is TRUE. + + \sa head() isEmpty() dequeue() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrQueue::clear() + + Removes all items from the queue, and deletes them if autoDelete() + is TRUE. + + \sa remove() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3PtrQueue::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the queue. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type* Q3PtrQueue::head() const + + Returns a pointer to the head item in the queue. The queue is not + changed. Returns 0 if the queue is empty. + + \sa dequeue() isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrQueue::operator type*() const + + Returns a pointer to the head item in the queue. The queue is not + changed. Returns 0 if the queue is empty. + + \sa dequeue() isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type* Q3PtrQueue::current() const + + Returns a pointer to the head item in the queue. The queue is not + changed. Returns 0 if the queue is empty. + + \sa dequeue() isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrQueue::autoDelete() const + + Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is + FALSE. + + \sa setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrQueue::setAutoDelete( bool enable ) + + Sets the queue to auto-delete its contents if \a enable is TRUE + and not to delete them if \a enable is FALSE. + + If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a queue are + deleted when the queue itself is deleted. This can be quite + convenient if the queue has the only pointer to the items. + + The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be + careful about copying the queue: you might find yourself with two + queues deleting the same items. + + \sa autoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& Q3PtrQueue::read( QDataStream& s, + Q3PtrCollection::Item& item ) + + Reads a queue item, \a item, from the stream \a s and returns a + reference to the stream. + + The default implementation sets \a item to 0. + + \sa write() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& Q3PtrQueue::write( QDataStream& s, + Q3PtrCollection::Item item ) const + + Writes a queue item, \a item, to the stream \a s and returns a + reference to the stream. + + The default implementation does nothing. + + \sa read() +*/ diff --git a/src/qt3support/tools/q3ptrstack.qdoc b/src/qt3support/tools/q3ptrstack.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..071fcd0 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/tools/q3ptrstack.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,217 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3PtrStack + \brief The Q3PtrStack class is a template class that provides a stack. + \compat + + Q3ValueStack is an STL-compatible alternative to this class. + + Define a template instance Q3PtrStack\<X\> to create a stack that + operates on pointers to X, (X*). + + A stack is a last in, first out (LIFO) structure. Items are added + to the top of the stack with push() and retrieved from the top + with pop(). Use top() to get a reference to the top element + without changing the stack. + + You can control the stack's deletion policy with setAutoDelete(). + + For compatibility with the Q3PtrCollection classes current() and + remove() are provided; they both operate on the top(). + + \sa Q3PtrList Q3PtrQueue +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrStack::Q3PtrStack () + + Creates an empty stack. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrStack::Q3PtrStack (const Q3PtrStack<type>& s) + + Creates a stack by making a shallow copy of another stack \a s. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrStack::~Q3PtrStack () + + Destroys the stack. All items will be deleted if autoDelete() is + true. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrStack<type>& Q3PtrStack::operator= (const Q3PtrStack<type>& s) + + Sets the contents of this stack by making a shallow copy of + another stack \a s. Elements currently in this stack will be + deleted if autoDelete() is true. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrStack::isEmpty () const + + Returns true if the stack contains no elements; otherwise returns + false. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrStack::push (const type* d) + + Adds an element \a d to the top of the stack. Last in, first out. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type* Q3PtrStack::pop () + + Removes the top item from the stack and returns it. The stack must + not be empty. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrStack::remove () + + Removes the top item from the stack and deletes it if autoDelete() + is true. Returns true if there was an item to pop; otherwise + returns false. + + \sa clear() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrStack::clear() + + Removes all items from the stack, deleting them if autoDelete() is + true. + + \sa remove() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3PtrStack::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the stack. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type* Q3PtrStack::top () const + + Returns a pointer to the top item on the stack (most recently + pushed). The stack is not changed. Returns 0 if the stack is + empty. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrStack::operator type* ()const + + Returns a pointer to the top item on the stack (most recently + pushed). The stack is not changed. Returns 0 if the stack is + empty. +*/ + +/*! + \fn type* Q3PtrStack::current () const + + Returns a pointer to the top item on the stack (most recently + pushed). The stack is not changed. Returns 0 if the stack is + empty. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrStack::autoDelete() const + + The same as Q3PtrCollection::autoDelete(). Returns true if + the auto-delete option is set. If the option is set, the + stack auto-deletes its contents. + + \sa setAutoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrStack::setAutoDelete(bool enable) + + Defines whether this stack auto-deletes its contents. The same as + Q3PtrCollection::setAutoDelete(). If \a enable is true, auto-delete + is turned on. + + If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in the stack are + deleted when the stack itself is deleted. This is convenient if + the stack has the only pointers to the items. + + The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be + careful about copying the stack, or you might find yourself with + two stacks deleting the same items. + + Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions in + subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove() function + will remove the item from its data structure, and if auto-delete is + enabled, will also delete the item. + + \sa autoDelete() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& Q3PtrStack::read(QDataStream& s, Q3PtrCollection::Item& item) + + Reads a stack item, \a item, from the stream \a s and returns a + reference to the stream. + + The default implementation sets \a item to 0. + + \sa write() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& Q3PtrStack::write(QDataStream& s, + Q3PtrCollection::Item item) const + + Writes a stack item, \a item, to the stream \a s and returns a + reference to the stream. + + The default implementation does nothing. + + \sa read() +*/ diff --git a/src/qt3support/tools/q3ptrvector.qdoc b/src/qt3support/tools/q3ptrvector.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c734064 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/tools/q3ptrvector.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,427 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3PtrVector + \brief The Q3PtrVector class is a template collection class that + provides a vector (array). + \compat + + Q3ValueVector is an STL-compatible alternative to this class. + + Q3PtrVector is implemented as a template class. Defines a template + instance Q3PtrVector\<X\> to create a vector that contains pointers + to X (X*). + + A vector is the same as an array. The main difference between + Q3PtrVector and Q3MemArray is that Q3PtrVector stores pointers to the + elements, whereas Q3MemArray stores the elements themselves (i.e. + Q3MemArray is value-based and Q3PtrVector is pointer-based). + + Items are added to the vector using insert() or fill(). Items are + removed with remove(). You can get a pointer to an item at a + particular index position using at(). + + Unless otherwise stated, all functions that remove items from the + vector will also delete the element pointed to if \link + setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. By default, + auto-deletion is disabled; see setAutoDelete(). This behavior can + be changed in a subclass by reimplementing the virtual function + deleteItem(). + + Functions that compare items (find() and sort() for example) will + do so using the virtual function compareItems(). The default + implementation of this function only compares the pointer values. + Reimplement compareItems() in a subclass to get searching and + sorting based on the item contents. You can perform a linear + search for a pointer in the vector using findRef(), or a binary + search (of a sorted vector) using bsearch(). You can count the + number of times an item appears in the vector with contains() or + containsRef(). + + \sa Q3MemArray +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrVector::Q3PtrVector() + + Constructs a null vector. + + \sa isNull() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrVector::Q3PtrVector(uint size) + + Constructs an vector with room for \a size items. Makes a null + vector if \a size == 0. + + All \a size positions in the vector are initialized to 0. + + \sa size(), resize(), isNull() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrVector::Q3PtrVector(const Q3PtrVector<type> &v) + + Constructs a copy of \a v. Only the pointers are copied (i.e. + shallow copy). +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrVector::~Q3PtrVector() + + Removes all items from the vector, and destroys the vector itself. + + \sa clear() +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PtrVector<type> &Q3PtrVector::operator=(const Q3PtrVector<type> &v) + + Assigns \a v to this vector and returns a reference to this + vector. + + This vector is first cleared and then all the items from \a v are + copied into the vector. Only the pointers are copied (i.e. shallow + copy). + + \sa clear() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type **Q3PtrVector::data() const + + Returns a pointer to the actual vector data, which is an array of + type*. + + The vector is a null vector if data() == 0 (null pointer). + + \sa isNull() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3PtrVector::size() const + + Returns the size of the vector, i.e. the number of vector + positions. This is also the maximum number of items the vector can + hold. + + The vector is a null vector if size() == 0. + + \sa isNull(), resize(), count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3PtrVector::count() const + + Returns the number of items in the vector. The vector is empty if + count() == 0. + + \sa isEmpty(), size(), isNull() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrVector::isEmpty() const + + Returns true if the vector is empty; otherwise returns false. + + \sa count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrVector::isNull() const + + Returns true if the vector is null; otherwise returns false. + + A null vector has size() == 0 and data() == 0. + + \sa size() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrVector::resize(uint size) + + Resizes (expands or shrinks) the vector to \a size elements. The + vector becomes a null vector if \a size == 0. + + Any items at position \a size or beyond in the vector are removed. + New positions are initialized to 0. + + Returns true if successful, i.e. if the memory was successfully + allocated; otherwise returns false. + + \sa size(), isNull() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrVector::insert(uint i, const type *d) + + Sets position \a i in the vector to contain the item \a d. \a i + must be less than size(). Any previous element in position \a i is + removed. + + Returns true if \a i is within range; otherwise returns false. + + \sa at() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrVector::remove(uint i) + + Removes the item at position \a i in the vector, if there is one. + \a i must be less than size(). + + Returns true if \a i is within range; otherwise returns false. + + \sa take(), at() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type* Q3PtrVector::take(uint i) + + Returns the item at position \a i in the vector, and removes that + item from the vector. \a i must be less than size(). If there is + no item at position \a i, 0 is returned. + + Unlike remove(), this function does \e not call deleteItem() for + the removed item. + + \sa remove(), at() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrVector::clear() + + Removes all items from the vector, and destroys the vector itself. + + The vector becomes a null vector. + + \sa isNull() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrVector::fill(const type *d, int size) + + Inserts item \a d in all positions in the vector. Any existing + items are removed. If \a d is 0, the vector becomes empty. + + If \a size >= 0, the vector is first resized to \a size. By + default, \a size is -1. + + Returns true if successful, i.e. \a size is the same as the + current size, or \a size is larger and the memory has successfully + been allocated; otherwise returns false. + + \sa resize(), insert(), isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrVector::sort() + + Sorts the items in ascending order. Any empty positions will be + put last. + + Compares items using the virtual function compareItems(). + + \sa bsearch() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3PtrVector::bsearch(const type* d) const + + In a sorted array, finds the first occurrence of \a d using a + binary search. For a sorted array, this is generally much faster + than find(), which performs a linear search. + + Returns the position of \a d, or -1 if \a d could not be found. \a + d must not be 0. + + Compares items using the virtual function compareItems(). + + \sa sort(), find() +*/ + + +/*! + \fn int Q3PtrVector::findRef(const type *d, uint i) const + + Finds the first occurrence of the item pointer \a d in the vector + using a linear search. The search starts at position \a i, which + must be less than size(). \a i is by default 0; i.e. the search + starts at the start of the vector. + + Returns the position of \a d, or -1 if \a d could not be found. + + This function does \e not use compareItems() to compare items. + + Use the much faster bsearch() to search a sorted vector. + + \sa find(), bsearch() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3PtrVector::find(const type *d, uint i) const + + Finds the first occurrence of item \a d in the vector using a + linear search. The search starts at position \a i, which must be + less than size(). \a i is by default 0; i.e. the search starts at + the start of the vector. + + Returns the position of \a d, or -1 if \a d could not be found. + + Compares items using the virtual function compareItems(). + + Use the much faster bsearch() to search a sorted vector. + + \sa findRef(), bsearch() +*/ + + +/*! + \fn uint Q3PtrVector::containsRef(const type *d) const + + Returns the number of occurrences of the item pointer \a d in the + vector. + + This function does \e not use compareItems() to compare items. + + \sa findRef() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3PtrVector::contains(const type *d) const + + Returns the number of occurrences of item \a d in the vector. + + Compares items using the virtual function compareItems(). + + \sa containsRef() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrVector::operator[](int i) const + + Returns the item at position \a i, or 0 if there is no item at + that position. \a i must be less than size(). + + Equivalent to at(\a i). + + \sa at() +*/ + +/*! + \fn type *Q3PtrVector::at(uint i) const + + Returns the item at position \a i, or 0 if there is no item at + that position. \a i must be less than size(). +*/ + + +/*! + \fn void Q3PtrVector::toList(Q3GList *list) const + + \internal + + Copies all items in this vector to the list \a list. \a list is + first cleared and then all items are appended to \a list. + + \sa Q3PtrList, Q3PtrStack, Q3PtrQueue +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3PtrVector::compareItems(Q3PtrCollection::Item d1, + Q3PtrCollection::Item d2) + + This virtual function compares two list items. + + Returns: + \list + \i zero if \a d1 == \a d2 + \i nonzero if \a d1 != \a d2 + \endlist + + This function returns \e int rather than \e bool so that + reimplementations can return one of three values and use it to + sort by: + \list + \i 0 if \a d1 == \a d2 + \i \> 0 (positive integer) if \a d1 \> \a d2 + \i \< 0 (negative integer) if \a d1 \< \a d2 + \endlist + + The sort() and bsearch() functions require compareItems() to be + implemented as described here. + + This function should not modify the vector because some const + functions call compareItems(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& Q3PtrVector::read(QDataStream &s, + Q3PtrCollection::Item &item) + + Reads a vector item, \a item, from the stream \a s and returns a + reference to the stream. + + The default implementation sets \a item to 0. + + \sa write() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& Q3PtrVector::write(QDataStream &s, + Q3PtrCollection::Item item) const + + Writes a vector item, \a item, to the stream \a s and returns a + reference to the stream. + + The default implementation does nothing. + + \sa read() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3PtrVector::operator==(const Q3PtrVector<type> &v) const + + Returns true if this vector and \a v are equal; otherwise returns + false. +*/ diff --git a/src/qt3support/tools/q3valuelist.qdoc b/src/qt3support/tools/q3valuelist.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..062a9da --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/tools/q3valuelist.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,569 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3ValueList + \brief The Q3ValueList class is a value-based template class that + provides lists. + \compat + + Q3ValueList is a Qt implementation of an STL-like list container. + It can be used in your application if the standard \c list is not + available for your target platforms. + + Q3ValueList\<T\> defines a template instance to create a list of + values that all have the class T. Note that Q3ValueList does not + store pointers to the members of the list; it holds a copy of + every member. This is why these kinds of classes are called "value + based"; Q3PtrList and Q3Dict are "pointer based". + + Q3ValueList contains and manages a collection of objects of type T + and provides iterators that allow the contained objects to be + addressed. Q3ValueList owns the contained items. For more relaxed + ownership semantics, see Q3PtrCollection and friends which are + pointer-based containers. + + Some classes cannot be used within a Q3ValueList, for example, all + classes derived from QObject and thus all classes that implement + widgets. Only values can be used in a Q3ValueList. To qualify as a + value the class must provide: + \list + \i a copy constructor; + \i an assignment operator; + \i a default constructor, i.e. a constructor that does not take any arguments. + \endlist + + Note that C++ defaults to field-by-field assignment operators and + copy constructors if no explicit version is supplied. In many + cases this is sufficient. + + In addition, some compilers (e.g. Sun CC) might require that the + class provides an equality operator (operator==()). + + Q3ValueList's function naming is consistent with the other Qt + classes (e.g. count(), isEmpty()). Q3ValueList also provides extra + functions for compatibility with STL algorithms, such as size() + and empty(). Programmers already familiar with the STL \c list may + prefer to use the STL-compatible functions. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3valuelist.qdoc 0 + + + Notice that the latest changes to Mary's salary did not affect the + value in the list because the list created a copy of Mary's entry. + + There are several ways to find items in the list. The begin() and + end() functions return iterators to the beginning and end of the + list. The advantage of getting an iterator is that you can move + forward or backward from this position by + incrementing/decrementing the iterator. The iterator returned by + end() points to the item which is one \e past the last item in the + container. The past-the-end iterator is still associated with the + list it belongs to, however it is \e not dereferenceable; + operator*() will not return a well-defined value. If the list is + empty(), the iterator returned by begin() will equal the iterator + returned by end(). + + It is safe to have multiple iterators a the list at the same + time. If some member of the list is removed, only iterators + pointing to the removed member become invalid. Inserting into the + list does not invalidate any iterator. For convenience, the + function last() returns a reference to the last item in the list, + and first() returns a reference to the first item. If the + list is empty(), both last() and first() have undefined behavior + (your application will crash or do unpredictable things). Use + last() and first() with caution, for example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3valuelist.qdoc 1 + + Because Q3ValueList is value-based there is no need to be careful + about deleting items in the list. The list holds its own copies + and will free them if the corresponding member or the list itself + is deleted. You can force the list to free all of its items with + clear(). + + Q3ValueList is shared implicitly, which means it can be copied in + constant time, i.e. O(1). If multiple Q3ValueList instances share + the same data and one needs to modify its contents, this modifying + instance makes a copy and modifies its private copy; therefore it + does not affect the other instances; this takes O(n) time. This is + often called "copy on write". If a Q3ValueList is being used in a + multi-threaded program, you must protect all access to the list. + See \l QMutex. + + There are several ways to insert items into the list. The + prepend() and append() functions insert items at the beginning and + the end of the list respectively. The insert() function comes in + several flavors and can be used to add one or more items at + specific positions within the list. + + Items can also be removed from the list in several ways. There + are several variants of the remove() function, which removes a + specific item from the list. The remove() function will find and + remove items according to a specific item value. + + \sa Q3ValueListIterator +*/ + +/*! \typedef Q3ValueList::iterator + The list's iterator type, Q3ValueListIterator. */ +/*! \typedef Q3ValueList::const_iterator + The list's const iterator type, Q3ValueListConstIterator. */ +/*! \typedef Q3ValueList::value_type + The type of the object stored in the list, T. */ +/*! \typedef Q3ValueList::pointer + The pointer to T type. */ +/*! \typedef Q3ValueList::const_pointer + The const pointer to T type. */ +/*! \typedef Q3ValueList::reference + The reference to T type. */ +/*! \typedef Q3ValueList::const_reference + The const reference to T type. */ +/*! \typedef Q3ValueList::size_type + An unsigned integral type, used to represent various sizes. */ +/*! \typedef Q3ValueList::difference_type + \internal +*/ +/*! + \fn Q3ValueList::Q3ValueList() + + Constructs an empty list. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueList::Q3ValueList( const Q3ValueList<T>& l ) + \fn Q3ValueList::Q3ValueList( const QList<T>& l ) + \fn Q3ValueList::Q3ValueList( const QLinkedList<T>& l ) + + Constructs a copy of \a l. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueList::Q3ValueList( const std::list<T>& l ) + + Contructs a copy of \a l. + + This constructor is provided for compatibility with STL + containers. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueList::~Q3ValueList() + + Destroys the list. References to the values in the list and all + iterators of this list become invalidated. Note that it is + impossible for an iterator to check whether or not it is valid: + Q3ValueList is highly tuned for performance, not for error + checking. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3ValueList::operator== ( const Q3ValueList<T>& l ) const + + Compares both lists. + + Returns TRUE if this list and \a l are equal; otherwise returns + FALSE. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3ValueList::operator== ( const std::list<T>& l ) const + + \overload + + Returns TRUE if this list and \a l are equal; otherwise returns + FALSE. + + This operator is provided for compatibility with STL containers. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueList<T>& Q3ValueList::operator= ( const Q3ValueList<T>& l ) + + Assigns \a l to this list and returns a reference to this list. + + All iterators of the current list become invalidated by this + operation. The cost of such an assignment is O(1) since Q3ValueList + is implicitly shared. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueList<T>& Q3ValueList::operator= ( const QList<T>& l ) + + Assigns \a l to this list and returns a reference to this list. + + All iterators of the current list become invalidated by this + operation. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueList<T>& Q3ValueList::operator= ( const std::list<T>& l ) + + \overload + + Assigns the contents of \a l to the list. + + All iterators of the current list become invalidated by this + operation. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool Q3ValueList::operator!= ( const Q3ValueList<T>& l ) const + + Compares both lists. + + Returns TRUE if this list and \a l are unequal; otherwise returns + FALSE. +*/ + +/*! + \fn iterator Q3ValueList::insert( typename Q3ValueList<T>::Iterator it, const T& x ) + + Inserts the value \a x in front of the item pointed to by the + iterator, \a it. + + Returns an iterator pointing at the inserted item. + + \sa append(), prepend() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3ValueList::remove( const T& x ) + + \overload + + Removes all items that have value \a x and returns the number of + removed items. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& operator>>( QDataStream& s, Q3ValueList<T>& l ) + + \relates Q3ValueList + + Reads a list, \a l, from the stream \a s. The type T stored in the + list must implement the streaming operator. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream& operator<<( QDataStream& s, const Q3ValueList<T>& l ) + + \overload + \relates Q3ValueList + + Writes a list, \a l, to the stream \a s. The type T stored in the + list must implement the streaming operator. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3ValueList::insert( typename Q3ValueList<T>::Iterator pos, + typename Q3ValueList<T>::size_type n, const T& x ) + + \overload + + Inserts \a n copies of \a x before position \a pos. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueList<T>& Q3ValueList::operator<< ( const T& x ) + + Adds the value \a x to the end of the list. + + Returns a reference to the list. +*/ + +/*! + \fn const T& Q3ValueList::operator[] ( typename Q3ValueList<T>::size_type i ) const + + Returns a const reference to the item with index \a i in the list. + It is up to you to check whether this item really exists. You can + do that easily with the count() function. However this operator + does not check whether \a i is in range and will deliver undefined + results if it does not exist. + + \warning This function uses a linear search and can be extremely + slow for large lists. Q3ValueList is not optimized for random item + access. If you need random access use a different container, such + as Q3ValueVector. +*/ + +/*! + \fn T& Q3ValueList::operator[] ( typename Q3ValueList<T>::size_type i ) + + \overload + + Returns a non-const reference to the item with index \a i. +*/ + +/*! + \fn const_iterator Q3ValueList::at( typename Q3ValueList<T>::size_type i ) const + + Returns an iterator pointing to the item at position \a i in the + list, or an undefined value if the index is out of range. + + \warning This function uses a linear search and can be extremely + slow for large lists. Q3ValueList is not optimized for random item + access. If you need random access use a different container, such + as Q3ValueVector. +*/ + +/*! + \fn iterator Q3ValueList::at( typename Q3ValueList<T>::size_type i ) + + \overload + + Returns an iterator pointing to the item at position \a i in the + list, or an undefined value if the index is out of range. + +*/ + +/*! + \fn iterator Q3ValueList::fromLast() + + \overload + + Returns an iterator to the last item in the list, or end() if + there is no last item. + + Use the end() function instead. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3valuelist.qdoc 2 + +*/ + +/*! + \fn const_iterator Q3ValueList::fromLast() const + + Returns an iterator to the last item in the list, or end() if + there is no last item. + + Use the end() function instead. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3valuelist.qdoc 3 + +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueList<T> Q3ValueList::operator+( const Q3ValueList<T>& l ) const + + Creates a new list and fills it with the items of this list. Then + the items of \a l are appended. Returns the new list. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueList<T>& Q3ValueList::operator+= ( const Q3ValueList<T>& l ) + + Appends the items of \a l to this list. Returns a reference to + this list. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueList<T>& Q3ValueList::operator+= ( const T& x ) + + \overload + + Appends the value \a x to the list. Returns a reference to the + list. +*/ + +/*! + \fn iterator Q3ValueList::append( const T& x ) + + Inserts \a x at the end of the list. + + \sa insert(), prepend() +*/ + +/*! + \fn iterator Q3ValueList::prepend( const T& x ) + + Inserts \a x at the beginning of the list. + + \sa insert(), append() +*/ + +/*! + \fn iterator Q3ValueList::remove( typename Q3ValueList<T>::Iterator it ) + + Removes the item pointed to by \a it from the list. No iterators + other than \a it or other iterators pointing at the same item as + \a it are invalidated. Returns an iterator to the next item after + \a it, or end() if there is no such item. + + \sa clear() +*/ + +/*! + \fn uint Q3ValueList::contains( const T& x ) const + + Returns the number of occurrences of the value \a x in the list. +*/ + +/*! + \class Q3ValueListIterator + \brief The Q3ValueListIterator class provides an iterator for Q3ValueList. + \compat + + An iterator is a class for accessing the items of a container + class: a generalization of the index in an array. A pointer + into a "const char *" and an index into an "int[]" are both + iterators, and the general idea is to provide that functionality + for any data structure. + + The Q3ValueListIterator class is an iterator for Q3ValueList + instantiations. You can create the appropriate iterator type by + using the \c iterator typedef provided by Q3ValueList. + + The only way to access the items in a Q3ValueList is to use an + iterator. + + Example (see Q3ValueList for the complete code): + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3valuelist.qdoc 4 + + Q3ValueList is highly optimized for performance and memory usage. + This means that you must be careful: Q3ValueList does not know + about all its iterators and the iterators don't know to which list + they belong. This makes things very fast, but if you're not + careful, you can get spectacular bugs. Always make sure iterators + are valid before dereferencing them or using them as parameters to + generic algorithms in the STL. + + Using an invalid iterator is undefined (your application will + probably crash). Many Qt functions return const value lists; to + iterate over these you should make a copy and iterate over the + copy. + + For every Iterator there is a ConstIterator. When accessing a + Q3ValueList in a const environment or if the reference or pointer + to the list is itself const, then you must use the ConstIterator. + Its semantics are the same as the Iterator, but it only returns + const references. + + \sa Q3ValueList, Q3ValueListConstIterator +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueListIterator::Q3ValueListIterator() + + Constructs an unitialized iterator. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueListIterator::Q3ValueListIterator(const Q3ValueListIterator &o) + \fn Q3ValueListIterator::Q3ValueListIterator(const typename QLinkedList<T>::iterator &o) + + Constucts a copy of iterator \a o. +*/ + +/*! + \class Q3ValueListConstIterator + \brief The Q3ValueListConstIterator class provides a const iterator + for Q3ValueList. + \compat + + In contrast to Q3ValueListIterator, this class is used to iterate + over a const list. It does not allow modification of the values of + the list since that would break const semantics. + + You can create the appropriate const iterator type by using the \c + const_iterator typedef provided by Q3ValueList. + + For more information on Q3ValueList iterators, see + Q3ValueListIterator. + + \sa Q3ValueListIterator, Q3ValueList +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueListConstIterator::Q3ValueListConstIterator() + + Constructs an unitialized iterator. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueListConstIterator::Q3ValueListConstIterator(const Q3ValueListConstIterator &o) + \fn Q3ValueListConstIterator::Q3ValueListConstIterator(const typename QLinkedList<T>::const_iterator &o) + \fn Q3ValueListConstIterator::Q3ValueListConstIterator(const typename QLinkedList<T>::iterator &o) + + Constructs a copy of iterator \a o. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef Q3ValueList::Iterator + + This iterator is an instantiation of Q3ValueListIterator for the + same type as this Q3ValueList. In other words, if you instantiate + Q3ValueList<int>, Iterator is a Q3ValueListIterator<int>. Several + member function use it, such as Q3ValueList::begin(), which returns + an iterator pointing to the first item in the list. + + Functionally, this is almost the same as ConstIterator. The only + difference is that you cannot use ConstIterator for non-const + operations, and that the compiler can often generate better code + if you use ConstIterator. + + \sa Q3ValueListIterator ConstIterator +*/ + +/*! + \typedef Q3ValueList::ConstIterator + + This iterator is an instantiation of Q3ValueListConstIterator for + the same type as this Q3ValueList. In other words, if you + instantiate Q3ValueList<int>, ConstIterator is a + Q3ValueListConstIterator<int>. Several member function use it, such + as Q3ValueList::begin(), which returns an iterator pointing to the + first item in the list. + + Functionally, this is almost the same as Iterator. The only + difference is you cannot use ConstIterator for non-const + operations, and that the compiler can often generate better code + if you use ConstIterator. + + \sa Q3ValueListIterator Iterator +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueList::operator QList<T>() const + + Automatically converts a Q3ValueList<T> into a QList<T>. +*/ diff --git a/src/qt3support/tools/q3valuestack.qdoc b/src/qt3support/tools/q3valuestack.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bc44235 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/tools/q3valuestack.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3ValueStack + \brief The Q3ValueStack class is a value-based template class that provides a stack. + \compat + + Define a template instance Q3ValueStack\<X\> to create a stack of + values that all have the class X. + + Note that Q3ValueStack does not store pointers to the members of + the stack; it holds a copy of every member. That is why these + kinds of classes are called "value based"; Q3PtrStack, Q3PtrList, + Q3Dict, etc., are "pointer based". + + A stack is a last in, first out (LIFO) structure. Items are added + to the top of the stack with push() and retrieved from the top + with pop(). The top() function provides access to the topmost item + without removing it. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3valuestack.qdoc 0 + + Q3ValueStack is a specialized Q3ValueList provided for convenience. + All of Q3ValueList's functionality also applies to Q3PtrStack, for + example the facility to iterate over all elements using + Q3ValueStack<T>::Iterator. See Q3ValueListIterator for further + details. + + Some classes cannot be used within a Q3ValueStack, for example + everything derived from QObject and thus all classes that + implement widgets. Only values can be used in a Q3ValueStack. To + qualify as a value, the class must provide + \list + \i a copy constructor; + \i an assignment operator; + \i a default constructor, i.e. a constructor that does not take any arguments. + \endlist + + Note that C++ defaults to field-by-field assignment operators and + copy constructors if no explicit version is supplied. In many + cases this is sufficient. +*/ + + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueStack::Q3ValueStack() + + Constructs an empty stack. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueStack::~Q3ValueStack() + + Destroys the stack. References to the values in the stack and all + iterators of this stack become invalidated. Because Q3ValueStack is + highly tuned for performance, you won't see warnings if you use + invalid iterators because it is impossible for an iterator to + check whether or not it is valid. +*/ + + +/*! + \fn void Q3ValueStack::push( const T& d ) + + Adds element, \a d, to the top of the stack. Last in, first out. + + This function is equivalent to append(). + + \sa pop(), top() +*/ + +/*! + \fn T& Q3ValueStack::top() + + Returns a reference to the top item of the stack or the item + referenced by end() if no such item exists. Note that you must not + change the value the end() iterator points to. + + This function is equivalent to last(). + + \sa pop(), push(), Q3ValueList::fromLast() +*/ + + +/*! + \fn const T& Q3ValueStack::top() const + + \overload + + Returns a reference to the top item of the stack or the item + referenced by end() if no such item exists. + + This function is equivalent to last(). + + \sa pop(), push(), Q3ValueList::fromLast() +*/ + +/*! + \fn T Q3ValueStack::pop() + + Removes the top item from the stack and returns it. + + \sa top() push() +*/ + + + + + diff --git a/src/qt3support/tools/q3valuevector.qdoc b/src/qt3support/tools/q3valuevector.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4ab8896 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/qt3support/tools/q3valuevector.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,274 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class Q3ValueVector + \brief The Q3ValueVector class is a value-based template class that provides a dynamic array. + \compat + + Q3ValueVector is a Qt implementation of an STL-like vector + container. It can be used in your application if the standard \c + vector is not available for your target platforms. + + Q3ValueVector\<T\> defines a template instance to create a vector + of values that all have the class T. Q3ValueVector does not store + pointers to the members of the vector; it holds a copy of every + member. Q3ValueVector is said to be value based; in contrast, + Q3PtrList and Q3Dict are pointer based. + + Q3ValueVector contains and manages a collection of objects of type + T and provides random access iterators that allow the contained + objects to be addressed. Q3ValueVector owns the contained + elements. For more relaxed ownership semantics, see Q3PtrCollection + and friends, which are pointer-based containers. + + Q3ValueVector provides good performance if you append or remove + elements from the end of the vector. If you insert or remove + elements from anywhere but the end, performance is very bad. The + reason for this is that elements must to be copied into new + positions. + + Some classes cannot be used within a Q3ValueVector: for example, + all classes derived from QObject and thus all classes that + implement widgets. Only values can be used in a Q3ValueVector. To + qualify as a value the class must provide: + \list + \i a copy constructor; + \i an assignment operator; + \i a default constructor, i.e., a constructor that does not take any arguments. + \endlist + + Note that C++ defaults to field-by-field assignment operators and + copy constructors if no explicit version is supplied. In many + cases this is sufficient. + + Q3ValueVector uses an STL-like syntax to manipulate and address the + objects it contains. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3valuevector.qdoc 0 + + Program output: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3valuevector.qdoc 1 + + As you can see, the most recent change to Joe's salary did not + affect the value in the vector because the vector created a copy + of Joe's entry. + + Many Qt functions return const value vectors; to iterate over + these you should make a copy and iterate over the copy. + + There are several ways to find items in the vector. The begin() + and end() functions return iterators to the beginning and end of + the vector. The advantage of getting an iterator is that you can + move forward or backward from this position by + incrementing/decrementing the iterator. The iterator returned by + end() points to the element which is one past the last element in + the container. The past-the-end iterator is still associated with + the vector it belongs to, however it is \e not dereferenceable; + operator*() will not return a well-defined value. If the vector is + empty(), the iterator returned by begin() will equal the iterator + returned by end(). + + The fastest way to access an element of a vector is by using + operator[]. This function provides random access and will return + a reference to the element located at the specified index. Thus, + you can access every element directly, in constant time, providing + you know the location of the element. It is undefined to access + an element that does not exist (your application will probably + crash). For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3valuevector.qdoc 2 + + Whenever inserting, removing or referencing elements in a vector, + always make sure you are referring to valid positions. For + example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3valuevector.qdoc 3 + + The iterators provided by vector are random access iterators, + therefore you can use them with many generic algorithms, for + example, algorithms provided by the STL. + + It is safe to have multiple iterators on the vector at the same + time. Since Q3ValueVector manages memory dynamically, all iterators + can become invalid if a memory reallocation occurs. For example, + if some member of the vector is removed, iterators that point to + the removed element and to all following elements become + invalidated. Inserting into the middle of the vector will + invalidate all iterators. For convenience, the function back() + returns a reference to the last element in the vector, and front() + returns a reference to the first element. If the vector is + empty(), both back() and front() have undefined behavior (your + application will crash or do unpredictable things). Use back() and + front() with caution, for example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_q3valuevector.qdoc 4 + + Because Q3ValueVector manages memory dynamically, it is recommended + that you contruct a vector with an initial size. Inserting and + removing elements happens fastest when: + \list + \i Inserting or removing elements happens at the end() of the + vector; + \i The vector does not need to allocate additional memory. + \endlist + + By creating a Q3ValueVector with a sufficiently large initial size, + there will be less memory allocations. Do not use an initial size + that is too big, since it will still take time to construct all + the empty entries, and the extra space will be wasted if it is + never used. + + Because Q3ValueVector is value-based there is no need to be careful + about deleting elements in the vector. The vector holds its own + copies and will free them if the corresponding member or the + vector itself is deleted. You can force the vector to free all of + its items with clear(). + + Q3ValueVector is shared implicitly, which means it can be copied in + constant time. If multiple Q3ValueVector instances share the same + data and one needs to modify its contents, this modifying instance + makes a copy and modifies its private copy; it thus does not + affect the other instances. This is often called "copy on write". + If a Q3ValueVector is being used in a multi-threaded program, you + must protect all access to the vector. See QMutex. + + There are several ways to insert elements into the vector. The + push_back() function insert elements into the end of the vector, + and is usually fastest. The insert() function can be used to add + elements at specific positions within the vector. + + Items can be also be removed from the vector in several ways. + There are several variants of the erase() function which removes a + specific element, or range of elements, from the vector. + + Q3ValueVector stores its elements in contiguous memory. This means + that you can use a Q3ValueVector in any situation that requires an + array. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueVector::Q3ValueVector() + + Constructs an empty vector without any elements. To create a + vector which reserves an initial amount of space for elements, use + \c Q3ValueVector(size_type n). +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueVector::Q3ValueVector( const Q3ValueVector<T>& v ) + + Constructs a copy of \a v. + + This operation costs O(1) time because Q3ValueVector is implicitly + shared. + + The first modification to the vector does takes O(n) time, because + the elements must be copied. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueVector::Q3ValueVector( const std::vector<T>& v ) + + This operation costs O(n) time because \a v is copied. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueVector::Q3ValueVector( QVector<T>::size_type n, const T& val ) + + Constructs a vector with an initial size of \a n elements. Each + element is initialized with the value of \a val. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueVector<T>& Q3ValueVector::operator=( const Q3ValueVector<T>& v ) + + Assigns \a v to this vector and returns a reference to this vector. + + All iterators of the current vector become invalidated by this + operation. The cost of such an assignment is O(1) since + Q3ValueVector is implicitly shared. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3ValueVector<T>& Q3ValueVector::operator=( const std::vector<T>& v ) + + \overload + + Assigns \a v to this vector and returns a reference to this vector. + + All iterators of the current vector become invalidated by this + operation. The cost of this assignment is O(n) since \a v is + copied. +*/ + +/*! + \fn T &Q3ValueVector::at( int i , bool* ok ) + + Returns a reference to the element with index \a i. If \a ok is + non-null, and the index \a i is out of range, *\a ok is set to + FALSE and the returned reference is undefined. If the index \a i + is within the range of the vector, and \a ok is non-null, *\a ok + is set to TRUE and the returned reference is well defined. +*/ + +/*! + \fn const T &Q3ValueVector::at( int i , bool* ok ) const + + \overload + + Returns a const reference to the element with index \a i. If \a ok + is non-null, and the index \a i is out of range, *\a ok is set to + FALSE and the returned reference is undefined. If the index \a i + is within the range of the vector, and \a ok is non-null, *\a ok + is set to TRUE and the returned reference is well defined. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void Q3ValueVector::resize( int n, const T& val = T() ) + + Changes the size of the vector to \a n. If \a n is greater than + the current size(), elements are added to the end and initialized + with the value of \a val. If \a n is less than size(), elements + are removed from the end. If \a n is equal to size() nothing + happens. +*/ diff --git a/src/qt3support/widgets/q3popupmenu.cpp b/src/qt3support/widgets/q3popupmenu.cpp index d2eaaa9..8912748 100644 --- a/src/qt3support/widgets/q3popupmenu.cpp +++ b/src/qt3support/widgets/q3popupmenu.cpp @@ -43,6 +43,43 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! + \class Q3PopupMenu + \brief The Q3PopupMenu class is a thin compatibility wrapper around QMenu. + \compat + + Use QMenu in new applications. Note that the menu's actions must + be \l {Q3Action}s. +*/ + +/*! + \fn Q3PopupMenu::Q3PopupMenu(QWidget *parent, const char *name) + + Constructs a menu with the given \a parent and \a name. +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3PopupMenu::exec() + + Pops up the menu and returns the ID of the action that was + selected. + + \sa QMenu::exec() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int Q3PopupMenu::exec(const QPoint & pos, int indexAtPoint) + + Pops up the menu at coordinate \a pos and returns the ID of the + action that was selected. + + If \a indexAtPoint is specified, the menu will pop up with the + item at index \a indexAtPoint under the mouse cursor. + + \sa QMenu::exec() +*/ + + +/*! \fn void Q3PopupMenu::setFrameRect(QRect) \internal */ diff --git a/src/script/qscriptable.cpp b/src/script/qscriptable.cpp index a84f839..97c0173 100644 --- a/src/script/qscriptable.cpp +++ b/src/script/qscriptable.cpp @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QScriptable class provides access to the Qt Script environment from Qt C++ member functions. \ingroup script - \mainclass + With QScriptEngine::newQObject(), you can expose the signals and slots and properties of any QObject (or subclass) to script diff --git a/src/script/qscriptclass.cpp b/src/script/qscriptclass.cpp index 41e5649..1df57d0 100644 --- a/src/script/qscriptclass.cpp +++ b/src/script/qscriptclass.cpp @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QScriptClass class provides an interface for defining custom behavior of (a class of) Qt Script objects. \ingroup script - \mainclass + The QScriptClass class defines an interface for handling various aspects of interaction with the Qt Script objects associated with diff --git a/src/script/qscriptcontext.cpp b/src/script/qscriptcontext.cpp index fcaa960..aed69d3 100644 --- a/src/script/qscriptcontext.cpp +++ b/src/script/qscriptcontext.cpp @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QScriptContext class represents a Qt Script function invocation. \ingroup script - \mainclass + A QScriptContext provides access to the `this' object and arguments passed to a script function. You typically want to access this diff --git a/src/script/qscriptcontextinfo.cpp b/src/script/qscriptcontextinfo.cpp index 30b87ce..dd3dbab 100644 --- a/src/script/qscriptcontextinfo.cpp +++ b/src/script/qscriptcontextinfo.cpp @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QScriptContextInfo class provides additional information about a QScriptContext. \ingroup script - \mainclass + QScriptContextInfo is typically used for debugging purposes. It can provide information about the code being executed, such as the type diff --git a/src/script/qscriptengine.cpp b/src/script/qscriptengine.cpp index cadad5e..59ce460 100644 --- a/src/script/qscriptengine.cpp +++ b/src/script/qscriptengine.cpp @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QScriptEngine class provides an environment for evaluating Qt Script code. \ingroup script - \mainclass + See the \l{QtScript} documentation for information about the Qt Script language, and how to get started with scripting your C++ application. @@ -1342,7 +1342,7 @@ QStringList QScriptEngine::importedExtensions() const Additionally, the type of each element in the sequence should be suitable for conversion to a QScriptValue. - See \l{QtScript Module#Conversion Between QtScript and C++ Types} + See \l{Making Applications Scriptable#Conversion Between QtScript and C++ Types} {Conversion Between QtScript and C++ Types} for more information about the restrictions on types that can be used with QScriptValue. @@ -1363,7 +1363,7 @@ QStringList QScriptEngine::importedExtensions() const Additionally, the type of each element in the sequence must be suitable for conversion to a C++ type from a QScriptValue. - See \l{QtScript Module#Conversion Between QtScript and C++ Types} + See \l{Making Applications Scriptable#Conversion Between QtScript and C++ Types} {Conversion Between QtScript and C++ Types} for more information about the restrictions on types that can be used with QScriptValue. @@ -1758,7 +1758,7 @@ QScriptValue QScriptEngine::objectById(qint64 id) const \brief The QScriptSyntaxCheckResult class provides the result of a script syntax check. \ingroup script - \mainclass + QScriptSyntaxCheckResult is returned by QScriptEngine::checkSyntax() to provide information about the syntactical (in)correctness of a script. diff --git a/src/script/qscriptengineagent.cpp b/src/script/qscriptengineagent.cpp index e71c97a..b4793ab 100644 --- a/src/script/qscriptengineagent.cpp +++ b/src/script/qscriptengineagent.cpp @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QScriptEngineAgent class provides an interface to report events pertaining to QScriptEngine execution. \ingroup script - \mainclass + The QScriptEngineAgent class is the basis of tools that monitor and/or control the execution of a QScriptEngine, such as debuggers and profilers. diff --git a/src/script/qscriptstring.cpp b/src/script/qscriptstring.cpp index f8e1c82..7d8d4e9 100644 --- a/src/script/qscriptstring.cpp +++ b/src/script/qscriptstring.cpp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QScriptString class acts as a handle to "interned" strings in a QScriptEngine. \ingroup script - \mainclass + QScriptString can be used to achieve faster (repeated) property getting/setting, and comparison of property names, of diff --git a/src/script/qscriptvalue.cpp b/src/script/qscriptvalue.cpp index da43fc2..b70afe5 100644 --- a/src/script/qscriptvalue.cpp +++ b/src/script/qscriptvalue.cpp @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QScriptValue class acts as a container for the Qt Script data types. \ingroup script - \mainclass + QScriptValue supports the types defined in the \l{ECMA-262} standard: The primitive types, which are Undefined, Null, Boolean, diff --git a/src/script/qscriptvalueiterator.cpp b/src/script/qscriptvalueiterator.cpp index 8bc668f..885f9c9 100644 --- a/src/script/qscriptvalueiterator.cpp +++ b/src/script/qscriptvalueiterator.cpp @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QScriptValueIterator class provides a Java-style iterator for QScriptValue. \ingroup script - \mainclass + The QScriptValueIterator constructor takes a QScriptValue as argument. After construction, the iterator is located at the very diff --git a/src/scripttools/debugging/qscriptdebugger.cpp b/src/scripttools/debugging/qscriptdebugger.cpp index 1ce9ab6..40f4d6c 100644 --- a/src/scripttools/debugging/qscriptdebugger.cpp +++ b/src/scripttools/debugging/qscriptdebugger.cpp @@ -136,8 +136,8 @@ static bool scriptDebuggerEventCallback(void **data) \brief The QScriptDebugger class provides a Qt Script debugger. - \ingroup scripttools - \mainclass + \ingroup script + */ class QScriptDebuggerPrivate diff --git a/src/scripttools/debugging/qscriptenginedebugger.cpp b/src/scripttools/debugging/qscriptenginedebugger.cpp index b8ed4ea..0588109 100644 --- a/src/scripttools/debugging/qscriptenginedebugger.cpp +++ b/src/scripttools/debugging/qscriptenginedebugger.cpp @@ -75,8 +75,8 @@ public: \brief The QScriptEngineDebugger class provides a QScriptEngine debugger. - \ingroup scripttools - \mainclass + \ingroup script + The QScriptEngineDebugger class provides a debugger that can be embedded into Qt applications that use Qt Script. The debugger diff --git a/src/sql/kernel/qsql.qdoc b/src/sql/kernel/qsql.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e6e321 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/sql/kernel/qsql.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \namespace QSql + \inmodule QtSql + \brief The QSql namespace contains miscellaneous identifiers used throughout + the Qt SQL library. + + \inheaderfile QtSql + \ingroup database + + + \sa {QtSql Module} +*/ + +/*! + \enum QSql::Confirm + \compat + + This enum type describes edit confirmations. + + \value Yes + \value No + \value Cancel +*/ + +/*! + \enum QSql::Op + \compat + + This enum type describes edit operations. + + \value None + \value Insert + \value Update + \value Delete +*/ + + +/*! + \enum QSql::Location + + This enum type describes special SQL navigation locations: + + \value BeforeFirstRow Before the first record. + \value AfterLastRow After the last record. + + \omitvalue BeforeFirst + \omitvalue AfterLast + + \sa QSqlQuery::at() +*/ + +/*! + \enum QSql::ParamTypeFlag + + This enum is used to specify the type of a bind parameter. + + \value In The bind parameter is used to put data into the database. + \value Out The bind parameter is used to receive data from the database. + \value InOut The bind parameter is used to put data into the + database; it will be overwritten with output data on executing + a query. + \value Binary This must be OR'd with one of the other flags if + you want to indicate that the data being transferred is + raw binary data. +*/ + +/*! + \enum QSql::TableType + + This enum type describes types of SQL tables. + + \value Tables All the tables visible to the user. + \value SystemTables Internal tables used by the database. + \value Views All the views visible to the user. + \value AllTables All of the above. +*/ + +/*! + \enum QSql::NumericalPrecisionPolicy + + This enum type describes at which precision levels numercial values are read from + a database. + + Some databases support numerical values with a precision that is not storable in a + C++ basic data type. The default behavior is to bind these values as a QString. + This enum can be used to override this behavior. + + \value LowPrecisionInt32 Force 32bit integer values. In case of floating point numbers, + the fractional part is silently discarded. + \value LowPrecisionInt64 Force 64bit integer values. In case of floating point numbers, + the fractional part is silently discarded. + \value LowPrecisionDouble Force \c double values. + \value HighPrecision The default behavior - try to preserve maximum precision. + + Note: The actual behaviour if an overflow occurs is driver specific. The Oracle database + just returns an error in this case. +*/ + diff --git a/src/sql/kernel/qsqldatabase.cpp b/src/sql/kernel/qsqldatabase.cpp index e94c247..d155c03 100644 --- a/src/sql/kernel/qsqldatabase.cpp +++ b/src/sql/kernel/qsqldatabase.cpp @@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ void QSqlDatabasePrivate::disable() a database. \ingroup database - \mainclass + \inmodule QtSql The QSqlDatabase class provides an interface for accessing a diff --git a/src/sql/kernel/qsqlquery.cpp b/src/sql/kernel/qsqlquery.cpp index 48ada28..e3944ac 100644 --- a/src/sql/kernel/qsqlquery.cpp +++ b/src/sql/kernel/qsqlquery.cpp @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ QSqlQueryPrivate::~QSqlQueryPrivate() \ingroup database \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \inmodule QtSql QSqlQuery encapsulates the functionality involved in creating, diff --git a/src/svg/qgraphicssvgitem.cpp b/src/svg/qgraphicssvgitem.cpp index 3a01a41..a287baa 100644 --- a/src/svg/qgraphicssvgitem.cpp +++ b/src/svg/qgraphicssvgitem.cpp @@ -99,7 +99,6 @@ public: /*! \class QGraphicsSvgItem - \ingroup multimedia \ingroup graphicsview-api \brief The QGraphicsSvgItem class is a QGraphicsItem that can be used to render the contents of SVG files. diff --git a/src/svg/qsvggenerator.cpp b/src/svg/qsvggenerator.cpp index 3d9c444..ace4cb8 100644 --- a/src/svg/qsvggenerator.cpp +++ b/src/svg/qsvggenerator.cpp @@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ public: /*! \class QSvgGenerator - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \since 4.3 \brief The QSvgGenerator class provides a paint device that is used to create SVG drawings. \reentrant diff --git a/src/svg/qsvgrenderer.cpp b/src/svg/qsvgrenderer.cpp index bb1f946..573b4a4 100644 --- a/src/svg/qsvgrenderer.cpp +++ b/src/svg/qsvgrenderer.cpp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \class QSvgRenderer - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QSvgRenderer class is used to draw the contents of SVG files onto paint devices. \since 4.1 diff --git a/src/svg/qsvgwidget.cpp b/src/svg/qsvgwidget.cpp index f8e672a..b7b0ab0 100644 --- a/src/svg/qsvgwidget.cpp +++ b/src/svg/qsvgwidget.cpp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \class QSvgWidget - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QSvgWidget class provides a widget that is used to display the contents of Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) files. diff --git a/src/testlib/qsignalspy.qdoc b/src/testlib/qsignalspy.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..02cb771 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/testlib/qsignalspy.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QSignalSpy + \inmodule QtTest + + \brief The QSignalSpy class enables introspection of signal emission. + + QSignalSpy can connect to any signal of any object and records its emission. + QSignalSpy itself is a list of QVariant lists. Each emission of the signal + will append one item to the list, containing the arguments of the signal. + + The following example records all signal emissions for the \c clicked() signal + of a QCheckBox: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qsignalspy.qdoc 0 + + \c{spy.takeFirst()} returns the arguments for the first emitted signal, as a + list of QVariant objects. The \c clicked() signal has a single bool argument, + which is stored as the first entry in the list of arguments. + + The example below catches a signal from a custom object: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qsignalspy.qdoc 1 + + \bold {Note:} Non-standard data types need to be registered, using + the qRegisterMetaType() function, before you can create a + QSignalSpy. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qsignalspy.qdoc 2 + + To retrieve the \c QModelIndex, you can use qvariant_cast: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qsignalspy.qdoc 3 + */ + +/*! \fn QSignalSpy::QSignalSpy(QObject *object, const char *signal) + + Constructs a new QSignalSpy that listens for emissions of the \a signal + from the QObject \a object. Neither \a signal nor \a object can be null. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qsignalspy.qdoc 4 +*/ + +/*! \fn QSignalSpy::isValid() const + + Returns true if the signal spy listens to a valid signal, otherwise false. +*/ + +/*! \fn QSignalSpy::signal() const + + Returns the normalized signal the spy is currently listening to. +*/ + +/*! \fn int QSignalSpy::qt_metacall(QMetaObject::Call call, int id, void **a) + \internal +*/ + diff --git a/src/testlib/qtestevent.qdoc b/src/testlib/qtestevent.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7c67d95 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/testlib/qtestevent.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QTestEventList + \inmodule QtTest + + \brief The QTestEventList class provides a list of GUI events. + + QTestEventList inherits from QList<QTestEvent *>, and provides + convenience functions for populating the list. + + A QTestEventList can be populated with GUI events that can be + stored as test data for later usage, or be replayed on any + QWidget. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qtestevent.qdoc 0 + + The example above simulates the user entering the character \c a + followed by a backspace, waiting for 200 milliseconds and + repeating it. +*/ + +/*! \fn QTestEventList::QTestEventList() + + Constructs an empty QTestEventList. +*/ + +/*! \fn QTestEventList::QTestEventList(const QTestEventList &other) + + Constructs a new QTestEventList as a copy of \a other. +*/ + +/*! \fn QTestEventList::~QTestEventList() + + Empties the list and destroys all stored events. +*/ + +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::clear() + + Removes all events from the list. +*/ + +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::addKeyClick(Qt::Key qtKey, Qt::KeyboardModifiers modifiers = Qt::NoModifier, int msecs = -1) + + Adds a new key click to the list. The event will simulate the key \a qtKey with the modifier \a modifiers and then wait for \a msecs milliseconds. + + \sa QTest::keyClick() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::addKeyPress(Qt::Key qtKey, Qt::KeyboardModifiers modifiers = Qt::NoModifier, int msecs = -1) + + Adds a new key press to the list. The event will press the key \a qtKey with the modifier \a modifiers and then wait for \a msecs milliseconds. + + \sa QTest::keyPress() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::addKeyRelease(Qt::Key qtKey, Qt::KeyboardModifiers modifiers = Qt::NoModifier, int msecs = -1) + + Adds a new key release to the list. The event will release the key \a qtKey with the modifier \a modifiers and then wait for \a msecs milliseconds. + + \sa QTest::keyRelease() + +*/ + +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::addKeyEvent(QTest::KeyAction action, Qt::Key qtKey, Qt::KeyboardModifiers modifiers = Qt::NoModifier, int msecs = -1) + \internal +*/ + +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::addKeyClick(char ascii, Qt::KeyboardModifiers modifiers = Qt::NoModifier, int msecs = -1) + + \overload + + Adds a new key click to the list. The event will simulate the key \a ascii with the modifier \a modifiers and then wait for \a msecs milliseconds. + + \sa QTest::keyClick() + +*/ + +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::addKeyPress(char ascii, Qt::KeyboardModifiers modifiers = Qt::NoModifier, int msecs = -1) + + \overload + + Adds a new key press to the list. The event will press the key \a ascii with the modifier \a modifiers and then wait for \a msecs milliseconds. + + \sa QTest::keyPress() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::addKeyRelease(char ascii, Qt::KeyboardModifiers modifiers = Qt::NoModifier, int msecs = -1) + + \overload + + Adds a new key release to the list. The event will release the key \a ascii with the modifier \a modifiers and then wait for \a msecs milliseconds. + + \sa QTest::keyRelease() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::addKeyClicks(const QString &keys, Qt::KeyboardModifiers modifiers = Qt::NoModifier, int msecs = -1) + + Adds new keyboard entries to the list. The event will press the \a keys with the \a modifiers and wait \a msecs milliseconds between each key. + + \sa QTest::keyClicks() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::addKeyEvent(QTest::KeyAction action, char ascii, Qt::KeyboardModifiers modifiers = Qt::NoModifier, int msecs = -1) + \internal +*/ + +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::addDelay(int msecs) + + Adds a \a msecs milliseconds delay. + + \sa QTest::qWait() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::simulate(QWidget *w) + + Simulates the events from the list one by one on the widget \a w. + For an example, please read the \l QTestEventList class documentation. +*/ + +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::addMousePress(Qt::MouseButton button, Qt::KeyboardModifiers modifiers = 0, QPoint pos = QPoint(), int delay=-1) + + Add a mouse press to the list. The event will press the \a button with optional \a modifiers at the position \a pos with an optional \a delay. The default position is the center of the widget. + + \sa QTest::mousePress() +*/ +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::addMouseRelease(Qt::MouseButton button, Qt::KeyboardModifiers modifiers = 0, QPoint pos = QPoint(), int delay=-1) + + Add a mouse release to the list. The event will release the \a button with optional \a modifiers at the position \a pos with an optional \a delay. The default position is the center of the widget. + + \sa QTest::mouseRelease() +*/ +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::addMouseClick(Qt::MouseButton button, Qt::KeyboardModifiers modifiers = 0, QPoint pos = QPoint(), int delay=-1) + + Add a mouse click to the list. The event will click the \a button with optional \a modifiers at the position \a pos with an optional \a delay. The default position is the center of the widget. + + \sa QTest::mouseClick() +*/ +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::addMouseDClick(Qt::MouseButton button, Qt::KeyboardModifiers modifiers = 0, QPoint pos = QPoint(), int delay=-1) + + Add a double mouse click to the list. The event will double click the \a button with optional \a modifiers at the position \a pos with an optional \a delay. The default position is the center of the widget. + + \sa QTest::mousePress() +*/ +/*! \fn void QTestEventList::addMouseMove(QPoint pos = QPoint(), int delay=-1) + + Adds a mouse move to the list. The event will move the mouse to the position \a pos. If a \a delay (in milliseconds) is set, the test will wait after moving the mouse. The default position is the center of the widget. + + \sa QTest::mousePress() +*/ + diff --git a/src/xml/dom/qdom.cpp b/src/xml/dom/qdom.cpp index 85a31c7..f079851 100644 --- a/src/xml/dom/qdom.cpp +++ b/src/xml/dom/qdom.cpp @@ -1938,7 +1938,7 @@ void QDomNodePrivate::setLocation(int lineNumber, int columnNumber) \inmodule QtXml \ingroup xml-tools - \mainclass + Many functions in the DOM return a QDomNode. @@ -6522,7 +6522,7 @@ void QDomDocumentPrivate::saveDocument(QTextStream& s, const int indent, QDomNod \brief The QDomDocument class represents an XML document. \inmodule QtXml - \mainclass + \ingroup xml-tools The QDomDocument class represents the entire XML document. diff --git a/src/xml/sax/qxml.cpp b/src/xml/sax/qxml.cpp index 0f17231..b8af8d1 100644 --- a/src/xml/sax/qxml.cpp +++ b/src/xml/sax/qxml.cpp @@ -2986,7 +2986,7 @@ void QXmlSimpleReaderPrivate::initIncrementalParsing() \inmodule QtXml \ingroup xml-tools - \mainclass + This XML reader is suitable for a wide range of applications. It is able to parse well-formed XML and can report the namespaces of diff --git a/src/xmlpatterns/api/qabstractxmlnodemodel.cpp b/src/xmlpatterns/api/qabstractxmlnodemodel.cpp index 307174e..489774e 100644 --- a/src/xmlpatterns/api/qabstractxmlnodemodel.cpp +++ b/src/xmlpatterns/api/qabstractxmlnodemodel.cpp @@ -190,8 +190,7 @@ bool QAbstractXmlNodeModel::isIgnorableInDeepEqual(const QXmlNodeModelIndex &n) Because the node model can be accessed concurrently by threads in the QtXmlPatterns module, subclasses of QAbstractXmlNodeModel must - be written to be \l{Thread Support in Qt#Reentrancy and Thread-Safety} - {thread-safe}. + be written to be \l{Reentrancy and Thread-Safety}{thread-safe}. Classes that simplify implementing thread-safety include QReadLocker and QWriteLocker. diff --git a/src/xmlpatterns/api/qxmlquery.cpp b/src/xmlpatterns/api/qxmlquery.cpp index b5b5244..9f9b136 100644 --- a/src/xmlpatterns/api/qxmlquery.cpp +++ b/src/xmlpatterns/api/qxmlquery.cpp @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \endcode \note For the current release, XSLT support should be considered - experimental. See section \l{QtXmlPatterns Module#XSLT + experimental. See section \l{Using XML technologies#XSLT 2.0}{XSLT conformance} for details. Stylesheet parameters are bound using bindVariable(). @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ QXmlQuery::QXmlQuery(const QXmlNamePool &np) : d(new QXmlQueryPrivate(np)) create instances of QXmlQuery for running XQueries. \note The XSL-T support in this release is considered experimental. - See the \l{QtXmlPatterns Module#XSLT 2.0}{XSLT conformance} for + See the \l{Using XML technologies#XSLT 2.0}{XSLT conformance} for details. \since 4.5 diff --git a/src/xmlpatterns/utils/qautoptr.cpp b/src/xmlpatterns/utils/qautoptr.cpp index 619423b..5ab691d 100644 --- a/src/xmlpatterns/utils/qautoptr.cpp +++ b/src/xmlpatterns/utils/qautoptr.cpp @@ -44,7 +44,5 @@ \brief A smart pointer very similar to std::auto_ptr. \internal \since 4.4 - \ingroup misc - */ |